TIA Service Training 1 S

SN3lA1315

•A•usnpu! Joj saamsuy

NIVHIIS

u!u!eii apvueS-V11 LS DIPANIS

s Tinsnpui pup suo uolletuomv Joj buluIpiLL

SIEMENS Information and Training Automation and Drives

SIMATIC S7 TIA-Service Training 1

1.

The SIMATIC S7 System Family

2.

Training Units and Addressing

3.

Installation/Maintenance of the Programmable Logic Controller

4.

The SIMATIC Manager

5.

Symbols

6.

Hardware Configuration

7.

Hardware Commissioning

8.

Block Architecture and Block Editor

9.

Binary Operations

ST-SERV1 Course AL: N

ECCN: 5D992

10. Digital Operations Export Regulations AL Number of European resp. German export list. Goods with labels not equal to "N" are subject to export authorization. ECCN Number of US export list. (Export Control Classification Number). Goods with labels not equal to "N" are subject to re-export authorization for export to certain countries. Indication Goods labeled with "AL not equal to N" (here: technical documentations) are subject to European or German export authorization when being exported out of the EU. Goods labeled with "ECCN not equal to N" (here: technical documentations) are subject to US re-export authorization. Even without a label, or with label "AL:N" or "ECCN:N", authorization may be required due to the final whereabouts and purpose for which the goods are to be used (here: technical documentations). Decisive are the export labels stated on order acknowledgements, delivery notes and invoices.

This document was produced for training purpose. SIEMENS assumes no responsibility for its contents.

11. Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP

12. Rewiring a User Program

13. Introduction to Micromaster

14. Documenting, Saving, Archiving

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable to damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

15. Closing Exercise

(--) SIEMENS AG 2009

16. Solutions Name: Course: from

to

17. Training and Support

Instructor:

18. Infoline

Tel: 01805 23 56 11 Fax: 01805 23 56 12 Internet: http://www.siemens.com/sitrain

19.

Version V5.9.1 (for STEP? V5.4 SP3. WinCC flexible 2008. Starter V4.0)

20.

1 SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.

Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.1

2.1 SITRAIN Training for qtr Automation and Industrial Solutions

Contents Page The SIMATIC S7 System Family ...... 2 Objectives 3 SIMATIC S7 Overview ................................................................................................................... 4 What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean ...... 5 The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers ...... 6 S7-200 ........................................................................................................................................... 7 S7-200 Micro Controller 8 S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM) ...... 9 S7 - 300 Automation System .......................................................................................................... 10 S7-300: Modules ............................................................................................................................ 11 S7-300: CPU Design ...................................................................................................................... 12 S7-400 Automation System ............................................................................................................ 13 S7-400: Modules ............................................................................................................................ 14 S7-400: CPU Design ...................................................................................................................... 15 SIMATIC Embedded Automation - Overview .................................................................................. 16 Device Spectrum of SIMATIC Embedded Automation .................................................................... 17 An Application Example for PC-based Automation ........................................................................ 18 SIMATIC Microbox 427-B RTX "Embedded PC" ............................................................................ 19 SIMATIC S7- mEC (Modular Embedded Controller) ........................................................................ 20 PG/PC Requirements for Installing STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 21 Installing the STEP 7 Basic Package .............................................................................................. 22 STEP 7 Tools ................................................................................................................................. 23 STEP 7 Software Packages (Examples) ......................................................................................... 24 If You Want to Know More about the Topic "TIA" ............................................................................ 25 More Information ............................................................................................................................ 26 SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

Page 1

ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family

SIEMENS


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.2

V,

SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industnal Solutions

Page Contents Programming Sequence Control Systems with S7- GRAPH ............................................................ 27 The State Diagram Method S7- HiGraph ......................................................................................... 28 Programming in the High Level Language S7- SCL ......................................................................... 29 CFC - Tool for Graphic Interconnection of Si Blocks ....................................................................... 30 Process Diagnosis with S7- PDIAG ................................................................................................. 31 Testing User Programs with S7- PLCSIM ........................................................................................ 32 Runtime Software for Closed-loop Control Engineering Tasks ......................................................... 33 Communicating with SIMATIC NET ................................................................................................. 34 Operator Control and Process Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI .......................................................... 35 Process Visualization and Operator Control with WinCC ................................................................. 36 Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7 ....................................................................................... 37 DRIVES Technology ....................................................................................................................... 38 The SINAMICS Family .................................................................................................................... 39

SITRAIN Training for


Page 2


1

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... have an overview of the SIMATIC S7 system family be familiar with the S7-300 and S7-400 automation systems have an overview of the modules available for these automation systems understand the concept of "Totally Integrated Automation" (T.I.A.) be familiar with the programming devices be familiar with the PC requirements for working with STEP7 be familiar with the tools of the STEP7 basic programming package have an overview of the most important tools used in the T.I.A. concept




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.3

Page 3

li SITRAIN Training for

vi



•

SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7 Overview SIMATIC Software

SIMATIC PG SIMATIC PC

SIMATIC HMI k: kr: kt

tail.

,

111 YYYYYYYYiY

MPI Network Industrial Ethernet

SIMATIC NET

PROFIBUS

aI

SIMATIC Controller

A e

PROFIBUS DP

iy

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.4

AS-Interface

1

47.

O

0

O

0



Introduction

For the operation of machines, equipment and processes in almost all areas of manufacturing you require control elements in addition to energy supply. It must be possible to initiate, control, monitor and end the operation of any given machine or process.

Hard-wired Controllers -> PLC

In the hard-wired controllers of the past, the program logic was governed by the task-specific wiring of contactors and relays. Today, programmable logic controllers are used to solve automation tasks. The logic stored in the program memory of an automation system does not depend on equipment design and wiring and can be modified at any time with the help of a programming device.

Totally Integrated Automation

Production processes are no longer seen as individual partial processes, but rather as integral components of an entire production process. The total integration of the entire automation environment is today achieved with the help of: • one common software environment that integrates all components and tasks into one uniform easy to use system • a common data management (central database) •

a common communication between all participating automation components.

SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions

Page 4


SIEMENS

What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean

WinCC

PCS7

/ /

w w D)

SIMATIC S7

LE]

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.5

11 SITRAIN Training for

1


Totally Integrated Automation

The new SIMATIC family unifies all devices and systems, such as hardware and software, into a uniform, powerful system platform. In this platform existing barriers between computer, PLC, and process control have been overcome. Operator control and monitoring are improved.

Advantages

This totally integrated automation offers you, among other things, the following advantages: •

A scalable hardware platform. The optimal (price/performance) functionality (PLC or computer) can be chosen for the task to be solved.

•

An open totally integrated automation environment. An existing system can be easily extended, or future automation solutions can be integrated. Existing investments retain their value. The transition from an existing SIMATIC, TELEPERM or TI environment can be carried out very easily.


•

Powerful software increases the productivity in the implementation of a project reducing the engineering and life cycle costs. In addition, expenses for commissioning, maintenance and service are reduced.

•

SIMATIC is based on Windows standards and can thus easily use their applications (standard software) and communication mechanisms.


Page 5


SIEMENS

The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers modular

forrirru r rrr11

Upper and middle performance range

inir1.11 SIMATIC S7 - 400

Lower and middle performance range

complete

modular

—TV l•willF■PimIll

=LED

SIMATIC S7 - 300 Micro PLC

SIMATIC C7 — 6xx

corn act

SIMATIC S7 - 200

SIMATIC S7

Logo Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.6

G _

gler


SIMATIC S7

The programmable logic controller family consists of the Micro PLC (S7-200) performance range, the lower/middle performance range (S7-300) and the middle/upper performance range (S7-400).

SIMATIC 07

This complete system is the combination of a PLC (S7-300) and an operator panel of the HMI operator control and process monitoring system. The integration of programmable logic controller and operator panel in one device makes complete machine controls in the smallest space and at an economical price possible.

WinAC

WinAC is a PC-based solution. It is used when various automation tasks (control, visualization, data processing) are to be solved with a PC.



Page 6


SIEMENS

S7-200 S7-22x

S7-21x

SIEMENS

!

SF RUN STOP

SIMATIC 0'7-200

10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5

11.0 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5

Q0..01 .40

IQ Q 11 ,0

Q0.2 Q0.3 Q0.4 Q0.5

10.6

Q0.6

M.7

Q07

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Features

CPI . 214


18.09.2009 SERV1_018.7

lir


•

Modular small control system for the low-end performance range,

•

Performance-graded range of CPUs,

•

Extensive selection of modules,

•

Expandable design with up to 7 modules,

•

Backplane bus integrated in the modules,

•

Can be networked with - RS 485 communications interface or - PROFIBUS or - connected with Industrial Ethernet,

•

Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules,

•

No slot rules for peripheral modules,

•

Own software,

•

"Complete package" with power supply, CPU, I/O in one device,

•

"Micro PLC" with integrated functions.


Page 7


SIEMENS

S7-200 Micro Controller

Status Indicators

Status Indicators for Integrated DO

lk

SIEMENS SINAlIC ST-200 SF RUN STOP

- Potentiometer - Memory Card - Mode Selector

PPI Connection

.1,

-I,

..5...6„.2

11

.0

4 irirliqjak

214-'RD22-0Y130

Status Indicators for Integrated DI

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


iv-

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.8


Mode Selector

For manual mode selection of the CPU: STOP = Stop mode, the program is not executed. TERM = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG. RUN = Program execution, read-only access possible from PG.

Status Indicators (LEDs)

SF RUN STOP DP

Memory Card

Slot for memory card. A memory card saves the program contents in the event of a power outage without the need for a battery.

PPI Connection

The programming device / text display or another CPU is connected here.

= Group error; internal CPU fault; red = Run mode; green = Stop mode; yellow = PROFIBUS-DP (only CPU 215)

This enables you to access several controllers from a PG or text display. As well, the S7-200 CPUs use the Network Read (NETR) and Network Write (NETW) instructions to read and write to each other (peer-to-peer communication).


Page 8


SIEMENS

S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM)

i

#1drerla ,

i s i rd 'Afrawdrifir

0 artr010:4:00:ffir

40191111ftliffilpr

I / 0 Modules

Function Modules (FM)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Expansion Modules (EM)

•

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.9

Communications Processors (CP)


Digital input modules: 24VDC - 120/230VAC Digital output modules: - 24VDC - Relay Analog input modules: - Voltage - Current - Resistance - Thermocouple Analog output modules: - Voltage - Current

-

• •

•


Using the CP 242-2, the S7-200 can be connected to an AS-Interface as the master. In that way, 31 AS-Interface slaves can control up to 248 binary elements. This greatly increases the number of inputs/outputs of the S7-200. Other communications modules are the modem and PROFIBUS-DP expansion modules. The SIMATIC NET CP 243-1 can be used to connect to Industrial Ethernet.

Accessories

Bus connector


Page 9


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Features


18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.10


4F


•

Modular small control system for the lower and middle performance range

•

Performance-graded range of CPUs

•

Extensive selection of modules

•

Expandable design with up to 32 modules

•

Backplane bus integrated in the modules

•

Can be networked with -

Multipoint Interface (MPI),

-

PROFIBUS or

-

Industrial Ethernet or

-

PROFINET

•

Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules

•

No slot rules for peripheral modules,

•

Configuration and parameter setting with the help of the "Hardware Configuration" tool


Page 10


SIEMENS

S7-300: Modules

Q PS

(optional)

V Q CPU

IM

Q Q Q

CP:

SM: SM: SM: SM: FM: (optional) DI DO Al AO - Counting

- Positioning - Closed-loop control

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


- Point-to Point - PROFIBUS - Industrial Ethernet


18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.11

gr.

Signal Modules

•

Digital input modules:

24VDC, 120/230VAC

(SM)

•

Digital output modules:

24VDC, Relay

•

Analog input modules:

Voltage, Current, Resistance, Thermocouple

•

Analog output modules:

Voltage, Current


Interface Modules (IM)

The IM360/1M361 and 1M365 make multi-tier configurations possible. The interface modules loop the bus from one tier to the next.

Dummy Modules (DM)

The DM 370 dummy module reserves a slot for a signal module whose parameters have not yet been assigned. A dummy module can also be used to reserve a slot for installation of an interface module at a later date.


Perform "special functions": • Counting • Positioning • Closed-loop control.


Provide the following networking facilities: • Point-to-Point connections • PROFIBUS • Industrial Ethernet •

Accessories

PROFINET.

Bus connectors and front connectors


Page 11


SIEMENS

S7-300: CPU Design CPU 315-2DP until Oct. 2002

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Mode Selector

Status Indicators (LEDs)


18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.12


MRES

= Memory reset function (Module Reset)

STOP

= Stop mode, the program is not executed.

RUN RUN-P

= Program execution, read-only access possible from PG. = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG.

SF BATF

Group error; internal CPU fault or fault in module with diagnostics capability. = Battery fault; battery empty or non-existent.

DC5V

= Internal 5 VDC voltage indicator.

FRCE

= FORCE; indicates that at least one input or output is forced. = Flashes when the CPU is starting up, then a steady light in Run mode. = Shows a steady light in Stop mode. Flashes slowly for a memory reset request, Flashes quickly when a memory reset is being carried out, Flashes slowly when a memory reset is necessary because a memory card has been inserted.

RUN STOP

Memory Card

CPU 315-2DP after Oct. 2002

A slot is provided for a memory card. The memory card saves the program contents in the event of a power outage without the need for a battery. For CPUs after Oct. 2002, a Micro Memory Card is always necessary for operation. It also provides the backup in the event of a power outage.

Battery Compartment For CPUs up until Oct. 2002, there is a receptacle for a lithium battery under the cover. The battery provides backup power to save the contents of the RAM in the event of a power outage. For CPUs after Oct. 2002, no battery is necessary. MPI Connection

Connection for a programming device or other device with an MPI interface.

DP Interface

Interface for direct connection of distributed I/Os to the CPU.



Page 12

' ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family

SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Features


114

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.13


•

The power PLC for the mid to upper performance range,

• •

Performance-graded range of CPUs Extensive selection of modules

• •

Expandable design to over 300 modules Backplane bus integrated in the modules Can be networked with - Multipoint interface (MPI),

•

- PROFIBUS or - Industrial Ethernet or - PROFINET •

Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules

•

No slot restrictions Configuration and parameter setting with the help of the "Hardware Configuration" tool Multicomputing (up to four CPUs can be used in the central rack).

• •



Page 13


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Signal Modules (SM)

Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions

•

Digital input modules: 24VDC, 120/230VAC • Digital output modules: 24VDC, Relay • Analog input modules: Voltage, Current, Resistance, Thermocouple •


A SITRAIN v„

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.14

Analog output modules: Voltage, Current.

The IM460, IM461, IM463, IM467 interface modules provide the connection between various racks: •

UR1 (Universal Rack) with up to 18 modules

• •

UR2 (Universal Rack) with up to 9 modules ER1 (Expansion Rack) with up to 18 modules

•

ER2 (Expansion Rack) with up to 9 modules.

Function Modules

Perform "special functions":

(FM)

• •

Positioning

•

Closed-loop control.

Counting

Communications

Provide the following networking facilities:

Processors (CP)

• •

Point-to-Point connections PROFIBUS

•

Industrial Ethernet

•

PROFINET.


Page 14


SIEMENS

S7-400: CPU Design

Error LEDs Slot for Memory Card Mode Selector MPI/DP Interface DP Interface External Battery Supply

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.15

2 SITRAIN Training for tr

Il


Fault LEDs

LEDs for the CPU's statuses and faults, both internal and external

Memory Cards

With the S7-400 CPUs you can, depending on your requirements, insert RAM or flash EPROM cards as external load memory: •

RAM cards are available with a capacity of: 64KByte, 256KByte, 1MByte, 2MByte. The CPU battery backs up the contents.

•

Mode Selector

Flash EPROM cards are available with a capacity of: 64KByte, 256KByte, 1MByte, 2MByte, 4MByte, 8MByte, 16MByte. The contents are backed-up on the integrated EEPROMs.

MRES = Memory reset function (Module RESet) STOP = STOP mode, that is, no program execution and output disabled ("OD" mode = Output Disabled). RUN

= Program execution, read-only access possible from PG.

RUN-P = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG. MPI / DP Interface

MPI / DP interface (parameter-assignable in HW-Config) for • •

establishing the online connection to the programming device connecting to distributed peripherals (DP)

•

data exchange with other stations (S7 Communication)

DP Interface

For connecting to distributed peripherals (DP, only for CPUs with 2 interfaces)

EXT-BATT

Additional external battery socket for a 5 VDC to 15 VDC source to back up the RAM when the power supply is being replaced.


Page 15


SIEMENS

SIMATIC Embedded Automation - Overview Modular Controller

Open + Standard PC

• Highest ruggedness • Highest ruggedness 111• Modularity • Modularity • Scalable • Scalable • Commissioning through a Commissioning through "Automators" "Automators" ▪ H / F functionality • 10 year replacement parts availability • Long-term availability • Data-secure

IPC

S7-mEC RTX

SIMATIC S7

•

SIMATIC Soft-PLC and HMI options • Standard PC operating system and interfaces • Openness (HW + SW) • State-of-the-art PC technolog

▪ Rugged (embedded) • Commissioning requires PC know-how

• • • •

SIMATIC Soft-PLC and HMI options Standard PC operating system and interfaces Openness (HW + SW) Stat-of-the-art PC technology

The Best of Both Worlds

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


PC-based Control

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.16

rai'i r Automation T an d lnlfsotrial Solutions

SIMATIC Embedded Automation is the implementation of various automation tasks (PLC programming, visualization, data processing, HMI services) on one common PC and software platform. Today, three fundamental directions can be derived from this: •

Modular Controllers: field-proven S7-300 and S7-400 controllers with their different versions and performance characteristics

•

Embedded Controllers such as SIMATIC S7-mEC and SIMATIC Microbox 427B

•

SIMATIC Panel PCs with Win AC MP and Industrial PCs

For this purpose, Siemens offers the System PC based Automation as a block out of the area of "SIMATIC Totally Integrated Automation". Configuration, programming and parameter-assignment is handled by the familiar engineering tool STEP 7 as of Version V5.4 SP4. The WinCC flexible software package makes the HMI configuration possible. The existing WinAC RTX 2005 software is being replaced by the 2008 version. The most significant expansion is the PROFINET functionality with PN 10 and CBA (Component Based Automation). Included in this, among other things, is the high performance operation of PROFINET 10 as well as the open communication via "Open User Communication".



Page 16


SIEMENS

Device Spectrum of SIMATIC Embedded Automation

......... •

SIMATIC Microbox 427B- RTX SIMATIC Microbox 427B- HMI/RTX SIMATIC Panel PC 477B- HMI SIMATIC Panel PC 477B- HMI/RTX

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Device Spectrum

•

•

•

-

SIMATIC Panel MP 177/277/377 + WinAC MP SIMATIC S7-mEC SIMATIC WinAC 2008 RTX

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.17

•


▪


The slide shows an overview of the most important device components that are available for SIMATIC Embedded Automation.


Page 17


SIEMENS

An Application Example for PC-based Automation

WinCC flexible Thin Client

PG/PC

Data server

HMI

Windows Ethernet interface

System / Cell network 169.254...

111 11 3rd party device

laasamanss-sw j .= 111111tall sammurnequivirn ,

1111U1

OUC

WINAC RTX PROFINET interface

SI

f ••••■

192.168...

I

Main application case for PC-based Automation:

PLC

Field device Drive

HMI

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


PROFINET 10 local "behind" CPU to avoid dependancy on system configuration (independent assignment of IP addresses).

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.18

I

hr



Application Example The application example above shows a possible structure for the use of a SIMATIC Microbox 427-B in an automation solution. The connection of local PN 10 slaves takes place behind the CPU to avoid dependencies on the system configuration. PROFINET 10 RT services can be used in parallel with CBA functions on the same line. Third party devices can be addressed via the open T communication (Open user communication) (T-send and T-receive). WinAC RTX 2008

SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2008 makes use of a PROFINET 10 Controller Interface for operating distributed PROFINET peripherals. Thereby, the RT and IRT operating modes are supported. Moreover, two different interface types can be operated with WinAC RTX 2008: •

the Standard Ethernet (LAN-Interface) of the SIMATIC PC

•

the CP1616/1604, integrated PROFINET interface of the S7-mEC and the SIMATIC PC

The interface integration in WinAC RTX 2008 and in the familiar STEP 7 configuration takes place similar to the PROFIBUS interfaces as submodules that are used today. They behave like the integrated PN interface of the SIMATIC S7CPUs. Basically, the following types of data transmission are available (Standard Ethernet LAN operating mode):

Realtime Core


•

PROFINET 10 RT with up to 128 PROFINET 10 devices

•

PROFINET Component Based Automation (CBA)

•

Open User Communication (T-communication)

•

S7 communication and routing

WinAC RTX 2008 simplifies the installation of the Ardence RTX realtime core. Effective immediately, this is completely integrated in the setup of WinAC RTX and no longer has to be installed separately.


Page 18


SIEMENS

SIMATIC Microbox 427-B RTX "Embedded PC"

System Fault

RUN/STOP

Imo"=1712s1 Qatei

cPU

tijIfe

SIEMENS 1

PS

•

ON BATF

CPU

IT!

INTF EXTF BUSE-I • BUSF2 BUSF3 BUSF4 'Ili FR CE I RUN STOP O

IRUN Oi STOP

M RE S

4

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Microbox 427B...

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.19

_211 ' SITRAIN Training for It T and Industrial Solutions

The SIMATIC Microbox 427B-HMI/RTX is an "embedded solution" for combined controller and operator control and visualization tasks. The ready-to-go Microbox provides the WinAC RTX, WinCC flexible RT and Windows XPe software preinstalled. Special properties with regards to retentive storing of SIMATIC WinAC RTX user data exist. Configuration and programming is done as usual with STEP 7. Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS interfaces are available for download activities and data communication. Furthermore, USB interfaces, connection possibilities for flat screens (DVINGA), as well as a serial RS232 interface and up to three PC/104Plus cards are available. SIMATIC WinAC RTX makes the use of an "Open Development Kit" for implementing application-specific functions in the PLC program possible.



Page 19


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7- mEC (Modular Embedded Controller)

—0.11••■•••■■••.are. ,"

Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) for access to all S7-mEC programs

USB connection for mouse etc.

•

•

Thin Client

r

EM PCI-104

EM PC

2x USB 1x IE/PN 1x serial 1x DVI-I lx serial 1x CF slot SIMATIC S7

EC31 RTX

Connection of S7 standard peripherals Up to 3 PCI cards

Date: File:


STEP 7 for parameterization + diagnosis (RTX)

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.20

SITRAIN Training for =_ Automation and Industrial Solutions

Embedded Controller The new high-performance SIMATIC S7-mEC "modular embedded controller" completes the product portfolio in the area of the SIMATIC Controller. The benefits of a Standard S7 Controller are combined with those of a PC-based solution. Different automation solution tasks can be implemented on one hardware p:atform with the S7-mEC. The hardware basis consists of current PC technology with an Intel Core Duo 1.2 GHz processor, a 2GB Flash Disk and 1 GB main memory. SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2008 is used as the application program, Windows XPe functions as the operating system. Remote services, such as, remote monitoring via TCP/IP services are available. The S7-mEC also has a Multimedia Card Slot (MMC). The design without fan and hard drive is well-suited for the industrial environment. Three Industrial Ethernet ports and up to two additional USB interfaces enable the problem-free integration in existing automation scenarios. The S7-mEC "modular embedded controller" is installed and configured like an S7-300 PLC. SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.4 SP4 with additional hardware patch is used as the engineering tool (RTX version on the S7-mEC necessary). WinCC flexible can be used as an additional option for operator control and monitoring. The new SIMATIC Thin Client and other Windows XPe applications can also be used.



Page 20


1 SIEMENS

PG/PC Requirements for Installing STEP 7 Operating Systems:

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows Vista

Memory on the Hard Drive:

Depending on the installation, between 400 MB and 800 MB

Mouse:

Yes

Interfaces:

• CP5611 (PCI) or • CP5512 (PCMCIA) or • PC adapter (USB) • Industrial Ethernet Interface (NIC) • Programming interface for Memory Card (optional)

/ SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Requirements

18.09.2009 SERV1_010.21

A


SIMATIC Programming devices (PG) provide the optimum basis for using the STEP 7 software. You can, however, also use a PC that fulfills the above-listed requirements. So that you can make the necessary online connection between the automation system (PLC) and the PC, the PC must be equipped with one of the interfaces listed in the slide above. If user programs are to be loaded on memory cards outside of the CPU, the PC must also be equipped with the appropriate programming interface.



Page 21


SIEMENS

Installing the STEP 7 Basic Package About

01

6,

Double-click on icon

• SIMATIC Manager

IcOUre

MM., L Wank[

51,7 Converting 55 Files

SIMATIC Manager [c) STEP 7 S7/M7/C7 verswi

V5.4 • SF%

Revisi n Level:

K5.4.4.0

PI LAD, STL, FBD - Programming 57 Blocks Memory Card Parameter Assignment

Communication

Activate through Start menu

tt Office Applications Utilities

•

Information

Business Appkations Programs Documents '

Setting the PG-PC Interface

ProSave

B

a STARTER

MI TI 405-S7 Converting TI Files

f STEP 7

TI 5135-57 Converting TI Files

WinCC flexible 2008 WinCC flexible Runtime 2008

Settings

111 Drive Monitor Search

•

S7-PLCSIM Simulating Modules

License Mona OPC-XML

State Graphs

on figuring ocess Diagnostics

Documentation

SIMATIC

rks signment

Help and Support

SIMATIC Manager ProTsol Pro CS

0 r Run... Log Off se3997... 3Shut Down...

4

d Start

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Installation

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.22

SITRAIN Training for %T


1. Activate "Setup.exe" on the Installation CD or use the automatic Setup routine activation 2. Choose options 3. Choose language(s) 4. Insert authorization disk when prompted. 5. Re-boot when prompted

Software Protection

The STEP 7 software is copy-protected and can only be used on one programming device at a time. When you have installed the software, you cannot start using it until you have transferred the authorization to the hard disk drive from the authorization disk.

Notes

• Be sure to read the notes in the README.TXT file on the authorization disk. If you do not observe these instructions, you risk losing your authorization. • For emergency operation, the STEP 7 basic package can also be used without authorization. As well, there is also a 14 day limited authorization available in addition to the unlimited (in time) authorization.

Hot fixes

STEP7 software updates can be downloaded from the Internet.

Result

The main tool in STEP 7 is the SIMATIC Manager. There are two ways in which to activate it: 1. through the Task bar 4 Start - SIMATIC SIMATIC Manager or through 2. the icon "SIMATIC Manager" on the Windows Desktop.

SITRAIN


Page 22


SIEMENS

STEP 7 Tools NCM 57 CFC - Interconnect blocks Configure SIMATIC Workspace

5+7 Converting 55 Files LAD, STL, FBD - Programming 57 Blocks Memory Card Parameter Assignment

Qp NetPro - Configuring Networks PID Control Parameter Assignment 57 SCL - Programming 57 Blocks 57-GRAPH - Programming Sequential Control Systems 57-PDIAG - Configuring Process Diagnostics 57-PLCSIM Simulating Modules Setting the PG-PC Interface TI 405-57 Converting TI Files

TI 505-57 Converting TI Files 57-HiGraph - Programming State Graphs STARTER

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.23

SITRAIN Training for 41

°'


SIMATIC Manager

The SIMATIC Manager manages the STEP 7 projects. It is the main program and also appears on the WINDOWS desktop.

Notes

"STEP 7 - Readme" provides detailed information about the version, installation procedure, etc.

LAD, STL, FBD

Tool for writing STEP 7 user programs in the "Ladder Diagram", "Statement List" or "Function Block Diagram" programming languages.

Memory Card Parameter Assignment.

You can save your user programs on EPROM cards by either using the programming device or an external prommer. Different drivers are required, depending on the application.

Configuring Networks

Network configuration with the "NetPro" tool which belongs to the STEP 7 basic package.

Setting the PG-PC Interface

This tool is used for setting the local node address, the transmission speed and the highest node address in the MPI network.

PID Control Parameter Assignment

The basic STEP 7 software package also includes blocks for solving PID (closed-loop) control problems. You choose "PID Control Parameter Assignment" to start the program for assigning parameters to the closed-loop control blocks.

Converting S5 Files

STEP5 programs can be converted into the corresponding STEP 7 programs with the help of the S5/S7 converter.

Configure SIMATIC Workspace

This option provides facilities for configuring multi-user systems.

Converting TI Files

SIMATIC TI programs can be converted into the corresponding STEP 7 program with the help of the TI/S7 converter.



Page 23


SIEMENS

STEP 7 Software Packages (Examples) Which PLC? SIMATIC S7-200

SIMATIC S7-300

Options

Necessary STEP 7 Micro/WIN

STEP 7 Lite

Tele Service

S7- PLCSIM

;11

SIMATIC S7-300

STEP 7

SIMATIC 57-400

S7- GRAPH

S7- SCL S7- HiGraph

Fuzzy Control

Standard PID Control

Modular PID Control

DOCPRO

TeleService

S7- PDIAG

S7- PLCSIM

PRODAVE MPI

S7- SCL

S7- PLCSIM

S7- GRAPH

11111 STEP 7 Professional

STEP 7

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


STEP 7

MP A SITRAIN Training for 111P. U. Automation and Industrial Solutions

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.24

STEP 7 is the basic package for configuring SIMATIC S7-300 or S7-400 systems. With STEP 7 you can: • configure hardware and assign parameters to it; • configure communication; • program; • test and debug; • document and archive; • carry out diagnosis.

STEP 7 Lite

STEP 7 Lite can be used to program the SIMATIC S7-300 (also the compact CPUs). Programs that were created with STEP 7 Lite can also be exported to STEP 7. It is not possible to carry out a PROFIBUS (DP) or ETHERNET configuration! ET200S or ET200X configuration (standalone) is possible. PLCSIM and Teleservice can be used as option packages.

STEP 7 Micro

STEP 7 Micro is suitable exclusively for configuring the S7-200.

License

With the exception of STEP Micro/Win, a license is required for each package.

STEP 7 Professional STEP 7 Professional is a Software Package that contains all IEC languages: STEP 7 Basic, S7-SCL, S7-GRAPH and the simulation package S7-PLCSIM. STEP 7 Professional is available as an upgrade package (Powerpack) for STEP7. Prerequisite for acquiring the powerpack is a valid STEP 7 license.


Page 24


SIEMENS

If You Want to Know More about the Topic "TIA"

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Note

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.25

11 SITRAIN Training for ‘r


The following pages contain either further information or are for reference to complete a topic. For more indepth study we offer advanced courses and self-learning mediums.



Page 25


SIEMENS SIEMENS

More Information

Download C Acrobat t to..-pler

/ "ILICI_Baugnypendatempdf] tone. 50.

f2abi learbeken Dgkment &wise

mikbaltscR5ck.iTo■

511.119115 57.300 ano to17 309 Programmable Controller.: Ma k* Somatc.mams

Lese.e.A

,_aff_j_Lj r

► ■I • • ; 17I ei 64 Gig j4

Siemens Katalog CA 01 10/2002 D

Ealaks learbeilen 2uc4reri Ausieehililen JiAres lesezeichen Internet 3

§ e

Set rArmS &stomata, & UV.:

.‘.....

.n g

-.

51F1.41FRIG

S

I (OAT

EF-0 2 Zerk4b4K4UpPen- Neu. Neu CPU 315: J bbereicht I 6nmndungsbereiCh AAP. I Eunkrrord 'ochry Oaten I Bosteildalen i ZikeNinBeuelicleien R-0 3 s Interaktivet Ketalog Siemens AID Er-04 Produkte A 11 Antriebstechnik D5 211 Automatisierungssysteme El- 0 6 S 0 Industie-Autometnerungssys Ei-0 ZenlFelbdugruppe 1 - Neu- N u CPU 315-2 DP s D Steuerungen 8 s O H/F-Technik FDA A O SIMATIC 505 Die CPU 315-2 DP verfugi E-Da O SIMATIC 05 • Mikroprozeseor. AD C SIMATIC 57 A DD der Prozessor erreicht eine Bearbeitungszeit von ca 100 ns je einaranweisung und 4 us le O 07-200 E13--0 E 57-300/S7-300F/5 • 128 KByte Arbedsspeicher (entspncht Owe 43 KAnweisungen): DF Li EMI-6111,N Der umfangreiche Arbeitsspeicher fOr ablaufrelevante Programmteile bietetAnwenderprog DG Zentralbaugrupi E Cards (may 8 MByte) als Ladespetcner fur Programm ermoglichen zusatiich die Projektat Kommentaren) in der CPU und kOnnen zur Datenarchivierung und Rezepturverwaltung yew E CPU 312C Di 1E CPU 313C • Flexible Ausbaubarkeit; E CPU 313C-2_ max. 32 Baugruppen (Izeiliger Aufbau) El CPU 313C-2 • Mehrpunkffehige Schnittstelle E CPU 3140-2 Die integrierle Schnittstelle MPI kann max_ 16 Verbindungen gleichzeitig zu 07-3001400 ode E CPU 314C-2 Von den Verbindungen ist jeweils eine kir PG und eine (Or OP fest reserwert. Mit der MPI ist • Neu . CPU 3 Datenkommunikation" eine einfache Vernetzung mit max. 16 CPUs aufzubauen • Neu CPU 3 • PROFIBUS DP-Schnittstelle • =ME Die CPU 315-2 DP mit PROFIBUS DP-MastertSlave-Schnittstelle ermeglicht einen dezentri p CPU 313 Geschwindigkeit und einfacher Handhabung. Die dezentrale Periphene wird aus Anwende CPU 314 (gieiche Projeldierung, Adressierung und Programmierung). E CPU 315 Es wird die PROFIBUS DP V1-Norm vollstandig unterstutzt. Dies ermbglichtverbesserte Di El CPU 315-21 V1-Normslaves. •I E CPU 316-21 • Passwortschutz, E CPU 318-21 Ein Passwortkonzept das Anwenderprogramm vor unberechtigtem Zugriff 2 CPU 312 1Ft • Diagnose-Puffer; DI CPU 3141Ff Die letzten 100 Fehler- und Unterbrechungsereignisse werden zu Diagnosezwecken in ein E CPU 314 CIL

E CPU 315E

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


• Wartungsfrete Datensicherung;

1 8.09.2009 SERV1_01E.26

SITRAIN Training for Ur


Information

You will find more information on the SIMATIC systems in the items below.

Manual

The manuals give detailed information on the hardware and software. In addition to the paper version, you can also use the electronic manuals. They are, in part, included in the installation or STEP 7. You can download Internet.

the

most recent SIMATIC manuals free of charge from the

A collection of electronic SIMATIC manuals (HW, SW, Engineering, HMI, NET, PG) can be ordered under the order number 6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0. The ST 70 catalog

Catalog

contains all SIMATIC components with their performance and

order data.

Electronic Catalog

Siemens Partner

SITRAIN

In addition to the paper version, the (CA01) catalog is also available as a CD. This information is also available on the Internet (www.siemens.de/Simatic). Of course, your Siemens partner

Training for


is also available for further information.

Page 26


SIEMENS

Programming Sequence Control Systems with S7- GRAPH ❑ S7-GRAPH: The tool for programming sequence cascades o

Compatible with DIN EN 6.1131-3

S1

o

Designed for the requirements of production engineering o Graphic division of the process into steps and transitions o Steps contain actions o Transitions check the conditions for switching to the next step

— T1 S2

ij The following phases of automation can be optimized with S7-GRAPH: o o o o o

S4

— T3

Maintenance, Diagnostics

S7-GRAPH

— T5

T2

Programming Debugging Commissioning

0

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. AU rights reserved.

S6

S5

Planning, Configuring

SIMATIC S7

— T4

2/1 SITRAIN Training for

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.27

ittr


With the S7-GRAPH programming language, you can clearly and quickly configure and program sequential sequences that you wish to control with an S7 PLC system. The process is thus split into single steps with their own function scope. The sequence is graphically displayed and can be documented with picture and text. The actions to be performed and the transitions, which control the conditions for switching to the next step, are determined in the individual steps. Their definitions, interlocking or monitoring are determined by a subset of the STEP 7 programming language LAD (ladder diagram). S7-GRAPH for S7-300/400 is compatible with the sequence language established in the DIN EN 61131-3 standard.

Functionality

The following functions are offered: •

Test Functions

User Interface


Several sequencers in the same S7-GRAPH function block

•

Free number assignment of the steps and transitions

•

Simultaneous branches and alternative branches

•

Jumps (also to other sequence cascades)

•

Starting/Stopping of sequence cascades as well as activating/holding of steps.

• Display of active steps or faulty steps •

Status display and Modify Variable

•

Switching between the operating modes: manual, automatic and jogging mode

•

Overview, Single Page and Single-step display

•

Graphic separation of locking controls and monitoring conditions.


Page 27


SIEMENS

The State Diagram Method S7- HiGraph Position Cam-operated Index out switch

❑ S7-HiGraph: The tool for programming using State Diagrams

111771=1

o Division of the machine into functional units o Creating state diagrams for every function unit

Motor

o States contain actions o State diagrams communicate using messages

Index in Index

Motor

❑ The following phases of automation can be optimized with S7-HiGraph:

Counterbearing lock/release Counterbearing

yt,

Coordinator

o Planning, Configuring o Programming and Debugging o Commissioning o Maintenance, Diagnostics o Supports reusability SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.28


Overview

S7-Higraph allows the asynchronous processes to be described using state diagrams. The machine or system to be automated is looked upon as a combination of independent elements, the function units.

Function Units

The function units are the smallest mechanical units of a machine or system. As a rule, a function unit is made up of mechanical and electrical basic elements. In programming, a state diagram is assigned to every function unit. In it, the functional, that is, the mechanical and electrical properties of the function unit are mapped.

State Diagram

The state diagram describes the dynamic behavior of a function unit. It describes the states that a function unit can have, as well as the state transitions. State diagrams can be used more than once. State diagrams that were created once for a specific function unit, can be reused in other program locations.

Diagram Groups and Instances

By combining parallel running state diagrams, you can describe the complete functionality of a machine or system.

Advantages

This "object-oriented" method of S7-HiGraph is well suited for:


•

the machine and system manufacturer (mechanical engineering)

•

the automation specialist (electrical engineering) as common means of description

•

the commissioning engineer and the maintenance specialist


Page 28


SIEMENS

Programming in the High Level Language S7- SCL FUNCTION BLOCK Integrator VAR INPUT : BOOL; // Reset output value !nit // Input value x : REAL; Ta : TIME; // Sampling interval in ms : TIME; // Integration time in ms Ti // Output value upper limit olim : REAL; ulim : REAL; // Output value lower limit END_VAR

o S7-SCL: High level language for creating PLC programs o Compatible with DIN EN 6.1131-3 (ST=Structured Text)) o Certified according to "PLC open" Base Level o Contains all the typical elements of a high level language, such as operands, terms, control statements o PLC specifics are integrated, such as I/O access, timers, counters...)

VAR_OUTPUT y : REAL:. 0.0; END_VAR

BEGIN IF TIME_TO_DINT(Ti) = 0 THEN // Division by ? OK := FALSE; y := 0.0; RETURN; END_IF; IF Init THEN y:= 0.0; ELSE y := y+TIME_TO_DINT(Ta)*x/TIME_TO_DINT(Ti); IF y > olim THEN y := olim; END_IF; IF y < ulim THEN y := ulim; END_IF; END_IF; END_FUNCTION_BLOCK

Advantages: o Well structured, easy to understand program o For those knowledgeable in high level languages o For complex algorithms

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Overview

// Initialize output value with 0

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E29

ittr


S7-SCL (Structured Control Language) is a PASCAL-similar high level text language for S7 - 300/400 and C7 and simplifies the programming in control technology for mathematical algorithms, data management and organization tasks. S7-SCL has the PLC open Base Level certificate and is in accordance with the DIN EN 61131-3 (Structured Text) standard. With S7-SCL, you can formulate time-saving and economical solutions for automation tasks.

Functionality

SCL offers the functional scope of a high level language such as: •

loops

•

alternatives

•

branch distributors, etc.

combined with control-specific functions such as: •

bit accesses to the I/O, bit memories, timers, counters etc.

•

access to the symbol table

•

STEP7 block accesses

Advantages of SCL •

simple to learn programming language especially for beginners

•

easy to read (understandable) programs are generated.

•

simpler programming of complex algorithms and processing of complex data structures

•

integral debugger for symbolic debugging of the source code (single-step, breakpoints, etc.)

•

system integration in S7 languages such as STL and LAD.


Page 29


SIEMENS

CFC - Tool for Graphic Interconnection of S7 Blocks ❑ CFC (Continuous Function Chart): Tool for graphic creation of PLC programs o Blocks are placed on function charts and interconnected o Interconnection is possible: - between I/O fields - also to blocks in other charts o Sources and destinations are managed in the margins

•

rato,f7

• .

CRMII

• •CIA! • • ,T7T-P • •SK.Z.L.

• • lb

Eta: CFC - [PC57Demo_extlSIMATIC 400-Slo gi Ben bate. gritipan &WPM jai

ACP1.14111 OF' I.■AS V,F

I

!nem fere fee*

---1.411412c1

Etta! 11

Oevat

011.1 CO C7•001111

1,1 RIC

SO /74 SC CU BB LI

— CO CIN

CIO CO RV SC

ria

SIMATIC S7

CC 017 SO

.11.001141 PO OM ON BO TIC.. CC OM,* CO CUM

o Program creation for technologists o quick creation, testing and commissioning times

CCM

0-1110 S Er•T•

S Lt. SO .1.0.11 I ST 171

Date: File:


Fa.

CPO. CO

❑ Advantages

Overview

lo

•• •

•

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.30

014

indgufsot arra di nI n r

Automation T

rial Solutions

With the engineering tool CFC (Continuous Function Chart), you can create automation tasks by drawing a technology plan - similar to a Function Block Diagram in PLC programming. In this graphic programming method, blocks are positioned in a type of drawing sheet and are graphically interconnected with one another. You can quickly and easily convert technological aspects into complete executable automation programs with CFC.

Scope

Note

The following is supplied with CFC: •

CFC Editor

•

Code Generator

•

Debugger

•

Standard block libraries

The CFC product, as an option package, is smoothly integrated in the STEP 7 architecture with a unified Look & Feel and with common data management. CFC is easy to use, easy to learn and provides consistent data management. The CFC tool plays an important role in the configuration of the PCS 7 process control system. Prerequisite is a previously installed SCL option package.



Page 30


SIEMENS

Process Diagnosis with S7- PDIAG ❑ Process diagnosis: Detection of faults occurring outside the PLC o Sensor/actuator defective, movement faulty,

❑ S7- PDIAG: Tool for configuring the fault definition in STL, LAD, FBD o Integrated in the development environment

• • S

■ •u• •■• ■ sea .***

• ass •"• ■

MAU a Ve

o Simple formulation of fault monitoring and message texts (during and after the program session) o Fault detection and criteria analysis are conducted automatically o Comprehensive information for the operator on: • type of fault • location of fault

Q1.0

I 1.0

• cause of fault

C)

❑ Reduction of down-time

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Process Diagnosis

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.31

%;.


Diagnosis is important in the operating phase of a plant or machine. Diagnosis is usually initiated when a fault leads to standstill or malfunction of the plant or machine. Programmable logic controllers are widely used in many areas. Field experience has proven that over 98% of faults occur in the peripherals (such as magnet valves and end switches). The distribution of fault occurrences makes it meaningful for the diagnosis to focus on process faults, since missing messages or faulty functions lead to down-times and the resulting costs. Process diagnosis diagnoses exactly these external components (such as sensors and actuators) or sequences in the process of a plant or machine.

S7-PDIAG

The S7-PDIAG software package enables a uniform configuration of the process diagnosis for the SIMATIC S7-300/400 controllers in the LAD, FBD and STL programming languages. You can already define signal monitoring routines including first-up signal acquisition and criteria analysis and input the associated message texts while or after creating the user program in the LAD, FBD or STL programming languages. PDIAG automatically generates monitoring blocks which you must call in your user program. At every call, the fault conditions are checked and in case of an error, the relevant process values are acquired and sent to the display device for the criteria analysis. For the configuration of the operator panel, S7-PDIAG stores the process diagnosis data in a shared database. This data can then be accessed by the OP configuration software WinCC flexible with the option package ProAgent and be made available for display on the operator panel.



Page 31


SIEMENS

Testing User Programs with S7- PLCSIM ❑ S7-PLCSIM: Simulation software for offline testing of PLC programs

S7-PLCSIM - SimViewl MCI Ell Fie Edit View Insert ELC Elecute Tools Window Help

Aim

61

uCPU 300/400 ell SF sop P RUN-P DC r RUN RUN STOP r STOP MRES I

o Functional program test • on a simulated CPU • with display/modify

-

E

I/O

o Testing of user blocks in

Pres Fl to get Help.

• LAD, FBD, STL, S7-SCL,

-

in -in IIJ

11 [ EE IPIB Q 'Bits zi 76 54 3210 rrr r rrrr PI8 0

=2

• S7-GRAPH, S7-HiGraph, CFC • S7-PDIAG, WinCC 0

Advantages o Faults can be detected early and eliminated o Many tests are already possible in the office without the final hardware

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


S7 - PLCSIM

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.32


The SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM engineering tool (option package) emulates a complete S7-CPU including addresses and I/O on a PG/PC. S7-PLCSIM thus enables you to test a program offline on the PG/PC. All STEP 7 programming languages (STL, LAD, FBD, S7-Graph, S7-HiGraph, S7-SCL and CFC) can be used. S7-PLCSIM allows you to check the functionality of user programs on the PC/PG, regardless of whether the final hardware is available or not.

Functionality

S7-PLCSIM offers the following functions for running a program on a simulated PLC: •

An icon in the SIMATIC Manager 's toolbar switches the Simulation on or off. If the simulation is turned on, every new connection is automatically made to the simulated PLC. If the simulation is turned off, then every new connection is made to the " real" PLC.

Advantages


•

You can create view objects that allow you to access memory areas, accumulators and tabs of the simulated CPU. You can modify and display all the data in these view objects.

•

You can change the CPU 's operating mode (STOP, RUN and RUN-P) just as with a "real" CPU. The simulation also provides a "Pause" function that allows you to halt the program execution without affecting the state of the program.

With S7-PLCSIM, you can detect faults early in the development phase and eliminate them. The quality of the user programs is greatly improved and the commissioning costs are lowered.


Page 32


SIEMENS

Runtime Software for Closed-loop Control Engineering Tasks

Configuration tool

Basic SW or option package

PID Controller

No

Basic SW

Basic SW PID Control

Yes

Basic SW


Yes

Option

Modular PID Control

Yes

Option

Fuzzy Control

Yes

Option

Neuro Systems

Yes

Option

Closed-loop control m.

Yes

Overview

S7-200

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


S7-300

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.33

C7

SITRAIN Training for 1


Closed-loop In a closed-loop control system process variables are controlled in such a way Control Engineering that they reach their new preset values as quickly as possible and that they maintain these in spite of the effect of disturbances. Basic Software PID Control

The STEP 7 basic package already contains a series of function blocks for solving simple control engineering tasks.


This additional package contains blocks and a parameter assignment tool with integrated control setting for standard tasks such as temperature controllers, flow rate regulators, pressure regulators etc.

Modular PID Control

Through the interconnection of supplied standard function blocks, you can implement just about every closed-loop control engineering structure, even in the upper performance range of process engineering. The package contains 27 FBs and a commissioning tool.

Fuzzy Control

Fuzzy Systems are used when the mathematic description of a process is difficult or even impossible, when a process behavior is not consistent, when non-linearities occur, but, on the other hand, experience with the process exists.

NeuroSystems

Neuronal Systems are used with those problems, whose structure and solution are only partly known. NeuroSystems can be used in all automation levels, from the individual closed-loop controller to the optimization of a plant.



Page 33


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


SIMATIC NET

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.34

111

4T


SIMATIC NET is the name of an entire family of networks. • Industrial Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3 - the international standard for the networking of areas and cells •

PROFIBUS according to EN 50170 - the international standard for the field area and the cell network with a limited number of nodes

•

AS-Interface - for communication with sensors and actuators.

Industrial Ethernet

The Industrial Ethernet network is a cell level network according to the international standard IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) and is designed for industrial use. Extensive open network solutions are possible. A high transmission rate is guaranteed with various transmission media. Industrial Ethernet is an industry standard, world-wide tested and accepted.

PROFINET

PROFINET as the standard for communication applications in the field level enables the interfacing of distributed field devices through Industrial Ethernet with the TCP/IP protocol.

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS is the bus system for cell networks with a limited number of nodes. It is based on the European standard EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. Since the requirements according to EN 50170 are fulfilled, PROFIBUS guarantees openness for the connection of components from other manufacturers that conform to standards. The PROFIBUS accessing procedure functions according to the "Token Passing with subordinate Master-Slave" procedure. As a result, a distinction is made between active and passive network participants.

AS - Interface

The AS-Interface is a networking system for binary sensors and actuators in the field area. With AS-Interface, binary actuators and sensors become capable of communication, for which a direct field bus connection was not technically possible up until now or was not economical.



Page 34


SIEMENS

Operator Control and Process Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI Process visualization

Process visualization

system

system

SIMATIC WinCC

SIMATIC WinCC flexible

SIMATIC Panels, PGs, PCs

SIMATIC PG, PC

oft 10

4

E

-41E00101616W,

, ,....: l E.,. --- . F;':tql: ., 1 mat ing...aim s'

wiliom—idAZ -Er&

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Overview

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.35

41

1



For the SIMATIC S7, there is a field-proven HMI system for user-friendly process control and monitoring available, the SIMATIC HMI. It ranges from the simple text display to the process visualization system. SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI are completely harmonized and integrated. This simplifies the use of the human-machine interface system SIMATIC HMI considerably. •

SIMATIC S7 has already integrated HMI services. The HMI system requests process data from the SIMATIC S7. Data transmission between SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI is carried out by the two operating systems and does not have to be taken into account in the user program. SIMATIC HMI systems can be connected directly to PPI (S7-200) and MPI or PROFIBUS (S7-300 and S7-400). Operation using PROFIBUS makes process control and monitoring even over greater distances possible.

•

Numerous features from the uniform database and symbols up to the same user-friendly Windows-oriented user interfaces simplify the use of HMI systems.


Page 35


SIEMENS

Process Visualization and Operator Control with WinCC

/ Programming Interfaces

/ Alarm Logging (Message System)

Process visualization / Standard Interfaces

Tag Logging / (Archiving)

/ Report Designer (Report System) SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


/ PLC Communication SITRAIN Training for

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.36


WinCC

SIMATIC WinCC (Windows Control Center) is the open process visualization system from Siemens. It can be integrated problem free in a new or already existing PLC system.

Function Modules

The heart of SIMATIC WinCC is an industry and technology independent basic system with all the important functions for operator control and monitoring, such as:

Basis of WinCC


•

Pixel graphic display

•

Measured value acquisition (archiving functions, data compression, minimum and maximum values etc.)

•

Message display, archiving and reporting

•

Process communication to different PLC systems

•

Standard interlaces, for example, Microsoft programs

•

Documentation of machine and process sequences with individual reports.

WinCC is based on the 32-bit standard operating systems Windows 2000/XP from Mircrosoft. This platform gives WinCC the following functionality: •

Use of the Windows operating equipment (such as printer and driver)

•

Data exchange with other Windows applications via DDE, ODBC, SQL, OLE, ActiveX and OPC.

•

API programming interlace

•

use of hardware available in the market


Page 36


1 SIEMENS

Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7 Engineering System

WA

Process terminal 1

Process terminal 2

WI

!Oi l

Process terminal 3

_Pli „„

1

Terminal bus

ICWinCC OS-Server

Pi W inCC OS -----r 7=:1 17_- ..._ _ -:* .

I

System bus S7-400as central unit

41 4

ET 200M ~r

41

G

Field devices

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:



18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.37


Introduction

SIMATIC PCS 7 represents the new control system generation in SIEMENS. It is the consistent, further development and summary of experiences with systems that are based on TELEPERM M, SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5. As a result, it is tailored to the process control system tasks in all industries.

Engineering System

The Engineering System can be designed as its own station in the system. It can however also be loaded as a software package in the OS components at the same time. The Engineering System has the following components: •

STEP 7 with the SIMATIC Manager, the central database, and with HW Config for configuring hardware and networks. It also contains the servers, that facilitate consistent configuration between PLC and OS.

•

SCL (Structured Control Language) as PASCAL-similar higher level programming language for block generation

•

CFC (Continuous Function Chart) for graphic configuration of the basic automation functions

•

SFC (Sequential Function Chart) for graphic configuration of production sequences

•

Expansion of the SIMATIC Manager with "Technological Hierarchy”

•

WinCC (Windows Control Center) for OS configuration

•

DOCPRO for documenting configuration data Import/Export wizard for bi-directional data exchange with other CAE systems

These components are supplemented by libraries that provide pre-defined blocks for PLC and OS.


Page 37


SIEMENS

DRIVES Technology

Consistent drives spectrum for all applications ❑ From standard drives with 100 W up to large drives with 50 MW ❑ Motion and vector control ❑ Technology-specific closed-loop controllers

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Overview

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.38


You have the following drives spectrum: •

Low voltage motors are the first High Performance AC for machine and systems - the solution for the future: maintenance free, dynamic and powerful.

•

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES frequency converters. They control the speed of AC motors extremely exact. This series was designed for world-wide use. It is suitable for all supply voltages from 230 to 690 volt and is certified world-wide.

•

MICROMASTER and MICRO/MIDIMASTER Vector standard converters are frequency converters in the 120 watt to 75 kW performance range. Because of their compact form, they can be installed in the smallest space. The sensorless vector control allows it to be used in the medium performance range even for demanding applications. COMBIMASTER are compact units consisting of three-phase low voltage motors and frequency converters. MICROMASTER Integrated are frequency converters (IP 65) that are applied directly to three-phase low voltage motors of different manufacturers. MICRO/MIDIMASTER Eco are frequency converters specially designed for the requirements of the heating, ventilation and air conditioning industry.

•


SIMOREG converter equipment are fully digital compact units for threephase operation and are used for armature and field supply of variable speed DC drives. The range of rated direct current of the devices is from 15 to 2000 A and can be increased by parallel connection of SIMOREG devices. The most familiar applications include hoisting gear, ski lifts, elevators, cranes, and other reversing drives.


Page 38


SIEMENS

The SINAMICS Family Frequency Converter for Standard Applications

SINAMICS G150

SINAMICS G120

SINAMICS G110

(single drive)

(single drive)

(single drive)

Frequency Converter for Motion-Contol Applications

SINAMICS S120

SINAMICS S120

SINAMICS S120

Cabinet Module

Chassis Block size (single drive)

Book size (modular)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


V

18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.39


Standard Applications

Drives with limited to medium demands on the control dynamics and functionality. Energy feedback into the network is not required as a rule (such as, pumps, fans, compressors, conveyor technology, door drives, mixers, kneaders, mills).

Motion Control Applications

Drives with high demands on the control dynamics and functionality. Energy feedback into the network is possible (for example, single drives such as elevators, extruders, conveyor technology, multimotor systems with modular design such as paper machines, rolling mill lines, plastic film machines, synthetic fiber systems, crane systems, packaging machines, printing machines, handling (robots), machine tools)

Benefits

The new drives family offers a handling as uniform as possible of planning, commissioning and parameter assignment. This is made possible through: • • • •

Other Versions


SIZER Configuration and Calculation Software STARTER Commissioning Software Uniform parameter structure Uniform hardware design

In addition to the display above of the most important family members, there is: - SINAMICS G120D for decentralized configuration outside of the cabinet - Frequency converters in the design of the SIMATIC ET200S and ET200pro - SINAMICS G130, the G150 without cabinet for the individual installation - SINAMICS S150, the feedback-capable version of the G150 - SINAMICS medium voltage drives (> 1000V) for large power ratings.


Page 39


SIEMENS

2

Training Units and Addressing


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.1

ihr


Page

Contents

...... 2 Training Area Setup with S7 - 300 ...... 3 Configuration of the S7 - 300 Training Unit The Simulator ...... 4 The Conveyor Model ...................................................................................................................... 5 6 Complete Symbol List If You Want to Know More .............................................................................................................. 8 ...... 9 Training Area Setup with S7- 400 Configuration of the S7-400 Training Unit ....................................................................................... 10



Page 1

ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing

SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


S7 - 300 Training Area • • • • • • • •


18.09.2009 SERV102E.2


The training area consists of the following components: An S7-300 programmable logic controller with the CPU 315-2 DP Digital input and output modules, analog module Simulator with digital and analog sections Conveyor model ET 200S distributed peripheral MM420 Micromaster with PROFIBUS module TP170B Touchpanel Programming device or PC


Page 2


SIEMENS

2

Configuration of the S7 - 300 Training Unit

Module

-->

Slot No.

-->

PS

CPU

DI 32

DO 32

D18/D08

Al 2

2

4

5

6

7

0

4

8

304

I/O Address -->

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Configuration

Slot 5: Slot 6: Slot 7:


V


The programmable controller is configured with the following modules: Slot 1: Slot 2: Slot 4:

Addresses

18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.3

Power Supply 24V/5A CPU 315-2 DP Digital input 32x24V

Inputs from the simulator and thumbwheel buttons Digital output 32x24V/0.5A Outputs from the simulator and digital display Conveyor model Digital input and output module 8X24V/ 8x24V 0.5A Analog section from the simulator Analog input 2 Al

You can set the starting addresses of the modules by parameter assignment (freely).


Page 3


SIEMENS

The Simulator Potentiometers for setting the analog values " PIW_All " (PIW 304)

BCD Digital Display QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)

"

.0 1 .2 .3

4 .5

.6 .7

.1 .3

.5

.6 .7

DI

DO

ND ND ND ND

• • • •

ND

•

.0 .1 .2 .3

4

No ND ‘ 0

* • 0

.5 .6 .7

)9

•

.0

' •

•

ND 19 ND \„, Ng \D

• • • •

2 .3 A

• 0

.6 .7

•

11111111

/ 1 — 1

. 7 1 I / / I I

s• s.

AIMMIIIMIEL

:7

-15V...*15V

All

AI2 0.01A02 -15V...+15V

Ill All = mi im ••

o o

0 8 1 5 mt

•

OV

All

0

Imi = NE

Al2

0

Al2

o o

A01

A02

LEDs Thumbwheel Buttons Switches / Momentary Contact Switches (QW 4) "IW_Thumbw" (IW 2) (IW 0)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Design

Addressing


18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.4

Two cables connect the simulator to the S7-300 or S7-400 training unit. The simulator is divided into the following three sections: •

Binary section with 16 switches / momentary contact switches and 16 LEDs

•

Digital section with 4 thumbwheel buttons and a digital display. The thumbwheel and digital (BCD) display use BCD values,

•

Analog section with two potentiometers for specifying or simulating analog input signals and a voltmeter that — selectable per switch — displays the voltage output set on the potentiometers or from the two output channels of the analog output module (as far as it exists).

You use the following addresses to address the inputs and outputs in your user program: Sensor / Actuator (D132, D032)



Switch / Mom.Con

IW 0

LEDs

QW 4

Thumb. buttons

IW 2

Digital display

QW 6

Analog channels

PIW 304/306

Page 4


SIEMENS

2

The Conveyor Model Ell

"BAY1" "BAY2" "BAY3" "LB" (I 8.0) (I 8.7) (I 8.6) (I 8.5)

"K_Conv_RIGHT" (Q 8.5) "K_Conv_LEFT" (Q 8.6)

.Z. "Horn" ......... (Q 8.7)

I I 1t I 1 I "T Bay2" I "T_Bay3" I "T_Bay-LB" /' "T—Bay1" l (I 8.4) i (I 8.3) ; (I 8.2) : (I 8.1) "L_Bay-LB" "L_Bay3" "L_Bay2" "L_Bay1" (Q 8.4) (Q 8.3) (Q 8.2) (Q 8.1)

/

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Design

18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.5

SITRAIN Training for W.— Automation and Industrial Solutions

The slide above shows the conveyor model with its sensors and actuators as well as the assigned I/O addresses.


Page 5


Complete Symbol List 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Symbol C_Conv_Fault C_Parts DB_Instance_F620_Fault2 DB_Instance_F620_Fault3 DB_Parts FB_FaultEvaluation FC_Signal FC_Mode FC_ConvMotor FC_Fault FC_Count FC_Count Add FC_FaultEvaluation FC_MM420 T_System_ON T_System_OFF T_Jog_RIGHT T_Jog_LEFT S_M/A_ModeSelect T_M/A_Accept T_Ackn_Fault S_Fault1 S_Fault2 S_Fault3 LB T_Bay1 T_Bay2 T_Bay3 T_Bay-LB BAY1 BAY2 BAY3 IW_Thumbw IVV_State_MM420 IVV_Act_MM420 M_Flash_2Hz M_Flash_1Hz M_Aux_System_ON M_Aux_Man_ON M_Aux_Auto_ON M_Aux_C17 M_Aux_LB M_Jog_RIGHT M_Auto_RIGHT M_Conv_Fault M_Faultl M_Aux_Fault1 M_Fault2 M_Aux_Fault2 M_Aux_Auto M Aux_Count M System_ON_HMI M_System_OFF_HMI M_Conv Jog_RIGHT_HMI

SITRAIN


Address / C 17 C 18 DB 2 DB 3 DB 19 FB 20 FC 14 FC 15 FC 16 FC 17 FC 18 FC 19 FC 20 FC 42 I 0.0 I 0.1 I 0.2 I 0.3 I 0.4 I 0.5 I 1.0 I 1.1 I 1.2 I 1.3 I 8.0 I 8.1 I 8.2 I 8.3 I 8.4 I 8.5 I 8.6 I 8.7 WV 2 WV 42 NV 44 M 10.3 M 10.5 M 15.1 M 15.2 M 15.3 M 15.7 M 16.0 M 16.2 M 16.4 M 17.0 M 17.1 M 17.2 M 17.3 M 17.4 M 18.0 M 19.0 M 30.0 30.1 M 30.2 M

Data type COUNTER COUNTER FB 20 FB 20 DB 19 FB 20 FC 14 FC 15 FC 16 FC 17 FC 18 FC 19 FC 20 FC 42 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL WORD WORD INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL

Comment Counter Conveyor faults Counter transported parts Instance DB for FB20, Evaluation of Fault 2 Instance DB for F620, Evaluation of Fault 3 DB with parts data FB for evaluating faults FC Indicator lights + Horn FC Set operating modes FC Control of conveyor motor FC Fault evaluation FC Count parts FC Count parts using addition FC for evaluating faults FC Control MM420 Momentary contact System ON Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact) Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MAN, I '=AUTO Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement Simulate Fault 1, 0=OFF/1 =ON Simulate Fault 2, 0=OFF/1 =ON Simulate Fault 3, 0=OFF/1 =ON Light barrier Momentary contact Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 3 Momentary contact Light barrier bay Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bay 3 BCD thumbwheel State word of MM420 Actual speed of MM420 Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT Memory bit Conveyor fault Memory bit for storing Fault 1 Edge auxiliary memory bit Fault 1 Memory bit for storing Fault 2 Edge auxiliary memory bit Fault 2 Auxiliary memory bit Edge AUTO on Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit System ON (HMI) Memory bit System OFF (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI)

Page 6


Complete Symbol List

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92

Symbol M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI 11/1_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI IA M/A Accept_HMI hil Ackn_Fault HMI M_Bays_occup_HMI kil Conv_Fault_HMI 114 MM420_0n_HMI M MM420_Jog_RIGHT HhAl M MM420_Jog_LEFT HMI M SlaveFailure MB SlaveAddress MW ACT MW SETP OB Cycle OB_SlaveFailure OB VVarmRestart L SYSTEM L_MAN L_AUTO L Restart man L Restart aut L Cony Fault L_Fault1 L_Fault2 L_Fault3 L Bay1 L_Bay2 L_Bay3 L_Bay-LB K_Conv_RIGHT K_Conv_LEFT Horn QW_DigDisp QW Control MM420 QW Setp_MM420 OD_Conv_Monitoring VAT 1/0-Conveyor VAT_Numberformats


Address / 30.3 M M 30.4 M 30.5 M 31 .0 M 33.0 M 33.1 M 40.0 M 40.2 M 40.3 M 86.0 MB 87 MW 20 MW 22 OB 1 OB 86 OB 100 Q 4.1 Q 4.2 Q 4.3 Q 4.5 Q 4.6 Q 5.0 Q 5.1 Q 5.2 Q 5.3 Q 8.1 Q 8.2 Q 8.3 Q 8.4 Q 8.5 Q 8.6 Q 8.7 QW 6 QW 42 QW 44 T 17 VAT 1 VAT 2

Data type ' BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BYTE INT INT OB 1 OB 86 OB 100 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL WORD WORD INT TIMER

2

Comment Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, '1'... Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI) Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI) all Bays 1 to 3 occupied Memory bit Conveyor fault Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI) Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI) Memory bit DP Slave has failed DP address of failed slave Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp. OB for cyclic program Error OB for slave failure Warm restart OB Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode Indicator light Automatic mode Indicator light for manual warm restart Indicator light for automatic warm restart Indicator light Conveyor fault Indicator light Fault 1 Indicator light Fault 2 Indicator light Fault 3 Indicator light Bay 1 Indicator light Bay 2 Indicator light Bay 3 Indicator light Light barrier bay Run conveyor RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Horn BCD digital display Control word for MM420 Setpoint speed for MM420 Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode

Page 7


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Note


18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.8


RIP Automation and Industrial Solutions

The following pages contain either further information or are for reference to complete a topic.


Page 8


SIEMENS

2

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Contents of the Training Area

18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.9

SITRAIN Training for Mr Automation and Industrial Solutions

The training area consists of the following components: • An S7-400 programmable logic controller with a CPU 412 or CPU 413-2 DP • Digital input and output modules, analog module • Simulator with digital and analog section • Conveyor model • ET 200S distributed peripheral • MM420 Micromaster with PROFIBUS module • TP170B Touchpanel • Programming device or PC


Page 9


SIEMENS

Configuration of the S7-400 Training Unit

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.10

S iTRAlN Traini

Automation and lnTufsotinal Solutions

Design

You can see the design of the S7-400 training unit in the slide above.

Configuration

The UR 1 rack is configured with the following modules: Slot 1: Slot 2: Slot 3: Slot 4: Slot 5: Slot 6: Slot 7: Slot 8: Slot 9: Slot 10: Slot 11: Slot 12: Slot 13: Slot 14: Slot 15: Slot 16: Slot 17: Slot 18:

Addressing


Power Supply 24V and 5V/20A CPU 412 or other vacant (when the CPU only has a single width) vacant vacant Digital input 32x24V (from simulator) Digital input 32x24V (from conveyor model) Digital output 32x24V 0.5A (to simulator) Digital output 32x24V 0.5A (to conveyor model) Analog input 8x13 Bit (from potentiometer on simulator) vacant vacant vacant vacant vacant vacant

As long as no configuration or parameter settings have been made, the system works with default addresses.


Page 10


SIEMENS

Installation / Maintenance of the Programmable Logic Controller


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.1

4

1 SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions

Page

Contents

Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 2 Components for Configuring an S7-300 ...... 3 Mounting Positions for an S7-300 Configuration ...... 4 Expansion Capabilities for an S7-300 ...... 5 Installation Rules ...... 6 ...... 7 Installation Aids 8 Installation Checklist 9 Installing the Rail (Part 1) .... 10 Installing the Rail (Part 2) Checklist for Electrical Configuration .............................................................................................. 11 Wiring the Front Connector ............................................................................................................. 12 13 Preparing for Operation Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-300 ................................................................................... 14 Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-300 ......................................................................................... 15 Changing the Fuse in Digital Output Modules of the S7-300 .......................................................... 16 Using the Electronic Manuals 17 Exercise 1: Using the S7-300 Manuals 18 Exercise 2: Wiring the Signal Modules 19 Installation/Maintenance of the S7-400 Programmable Logic Controller ......................................... 20ff



Page 1

ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of this chapter the participant will ... be familiar with the basic components for configuring a SIMATIC S7-300/400 understand the function of these basic components know the installation and expansion possibilities of an S7-300/400 know the installation aids for a PLC be able to use the electronic S7 manuals be able to wire digital input and output modules be able to change a backup battery




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.2

Page 2



SIEMENS

Components for Configuring an S7-300 Component

Function

Rail

... is the rack for an S7-300

Power Supply (PS)

... converts the supply voltage (120/230 V) to 24 VDC operation voltage to supply the S7-300

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

... executes the user program accessories: memory module, backup battery


... connect the bus between the racks (tiers)

Signal Modules (SM) (Digital/Analog)

... adapt various process levels to the S7-300. accessories: bus connector, front connector


make functions available, such as for positioning, ... closed-loop control

Communication Processors (CP)

... for communications between programmable logic controllers. accessories: cable, software, interface modules

SIMATIC S7

Date File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.3

SITRAIN Training for IC


Rail

You snap the power supply, CPU, IM, and up to eight signal modules onto the rail.

Power Supply

The power supply is available in 2A, 5A, and 10A output current at 24V. The output voltage is isolated, short-circuit proof and stable at no load. An LED lights up for error-free operation. The LED flashes when there is an output voltage overload. You use a selection switch to change the primary voltage between 120V and 230V.

Central Processing

The CPU has the following elements on its front side: • Status and error LEDs, • Operating mode selector, removable key with four switch settings, • Connection for 24V supply voltage, • Multipoint interface, MPI, for the programming device or connecting to an additional programmable logic controller, • Battery compartment, (not on Compact_CPUs and CPUs after October, 2002) • Compartment for a memory module (not on the CPU 31X IFM).

Unit (CPU)

Interface Modules

Interface modules make it possible to have a multi-tier configuration.

Signal Modules

These modules are selected according to their voltage range or output voltage. A bus connector is included with each module, which together make up the backplane bus. The process signals are connected to a plug-on front connector.

Interconnecting Cables

You need a PG/PC cable to connect a programming device directly. PROFIBUS cables and cable connectors are also needed to network several programmable logic controllers.

CP

A communication processor for the PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet, and other bus systems.



Page 3


SIEMENS

Mounting Positions for an S7-300 Configuration

1.01:133

1111111111111111111

1111111111111111111

1111111111111111111 1111111111111111111 1111111111111111111

•

U

U

E

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.092009 SERV1_03E.4

•

■


V Automation and Industrial Solutions

Mounting Position

The slide above shows the possible horizontal or vertical mounting positions.

Temperature

Depending on the mounting position, you can have the following ambient temperatures for operating the programmable logic controller: • •

0-60°C for a horizontal configuration 0-40°C for a vertical configuration.


Page 4


SIEMENS

Expansion Capabilities of an S7-300

SIMATIC S7

Date. Ale:



18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.5

Maximum Expansion The slide above shows the maximum expansion for an S7-300/CPU314/315. The total expansion permits up to 32 modules, with up to eight modules per rack (tier). There are no slot rules for signal modules, function modules, and communications processors. That is, they can be used on any slot. Interface Module (IM)

Interface modules (IM 360/361) are used to loop the bus between the racks. The IMS interface represents the sender, and the IMR interface represents the receiver. The interface modules must be used in their specified slots. If needed, an additional power supply can be provided in the expansion rack. There is the hard-wired IM 365 interface module as an economical variation for the two-tier configuration. (No additional power supply is needed; no CP can be connected).

Local Segment

Certain function modules, such as the FM NC, can have their own I/O assigned to them. This provides an FM module with its own I/O area, which can be accessed very quickly. This I/O area is referred to as a local segment. One local segment can be configured per rack. During running operation, the CPU can no longer access this I/O.

Slot Number

Slots 1 to 3 Slot 1: PS Slot 2: CPU Slot 3: IM Slots 4 to 11 SM, FM, CP

Distance

The following cable lengths are available between the tiers: Two-tier configuration with IM 365: maximum 1m Multi-tier configuration with IM 360/361: maximum 10m



(= permanent assignment): (power supply), if present (central processing unit), if present (interface module), if present (free assignment): can be plugged in any slot

Page 5


SIEMENS

Installation Rules

❑ For a horizontal configuration, the CPU and power supply must be arranged on the left. For a vertical configuration, the CPU and power supply must be arranged at the bottom ❑ The following minimum clearances must be maintained: o 20 mm to the right and left of the rack o 40 mm above and below for a single-tier configuration and at least 80 mm between two racks ❑ The interface module always occupies the space next to the CPU ❑ There may be a maximum of eight I/O modules (signal modules, function modules, communication processors) inserted in a rack ❑ A multi-tier configuration is possible for the CPU 314/315/316/317/318 and 319 ❑ Please ensure that there is a low resistance connection, such as through contact washers, between the rail and the substructure. C)

.1

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Rules

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.6


The most important rules for the mechanical configuration are listed in the slide above.

(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).



Page 6


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV103E.7


Manuals

For installation, you need the following manuals: • "S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation" • "S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications" • "S7-300 Automation System, CPU Specifications: CPU 31XC and CPU 31X" These manuals are also available electronically.

Parts List

This list specifies the modules of the PLC and where they are configured. The system designer must create this list.

Checklist

Displays the procedure for installation. A suggestion for the sequence is presented on the next page.



Page 7


SIEMENS

Installation Checklist

• Are all the components available ? (see parts list) • Install the rail ! • Install the power supply ! • Snap a bus connector onto the CPU and install the module ! •

• Snap a bus connector onto each of the I/O modules and install the modules ! • Plug on the front connectors and insert the labeling strips and the slot number ! • Wire the modules (power supply, CPU and I/O modules)

•

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Checklist

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.8


The checklist provides only the sequence for the individual activities. The following pages and the manuals contain the exact procedure. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).



Page 8


SIEMENS

Installing the Rail (Part 1)

• • Use M6 screws to screw the rail to the substructure! •

• Connect the protective ground conductor to the rail (protective ground screw) . Note: Minimum cross section of the cable = 10mm2. Approx. AWG 7.5. Protective Ground Connection

57.2mml

9 466 mm 500 mm 800 mm

482 mm 530 mm 830 mm

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Mounting Holes

41 A SulT Nn Training ni g toR mA atilo in f or ndustrial Solutions

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.9

The measurement specifications for the mounting holes are indicated in the following table. L1(mm) 32.5 32.5 32.5

Rail Length (mm) 482.6mm 530 mm 830 mm Lt

L2(mm) 57.2 57.2 57.2

L3(mm) 466 500 800

-CO

L2

L3 Screws

You can select from the following screw types to secure the rail: • •

M6 machine screw according to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/DIN 85) M6 hexagon head cap screw according to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017).

The screw length depends on the substructure. You also need 6.4mm washers according to ISO 7092 (DIN 433)


Page 9


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Bus Connector

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.10


A bus connector is included with every module. You snap the bus connector onto the module before you install it. Note: Begin with the CPU. No bus connector is snapped onto the last module.

Modules

Hook the modules on the top of the rail in succession. Module sequence: • • •

Power supply CPU Modules.

You then swing down the modules and secure them with the hold-down screw. Front Connector

A front connector is then plugged onto the signal modules to connect the process signals. A mechanical coding between the module and front connector is provided to avoid interchanging the front connectors at a later time.

Slot Number

Labeling strips for the slot number are included with the CPU. You can use these strips to label the module's slot location. The slot number is needed later to configure and assign parameters to the module.



Page 10


SIEMENS

Checklist for Electrical Configuration

• 1. Are analog signals or bus signals used? 2. Do cables with > 60V exist? •

3 Are inductances switched by additional 3. contacts in the output circuit or independently of the programmable logic controller? 4. Will cables be laid outside of buildings?

•

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.11

SITRAIN Training for •


Point 1

Shielded cables must be used for analog signals or bus signals (PROFIBUS).

Point 2

When cables are laid with signals > 60 V, you must lay the cables in separate bundles or cable ducts. For signals >400V, you must lay the cables outside of cabinets with a minimum clearance of 10cm.

Point 3

You must connect inductances to an overvoltage protective device. You connect D.C.-controlled coils with diodes or Zener diodes. You connect A.C.-controlled coils with varistors or RC elements.

Point 4

Special lightning protective measures are required here, such as laying cables in metal conduits grounded on both sides.




Page 11


• SIEMENS

Wiring the Front Connector ,•■••■..

INV

•

Open the front door of the signal modules ! o Bring the front connector into wiring position ! ❑ Thread the strain reliever in the front connector ! o Strip the insulation from the wires (6 mm length) !

•

o Connect the wires ! a Tighten the strain relief for the cable loom ! a Position the front connector in the operating position ! o Close the front door !

❑ Fill out the labeling strip and insert it in the front door ! • a Attach the slot number to the front door !

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.12


Cables

Use flexible cables with a cross section of 0.25 to 1.5 mm2. Core end sleeves are not required. If you want to use them, then use only ones without an insulating collar according to DIN 46228 Form A.

Wiring Position

Press the reset button on the top side of the module and drag the front connector to the front until it latches. The front connector has no connection to the module in this position. Wiring is also made easier, because you can more readily access the terminals.

Connection Assignment

Refer to the section about signal modules in the instruction manual. As a rule, M is connected to terminal 20, and L+ is connected to terminal 2 or 1.

Optical Isolation

The digital input modules and output modules are optically isolated. Either eight or 16 inputs or outputs have a common ground or return (M connection).

Cable Length

A cable length of up to 600 m is permitted with unshielded cables (exception: analog modules). The maximum cable length is 1000 m for shielded cables.

Laying Cables

To implement a correct EMC configuration, use the notes in the section on configuring the electrical structure for an S7-300 in the instruction manual. Separate bundles or cable ducts are required when signal cables and heavy current cables (>60 V) are laid together.

Tool

You will require a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.



Page 12


SIEMENS

Preparing for Operation

• ❑ Insert the key in the mode selector on the CPU (for CPUs until Oct. 2002)! ❑ Install the backup battery (for CPUs until Oct. 2002)! o

o

•

If the user program is not installed in a non-volatile memory module If larger memory areas must remain retentive during a power failure

❑ For CPUs until Oct. 2002 insert the memory module if required ! o o

So that the user program and the data are retained during Power OFF and without a backup battery To have a larger "load memory" available.

•

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:



18.092009 SERV1_03E.13


Keyswitch

The keyswitch is used to select the operating mode (STOP, RUN, and memory reset). This keyswitch also provides protection for the user program. If the switch is removed in the RUN position, it is possible to read out the user program, but it is not possible to make changes.

Backup Battery

Open the front door of the CPU. Insert the battery connector, with the notch on the left side, into the receptacle in the battery compartment. Push the backup battery into the battery compartment. Close the front door of the CPU.

Memory Module

Before you insert the memory module, you must switch the CPU to the STOP state, or you must switch off the supply voltage.

CPU Memory Reset

A CPU memory reset must be done: • during the initial startup • before a new and complete user program is downloaded • if the CPU requests a memory reset (the STOP LED flashes). Using the keyswitch to perform a memory reset (points 1 to 4) 1.

Turn the power supply on.

2. Turn the keyswitch to the STOP position. 3. Turn the keyswitch to the MRES (Memory Reset) position and hold this position until the STOP LED flashes twice slowly (about 3 seconds). 4. Turn the keyswitch back to STOP and then within one second turn it back to MRES. The STOP LED flashes rapidly to indicate that the memory reset is being done. Note:


You can also use a PG/PC to perform a memory reset.


Page 13


SIEMENS

Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-300

Battery only exists in CPUs that were delivered until Oct. 2002

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:



18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.14

Procedure for the S7-300TM

1. Open the front door of the CPU 2. Use a screwdriver to pull the backup battery out of the battery compartment 3. Insert the battery connector, with the notch on the left side, into the receptacle and push the battery into the battery compartment 4. Close the front door of the CPU.

Change Frequency

You should change the battery after one year.

Notes

Only CPU's that were delivered until Oct. 2002 have a backup battery. Change the backup battery during POWER ON only, otherwise the data in the user memory will be lost. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).



Page 14


SIEMENS

Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-300

•

u Switch the CPU to Stop ! u Switch the load voltage off ! O Open the front door ! O Release the front connector and take it out !

•

u Loosen the hold-down screw on the module ! u Swing the module up and off the rack ! o Remove the upper portion of the front connector coding key on the new modules !

•

0 Insert the new module and screw it down tightly !

O Connect the front connector and bring it into operating position! Li Close the front door ! u Switch the load voltage on again ! o Perform a complete restart on the CPU !

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Warning

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.15

11SITRAIN Training for

4


You are not to exchange modules while there is data traffic via the MPI. If the CPU is not in the STOP mode, there could still be data traffic on the communication bus (MPI). This situation would lead to a system fault. If you are not certain, pull out the connector to the CPU's MPI interface. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).

Tool


You will require a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.


Page 15


SIEMENS

Changing the Fuse in Digital Output Modules of the S7-300 —

—

■

,.n..k

• 0 Switch the CPU to Stop ! 0 Switch the load voltage off !

o Remove the front connector ! • o Loosen the hold-down screw on the module ! o Swing the module out ! D Screw the fuse support out of the module ! 0 Change the fuse !

• CI Screw the fuse support down tightly again ! 0 Install the module ! 0 Insert the front connector !

o Switch the load voltage on again !

SIMATIC S7

Date: File

Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved .

Which Modules

Automation and lndustnal Solutions

The following digital output modules have fuses: • •

Fuses

111 SITRAIN Trammg for

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.16

SM 322, 16 x AC120V SM 322, 8 x AC 120/230V

You can use the following fuses of the 8A/250V type: • • •

Wickmann Schurter Littlefuse

19 194-8A SP001.013 217.008


SITRAIN


Page 16


SIEMENS Using the Electronic Manuals FIR ilm

ffj Acrobat Reader - [S7,300_1H8x_e.pdf]. .

.._ .ilu p 2ci

ri fie Edit Qocurnent View Window Help '6

a 51A oli -, MI II I ■ H 1! + + 1101l00%

n

."

D Back to home

1 .5

.

r

1] Se j

■I1

0.- Bookmark ..

6

a5

- ® 1 D NI Is EI 1 7: .i

1 1-' -

D Title

Find What:

EMI

El D 1 Preface D 2 Guide to the S7-330 documentati D3 Installation Order D 4 S7-300 modules 5 Configuring 7,k' f+-[216 Installation - ,E 0 7 Wiring

j

r Match Case r Find Backwards 5

---

.2_1

Manual Collection

0

Cancel

IllI

n

I— Ignore Asian Character Width

Fl

Config uring Summary of the Content Bast Principles of Planning Component dimensions .. Arranging modules on a single rack Arranging modules on mukiple racks 5.6 Selection and installation of cabinets. Example: Selecting a cabinet. 5.7 Elm tical assembly, protective rileOW= Mid gl.ding. 5.5 Grounding concept and overall structure. 5.8.1 Installing an S7-300 web grounded reference potential 5.8.2 histalling an S7-300 with ungrounded reference potential 5.8.3 (not CPU 312 IFM or CPU 314).... bolded or non-lsolated modules? 5.8.4 5.8.5 Grounding. 5.8.6 Overview. Grounding 5.9 Selecting the load powersupply unit . 5.10 Planning subnets , , . . 1 1 e H 8,5 x 11 in 0 : 1=1 IN 5.1 52 5.3 5.4 5.5

-

i.' -C1 Index

El. Manuals

Find A gain

flattery

1"" Match Whole Word Only

.•=--D 8 Addressing l-E-.0 9 Commissionin g ,--D 10 Maintenance ,--D 11 Testing functions, Dia gnostics a += --012 Appendix D13 Glossary

1.

II

I

3 of 256

Date: File:

SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. An rights reserved.

1

CI

Find

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.17

. 5-

5


When you install the STEP 7 software, you can also install the electronic manuals for STEP 7. You will need the Acrobat Reader software to read the manuals. It can also be found on the STEP 7 CD. The menu options Simatic - Documentation - English take you to a list of existing manuals. SIMATIC manuals (Automation Systems, SW, HMI, Networks) can be ordered as a CD collection.

All

Download

You can download the most recent electronic SIMATIC manuals free of charge from the Internet. Visit the Product Support Homepage (www.siemens.de/Simatic).

Search

To quickly find information, use either the detailed table of contents. You can directly open the pages marked in green with a mouse click. Or, alternatively, you can use the Search function to search for a term, such as, "Battery". As a result, all locations where the term can be found are displayed. Again, you can jump directly to the locations that are marked in green.



Page 17


Chapter 3 Exercisel: Using the S7-300 Manuals 1. How many racks with how many modules each can be installed in the S7-300? max. ............. racks with ............. modules each 2. The PS 307 power supply module, 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 (5A output) is designed for an input voltage of .................. VAC or ......................VAC 3. An S7-300 and its various modules rated at 24 VDC have a voltage Tolerance Range of .................... VDC to ................... VDC 4. How many digital inputs and outputs can the CPU 314 address and how large is the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image output table (PIQ)? Process-image input table: ........... bytes = .............. digital inputs Process-image output table: .......... bytes = .............. digital outputs 5. At which voltage levels does the digital input module SM321; D132/24V deliver signal state '0' . ............... V to ........... V signal state 1 '. ......... V to ........... V 6. What is the maximum output current that the digital output module SM322; D032; DC24V/0.5A delivers at signal state '0' . ............... mA (residual current) signal state '1' ......... A 7. What is the maximum operating frequency of this output module ? for resistive load:

......Hz

for inductive load:

...... Hz

8. Is the output module short-circuit proof?



Page 18


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Wiring the Signal Modules

M.C.Sw 2

M.C.Sw 1

Power supply

LED

L-

L+

1720

8

13 16

DI/ DO 323 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Task


18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.19


The following sensors and actuators are to be connected to the digital input and output module 6ES7 323-1BEIxx-OAA0 at Slot 6 : • •

momentary-contact switch 1 at input I 8.0

•

LED at output Q 8.0

momentary-contact switch 2 at input I 8.5

What to Do

In the picture complete the necessary wiring. Also consider the power supply of the sensors, actuators and the module.

Note

Use the manual for the terminal assignment or use the wiring diagram on the inside of the digital module's front door.



Page 19


SIEMENS

Installation / Maintenance of the S7-400 Programmable Logic Controller


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_038.20

g SITRAIN Training for la


Contents

Page

Components for Configuring an S7-400 ............................................................................................ Racks and Connection Possibilities Installation Rules Installation Checklist Installing Racks Installing Modules Wiring the Power Supply Wiring the Front Connector .............................................................................................................. Preparing for Operation ..................................................................................................................... Changing the Backup Battery .......................................................................................................... Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-400 .......................................................................................



Page 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31


SIEMENS

Components for Configuring an S7-400 Component

Function

Rack

for receiving and establishing an electrical connection to the modules

Power Supply (PS)

converts the supply voltage to 5 VDC and 24 VDC to supply the modules

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

executes the user program accessories: Memory Card

Signal Modules (SM) (Digital/Analog)

adapt various process signals to the S7-400 accessories: front connector


connect the racks with one another accessories: connector cables, terminators


make functions available, such as for positioning and closed-loop control

Communication Processors (CP)

for communications between programmable logic controllers accessories: cable, software, interface modules

SIMATIC S7

Date:


18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.21

41 SITRAIN Training for 6

46

,,


Introduction

You need the components specified in the slide above to configure an S7-400.

Accessories

The specified accessories must be ordered separately. Refer to the ST 70 catalog.


Page 21


SIEMENS

Racks and Connection Possibilities Usable as

Type of Rack

UR1 / UR2 (Universal Rack)

Central rack

i Expansion : rack 1

P Bus

Yes

Yes

K Bus

i

CR2 (Central Rack)

P Bus, Segment 1

P Bus, Segment 2

Yes

No

K Bus

ER1 / ER2

(Expansion Rack)

P Bus

Yes

No

/1

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.22

VIZ


UR1/UR2

Racks that can be used as central and as expansion racks. The UR1 rack has 18 slots and the UR2 has 9 slots for S7-400 modules.

CR2/CR3

Rack used as a central rack. The I/O bus (Peripheral bus) is divided into two segments with 10 and 8 slots. The communication bus is continuous. The CR3 rack with only four slots is designed for distributed automation solutions.

ER1/ER2

Racks used as expansion racks. ER1 has 18 slots and ER2 has 9 slots. The I/O bus has the following restrictions: • • •

Connecting CR/ER

no interrupt processing no 24V supply for the modules no backup of the modules.

You need interface modules (IM) to connect expansion racks (ER) to the central rack (CR). You can insert one or more send IMs in the central rack. The send IM has 2 interfaces. You can connect 4 expansion racks to each interface. The IM modules make a distinction between local and remote ranges. • Local range: Distance up to 3m with the 460-0/461-0 interfaces. The 5V is not transmitted with these interfaces, however the K bus is. Distance up to 1.5m with the 460-1/461-1 interfaces. The 5V is transmitted with these interfaces, however the K bus is not. • Remote range: Maximum distance of 100m with the 460-3/461-3 interfaces.



Page 22


SIEMENS

Installation Rules

o You must maintain the following minimum clearances: o 20 mm to the right and left of the rack o 40 mm above and 22 mm below the rack o

110 mm between two racks

0 The power supply must be inserted on the far left (slot 1) and

the receive IM must be inserted on the far right D Please ensure that there is a low-resistance connection between the rack and substructure, such as through contact washers LI Connect the rack to building ground with at least 10 mm2 cable o Remove the slot covers before you install the modules

/ SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Rules

w

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.23

7'SITRAIN

lit:


The most important rules for installing an S7-400 are given in the slide above. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).


Page 23


SIEMENS

Installation Checklist

■

ANY ■Nis,

• Are all components available ? (see parts list) • Install the rack ! • Install the power supply ! • Remove the slot covers and install the modules ! • Connect the front connectors and insert the labeling strips! • Wire the modules (power supply and I/O modules) !

•

SIMATIC S7

Date File:


Checklist

w

SITRAIN

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.24

4' SITRAIN

Training for Automation and Industnal Solutions

The checklist provides only the sequence for the individual activities. The following pages and the manuals contain the exact procedure. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).


Page 24


SIEMENS

Installing Racks

• ❑ Screw the rack to the substructure (M6 machine screws) ! •

❑ Connect the rack to building ground. A stud bolt is provided on the lower left for this purpose. The minimum cross section of the cable is 10 mm2 ! ❑ Install additional racks with a minimum clearance of 110 mm !

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_038.25


Introduction

The racks are designed for installation on walls and installation in frames and cabinets.

Mounting

The rack has four cutouts on the side for mounting. The cutouts are suitable for 19 inch frames. You can use the following screws: • •

M6 Machine screw according to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/85) M6 Hexagon head cap screw according to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017)

You also need 6.4 mm washers according to ISO 7092 (DIN 433).



Page 25


SIEMENS

Installing Modules MID

• ❑ Remove the slot covers. Grasp the cover at the indicated locations and pull the cover forward to remove it !

• ❑ Hang on the first module and swing it down !

•

❑ Screw the module tight on the top and the bottom. Triple-width modules and the power supply each have two screws on the top and on the bottom ! ❑ Install the other modules as before !

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.26


Layout

The power supply must be inserted on the far left (slot 1). The receive interface module (receive IM), if used, must be inserted in the extreme right slot of the rack it's in.

Tool

You need a screw driver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width.



Page 26


SIEMENS

Wiring the Power Supply 01.

•

❑

Open the power supply cover !

❑ Adjust the voltage selector switch to the correct supply voltage I ❑ Use a screwdriver as a lever to loosen the power plug ! ❑ Pull out the power plug !

•

❑ Shorten the hot and neutral wires (not the ground) by 10 mm ! ❑ Strip the insulation to a length of 7 mm ! ❑ Open the power plug (screw in the cover) and the strain relief device ! ❑ Connect the wires and tighten the strain relief device ! ❑ Close the power plug cover !

•

❑

Push the power plug to a dead stop in the guide notch on the power supply !

SIMATIC S7

Date:


Cables

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.27


You can use the following cables: • rigid: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 • flexible: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 • core end sleeve: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 without an insulating collar according to DIN 46228, Form A

Tool

You need a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).

SITRAIN


Page 27


SIEMENS

Wiring the Front Connector

❑ Use a lever motion on the lower part of the front connector cover to loosen it. Open the cover and pull it up to remove it ! ❑ Strip the insulation from the wires !

•

❑ Connect the wires ! ❑ Install the strain relief device on the lower side of the front connector ! ❑ Fill out the labeling strip and insert it in the front connector !

•

❑ Place the cover on the front connector ! ❑ Latch the front connector onto the module's coding key ! ❑ Swing the front connector up ! ❑ Screw the front connector tightly in place !

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Front Connector


18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.28


There are three different types of front connector: • crimp connection • screw-type terminal • spring connection You can insert the front connector only if the module is installed and screwed down tightly.

Note

The front connectors have a jumper that is needed by some modules. Do not remove this jumper.

Cables

You can use the following cables: •

Tool

flexible: 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 for a crimp connection 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 for screw-type or spring connection

You need a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).



Page 28


SIEMENS Preparing for Operation

•

O Insert the key in the mode selector switch! O Insert the backup battery (or batteries) ! o Adjust the BATT INDIC switch for monitoring the battery on the power supply !

•

0 Insert the memory card in the CPU .

O Connect the racks using the correct connector cables ! •

D Set the rack number (1 to 21) on the coding key of every receive IM ! O Connect a terminator to the last receive IM of every coupling phase ! o Perform a CPU memory reset ! D Connect the programming device !

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.29

SITRAIN

gip Automation and Industrial Solutions Training for

Keyswitch

The keyswitch is used to select the operating mode (STOP, RUN, and Memory Reset). This keyswitch also provides protection for the user program. If the keyswitch is removed in the RUN position, it is possible to read out the user program, but it is not possible to make changes.

Backup Battery

Depending on the power supply, you can install one or two backup batteries to buffer the user program and the retentive bit memories, timers, counters and data blocks. You can also connect an external battery to the EXT.-BATT. receptacle on the CPU.

Memory Module

Before you insert the memory module, the CPU must be switched to STOP. There are two types of memory cards: • •

CPU Memory Reset

RAM cards for extending the internal load memory Flash Cards for storing the user program in a power failure-proof way

A CPU memory reset must be done: • • •

during the initial startup before a new and complete user program is downloaded upon CPU request of a memory reset (the STOP LED flashes).

Using the keyswitch to perform a memory reset (points 1 to 4) 1. Turn the power supply on. 2. Turn the keyswitch to the STOP position. 3. Turn the keyswitch to the MRES (Memory Reset) position and hold this position until the STOP LED flashes twice slowly (about 3 seconds). 4. Turn the keyswitch back to STOP and then within one second turn it to MRES until the STOP LED flashes rapidly. You can also use a PG/PC to perform a memory reset.



Page 29


SIEMENS

Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-400

Open the power supply cover ! CI Use the ribbon loop to pull the battery (batteries) out of the battery

compartment !

•

J Insert the new battery and pay attention to the polarity !

Set the BATTINDIC switch for battery monitoring: ) BAT position for a single-width power supply ) 1BAT position for a double or triple-width PS and one battery 2BAT position for a double or triple-width PS and two batteries •

Use the FMR acknowledgement pushbutton to reset the fault indicator !

❑ Close the cover to the power supply !

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.30

SrRAlN T rain

Iar Autom ation a nd In l strial Solutions

Change Frequency

You should change the battery after one year.

Note

Change the backup battery during POWER ON only or with a connected external supply. Otherwise, the data in the user memory will be lost.

ICI

(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).



Page 30


SIEMENS

Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-400

• J Switch the CPU to STOP or make sure that the user program permits modules to be exchanged in the RUN state !

0 Loosen the hold-down screws of the front connector and remove the front connector ! • _.i Loosen the hold-down screws on the module and swing the module out

0 Hang in the new module of the same type and swing it down ! 0 Use both screws to screw the module down tightly ! •

3 Remove the front part of the coding key from the module ! 0 Connect the wired front connector and tighten it ! i Switch the CPU to RUN . (if it was switched to STOP)

110 / SIMATIC S7

Date' File:

Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved

18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.31

SITRAIN Training for 4,1


(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).


Page 31


SIEMENS

The SIMATIC Manager SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project DAS7_Courses\My_Proje]

a

Fie Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help

'1= 1; g? O Fr; My_Project in 67_300 Station

ei

i

re' fas

I E. 11 CPU 315-2 DP S7_300_Sle Ch6 Analog — CO Sources iA Blocks MICROMASTER_42C TP170B_Color WinCC flexible RT IEFQ Ch07 Error Sources Blocks

rth

< No Filter >

Si ' TP170B_Colot

Ch07_Er1OF


PROFIBUS[1)

ICP5611(PROFIBLIS)

Press Fl to get Help.

SIMATIC S7

WIN)

Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.1

I

le'


Page

Contents Objectives From Process to Project

2

STEP 7 Project Structure Interesting Facts about Multiprojects

4

Creating an S7 Project

6

Inserting an S7 Program Standard Library ............................

7

STEP 7 Help System .................... Context-Sensitive Help in STEP 7

9

3 5

8 10 11

Setting the PG/PC Interface .... Project: OFFLINE / ONLINE View

12

"Accessible Nodes": ONLINE View (project-independent)

13

Erasing a Memory Card (Memory or MMC Card) Exercise 1: Setting the PG Interface to MPI

........ 14

Exercise 2: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart Exercise 3: Retrieving a Project and Saving It as "My_Project"

........ 16

If You Want to Know More SIMATIC Manager Customizing Options

........ 18


........ 15

17 19

Page 1

ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... understand the project structure in the SIMATIC Manager understand the function "accessible nodes" be familiar with the offline / online view in the SIMATIC Manager be familiar with the STEP7 Standard Libraries be familiar with the STEP7 help system be able to create and manage a project with the SIMATIC Manager be able to set the PG's interface be able to erase an MMC be able to perform an S7 CPU memory reset




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.2

Page 2

gor



SIEMENS

From Process to Project Project Management

SIMATIC Manager

< Hardware

Communication

FB21 OB1 11.0 I1 1 H

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.3

Q4.0 )

Software 4—

%...T


Process

When you take a closer look at a process you want to automate, you will find that it is made up of a multitude of smaller sections and sub-processes, which are all interlinked and dependent on one another. The first, most important task is to break down the automation process as a whole into separate sub-tasks.

Hardware and Software

Each sub-task defines certain hardware and software requirements which the the automation system must fulfill: Hardware: - Number and type of inputs and outputs - Number and type of modules - Number of racks - Capacity and type of CPU - HMI systems - Communication structures • Software: Program structure Data management for the automation process Configuration data and parameter assignment data - Communication data Program and project documentation

Project

In SIMATIC S7 all the hardware and software requirements of an automation process are managed within a project. A project includes the necessary hardware (+ configuration), networking (+ configuration), all the programs, and the entire data management for an automation solution.


Page 3


SIEMENS

STEP 7 Project Structure SIMA I IC Manager

[ My

Project DAS 7 ProjektelMein_Pro ]

Fie Edit Insert PLC New Options Window Help

D HI

1r

- x

FiE

III ! 0

< No Filter >

17%Eir

Z.IY, la*

7

Fr

SIMATIC 300(1) CPU 315-2 DP SIMATIC Touchpenel Chap14_Faults MF1(1) PR0FIBUS(1) 300(1) [11 ChapOttfigital_Op al Sources { Blocks SIMATIC Manager [My Pro ject -- D:157-Pro jekteWein Pro ] ,T i MICRONIASTER 1993 Edit Insert PLC New Options W dow He Touchpanel E d Chap14_Faults Rai pH © ft I < No Fits > Sweet My_ Project , la Blocks SIMATIC 30011) 4E+ ID. cf H III CPU 315-2 DP System data OB1 FC14 FC15 rr Chap09_cicitl_Op al Sources

i

Drii:I PINIX

a

E

rF

FC16

Cd Enla

j MICROMASTER_420

Touchpanel

FC17

FC18

FC19

VAT_Numbe_

:, a Chap14_Faults

Sources Blocks

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.4

SITRAIN Training for Mr' , Automation and Industrial Solutions

Project Structure

Data is stored in a project in the form of objects. The objects in a project are arranged in a tree structure (project hierarchy). The tree structure displayed in the project window is similar to that in the Windows Explorer. Only the icons for the objects are different.

Project Hierarchy

1st. Level:


The first level contains the project icon. Each project represents a database where all the relevant project data are stored. 2nd. Level: • Stations (such as the S7-300 station) are where information about the hardware configuration and parameter assignment data of modules is stored. Stations are the starting point for configuring the hardware. • S7 Program folders are the starting point for creating (writing) programs. All the software for a parameter-assignable module from the S7 range is stored in an S7 Program folder. This folder contains further folders for the program blocks and sources. • Subnets (MPI, PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet) are part of an overall network. 3rd. and subsequent levels: Depends on the object type of the next-higher level.


Page 4


SIEMENS

Interesting Facts about Multiprojects ,LEAAI

IcSIMATIC Manager - [PROI_SOL -- \ Sl_Courses PRO3_Loe \PRE13 Joe] File Edit Insert KC View Options Widow He

sa

lbelltIlra-liii74:rErainli < No Filter > IE 6g PRO1 SOL E Ethernet GE , I_ E SIMATIC 300-LEFT E E III CPU 315-2 DP_MPI 4 S7-Communication 1:1 al Sources i2 Blocks SIMATIC 300_RIGHT • E 9 Message_L Message_R ▪ S7-Sokitions E SFC_Correnunicatim SIMATIC 300-LEFT EE SIMATIC 300_RIGHT E MeldeRezept_L E • Melde_Rezept_R

g

.7-1

4

-G

JslxJ

I

T5

M

It?

111 SIMATIC SIMATIC Message_L Message_R MPI(1) 300_LEFT 300_RIGHT

g

1

Press Fl b3 get Help.

1035611(PROFIBUS)

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.5

ji SITRAIN Automation and Industrial Solutions Training for

Multiproject

A multiproject folder is a folder for all projects and libraries of an automation solution that contains one or more STEP 7 projects and, optionally, also libraries. The projects within the multiproject can contain objects with crossproject interrelations (such as cross-project S7 connections).

Benefits

When projects are a component of a multiproject, their scope can be smaller and easier to follow. With the help of the multiproject you can, for example, create a project for every operator for distributed editing and divide the stations according to their operator between the projects. Cross-project functions make sure that you can almost handle a multiproject like one single project. Examples of cross-project functions • Cross-project functions in STEP 7 (basic package): • Save As (save multiproject with all projects in another location) • Archiving (multiproject with all projects) • Adjustment of cross-project networking (such as, bringing together subnets) • Updating the view (all projects of a multiproject)


Page 5


SIEMENS

Creating an S7 Project File PLC View Options Window Help Ctrl+N New Project' Wizard... Open...

User projects I Libraries Multiproiects

Ctr1+0

57 Memory Card Memory Card File

a

Ethernet 121:157_Courses \PR 0 3_Loe \Ethernet GD-Communication DAS7_Courses5PRO3_Loe GD-Kommu Et) Lueftunglnitialserung D:157_Couises1LueftunglnitialisierungsT est D:157_Kurse SERVl_L 57-Solutions D: \97_Courses \PR 03_Loe1S7-Loesu SERV1_A D: S7_Couises \SERVLA ENcrovi c \c7 1-',.....-.ACCP1/1 I

Delete... Reorganize... Manage...

amy_pro,ect a

Archive... Retrieve.,.

r Add to current multiproject

Page Setup... 1 PRO1_50L (Multiproject) DA57_Courses \PRO3_Loe \PRO3_Loe 2 SER92_B (Project) -- DA57_Courses SIERV2_B 3 SERV/2_5 (Project) -- DA57_Courses \SERY2_1. Exit

.17.••.

Type:

N

*

1My_Project

Alt+F4

I %Oct

rF

.• ....... ** r

5jareSPADcalin

t1DAS7_Courses

Browse..

OK

care'

Creates a new project or a new library.

SIMATIC S7

Date. File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_048 6

Library

qt.

I

Heo


SIMATIC Manager

The SIMATIC Manager is normally started by double-clicking on the "SIMATIC Manager" icon which appears on the Windows desktop after the STEP 7 Basic Package has been installed.

Creating a Project

Select the menu options File 9 New or the icon in the toolbar to open the "New" dialog box for creating a new project or a new library. Enter the project name in the "Name" box and click the "OK" button to confirm.

Notes

1. The "Storage location (path)" displays the path that was preset in the SIMATIC Manager under Options -> Customize. 2. You can also use the "New Project" Wizard to help you create a new project. Select File 9 New project and follow prompts.

SITRAIN


Page 6


SIEMENS

Inserting an S7 Program ..141z.1 Fie Edt rjreat PLC View Options Window Help D fa;

Raba, Subnet

I [i

21,

R

Ill I

a II

ail

ra MI I it?

I 57 PT

2 M7 Program

S7 Software

3 Program

57 Sock

4 Drive

I'17 Software

5 51NAMIC5

Symbol Table Text Library External Source,.. WinCC flexible PT

WVICC Object Parameter External parameters... Z17My_Projer I - Di 57_Courses My_Proje

.pew)

-

2 Global labeling held

..1412..1 c

%

Inserts 57 Program at the cursor position.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Inserting a Program

18.09.2009 SERV1_04E 7

.619.

-.T.

Training for S TRAIN 1 Automation and Industrial Solutions

Select the Insert - Program - S7 Program menu to insert a new program into the current project. When you insert an object, the system automatically gives it a relevant name, such as "S7 Program(1)". You can then change this name if you like.

Note

You use the method described above to create a hardware-independent program. Programs assigned to particular hardware are described in the "Hardware Configuration" chapter.


Page 7


SIEMENS

Standard Library

New Project' Wizard...

User projects

Libraries I Sawn projects I Multiprojects I

■ Name SIC4 • • • es PDIAGUB CAPrograrn Fies1Siemens1StepTS71/ es PROF1NET System-Lbary CAProgram FienSiemenatep71S7ft tik Redundant 10 (VI j CAPromarn Files1SiernenatepTS7k es Redundant 10 CGP CAProgram Fies1Siemens1StepTS71/ tek SIMATIC_NET CP CAPrcgram Fie:VS iemens1StepTS7R 4 611823MMIIMERIZEI■ ,... we stdlibs (V2) CAProgram Files1Siemens1Step7 \ S71117

S7 Memory Card Memory Card Fie Delete... Reorganize... ArcNve... Retrieve... Page Setup.,.

2-1—

1 My_Project (Project) - DA57_Courses/MyProje 2 PROI_SOL (Mull:Project) - DAS7_CousesIP1103_LoekPRO3_Loe 3 SERV28 (Project) - DA57_Coursest.SERV23 4 SERV2_5 (Project) - D1,57Couses 5ERV2J. Ext

Selected

At+F4

Use Projects: Lbaries: Sample Projects: Multiprojects: OK

,

,Standard Library -- C:'" Program Files' ,.Siernens Step7 571ibs stdlib30

Opens a project to be selected or a t

7.WIMI1111101

Browse... Cancel l

Help

—11:11.2s1

Comm cation Blocks d IEC Function Blocks d Organization Blocks Id Miscellaneous Blocks PID Coned Blocks a S5-S7 Convertng Block: AD System Function Blocks TI-S7 Convertng Block:

-' zv

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.8


Introduction

Libraries are used to store reusable blocks. The blocks can be copied into a library from existing projects or they can be created directly in the library independent of projects.

Standard Library

A Standard Library is installed when you install STEP 7. You can access this standard library from the SIMATIC Manager (File 4 Open 4 Libraries) or from the Block Editor ( Overviews 4 Libraries). The library contains the following S7 programs : Communication Blocks: Functions (FC) for communication between the CPU and the distributed I/O via communication processors. Organization Blocks: Organization Blocks (OBs). S5-S7 Converting Blocks: Blocks that emulate STEP 5 standard function blocks and that are necessary for converting STEP 5 programs. TI-S7 Converting Blocks: Generally usable standard functions such as analog value scaling. IEC Function Blocks: Blocks for IEC functions (IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission), such as for processing time and date information, for string processing and for selecting maximum and minimum. PID Control Blocks: Function blocks (FBs) for PID closed-loop controls. System Function Blocks: System Functions (SFCs) and System Function Blocks (SFBs). Miscellaneous Blocks: FCs and FBs for switching between daylight savings time and standard time (summer and winter times).

Note SITRAIN Training for

Additional libraries are added when optional software is installed.


Page 8


SIEMENS

STEP 7 Help System .1212.1 c

Manager He PLC View Options

window I Help

DUM?1,1,101 Contents

11

Introduction Getting Started

Press Hot-key Fl

Using He About

Project Object Provides various waysto ea

The project represents the entirety of all the data and programs in an automation solution, and is located at the top of an object hierarchy . Position in the Project View

a

Proiect Object Station Object

Project Station

I

Programmable Module Obied S7147 Program Object

Progr. Module

Source File Folder Object Block Folder Object

.1.1;11 S7 Program .;J Source F il es Blocks

Example

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.9

ingufsor radi nin tri . n Automation T

d

Obtaining Help

There are various ways of obtaining help: Contents menu to activate the general help. 1. You use the Help 2. You use the Fl hot-key or the icon in the toolbar to start the contextsensitive help.

Tabs

• •

"Hot words"

al Solutions

"Contents": Displays a list of help topics under general headings. Allows you to access the help information by displaying a list "Index": of available terms in alphabetical order. Enables you to look for certain words or expressions in the • "Search": help topics. Certain words are highlighted in green and are underlined with a broken line in the help texts (called "Hot words"). A mouse click on these "Hot words" leads to a further help text with detailed information.


Page 9


SIEMENS

Context Sensitive Help in STEP 7 r„,,,MA I IF manager - [St andard t diraity -- 1: ",Program Files >, Siernens Step] \ •

.J.01LI c ..1212g

stdlib90]

Pie Eh Wert PLC New Optia-ss Virdow Help

ll ou;11?1,1J6 u•anisaia Luray •

Coarrxxxcaoon Blocks

ivi ,J IEC Function Blocks

±rI Misceleneous Blocks ± Organcation Blocks • IA PID Control Blocks • S5-S 7 Converting Blocks System Function Blocks a Blocks • al TI 07 Converting Blocks

Fire >

111 ==11=2!!!!=11111111i11 SFC2

p SFC3 p SFC4 2 SFCS SFC6

S0 SFC7 p SFC9 7 SFC10

p SFC11 p SFC12 p SFC13 p SEC14 S:/ S FC1 5 t;i• SFC17

STL OIL

SET_RTM CT RL_R TM

••• System fu • System Iwiction

Press Hot-key Fl

1.0

Fie Edit Bookmark Options Help LWent. I

Ind"

I

I

E"

I

Sc

Reading the Time with SFC 1 "READ_CLK"

I

2

'

I Help on STEP 7[

Glossary

I

Description With SFC 1 'READ_CLK" (read system clock), you read the current date or current time of the system clock of the CPU

kignmAtil

Ennakiti011

RET_VAL OUTPUT

1NT

1, 0, M. D. L

7 an error occurs during the execution of the function, the return value contains an error code

CDT

DT

D,L

The current date and current time are output at the CDT output.

PararnelN Declaration


1110111111111=1111111111117Amml

OUTPUT

Error Information See Chapter Evaluatina Errors with the Output Parameter RET VAL See also:

Etrarnole of an SFC 0 (SET Cl..14.1/ SFC 1 (READ CLK1- task

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.10

SITRAIN Training for ‘0111 Automation and Industrial Solutions

Context-Sensitive Help ...

With the context-sensitive help, you can find information directly connected to the selected object. As the slide shows, the object can be a system function or it can be an STL instruction in a block, for example.

... Activating

You can activate the context-sensitive help from any tool by selecting the relevant object and then pressing the Fl function key. Use the "Help on STEP 7" button to jump from the context-sensitive help to the general help.

Note

You can find additional information on STEP 7 in the electronic manuals. Choose the following menu options to open the electronic manuals: Start - Simatic - Documentation



Page 10


SIEMENS

Setting the PG/PC Interface STEP 7

Access Point of the Application: S7ONLINE

Access Path 1 Access Pont of **Application

IS7ONLINE (STEP

71 -> CP5611(MPI)

(Standard for STEP 7) Interface Parameter Assignment Used: Properties

ICP5611(MPI)

Diagnostic

cP5si t impo CP5611(PPI) CP5611PROFIBUS DP Slave)

I

Copy._

Zj CP56111PROFIB U S I ._

2sJ

Properties - CP5611(MPI)

Parameter assign communications MPI network) - Interlaces -Add/Remove.

CP5611

Interface Parameter Assignment Used: CP5611 (MPI)

OK

MPI - Station Parameters

r

PG /PC is the only master on the bus

Address:

10

Timeout.

II

s

Network Parameters

CPU

Transmission Rate:

1187.5 Kbps

Highest Station Address:

1 31

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File'


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.11

Default

Cancel I

I

V

I

Help


General

You use the "Set PG/PC Interface" tool to define the connection between an application such as STEP 7 and a module such as CP 5611. The tool is activated with Start - Settings 9 Control Panel .

Access Point

Other examples of access points are: •

CP_H1_1 for SIMATIC NET (Ethernet)

•

CP_L2_1 for SIMATIC NET (PROFIBUS)

•

DPSONLINE for ProTool/Pro DP-Slave

•

Micro/Win for the S7-200 software

•

MPI (WinCC) for the WinCC Software

Interface Parameter Assignment Used

Here, enter the module used, such as, CP5611 and the interface used, such as, MPI. If you connect the PG to the PROFIBUS, use the setting CP5611 (PROFIBUS). To save a switch-over of the PG/PC interface, you can also use the setting CP5611 (Auto). The bus parameters are then automatically determined. With this setting, however, the connection takes longer.

Properties

In this tab, you adapt the parameters of the interface. For "Address", enter the MPI address of the PG. This must be unique in the network. To make communication possible, the "Transmission Rate" and "Highest Node Address" parameters must be the same for all nodes (stations). The "PG/PC is the only master on the bus" setting is only activated if only slaves are connected to the PG.

Diagnostics

With this, you can check whether a connection can be made.

SITRAIN


Page 11


SIEMENS

Project: OFFLINE / ONLINE View

JJJ

File Edit Insert PLC View g3tions Window Help

D: \ Courses \MyProject

MyPropect S7_300_Station E ▪ II CPU 315-2 DP S7program j:j Sources

a

Systemdaten

-=J

'

0061

Plod

▪

1.1 '9 I I/ gl 1 riAi

II

I

l'..:MyProject

FC1

....... FC14

0

MICROMASTER_420 Touchpanel

FC17

FC18

FC15

Project OFFLINE

0-

.. 7E16 .....

........

•

e

FC19


Q .....

". • .s. [CT—

VAT I/O-Co... VAT_Numbe.. ICP5611(PROFIBUS)

VSIMATIC Manager - MyProject

File Edit Insert PLC itelW gAtions Window Help ..

Project ONLINE ..•

774 myProlect ...••• S7,30Intation ...rill CPU 315-2 DP ••• j E1 1:j S7program

a 0. Systemdaten

a

• MICROMASTER_420 5 g Touchpanel

061

0- 0FC17

FC18

Press F1 beet Help.

CF

0

FC1

FC14

L1,11101% F

0-

0-

FC15

FC16

CF FC19 'Filtered ja5611(PRCCEIUS)

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.12

A


Offline View

In the project window of the SIMATIC Manager, the offline view displays the project structure stored on the hard disk of the programming device. • The "S7 Program” folder contains the "Sources" and "Blocks" objects. • The "Blocks" folder contains the system data created with the HWConfig tool and the blocks created with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor.

Online View

The online view shows the offline project structure in the left window and in the right window it shows the blocks stored online in the selected CPU. As a result, the "S7 Program" seen in the online view only contains the "Blocks" folder which contains the following objects: • System data (SDB) • User blocks (OB, FC, FB) • System blocks (SFC, SFB). The title bar in the online window is highlighted in color.

Changing Views

Changing between offline and online view takes place: • through the View - Offline or View - Online menu items or with the corresponding icon in the toolbar: - Online - Offline

Note

You can arrange the "ONLINE" and "OFFLINE" views next to each other (as in the slide) or under each other with Window - Arrange - vertical (horizontal)


Page 12


SIEMENS

"Accessible Nodes": ONLINE View (project-independent)

r--1 1-711X Insert PLC View Options Window He e File Ed/ ..... 4 ea - , .11 as

=

in Accleisible Nodes = (73 PROFIBUS - 2

aPROFIBUS - 4 (passive)

iiSystem data

0 FB2 0. FB31 gFC50 0. DB30 0 DB40 gSFBO a. SFB4 gSFB53 0. SFCO a. SFC4 0. SFC11 0. SFC15 0. SFC20 a. SFC24 0. SFC31

- 151 X

rth M=1

I < No Fier>

0 0131 0 FB3 0 F899 gFC105 gDB31 0 DB99 0.SFEI1 0 SFB5 0. SFB54 0 SFC1 0 SFC5 0. SFC12 0. SFC17 0. SFC21 0. SFC28 gSFC32

0 0835 gFB4 0 FC31 a. DB10 0. DB32 0 08112 0. SFB2 10 SFB32 gSFB75 0 SFC2 0 SFCS 0. SFC13 a. SFC18 0. SFC22 0. SFC29 0. SFC33

J'Ytt

ar

0FB1 0. FB 30 0 FC42 0. DB20 g01333 a. DB123 0. SFB3 0. SFB52 0.SF1381 0 SFC3 0. SFC7 0. SFC14 0. SFC19 0 SFC23 0. SFC30 0. SFC34

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.13

SITRAIN Training for gr


Area of Use

This type of connection provides you with quick access, such as for service purposes. You can access all accessible programmable modules (CPUs, FMs, CPs) in the network. You choose this method when you don't have any project data about the target systems on your PG.

What to Do

You can activate the "Accessible Nodes" window with the menu options PLC 9 Display Accessible Nodes. In the "Accessible Nodes" object, all accessible programmable blocks in the network are displayed with their address.

Note

Nodes (stations) that are not programmable with STEP 7 can also be displayed (such as programming devices or operator panels). On the CPU to which the PG is connected, the addition (directly) is displayed. In the slide, the CPU with the MPI address =2.

SITRAIN


Page 13


SIEMENS

Erasing a Memory Card (Memory or MMC Card) Memory card is inserted in the CPU: FIe Egt..Insert

.

D QUIT 111ft

•

PLC

View

Ea

t •

Window

He

X lib

Accessible Nodes Etiji r PROFIBUS = 2 to Blocks PROFIBUS = 4 (passive)

. z

Options

• • ••••

System data FB1 rat FB 4 FB99 FC50 DB20

081 la FB2 fa FB30 ta FC31 FC105 DB30

rt II

o < No

OB35 FB3 CZt FB31 la+ FC42 0811 DB3

"•-. ................. ..-• right •-. mouse button

Memory card is inserted in the PG:

.••

livert PLC View Options Window

O

M,)it,w6hf

❑

i Lit 57 rn8frori) card ,

..•—"•...••••••

r+ System data Ca. FB1 0. FB4 co. FB99

Fc5o DB.?

••„ ,••

SIMATIC S7

Date:

File:


Reason

I

A

Open Object

ctri+Alt+o

Cut Copy

Ctrl+X Ctrl+C

Delete

Del

Compare Blocks...

1 lr.J11-_1 " 01'1

SIMATIC Manager [S7 memory card] J File Edit

x

Fitter >

a

No Piker

s # 081 0 FB2 sp FB30 a. FC31 a. FC105 DB30

18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.14

# 0835

a FB3 0. FB31 ta. FC42 tg. D B1 0 SI. IB 1

SITRAIN gr


During a CPU memory reset, only the RAM work memory of the CPU is reset, not the memory of the possibly inserted memory or MMC card. That means that the user program stored on the inserted memory card is retained.

Erasing the memory card can oe done in the following ways: Memory Card is Inserted in the CPU

The memory card can be erased online directly on the CPU using the function "Accessible Nodes":

SIMATIC Manager -4 PLC 9 Display Accessible Nodes then select all blocks .9 Delete Memory Card

IT]

The memory card can be erased using a programming device with a suitable interface. For this, the memory card must be inserted in the module slot and a new window has to be opened that displays the contents of the memory card.

SIMATIC Manager 9 File 9 S7 Memory Card 9 Delete...

Note

The data format of SIMATIC MMCs does not correspond to the data format that is used by MS Windows. Accordingly, SIMATIC MMCs can not be read, written or erased with the Windows Explorer!

Caution

If SIMATIC MMCs are formatted in MS Windows, then they can no longer be used in a SIMATIC S7!

SITRAIN


Page 14


SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Setting the PG Interface to MPI SIMATIC Manager Options Access Path I Access Poitt of the Application I S7ONLINE

(STEP 7)

CP5611(MPI I

(Standard tot STEP 7) Interface Patameter Magmata Used: Properties..

CP5611(MPI) 11112=1 — CP5611IPPI) CP5611(PROFIBUS - DP Slave] _J "itgl CP5611 (PR Fl BUS)
Diagnostics. Copy..

JJ

1

MPI — Station Parameters

Parameter assignment of your communications processor CP5611 for an MPI network]

PG/PC is the only master on the bus Address:

[Interfaces Add/Remove:

1°

_-_J

[ Timeout

Select._

— Network Parameters Cancel

OK

I

He

Transmission Rate:

1187. 5 Kbps


1 31

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: Files

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserves.

18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.15

Default

Cancel

Help


g=


Task

The PG's interface is to be switched to MPI so that an online connection to the CPU can be established.

What to Do

1. Activate the "Set PG/PC Interface" function SIMATIC Manager Options 9 Set PG/PC Interface 2. In the Properties dialog, change the properties so that they appear as those shown in the slide


Page 15


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart Until Oct 2002 RUN-P

RUN

1. Set the mode selector switch to STOP

STOP V! MRES RUN-P RUN STOP CID

2. Hold (Press) the mode selector switch in the MRES position until the STOP LED has flashed twice slowly. Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to the STOP position.

MRES

4

,within 1 sec

RUN-P RUN STOP MRES

3. Turn (press) the mode selector switch to the MRES posi-tion once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to the STOP position.

RUN STOP MRES

RUN-P RUN STOP CI) MRES

RUN STOP

4. Set the mode selector switch to the RUN-P (RUN) position. (A warm restart is carried out in the transition from STOP to RUN/RUN-P)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.16

MRES

-


Task

You are to perform a CPU memory reset and check whether the memory reset was successful.

What to Do

1. If a CPU with MMC is used at your training area, the MMC must first be explicitly erased. For example, SIMATIC Manager - Accessible Nodes - in the Blocks folder select all blocks 4 Delete 2. Carry out the memory reset according to the steps in the slide above (manually and from the PG). 3. Check if the memory reset was successful. It was successful if only system blocks (SDBs, SFCs, SFBs) are left in the CPU SIMATIC Manager 4 Accessible Nodes - Double-click on MPI=2 - Click on Blocks

Notes


To make sure that no "old" blocks are left in the CPU, a memory reset of the CPU should be performed. The following steps are carried out during a memory reset: •

All user data is deleted (Exception: MPI parameter assignments and the contents of the diagnostic buffer are retained).

•

Hardware test and initialization

•

If an Eprom memory card or a Micro Memory Card (MMC) is installed, the CPU copies all data on the cards that is relevant for execution back into the internal RAM after the memory reset.

•

If no memory card or Micro Memory Card is installed, the preset MPI address on the CPU is retained. If, however, a memory card is installed, the MPI address stored on it is loaded.


Page 16


SIEMENS

Exercise 3: Retrieving a Project and Saving It as "My_Project" oc===•■••■•=tr:..121211 Fie PLC View Options Window NM)

Ctr1-1-N New Project' Wttard...

57 Yancey Card

E

Memory Card Mb

Li Servl_b.zp

Page Setup...

1 My_Project (Project) — DAS' 2 Accessible Nodes —

3 51ZPVI _5 (Project) — DA57_ Let Gets object Nom the arcNve.

Dateiname: Dateityp:

Desktop Arbeitsplat2 Sinalic Shell • My Documents E Gemeinseene Dokunente E 314-Diskette (Al E E Cell SYSTEM (C:) ariali DATA (1):) Heirnarbeit ER Archive E. Image_D1 E9 S7_Kurse DVD-RW.Laufwerk (R:) Netzweikunoebuna

IS ervl _a. zip PKZip 4.0-Archive ('. zip)

Abbrecher OK

Cancel

I

Retrieve (3020:58) The retrieved data have been stored in the project directory D:1S7_Courses \ SE RV1_A:.

1

Do not display this message again.

OK


Date:

18.09.2009

File:

SERV1_04E.17

lltr

I



Task

You are to retrieve a project and save it under the name "My_Project".

What to Do

1. Start the SIMATIC Manager 2. Delete — should they exist — the old projects "My_Project", "SERV1_A" and "SERV1_B" File 9 Delete... 4 User Projects 9 select the projects from the list 4 confirm 3. Retrieve the project "SERV1_A.zip" File 9 Retrieve... 4 Suchen in [Look In]: :IS7 CoursesiSelect an archive and choose "SERV' _A.ZIP" from the list 4 acknowledge with "OK" 4. Save the project under the name "My_Project" File 4 Save As... 4 User projects 4 enter "My Project" as the file name 4 as the Storage Path choose :1S7 Courses 4 confirm



Page 17


SIEMENS

If You Want to Know More

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Note

SITRAIN

18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.18





Page 18


SIEMENS

SIMATIC Manager Customizing Options Fie PLC View I Options Window Help

❑

ustorritze

g?

arl+Alt+E

Simulate Modules Set PG/PC Interface...

Customize Columns Language

Genetal

national Language

Message numbers Date and Time of Day I

13=111■11=111=11116F Columns

Mnemonics Example 1 German (1" Eng4h

General

Language

Archiving

Message numbers I I Date and Time of Day

I

View

I

- Storage location lot projectsimultiproiects

U El .0

Browse...

! ID: SLcourses

A 11 C

Storage location lot jibraies

ID:197_courses E

Browse...

Qpen new object automatically

I— Archive automatically on opening project or library

save window arrangement and contents at end of session l Offhne window

I— Online window

Deactivated system messages: Ca

OK

Cancel

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


"Language" Tab

•

•

"General" Tab

18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.19

I Help

SITRAIN Training for Re Automation and Industrial Solutions

National Language: You can select the language you want to use for the SIMATIC Manager, menus, dialog boxes, help, etc. (Only the languages that have been installed appear in the list.) Mnemonics: You can select the mnemonics you want to use for programming the S7 blocks

Basic settings for editing projects and libraries: • Storage location for prolects/multiproiects is where you specify the directory in which you want to store your user projects. •

Storage location for libraries is where you specify the directory in which you want to store your user libraries.

•

Further options for inserting objects, opening projects and for window arrangement will be dealt with later.

•

Deactivated system messages By pressing the button "Activate" you can reactivate all system messages that were switched-off in a window when the option "Always display this message...." was chosen.

"Date and Time of Day" Tab

Here you specify how you want to represent the date and time, for example, in the Diagnostic Buffer.

"View" Tab

This is where you specify how project objects are to be displayed on the screen.

"Columns" Tab

This is where you specify which columns are to be displayed when the Detail view is switched-on (see "Help").

"Message numbers" Tab

This is where you specify the type of message number assignment.

"Archiving" Tab

Here you specify the default program that is to be used to archive and retrieve files, as well as the associated directories.



Page 19


SIEMENS


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.1


Page Contents Objectives ...................................................................................................................................... 2 ...... 3 Hardware Configuration and Parameter Assignment 4 Inserting a Station ...... 5 Starting the Hardware Configuration Editor ...... 6 Generating a Hardware Setpoint Configuration 7 Addressing S7-300 Modules ...... 8 DI/DO Addressing in Multi-Tier Configurations ....... 9 Module Address Overview 10 Variable Addressing 11 Edit Symbols, Monitor/Modify Variables 12 CPU Properties: Cycle/Clock Memory CPU Properties: General (amongst others MPI Address) ............................................................... 13 14 Saving Station Names in the CPU Saving the Setpoint Configuration and Downloading it in Modules ................................................. 15 Uploading the Actual Configuration to the PG ................................................................................ 16 17 Exercise 1: Adapting the Setpoint Configuration Exercise 2: Assigning Parameters to the CPU Clock Memory and Testing It 18 If You Want to Know More ............................................................................................................. 19 CPU Properties 20 CPU Properties: Startup 21 CPU Properties: Retentive Memory ............................................................................................... 22 CPU Properties: Protection 23 CPU Properties: Diagnostics/Clock ............................................................................................... 24 CPU Properties: Communication 25 Further Processing of Hardware Stations in the CA01 Electronic Catalog ..................................... 26 Exporting a Hardware Station ........................................................................................................ 27 CA01: Selection Assistant for SIMATIC ......................................................................................... 28 Parts List and Description 29 SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions

Page 1

ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of this chapter the participant will ... be able to create a setpoint configuration and assign parameters to it be able to read out an actual configuration and assign parameters to it be familiar with the addressing of S7-300 input and output modules be able to adapt a given hardware configuration to an existing hardware




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.2

Page 2

0



SIEMENS

Hardware Configuration and Parameter Assignment Configuration

Assignment of racks, cards, blocks and distributed I/O in the station window of the Hardware Configuration tool. You can select the components from a hardware catalog.

Parameter assignment

Specifying the behavior of parameter assignable modules such as startup behavior, retentive areas, etc.

Setpoint configuration

Actual configuration

SIMATIC S7

Actual configuration and parameter assignment of existing hardware.

Date: File:


HW Configuration

Planned hardware configuration and parameter assignment using the Hardware configuration tool.

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.3


The modules are supplied from the factory with preset parameters. If these default settings are OK, a hardware configuration is not necessary. A configuration is necessary: • if you want to modify preset parameters or addresses of a module (such as to enable the hardware interrupt of a module) • if you want to configure communication connections • with stations that have distributed peripherals (PROFIBUS-DP) • with S7-400 stations that have several CPUs (multicomputing) or expansion racks • with fault-tolerant programmable logic controllers (option package).

Setpoint Configuration

When you configure a system, a setpoint configuration is created. It contains a hardware station with the planned modules and the associated parameters. The PLC system is assembled according to the setpoint configuration. During commissioning, the setpoint configuration is downloaded to the CPU.

Actual Configuration In an assembled system, the actual existing configuration and parameter assignment of the modules can be uploaded from the CPU. This creates a new HW station in the project. A configuration upload is necessary, for example, if the project structure does not exist locally at the PG. After the actual configuration is read out, you can set parameters and add part numbers. Notes

With the S7-400, the CPU can be assigned parameters in such a way, that when there are differences between the setpoint configuration and the actual configuration, the CPU startup is interrupted. To call the HW Config tool, there must be a hardware station in the SIMATIC Manager.


Page 3


SIEMENS

Inserting a Station =_Llalx]

VSIMATIC Manager - My_Prtgett

He Edit

Ion

Insert PLC

Options

ldow Help

I SOMATIC 400 Station

Subriet Program

SOMATIC 300 Station

ml,liesemlysemik?

3 SOMATIC H Ration

4 SIMATIC PC Raton 57 Block M7 Software Symbol Table Text Library Este:mai Source...

5 SOMATIC HMI Staten 6 Other station 7 SOMATIC 55 8 PG/PC 9 SOMATIC OP A SIMATIC 200 Staten

WinCC flexible PT Pena Oblea

Zr, y _Pro pect

13. Cl_Course4 My_Proje

My Program

YMP1(1)

MPI

a Global labeling held

Global labeling field 57 Program

Hy-P.17=

Inserts SOMATIC 300 Ration at the cuss postan.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_05E A

gir


Insert Station You insert a new station in the current project by selecting the menu options Insert 4 Station 4 SIMATIC 300 Station or SIMATIC 400 Station. You can then change the name that is automatically given to this station "SIMATIC 300 (1)" - to one of your choice.

SITRAIN


Page 4


SIEMENS

Starting the Hardware Configuration Editor ...11:112cJ m17/ 1 41®

1•112n1

Ilif!:

My_Ropret

rir

SIMATIC301:(1)

=

My Rogam ttw [ unfit, ISPIAT IC 305(1)(Configuration)-- Ply_Project]

ei Station EAt tread PLC

D

u 91i &

View OP8.76 Wnamv nab M1d

MMII

Alba Taber

w Stabs Bar

LINA. Auto AMMO

PS

41

?

ntI AjI

Doris:

2:1

!Standard

PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS-PA PROF1NET 10 11 SIMATIC 300 f :la C7 FEI .0 CP-300 Ba.-12:1 CPU-300 03-al FM-300 Ett.C3 Gateway IM-300 $•C3 M7-EXTENSION 1 B3-0 PS-300

RACK-300

mei

♦ I *I SIMATIC 300(1)

we Pl toga Help.

▪ End

'Z:tly_Proiert ID:iSlCourses .1y_Prrge

p-1=1 S14-300 SIMATIC 400 SIMATIC HMI Station • SIMATIC PC Based Contrd 300/400 SIMATIC PC Station O

51 -11

6ES7 3901 7770416A0 vaiable m various lengths IA

Displays catalog lon(off).

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.5

SITRAIN Training for ger Automation and Industrial Solutions

Hardware Config.

This tool helps you configure, assign parameters to and diagnose the hardware.

Starting HW Config

To start the Hardware Configuration tool:

"Configuring"

•

Select a hardware station in the SIMATIC Manager and choose the Edit 4 Open Object menu options or by

•

Double-clicking on the Hardware icon.

This is a window in the "Hardware Configuration" application you use for inserting components from the "Hardware Catalog" window. The title bar of this window contains the name of the project and the station name.

Hardware Catalog

To open the catalog: •

Select the View 4 Catalog menu options or by

•

Clicking on the icon in the toolbar.

If "Standard" is selected as the catalog profile, all racks, modules and interface modules are available in the "Hardware Catalog" window. You can create your own catalog profiles containing frequently used elements by selecting the menu Options 4 Edit Catalog Profiles. You can add PROFIBUS slaves that do not exist in the catalog later on. To add slaves, you use GSE files that are provided by the manufacturer of the slave device. The GSE file contains a complete description of the device according to PROFIBUS / PROFINET conventions. To include the slave in the hardware catalog, use the Options 4 Install New GSE Files menu and then Options 4 Update Catalog.



Page 5


SIEMENS

Generating a Hardware Setpoint Configuration Zr;...HW Conlin - [SIMATIC 300( I ) (Configuration) — fly_Project]

JJJ

Mt Ration Edt Insert PLC %ow Worts Winnow Help

t1 ES likelliberillil01 5131110

5

End Proas:

1 (0) UR 41.1 J

Slot 1 2 ,12 3 r 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Module PS 3075A CPU 315-2 DP DP

Order number 6E57 3074E400-0AM 6E57 315-2AF03-0A80

D132iDC24V

6E07 321-113L00-0AA0

Finevare V1.1

MPI a.. I add... O... Cont.. 2

Urri .. 0 3

I tandad SM 321 0116a4C120V SM 321 0116a4C1213/ SM 321 0116,0C24V SM 321 01164)C24V SM 321 0116pDC24V SM 321 0116NDC2W SM 321 13116a0C24V SM 321 0116NDC24V SM 321 01164)C24V SM 321 011 6NDC241/. In SM 321 0116eDC24V, In SM 321 011 6,0C2iN, In SM 321 Dll EoDC48-1 25 SM 321 D116KNAMUR SM 321 13116eUC21/484-SM 321 0132x4C120V SM 321 DI3243C24V SM 321 0132,0[24V SM 321 DI4KNAMUR,E: SM 321 DI6i,AC1213/230 j 3:

6E67 321.1BL00-06A0 DOA input module 013224V. invPing 32; also avoid:kr as SIPLUS module with order number EAG1

Press F1 to get Help.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.6

'11%•


Generating a Setpoint Configuration

This means specifying how the modules are to be arranged in the rack. This configuration, specified by you, is referred to as the setpoint configuration.

Rack

For example, you open a SIMATIC 300 station in the Hardware Catalog. Opening the "RACK-300" folder shows the icon for a DIN rail. You can insert this in the "Hardware Configuration" window by double-clicking on it (or using drag & drop). Two rack component lists then appear in the two-part window: a plain list in the top part and a detailed view with order numbers, MPI addresses and I/O addresses in the bottom part.

Power Supply

If a load current power supply is required double click or use drag & drop to insert the appropriate "PS-300" module from the catalog in slot no.1 in the list.

CPU

You select the CPU from the "CPU-300" folder, for example, and insert it in slot no. 2.

Slot No. 3

Slot no. 3 is reserved as the logical address for an interface module (for multitier configurations). If this position is to be reserved in the actual configuration for the later installation of an IM, you must insert a dummy module DM370 (DUMMY).

Modules

From slot no. 4 onwards, you can "insert" a choice of up to 8 signal modules (SM), communications processors (CP) or function modules (FM) from the "Hardware Catalog" using drag & drop or with a double-click. The slots on which the selected module can be inserted are automatically highlighted in green.



Page 6


SIEMENS

Addressing S7 - 300 Modules 1

2

4

Module:

PS

CPU

DI 32

IB 0

Q 4.0

I 2.0

I 0.0 191 MI

0

6

5

Slot No.:

DO 32 DI8/D08 Al 2

Q6.0

ED

QB 4

IB 2

7

QB 6

IB 8

111

Byte and

I 0.7

I 2.7

bit addresses:

I 1.0

1 3.0

IB 1 11.7

SIMATIC S7

101

1113

Q6.7

1 8.7

07.0

Q8.0

101

0

0

QB 5

IB 3

05.7

0 I 3.7

Date: File:


Q4.7 Q5.0

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.7

101 0

QB 7 07.7

1.73

QB 8 Q8.7


Slots

With the S7-300, the slots are logical not physical slots since the rack or the DIN rail does not have any slots or interfaces. Still, the slots are numbered and each logical slot has a default address assigned to it which is automatically used when the system is not parameterized.

Slot 1

This is reserved for the power supply module. With the S7-300, a power supply module is not necessarily required. The S7-300 can also be operated with 24V from another power source.

Slot 2

This is the slot for the CPU.

Slot 3

This is solely reserved for an interface module (IM) for multi-tier configurations using expansion racks. If no IM module is installed, the logical slot remains free even though physically there is no space. If the slot is also to be reserved physically (such as, for installing an IM module at a later date), you can insert a DM370 dummy module.

Slots 4-11

These are the slots for I/O modules, communications processors (CP) or function modules (FM).

Bit and Byte Addresses

On slots 4 to 11, each module is assigned a so-called "module address" that is always the same as the address of the first input or output byte of the module. The addresses of the other I/O bytes then follow consecutively. When you use default addresses, you lose 2 address bytes per slot when 16channel DI/DO modules are used!


Page 7


SIEMENS

DI/DA Addressing in Multi-Tier Configurations PS

° Rack 3

IM (Receive)

96.0 to 99.7

100.0 to 103.7

104.0 to 107.7

108.0 to 111.7

112.0 to 115.7

116.0 to 119.7

120.0 to 123.7

124.0 to 127.7

64.0 to 67.7

68.0 to 70.7

72.0 to 75.7

76.0 to 79.7

80.0 to 83.7

84.0 to 87.7

88.0 to 91.7

92.0 to 95.7

56.0 to 59.7

60.0 to 63.7

? o

6 IM (Receive)

PS Rack 2

f PS c)

IM

Rack 1

e

32.0 to 35.7

(Receive)

36.0 to 39.7

40.0 to 43.7

44.0 to 47.7

48.0 to 51.7

52.0 to 55.7

4.0 to 7.7

8.0 to 11.7

12.0 to 15.7

16.0 to 19.7

20.0 to 23.7

5

6

? PS

CPU

Rack cj 0 Slot 1

2

• IM • (Send)

3

0.0 to 3.7 4

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Multi-Tier Configurations

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.8

7

8

9

24.0 to 27.7

28.0 to 31.7

10

11


The individual slots also have default addresses in a multi-tier configuration. Examples:


•

Q7.7 is the last bit of a 32-channel DO module plugged into slot 5 of rack 0.

•

IB105 is the second byte of a DI module in slot 6 of rack 3.

•

QW60 is the first two bytes of a DO module in slot 11 of rack 1.

•

ID80 is all four bytes of a 32-channel DI module in slot 8 in rack 2.


Page 8


SIEMENS

Module Address Overview EiHW Config - [SOMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My Project] Station Edit Insert PLC view Options Window He

D car.. ik ea

II

Catalog

a

7

11" Ir Ir

"Address Overview"

Met PS 307 SA CPU 315-2 DP .4 Isobar

II DP

Ir

Ctrl+K

4, Status Bar 0

F5 F4

Pdate

D032x0C24V/0 5A kit° Arrange 018/D08,424V/0 54 41202811

7

Addresses from

1111111■11111=

7

~J 101 UR Slot 1

Order nu Filter

Mackie

6E57 307 66 57 31

PS 307 54 CPU 315-2 DP

Inputs

Type I Add horn I

DP 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

6E S7321 6E57 322 6E57 323 6E57 331

D132KDC24V D032xDC24V/0.54 018/D08,424V/0.54 A.12x128it

P Outputs

I' 0 0

0

Available addr assign

Yes

Rack/ slot

0/2

1023

r Address gaps

Adds to I Module 8 DIEI/00esr24V/0.54 307 Al2n1281 1023 DP 7 D032,0624V/0 54 8 1218/008x24V/0 54

8 304 1023 4 8

to

Address area horn:

I

PIP I

DPI

RJ

PN I

061 PI

0 0

081 PI 081 PI

0

0

5

IF

7 2 5 6

1

Help

Dose Shows the address overview of the current static

SIMATIC S7

Date: File


Address Overview

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.9

SITRAIN Training for gr.


The I/O addresses can be displayed via the menu option View Address Overview ...

Abbreviations

• R

Rack number

•

S

Slot number of the relevant module

•

DP

Relevant only when Distributed Peripherals (I/O) are used

IF

Interface module ID when programming the M7 system (in C++).

•

PIP Process Image Part


Page 9


SIEMENS

Variable Addressing I— -

r HW Conlin - (SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration)

A Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wir

j

g

gtt e I l

(0) UR

M

Properties - D132xDC249 - (RO/S4)

r Ps 307 5A IF CPU 315-2 DP

II

4

r r

General Addresses

DP

— Inputs -

2x

DI32xDC24V D 032xD C24V/0.5A

Start:

End:

Process image 15

10E1 PI LI

r System Default

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Cancel 1 Help

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.10


Addressing

The modules are assigned fixed slot-dependent addresses with the S7-300 (CPUs without DP interface) and S7-400 (without hardware configuration).

Variable

With the S7-300 (CPUs with integrated DP interface) and with the S7-400, you can assign parameters to the starting addresses of the modules.

Addressing

When you double-click a digital or an analog module, the parameter assignment screen is opened. After you choose the "Addresses" tab, you can cancel "System selection". You can now define the starting address in the "Start" box. If the address is already used, an error message is triggered. Part process images can be defined only in the S7-400. That way, specific inputs and outputs (such as time-critical signals) can be combined into one group. A system function triggers the updating of a part process image in the user program. Note


If the system data is not stored on a memory card, all module parameters and therefore also the modules' assigned addresses are lost after a CPU memory reset. Without the memory card this means that the original slot-dependent addresses of the S7-300 and the default addresses of the S7-400 become valid once more.


Page 10


SIEMENS

Edit Symbols, Monitor/Modify Variables EI!FIW Confg - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Pro• Station Edit Insert PLC view Options WInclow Heb

! ❑ clot 1-

t; a

51 6

lb r

6611E00

'Er." (13IUR

COI+C

COPY

ll

I+

Paste

Replace Object...

d

Ad Master System PS 307 54

Disconnect Master System

CPU 315-2 DP

2 X2 3

Insert PROFINET 10 System

DP

Disconnect PROFINET 10 System PROFINET IO Domain Management...

D13243C24V

rD

24'1;0 Ev-,

r D18/D08 24V/0 5A

ROFINET 10 Topology...

l x right

Isochrone Mode

Al2.1213

Specify Module...

Delete

Del

Go To •e

elpj .

(0) UR

Monitor

Order numbs

Slot Vickie 1

PS 307 5A CPU 315-2 DP

2

6E57 307-1E 6ES7 315-2A

00

PP

t

y

Edt Symbols— Object Properties...

Ak+Return l

OpenObject With...

Ctrl+tAlt+0

3 Grine via assigned CPU services Address

2 3 4

I Symbol L_vveight_invidid L_SYSTEM L_MAN L AUTO

mitum. 0 0

4.1 42 43

0

1

0

I Date type Content BOOL Indicator 141- weiptt trveltl Indicator 1511 System ON BOOL Muter ligit MAN mode BOX BOOL IndiCela 1511 Automatic mode

Path ,

in1, 0 4.0 1__Weight_invele 0 41 'L SYSTEM' 41 0 4.2 -L_MAN" 0 43 1. 11.1i0' 0 14 in • n 4 Om* man.


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. All lights reserved.

Symbols

IMy_Prolect SIMATIC 300(11\CPU 315-2 DP

,d Address) Symbol

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.11

I Dispel Status velue I Modify °Wel LI true 11:. false BOOt. (J ean

1

. •_

BOOL BOOL

I

8001 ri; false BOOL tk lease

true

1

14,11 git 1....

win


You can directly access the symbol table from the "Hardware Configuration" tool. This allows you to assign symbolic names to the inputs and outputs during hardware configuration or at a later date when you can make supplements or changes. You open the symbol table with a right mouse click on the module. Select Edit Symbols in the follow-up box. A section of the symbol table with the relevant addresses is then opened.

Monitor/Modify Variables

You can monitor or modify the addresses of the configured modules directly from the Hardware Configuration tool. The signals of the input modules can be "checked" and the signals of the output modules can be "controlled" using the Monitor/Modify (Variables) function.

Product Support

Directly from the Internet, you can fetch information on modules or components from the Product Support pages. As well, it is also possible to update HW Config by incorporating individual components such as new CPUs or new DP devices into the current STEP 7 version. Requirements: The PG/PC has an Internet connection, a browser for displaying Internet pages, and the function is enabled in the Hardware Configuration Settings along with the specification of the Internet address.

Note

"Symbolic Addressing" and the editing of symbol tables is dealt with in depth in the "Symbols" chapter.


Page 11


SIEMENS

CPU Properties: Cycle/Clock Memory _Lai>:j

la:HW Config - [51MAI It 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Projecti Ration Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help

D cai; .- o tiu I ED I I 1

1

-

F PS 307 54 CPU 315.2 DP F DP

r

2 3 4 5 6 7

e I I Ifk I IED

" •4

Double-click

-

mi

3 4 5

6

8

9

UR

Module PS 307 SA CPU 315-2 DP DP

I

Order number 6657 3137-1EA00-04A0 6E67 315-2AF03-0AB 0


150

Scan cycle load heel cannier -aeon rtl

1 20

Size of the process image

I

0885 - cal Lp at I/0 access actor

I No 0885 call up

L

-Dock Memory

6E67 321.1BL00-0 6E57 322-181_006E57 323-1BH 00-134.40 US7 1313T am .riestn

Clock Memory Bit 7 1 6 1 5 1 4

Cancel

3 1 2 1 1 1 0

Help

Frequency (Hz) 10.5 10.621 1 11.251 2 1 2.5 1 5 1 10 Period (s) 1 2 11.6 1 1 1 0.8 10.5 1 0.4 1 0.2 1 0.1

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Cycle

Cycle

F Clock memory

0132,d)C24V D032sEiC24V/0 54 018/D08s24V/0 54 Al2s1 288

10 11

I Diegnoslics/C3ock I Rotection I Communication I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory 1 Interrupts I

Minimum scan cycle time Ems)

-

Slot 1 2

Stare*

Soon cycle roxitocing tinie Ina

41

41111ijpi

I

F Update 061 process image cyclically

01324)C24 / 1)032xDC24V/0.54 DIEVD0844V/0.54 Al2s1213i

,

Time-of-Clay Interrupts I Cynic Interrupts General

1

8

1 5j, _xj

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.12

lift■


"Scan Cycle Monitoring Time (ms):" If this time is exceeded, the CPU goes into the STOP mode. Possible causes why this time is exceeded: communications processes, accumulation of interrupt events, errors in the CPU program. If you have programmed an error OB 80, the scan cycle time is doubled. After that, the CPU also goes into the STOP mode. "Scan Cycle Load from Communication (%):" Communication (such as data transmission to another CPU through MPI, or test functions that were triggered by PG/PC) is restricted to the specified percentage of the current scan cycle time. Restricting the cycle load can slow down communication between the CPU and PG. Without additional asynchronous events, the OB 1 cycle time is prolonged by a factor which can be calculated according to the following formula: Cycle time (real) = cycle time x 100 / (100 - "cycle load (%)")

Clock Memory

Clock memories are bit memories that change their binary value periodically (pulse-to-pause ratio 1:1). Each bit in the clock memory byte is assigned a particular period/frequency. Example of a flashing light with a flashing frequency of 2Hz: Q8 .7

111 . 3

)



Page 12


SIEMENS

CPU Properties: General (amongst others MPI Address)

Tine-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts I CPU 315-2 DP

Short Description:

164 KB work memory; 0.3 ms/1000 instructions; MPt. DP comection (DP Imaster or DP slave); multi-tier configure Properties - MPI intefface CPU 315-2 OP (ROM) ; Receive capabity for lateral communic routing, firmware V1.1 General Parameters I 6E57 315-24F0313680 / V1.1 Address: 12 -7-1 315-2 DPI Highest address. 31

Order No / firmware

ICPU

Name. 7 Interface

Type

Transmission rate. 187.5 Kbps

MPI

Address:

2

Networked:

Yes

Subnet Properties...

not networked -131011 11.111.11MEIMET

New... E Properties

Comment

Delete

OK

Cancel I Help

OK

/1 SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.13


"General" Tab

The "General" tab page provides information about the type of module, its location and, in the case of programmable modules, the MPI address.

MPI Address

If you want to network several PLCs using the MPI interface, you must assign a different MPI address to each CPU. Click the "Properties..." button to open the "Properties - MPI Interface" dialog window, which contains the "General" and "Parameters" tabs.


Page 13


SIEMENS

Saving Station Names in the CPU

I— Display object properties automatic* whie inserting

P Enable exchange of modules and racks P Confirm deletion of objects - Display of configuration tables Display Size:

—

!Standard

Auto Menge Packing density of the slaves

ItiiednAm

R Save object names in the PLC

[D a My_Project My_Station

rff Save window arrangement on exit 7 1. . Update hardware diagnostics cyclic*

Update Cycle

p sr S7-Program

1:11

r Deactivated

a

Via Internet

Default

Internet addass for product support information

Ihttp://wowsiemens.com/autornabon/stepThwconfig1

A

OK

Date: File:


Area of Use

- Product support information

al Sources tU Blocks:* My_MM420 My_TP170B

SIMATIC S7

s

10

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.14

Cancel I Help

rd SITRAIN Training for

wi


When the checkbox is activated (check marked), the identifier of modules, DP slaves, racks and stations are also included in the system data and are loaded into the modules together with the system data. You enter the identifier in the "General" tab of the objects. This has the benefit that when you download the station !nto the PG (without having the configuration information for the station), the object names are contained in the station configuration.

Handling

Activate the "Hardware Config" tool and select the Options -> Settings menu options.

Note

This function makes the loaded or diagnosed stations more transparent, however also increases the load memory requirements!

SITRAIN


Page 14


SIEMENS

Saving the Setpoint Configuration and Downloading it in Modules

JJ jc

HW Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project] el Station Edit Insert PLC View °Mons Window Help Ctd+N C C81+0 Open ONLINE nose

j2s1

Save

=

Ctr1+5

Consistency Check Cher 1.

C131+Alt+IC Ctrl+Alt+F

Compatibility

004+P

Print Preview... Page Setup...

Fanwee

1 My Project\SIMATIC 300(1) 2 LusftungInitialsierung‘57_300 Ration 3 My_Project1,S7_300 Statim 4 SE.118‘2_,RS7 31309tabon •

D

MPI a.. I add... Q... Commit 2 0...3

Alt+F4

Exit

7 11 Al2x1213it 8

Download

8 8 304...307

SES 7 331.M601-n48o

(only when CPU is in STOP mode)

■..

Saves and creates al system data in the current station.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_050.15

nv Training for ` S TRAIN I ISI Automation and Industrial

Solutions

Save

You select the Station Save menu to save the current configuration in the current project (without generating system data blocks).

Save and Compile

When you select the Station - Save and Compile menu or click the icon in the toolbar, the configuration and parameter assignment data are also saved in system data blocks.

Consistency Check

You select the Station 4 Consistency Check menu to check whether it is possible to generate configuration data from the entries made.

Download in Module You select the PLC 4 Download menu or click the icon in the toolbar to download the selected configuration to the PLC. The PLC must be in "STOP" mode! System Data

The system data blocks (SDBs) are generated and modified when you configure the hardware and compile the hardware configuration. SDBs contain configuration data and module parameters. When a system data block is downloaded, it is stored in the CPU's work memory. This makes it easier to replace modules, because the parameter assignment data is downloaded to the new module from the system data blocks on startup. The PLC must be in "STOP" mode! In the programming device, the system data blocks are saved under: Project \ Station \ CPU \ S7_program \ Blocks \ System_data. You double-click the System data briefcase icon to see the list of system data blocks.

SITRAIN

Training for


Page 15


SIEMENS

Uploading the Actual Configuration to the PG I II Manager /My Protect D:. /_Lourses My_Proie]

aj PM Olt Insert IPZ Wow Osten, Widow He

1o

I rr IP 1

El ( J My_Plogen SOteCee

Blocks

AccmRchts

vL

Download Configure...

Ctr CH-4-E

Which module do you want to reach?

Compile and Download Objects... Upload to PG

Rack

Copy RAM to ROM... Download User Program to Memory Ca,

Slot

Save to Memory Card.., Retrievefrom Memory Card-.

Target Station:

a

r

Manage M7 System...

Local Can be reached by means of gateway

Drive Display Accent* Nodes Change Module IdentficatIonCPU Messages... Display Force Values Montor/Modify Variables

Diagrestic/Seeke

Enter connection to target station: MPI address I Module type I Station name I Module name I Mark designation 2 CPU 315-... Accessible Nodes

INIM=1:21E1111

PROMO Edlt Diernet Assign PG/PC Camel PG/PC Asogriment Update Firmware

pleats the °pedalo System... Save Service Data... Up date

1.1 uploads the current station cafroureen to the creadan system (conflpealesn and wow,

Cancel

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Introduction

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.16

I Help I


A configuration is necessary only in the following cases: • if you want to modify the basic module settings • for stations with distributed I/O • for S7-400 with several CPUs or with expansion racks You can read out the actual configuration from the CPU and look at the set parameters in an existing system.

Actual Configuration During startup, the CPU generates an actual configuration. That is, the CPU saves the arrangement of the modules and allocates the addresses in accordance with a fixed algorithm. If no parameters have been assigned, the default parameters defined at the factory are used. The system stores this actual configuration in system data blocks. Uploading to PG/PC

There are two ways of uploading the actual configuration to the PG/PC: 1. In the SIMATIC Manager: select the PLC 4 Upload Station to PG... menu. 2. In the HW Config tool: select the PLC 4 Upload menu or click the icon.

Storage on PG/PC

The actual configuration read from the hardware is inserted as a new station in the selected project on the PG/PC.

Note

When you read out the actual configuration, the order numbers of the modules cannot be completely identified. For this reason, you should check the configuration. If required, insert the exact module type of the existing modules. To do so, choose the module, and then select the Options -> Specify Module menu.



Page 16


SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Adapting the Setpoint Configuration a:HW Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project] Station Edt Insert PLC View Options Window He

0 2-, st.i dif I 1 Ral 1111 * el I IIL73 I 133981111111111111111111111•1 1 2 X2

9.111

PS 307 54 CPU 315-2 DP DP

4 5 6 7 R

fird

frolic

D1323d)C24V D032rDC24V/0.54 D18/D08x24V/0.5A Al2x129it

E E E SIMATIC 400 p-- SIMATIC HMI Station E 1111SIMATIC PC Based Control 300/400 E SIMATIC PC Station

71 4.141 (0) UR sia 1 2 ..1/4.." 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

i Module

PS 30754

B CPU 315-2 DP DP

D132)0C24V D032sDC24V/0.54 D18/D0EN24V/0.54 Al2x12130

I S tandem! PR OF1BUS DP PROFIBUS-PA PROFINET 10

a

Order number 6ES7 3074 EA00-06A0 6ES7 315-2AF03-0ABO

Rimers

M...

I ...

Q...

Comment ..

V1.1

2

/au

13ES 7 321-1BLOO-OAA0 6ES7 322-113L00416A0 6ES7 3231 BH00-06A0 6ES7 331.710301-N30

0...3 8

4...7 8 SIMATIC S7-300147-300 and C7 modules central rack) ml

Press Ft to get Help.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.17


Task

Since different training units and CPUs are used for the courses, the CPU available has to be integrated into the setpoint configuration.

What to Do

1. Open the given HW Station with the HW-Config tool SIMATIC Manager (Offline view) -> select the HW-Station "S7 300 Station" 9 double-click on the "Hardware" object

2. Click on the icon (see left) to have the Hardware Catalog appear. 3. In the Hardware Catalog, select the CPU used in the training unit and bring it to Slot 2 using drag and drop. 5. Acknowledge the message "Do you want to exchange the component with the order number .......... for the component with the order number .......... 4. Also check all other modules.

6. Save and compile the configuration with the icon. 7. Download the modified hardware configuration into the CPU. 8. Exit the HW-Config tool.

SITRAIN

Training for


Page 17


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Assigning Parameters to the CPU Clock Memory and Testing It , =1Q.121

a:HW Conlin - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project] gation Edit Insert EEC View Qptions Window Help

51 I

D t: a II tll 01111IIMIN=11•111■

ms*

PS 307 50

2

r- CPU 315-2 DP DP

4 5 6 7

5 1 X ...„11

i

II DI32xDC24V II D032xDC24V/0.54 II D18./D08ex24V/0.5A II Al2x1213it

Timepl.Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts 1 Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I General I Startup Interrupts

Cycle Update OBI process image cyclically

Scan cycle monitoring time [ms1: Minimum scan cycle

50

-

Scan cycle bedlam communication [511

Fr

Size of the process image

11_1 11 2d E (0) UR

0885 call up at I/O access error:

Order number S7 307-1EA00-0AA0 6E S 7 315-2AF03-0ABO

Slot f Module

6ES 7 321-1 BL00-0440

5 6 7 8 9 10

D°:

D18.

Al2,

Arrangement of

EL tar - 49 tl

DI-1611

1

r Clock Memory 1.7 Clock memory Memory Byte:

4 Address

Symbol

10

1;

tables

Table Edit Insert PLC

I No 0B85 call up

,_1171. 12Si

Variable View Options Window Help

Iffiblel -I-I 11 F;J_I kl_?1 cY_F fe I Modify value'

Displa Status value

Cancel

I Help

•1

2

01111111111At.;.

My_Project SIMATIC 300(1)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Task

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.18

iv


Assign parameters to the CPU in such a way that the clock memory byte is available on memory byte MB 10. Then check the success of your parameter assignment with the "Monitor/Modify Variable" function.

What to Do:

1. Start the HW-Config tool SIMATIC Manager (Offline view) -> select the HW-Station "S7 300 Station" - double-click on the "Hardware" object 2. Parameterize the MB10 memory byte as the CPU clock memory byte HW Config - double-click on CPU 9 Cycle / Clock Memory 3. Save and compile the modified configuration Station 4 Save and Compile 4. Download the modified configuration into the CPU PLC 4 Download 5. Exit the HW Config tool 6. Use the function "Monitor/Modify Variable" to monitor the MB10 memory byte in the "binary" display format to be able to see the individual bits with the flashing frequencies In the SIMATIC Manager, select the CPU of the HW Station 4 PLC 4 Monitor/Modify Variable 4 enter MB 10 in the Variable Table address field 4 using a right mouse-click, set the display format to "binary" 4 activate the function using the Glasses icon



Page 18


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Note

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.19


lir





Page 19


SIEMENS

CPU Properties EL:11W Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) — My_Project] 011 Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wildow Help

JCicirt-e CIE101111111111=r 1 1 PS 307 5A 2

Xl 3 4 5 6 7

N, 2x

1- CPU 31:2bi. I- DP

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time-of-Day Interrupts Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts I Short Description:

CPU 315-2 DP 64 KB work memory; 0.3 ms/1000 instructions; MP1+ DP connection (D pz-J master or DP slave); multi-tier configuration up to 32 modules, Send and Receive capability for lateral communication, constant bus cycle time, routing, firmware V1.1

Order No./ firmware

6ES7 315-2AF03-64130 / V1.1

Name:

ICPU 315-2 DP

r Interface

412141 ±. 1 (0) UR .

X?

_xj

I

DI32xDC24V D032x0C24V/0.5A DI8/D0EQ4V/0 54 412x1280

;1

Slot 1 2

I Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/S2)

Type:

MPI

Module PS 30754 CPU 315-2 DP DP

Order number 6E57 3071 EA004440

Address:

2

6ES7 315-2AF03-OADO

Networked:

Yes

DI32xDC24V D032xDC24V/0.54 I DI8/D08x24V/0.54 .412x1284

6ES7 321-1BLOO.OAAO 6E57 322-113L00-0AA0 6ES7 323-113H00-04A0 6ES7 331-7K801-0030

Comment:

Cancel

OK


I Help /41

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.20


Assigning Parameters

You assign parameters to the modules to adapt them to the requirements of the process.

What to do

1. Select a module in the station window. 2. Double-click the selected module to open the "Properties" dialog window. 3. This dialog window contains ten tabs in which you can assign parameters for the various CPU characteristics (see next pages).



Page 20


SIEMENS

CPU Properties: Startup Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52)

I

Time-of-Day Interrupts Cyclic Interrupts 1 Diagnostics/Clock 1 Protection 1 Communication Startup General Cycle/Clock Memory 1 Retentive Memory 1 Interrupts 1 ▪

Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration

•

Reset outputs at hot restart

P

Disable hot restart by operator (for example, from PG) or communication job (for example, from MPI stations).

— Startup after Power On

H ot restart

a Warm restart

r Cold restart

—Monitoring Time for "Finished' message from modules [100 ms]

1650

Transfer of parameters to modules [100 ms]

1100

Hot restart [100 ms):

OK

I

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Startup Characteristics

Cancel

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.21

I Help

SITRAIN Training for Automation and industrial Solutions

The S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs have different startup characteristics. Only with CPUs with integrated DP interface (and S7-400) can you use the "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" checkbox to decide whether the CPU should start up if the setpoint configuration is not the same as the actual configuration (number and type of modules installed). The other S7300 CPUs go into RUN when the setpoint configuration is not the same as the actual configuration.

Warm Restart

The S7-300 only recognizes the "Warm restart" startup. Newer S7-CPUs also recognize "Cold restart". All non-retentive addresses (PII, PIQ, non-retentive bit memories, timers, counters) are reset (overwritten by 0) and the cyclic program execution starts at the beginning.

Cold Restart

Cold restart behaves the same as Warm restart, except that ALL - even the retentive memory areas - are reset.

Hot Restart

All - even the non-retentive - memory areas retain their contents and program execution restarts where it stopped.

Monitoring Times

•

"Finished" message from modules (x100ms): Maximum time for all modules to issue a Finished message after power ON. If the modules do not send a Finished message to the CPU within this time, the actual configuration is not equal to the setpoint configuration.

•

Transfer of parameters to modules (x100ms): Maximum time for "distributing" the parameters to the parameterassignable modules (timing begins after "Finished message from modules"). If, after the monitoring time has run out, all modules have not been assigned parameters, then the actual configuration is not equal to the setpoint configuration.



Page 21


SIEMENS

CPU Properties: Retentive Memory Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52)

Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock 1 Protection Retentive Memory Cycle/Clock Memory I General I Startup

Communication Interrupts

Retentivity 16

Number of memory bytes starting with MBO: Number of S7 timers starting with TO: Number of S7 counters starting with CO: –Areas

DB No.

Byte Address

Number of Bytes

Retentive Area 1: [C7—

Retentive Area 2: Retentive Area 3:

Relevant only for CPUs until Oct. 2002 that have no backup battery

—

[7

rc7--

Retentive Area 4:

ib---

Retentive Area 5: R etentive Area 6: Retentive Area 7:

I7—

Retentive Memory

ra--Cancel

OK

SIMATIC S7

Io

FT

Retentive Area 8:

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. An rights reserved.

lU

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.22

lik;

Help


The "Retentive Memory" tab page is used for specifying the memory areas to be retained after a power failure or during the transition from STOP to RUN. A "warm restart" is performed in both cases on the S7-300.

Warm Restart with Backup Battery

On warm restart, tne blocks stored in the battery-backed RAM (OB, FC, FB, DB) as well as the bit memories, timers and counters defined as retentive are retained. Only the non-retentive bit memories, timers and counters are reset.

Warm Restart without Backup Battery

If the RAM is not battery-backed, the information in it is lost. Only the bit memories, timers and counters defined as retentive and the retentive data block areas are saved in the non-volatile RAM area. After a warm restart (without battery backup), the program must be downloaded again: • from the memory card (if inserted) or • from the PG/PC (if no memory card exists).

Note

SITRAIN

For CPUs delivered after Oct. 2002, a backup battery is no longer necessary. All retentive data is saved on the MMC card in case of a power failure.


Page 22


SIEMENS

CPU Properties: Protection

General

I

Startup

I

Cycle/Clock Memory

Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts Protection level

I

Interrupts

Protection I Communication

Process mode

I— Removable with password

•

Retentive Memory

Mode

6.1: Keyswitch setting

•

I

Diagnostics/Clock

Permissible cycle increase via test functions:

2: Write-protection 3: Write-/read protection

( Test mode

Password:

Enter again:

OK

I

SIMATIC S7

__:_l Car ocel

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008_ All rights reserved.

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.23

Help

211 SITRAIN


Default Setting

Default setting (protection level 1; no password assigned): The keyswitch position on the CPU determines the protection level: • Keyswitch in RUN-P or STOP position: no restrictions • Keyswitch in RUN position: read-only access possible!

Password

If a protection level was assigned with a password (only valid until a memory reset), a "person who knows the password" has reading and writing access. "The person who doesn't know the password" has the following restrictions: • protection level 1: corresponds to the default setting • protection level 2: read-only access possible, irregardless of the keyswitch setting • protection level 3: neither reading nor writing access possible, regardless of the keyswitch setting.

Characteristics of a Password-Protected Module in Operation Example: if you want to execute the "Modify Variable" function, you must enter the password for a module that has been assigned the protection level 2 parameter. Access Rights

Mode

SITRAIN

You can also enter the password for a protected module in the SIMATIC Manager: 1. Select the protected module or its S7 program 2. Enter the password when you select the PLC Access Rights menu. The access rights, after a password has been entered, is only valid until the last S7 application is completed. The cycle load for test functions depends on which of the following modes you select. In Process Mode, test functions such as "Monitor" or "Monitor/Modify Variable" are restricted so that the allowable scan cycle time that has been set can not be exceeded. Testing with breakpoints and single-step (program execution) cannot be performed. In Test Mode, all test functions through the PG/PC can be used without restrictions, even if the scan cycle time is greatly increased.


Page 23


SIEMENS

CPU Properties: Diagnostics/Clock Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52)

General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication I Time-of-Day Interrupts ICyclic Interrupts — System Diagnostics

r Extended functions 17

Report caused STOP

r Acknowledgment-triggered reporting of SFB33-35 Clock Synchterization

Time Interval

Synchronization Type

In the PLC:

INone

J

INone

2, j

On MPI:

INone

1 . 1

INone

1-1

On MFI:

I l one

LI

INone

—II

Correction factor:

OK

ID

ms

Cancel

I

I

Help

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


System Diagnostics

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.24


If the "Report cause of STOP" checkbox is deactivated (not checked), no message is sent to the PG/PC or OP when the CPU goes into Stop mode ("CPU Messages"). The cause of the stop is still entered in the diagnostic buffer.

Clock

With networked stations, it is possible to synchronize clocks. Thus, for example, a WinCC flexible station can synchronize all remote S7 stations to its own time of day in a selectable time interval. It is, however, also possible to automatically reset the clock by a specific correction value in stand-alone devices.

Correction Factor

The correction factor compensates for a loss or gain in the clock time within a 24 hour period. Positive or negative millisecond values can be specified.

Example:

If the clock is 3 seconds fast after 24 hours, this inaccuracy can be corrected with the "-3000ms" factor.

Note

The "Interrupts", "Time-Of-Day Interrupts" and "Cyclic Interrupt" tabs are discussed in the "Organization Blocks" chapter.



Page 24


SIEMENS

CPU Properties: Communication Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52) General

I

Startup

I

Cycle/Clock Memory

I

Retentive Memory

Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection

I Interrupts I Communication

Connection Resources Reserved for PG Communication: OP Communication: S7 Basic Communication: S7 Communication:

0

Maximum number of connection resources:

12

OK

I

SIMATIC S7 Communication

Cancel

Date: File:


(already configured)

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.25

I Help

17-


Every communication connection occupies a connection resource on the S7CPU. Depending on the technical specifications, a specific number of possible connection resources are available to every S7 - CPU which are occupied by various communication services (PG/OP communication, S7 communication or S7 standard communication). When communication services log on, the connection resources are occupied in the sequence of the log on. So that the occupation of these resources is not dependent only on the sequence of the log on of the various communication services, you can also reserve communication resources for the following services: •

PG communication

•

OP communication

•

S7 standard communication

At least one connection resource each is reserved for the PG/PC and OP communication. Smaller values are not possible. Other communication services, such as S7 Communication with PUT/GET functions, cannot occupy these connection resources even if the services make their connection first. Instead, still available connection resources are occupied that were not specifically reserved for a service.



Page 25


-

SIEMENS

Further Processing of Hardware Stations in the CA01 Electronic Catalog

Export function

Import function

[Hardware

S7 Hardware

CA01 Electronic Catalog

Station

Order lists E-mail dispatch Further processing with text editors

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.26

,1 SITRAIN Training for

41


Importing and Exporting a Configuration

Introduction

As of STEP 7 V5, it is possible to handle station configurations not only together with the entire project (such as, save or open), but also to resave them independent of the project in a text file (ASCII file).

Applications

-

can be distributed through electronic media (such as e-mail) configuration of order data in the electronic catalog CA01 (Export)

-

generation of hardware configuration data from the CA01 (Import)

-

can be read into future STEP 7 versions the Export file can be printed out with text processor systems or can be further processed for documentation purposes



Page 26


SIEMENS

Exporting a Hardware Station aa7HW Config - [S7_300_Station (Configuration) — SERVI_S[ Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Windo Ctrl+N Ctrl+O

7

Open ONLINE

Help op iv?

111111111111111111111111

ii

Close Save Save and Compile

5 6 78

—

9 1--

Ctr1+5

PROF'S USl1 ) DP master system [I )

T tams

Properties... Import...

Export... Consistency Check

Ctrl+Alt44( Ctrl+Alt+F

Check OP. Coop t.b

Ctrl+P

Export Fie:

Print Preview... Page Setup...

Browse

D: \ S7_Courses S7_300_Station.cfg

I SERVI_S‘S7_300_Stetion 2 My_Project‘SIMATIC 300(1)

Options

3 LueftunglnitialsierungL57_300_Station

r Export default values

4 My_ProjectLS7_300_Station Exit

Alt+F4

10 11

I✓ Export symbols I7 Export subnets

Format

(7 Readable r Compact

12 Exports an extstng station.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File


Exporting

Cancel

Save

18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.27

Help

I

SITRAIN Training for gir


Open a station configuration or save the just edited station configuration (Menu option Station 9 Save). With the station configuration open, select the menu option Station 9 Export. In the dialog box that then appears, enter the path and the name of the Export File, the format and other options. Acknowledge the settings with "Save".



Page 27


SIEMENS

CA01: Selection Assistant for SIMATIC

ASST

Offline Mall

SILIUMERIK 8 SIMODRIVE

Fid

aroTirne PCS7

nrk

apHonfigurator tAhn-SPSOST ART

Extended search

Tree search

SNIATIC

ABC Industual Automation Systems - PLC

Interactive Catalog Siemens Automation and Driv

Lt....? Drive Technology SIMATIC cord' oilers 11,1[2i Automation Systems From the corrnact mini controller including the high-pe gr SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems meet every demarn and every requirement, whatever I 1 Ela.,,k[i! PLC I I EI:Ky Distributed I/0s SIMATIC selection assistant - Project Manager Programming Devices II I [a}-f SIMATIC Industrial soh, File Edt Paste View Settings ? Micro Automation Sets Pa-14) Comment based Autor INts1 T IA-Programmer 1

SIMATIC selection assistant - Project [ File Edit

Paste

Import ...

View

Settings

x

File Name:

C:1abc

let

Archiv_11_2003.cs Archiv_4_2004. cry ARCHNI_BM_MELI ARCHIV_KURVENi ARCHIV_SM_MELI ARCHIV_System0. c chwinto.bd shier& ET.te IM000047.JPG K7 Antrieb PC FW

I

[A12411E1

Folder:

Properties

?

Selection assistant STEP 7

bc

~' a

_j I 0 S_U• koordinator

54

te:r .ritation cra

Project

test_20_05_2003 02:1

c PANTZON

Project Na: Ecited front Deatect

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Selection Assistant

Michael Jantzon

1

11 ,

18.09.2009

SERV1_05E.28

Changed:

`


With the SIMATIC selection assistant, you can make the necessary preparations for importing a STEP7 hardware configuration file (.cfg). •

Specifying a project name and defining project properties

•

Selecting the appropriate configuration file

•

Using the import function


Page 28


SIEMENS

Parts List and Description

,JoI2_cf

SIMATIC selection assistant - Project Manager

Fte Eck Paste View Settings ?

_m11;7 4111

Einks4,4_u2 gifil TA-Programmer 1

Properties

ISM

Order number 6ES7307-1EA00-06A0 6ES7321-18L00-04A0 6ES7322-1BL00-O8A0 SES 7390-1AE804.1AA0 6ES 7392-14100-130.13

Pads list

A Descript

System

Designation List price Quantity Total price Load power supply PS 307; AC 120/23N, DC 1 upon request upon request Digital input SM 321, isolated, 32 DI, DC 24V 1 upon request upon request Digital output 32D0, DC 24V, 0.5A; isolated 1 upon request upon request 480 ram rag (*ogle mod width 40 mm) 1 uron request upon request Front connector, 40-pole, with screw contact 2 upon request upon request Total price:

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Parts List


18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.29

upon request

SITRAIN Training for Illtr


Using the CA01 Catalog CD and the various register tabs, you can get information about module component lists, pricing etc.


Page 29


SIEMENS

Symbolic Addressing W:Symbol Editor - [S7 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project \SIMATIC 3000Y\

yrnbol Table Edit Insert Mew Options Window Help

far, IA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

1 &

1 4 ith 1ft I ..--) c-, I lAi Symbols

Status I Symbol / L_Weight_hvalid 1 L_SYSTEM 1 L_MAN L_AUTO L_Restart man L_Resteart_aut L_Conv_Faut L_Faull1 L_Faut2 L_Faut3 L_S4_1411 L_S5_3,-LB L_S6_Final_Check L_Bsy1 L_Bay2 L_Bay3 L_Bay-LB K_Conv_RIGHT H_Conv_LEFT Horn QB_Simulator-LED QW_DigDisp Cl1N_Control 141420 QW_Setp_141420 DEI_Instance_FB20_F... DB_Instance_FB20_F... DB_FB11_RurningLight DB_F1317_Fault

Address Q 4.0 0 4.1 Q 42 0 43 0 4S 0 4.6 0 5.0 0 5.1 Q 52 0 53 0 5.4 0 5.5 0 5.6 0 8.1 0 82 0 83 0 8.4

I Dab:trim BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL 13001. BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL 13001 BOOL BOOL

0 8.6 0 8.7 OB 5 GAM 6 GAM 42

8001 BOOL BYTE WORD WORD WORD FB 20 FB 20 FI3 11 FB 17

0 es

ON 44

DB 0f3 DB DB

2 3 11 17

eax

SIMATIC S7

r:']

.....s..9 1 k? I Comment Indicator light - weigN invalid Indicator light System ON Indicator fight MAN mode bcficator light Automatic mode Indicator light for manual wean rested Indicator fight for automatic warm rested Imitator fight Conveyor fault Indicator light Fault 1 Indicator igN Fault 2 Indicator Nil Fault 3 Indicate. fight Wing at Bay 3 Indicator light Transport Bay 3 -> Light barrier bay Indcator fight Fnal check at LB bay Indeater fight Bay 1 Indcator light Bay 2 Indicator light Bay 3 Indicator tit Light barrier bay Run conveyer RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Horn lower Simulator LEDs BCD cigltal display Control word for 144420 Setpoint speed for 144420 Instance DB for F1320, Evaluation of Fault 2 Instance DB for F1320, Evaluation of Fat 3 Instance DB for FBIl_RtrningLight Instance DB for F1317 Faut evahation

Press F1 to get Help


.•

1----

Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.1

I— I

•1,

—

.1

4 lir


Contents

Page ........................................................................................................... Objectives 2 Absolute and Symbolic Addressing 3 Symbolic Addressing 4 The Symbol Table 5 Edit: Find and Replace 6 View: Filter 7 View: Sort 8 ......... 9 Editing Symbols in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor Symbol Information in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor ....... 10 Symbol Selection in LAD/FBD ....... 11 Symbol Table: Export ....... 12 13 Symbol Table: Import ....... 14 Exercise 1: Creating a Symbol Table for the Conveyor Model



Page 1

ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... know the difference between absolute and symbolic addressing know the difference between local and global symbols know the difference betweeen leading symbols and leading absolute addresses be able to edit a global symbol table be able to use the Block Editor to edit global symbols




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.2

Page 2

ll SITRAIN Training for

gi



SIEMENS

Absolute and Symbolic Addressing Absolute Representation

A

Symbolic Representation

10.0

A

"SYSTEM_ON"

Q8.0 A

"LED ON"

10.4

A

"M_FORW"

Q20.5 Call

"MOTOR_FOR"

FC18

Call

"COUNT"

Symbol

Address

Data Type

Comment

MOTOR_FOR

Q20.5

BOOL

Motor moves forward

COUNT

FC18

FC18

Count bottles

SYSTEM_ON

10.0

BOOL

Switch system on

SYSTEM_ON

Q8.0

BOOL

Indicator: System is "On"

M_FORW

10.4

BOOL

Pushbutton: Motor forward

(max. 24 characters)

SIMATIC S7

(max. 80 characters)

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.3

‘tiT

.61


Absolute Addressing

In absolute addressing, you specify the address (such as input I 1.0) directly. In this case you don't need a symbol table, but the program is harder to read.

Symbolic Addressing

In symbolic addressing, you use symbols (such as MOTOR_ON) instead of the absolute addresses. You store the symbols for inputs, outputs, timers, counters, bit memories and blocks in the symbol table.



Page 3


SIEMENS

Symbolic Addressing Where are symbols used?

Where are they stored?

Global Data: - Inputs - Outputs - Bit mem., timers, counters - Peripheral I/O

Symbol Table

Symbol Editor

Local Block Data: - Block parameters - local / temporary data

Declaration part of the block

Program Editor

Jump Labels

Code section of the block

Program Editor

Block Names: - OB - FB - FC - DB - VAT - UDT

Symbol Table

Symbol Editor

DB Components

Declaration part of the DB

Program Editor

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


With what are they created?

18.09.2009 SERV1_06EA

1 ‘ 4r


Global Symbols

Global symbols are declared in the symbol table and can be used in all blocks of a program. The name in the symbol table must be unique, that is, a symbolic name must appear only once in the table.

Local Symbols

Local symbols are declared in the declaration part of a block. They can be used only within that block. The same symbolic name can be used again in the declaration part of another block.

Notes

The LAD/STL/FBD Editor always displays symbols declared in the global symbol table in quotation marks. Local address symbols (local variables and parameters) are always displayed with a # (hash or pound mark) in front of them. You don't have to include the quotation marks or the hash mark when you enter symbolic addresses. The program editor automatically adds these for you.

Abbreviations

-


OB

Organization blocks (administration blocks)

FC

Functions (are used for program structuring)

FB DB

Function blocks (instantiation) Data blocks (store process data in the S7)

-

VAT Variable tables (monitoring instrument for process variables)

-

UDT User-defined data types (data type defined by the user)


Page 4


SIEMENS

The Symbol Table MyProtect -- D: \Courses \MyProject MyPioject

E

0111 S7_300_Station

_DJ

1 12

Sources

Blocks

yi

CPU 315-2 DP S7ptogram E al Sources Blocks E i MICROMASTER_420 2 Touchpanel E

II ,.1.g125.1

-a,Symbol Editor - (57program (Symbols) — MyProject 57_300 Station\

2_cl

Symbol Table Edit Insert View motions Window

irakia a

y,

Statu Swift( 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

OB WartnRestart L_SYSTEM L MAN L_AUTO L_Restart_man L_Restart_aut L_Conv_Faut X

L_Faut2 L_Fault3 = L_E■avl 61 L_Bay2 = L_Bayl 62 63 L_Bay-LB 84 K Cony RIGHT Press F1 to get Help.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


I WI

Symbols Address ' 013 100 Q 4.1 0 4.2 0 4.3 0 4.5 0 4.6 0 5.0 0 5.1 0 52 0 5.3 0 8.1 0 82 0 6.3 0 8.4 0 8.5

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.5

Data type 013 100 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL. BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL

eoo1

Comment Warm restart OB Indicator tight System ON hclicetor ION MAN mode Include( nigh/ Automatic nada Indicator tight for mental warm restart Indicator NM for aulanath wean restart Indicator light Conveyor fault Indicator light Fault 1 Indicator WI Faut 2 Indicator Ugh Fault 3 Indicator NM Bay 1 Indicator light Bay 2 Indicator NM Bay 3 Indicator ight Light barrier bay Run conveyor RIGHT --

r

gee


Opening the Symbol Table

Every "S7 program" has its own symbol table. You can open a symbol table from the SIMATIC Manager, among other ways, with a double-click on the "Symbols" icon. You can also open the symbol table from the LAD/STL/FBD Editor using the Options - Symbol Table menu option.

Table Structure

In the symbol table, a line is created for every variable. You then enter the symbol name, the address, the data type and a comment for the variable in the columns. A blank line is automatically added at the end of the table for defining a new symbol.

"Status" Column

Invalid symbol definitions are marked as follows in this column: = The symbol name or address is identical to another entry in the symbol table. X The symbol is incomplete (the symbol name and/or the address is missing).

Note


As soon as a symbol table has been created, the declared symbols are also available in all other tools (such as LAD/STL/FBD Editor, HW-Config, and Monitor/Modify Variables etc.).


Page 5


SIEMENS

Edit: Find and Replace Symbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project\SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 315-2 DP] He

a Symbol Table IEdit Insert View Options Window CtrI+27 Ctri-i-Y

Undo

r cell

Status 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

Cut Copy Pa5te

Ctrl+X Ctrl+C

Delete

Del

Select Undo Selection

•

We type 001 001 001 OOL 001 001

OOL

Comment Momertary contact System ON Momentary collect System OFF (NC collect) Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact Jog conveyor LEFT, momertary collect Swtch - Operating Mode Preselect '0. Momertery contact, confirm operating mode 0 • Display quality, 1 - Display weight Momentary collect to acknowledge warm restart display

41AMJAL,

IP• Go To Row... Add Defauk Symbols kener ate ',DE; Special Object Properties _otty.D T_Bay-LB BAY1 BAY2 BAY3 IN PNThcanbw PA( AN_State_MM420

Ctr1+%Al Ctrl-FE

Oa_

OOL

OOL

001 8.4 8S 8.6 8.7 2 42

COL LiOOL BOOL BOOL BOX BOOL WORD WORD

r Suchberei:h r Von Cursorposition thwarts

SIMATIC S7

Von Cursorposition aufwarts

Guard

r Markiltung

Opbonen

ma Widcards suchen

r GroB/Kleinschrerbung beachtan

Suchen I

Date: File:

r

2.1 «Reduziert I

r Nu genes Wort suchen

Looks for text or replaces text in the arrant symbol table.


Ersetzen dick 1A4.

Suchen neck

IA8.

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.6

Erseten

I Ale ersetzen 1

Schis8en 1

Hie

_.111 SITRAIN Training for


Find and Replace

A number of options are available for finding and replacing text in the current window: • Find what: Enter the text you are looking for. • Replace with: Enter the replacement text. • From cursor down: Searches downwards to the last line in the symbol table. • From cursor up: Searches upwards to the first line in the symbol table. • Match case: Only searches for the specified text with identical use of uppercase and lowercase letters. • Find whole words only: Searches for the specified text as a separate word, not as part of a longer word. • All: Searches through the whole symbol table, starting from the cursor position. • Selection: Searches only the selected symbol lines.

Note

When looking for addresses, you must insert a wildcard after the address identifier (? for one character, * for several characters), otherwise the address cannot be found. For find and replace: for example, replace all outputs that have address 8. with address 4.:

Example:

Find what: Replace with: Q 8. Q 4.



Page 6


SIEMENS

View: Filter 11711 J

'Symbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Prolort SIMAT C 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DPP Sleet I Hew Options Meow He

Et, Symbol rode Eck

jranaleslxike Stem 119 120 1 21 122 123 124

Zoom In

CITH-Nurn-r

Zoom Out

CP1+Num-

-

Zoom Factor...

I Del

11111111111■1111111111fiffar-

Ce foe Maw Ccrumns 11, 0, M, C, CC 071+K restart 013 -Pali far Tooear or-Pcri for 5C to 8w or Iptt - we upd.t. or Pare Sysl PS or Isrt MAP L_AUTO 0 43 BOOL Incbcdce lett Auk L_Reatakman 0 4.5 Indicator ept to r 1300L L_Realart_aut 0 46 1930L becalm 1)1 to e L_Corn_Fati 0 5.0 DOM tectica VI Cm L_Fautl 0 5.1 BOO. Indloalor Ipla Fad L _Fault2 0 52 BOX Indicator Ibb Fad L_Fau1.3 0 5.3 SCOL Indicator NMI Feel L S466 0 5.4 00C4. Irdicator iptt Is L_S5_3-Ple 0 SS 13COL Ineacetor fpM Trar L_S6fInal_Cheick DOM 5.5 Indicator qt Fria L_Bayl 0 6004 Indicator aget Bay . Symbol Editor - [57 Prograrn(2) (Symbols) — My_Project S1MATIC

125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146

SYmb01 OB_Cycle OES_Cycky 081_110_FLT1 OB SlareFei 013 WarrnRe p%' An MNAl2 LWargrtirn L_SYSTEM L_MAN

a

Insert

Symbol Table Edit

rai:

61

a

Status

Vow

Et) f'

-

Symbol

Window Help

I r Flared yew

1 Mesas I 8.0 81 I 82 0 8.3 II 8.4 I 8.5 1 86 I 8.7

LB

Fiters the 3

Options

TSayl T_Bay2 T_Bey-LB BAY1 BAY2 BAY3

I OM* Woe I BOOL 5)00(. BOOL 8001 BOOL 0001. DOOL 8001

,

2:1

-Fier List Na:

Filter name:

J

lAll Symbols

(Selection in the Symbol Table with Alt+0, ..,Alt+9) Dela, cs

New filter — Display Symbol with Property... Name. Address:

1 18

Data Type: Comment .

.2j '

_LI .:_1 .:d

Monitoring:

I'

Op. Ctrl. + Monitoring:

I'

Message:

_II

z_l

I' I'

Communication: Control at contact:

_II

F—E

Display Symbol with Status... I Valid

lInvalid (non-unique, incomplete)

I Cannon WI Pm

Fifer

Cancel

I

Help

momectarreirmeroprourrierm-Proxbray wary Bay 1 Proyirdy mace Bay 2 Probriy sinew lbw 3

Mamba of symbols: 61172

L

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


View: Filter

I

hlorneria

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.7

SITRAIN


Only the symbols which meet the active filter criteria ("symbol properties") are displayed in the current window. You can apply several criteria at once. The following filter criteria can be linked with one another: Name, Address, Data Type, Comment, Operator Control & Monitoring, Communication, Message. Permissible wildcards are ? for one character and * for several characters.

Examples

•

Name: M* Only the names that begin with "M" and that contain any number of additional characters are displayed in the symbol table.

•

Name: SENSOR_? Only the names that begin with "SENSOR_" and that contain one other character are displayed in the symbol table.

•

Address: 1*.* Only the inputs are displayed.

•

SITRAIN

Valid, Invalid The symbols must be unique, that is, a symbol or an address must exist only once in the symbol table. If a symbol or an address appears more than once, the lines in which it appears are displayed in "Bold". If your symbol table is long, and you want to find such ambiguous symbols or addresses more quickly, you can display only these lines of the symbol table by Filter and the attribute "Invalid". selecting the menu option View


Page 7


SIEMENS

View: Sort v a5ymbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project \SIN1ATIL 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP]

.1.2J25.1

a Symbol Tat* Edit Insertr h rool Options Wridow Help

car, 61 ! 37

IX

gla 3 la zocf"^

ZOOM Out Zoom Factor...

Status I Symbol

FC_MM420

38

.FC_Sequenc

39 40

FC_Cornrnark I FC_Scale

T_System_O Columns R, 0, 14, C, CC Ctrl+K

42 43 44

T_System_O T _Jou RION' T_Jog_LEFT

45

S_WA_Mode upd,t,

46 47 48 49

T_M/A_Acc S_VVeight/Quantity

50

emery contact Syste emery contact Syste 'F (NC contact) VI collect conveyor R101-17;r: y coiled -conveyor LEFT,

v. 1.Mbar

Status Bar

I I

I

LB

I I I

T_Bay1

I

T_Elay2

I

T_Bey3 T_Bay-LB

I

BAY1

I

I

0.6 13001BOOL 0.7 1.0 BOOL 1.1 BOOL 1.2 BOOL 13 BOOL 8D BOOL 8.1 BOOL 8.2 BOOL 8.3 BOOL 8.4 BOOT BOOL 8.5

I 8.8 BOOL BAY2 I 8.7 BOOL BAYS 60 Sorts the display according to specific criteria.

SIMATIC S7

Display quell

Momentary contact

Column:

Simulate Fault 3, Os Light earner Momentary contact Momentary contact Momentary coded

Address Ascending Address 4..c.Pndina Address Descending Data Type Ascending Data Type Descending Comment Asc

Momentary coiled Simulate Foul 1, 0. Simulate Fault 2,

OK

Help

Cancel

Momentary contact Light barrier bay Proximity sensor Bey 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bev 3

Date: File:


J

ch - Operathg Sort ary collect

FS

I

T_Ackn_WarrnRestarl T_Ackn Fault S_Faut1 S_FauL2 SFaul3

Sort

merit ontrol MM420

.equencer for production fne

41

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

wl

Ctrl+Num+ Ctrl+Nurn-

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.8

r--r---1


Automation and Industnal Solutions

The entries in the symbol table can be displayed in alphabetical order. You use the View - Sort menu option to specify the column to be used as the point of reference for sorting in the current window. There is an alternative way to sort: 1. Click the column heading "Symbol, Address, Data type or Comment" for sorting in ascending order in this column. Answer "Yes" when prompted. 2. Click the column heading once more for sorting in descending order in this column. Answer "Yes" when prompted.



Page 8


SIEMENS

Editing Symbols in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor

...L412.Jc JJJ j

LAD/STL/FEID - [FICI My_Project SIMATIC 300(1) CPU 315-2 DP]

CI.

File Edit Insert PLC Debug

❑4,-1=-1®1 FC1

View Options Window Help

I IeIfdL-LI E ICI F 9.1 I LLI Firt

-IFI*1-011141-4-fl

JJi

System

g...1 New network

System ON/OFF

T_Syst es_ in= Cut ON SR Copy

Ctri+X

Paste

CIAO

Delete

Del

0

II

•r_Systak_ On • VI

E yr Bit logic E Comparator Si Converter E Counter DB cal E E Jumps 111 mInteger function Floating-point fct. E E Move fiA Prooram control

E -a

Ctrl+C

Insert Network

Ctrl+R

Insert Empty Box

Silt+F9 Cir1+3

Insert Symbol Go To Edit Symbols...

Alt+Return

Special Object Prq

ties

— It Program e...

TI1141 4 11 ■1

6: Magna:bar Address

Shows properti

Add to Sytobott

I Symbol L SYSTEM

i

I

Cal struc...

7: Compaiis

Dees type I Cabbed BOOL INclocelor light System ON Sorting

Delete Symbol

I

1 Ditpley Columns R, 0. M, C, CC The symbols an welted eali, DE a 'Apply'

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Edit Symbols

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.9

l v.

ik


With the menu option Edit 9 Symbols..., or a right mouse-click on the address followed by the menu option Edit Symbols..., you can also assign symbolic names to absolute addresses at a later point in time. These assigned names are automatically entered into the symbol table. If you assign a name that is already in the symbol table, it will be displayed in a different color. Duplicate names cannot be used in the symbol table.

SITRAIN


Page 9


SIEMENS

Symbol Information in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor AD STL ,FEID [Fri -- My_Project .5114/1511 300(1 )\CPU 315-2 DP]

—12.1a1

Cl• Fie Eat Insert PLC Debug new Options Widow Hew,

klitALM . 11111 .

DIr312-11:111

LI22.1 Eft

'di

AD . STI IAD - [Ell -- My_Project.5114ATIC MOW

.

T_System_ ON.

I I

:'

ON/OFF

.

1,ATSTIM

S

,14.1251

c. Ian Dia...I:Ho Lie xiikiel LLI L.1 2 -11-1*1-01E11.1-r1 3-1 LI ? 7C1

SA

------

CP11315-2Fin'

(a Fie 644 Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help

System

mem System

1

ciAji ra.

System

=13E: System ON/OFF

8

71S ystem_ OFF.

I0.0 Momentary contact System ON

10.1 iT System OFF / Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)]

"T_Systes_ ON"

Symbol imbesmstiam: T_System_ON T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM

I

-- Momentary contact Sy Momentary contact Sy -- Indicator light Syst

10.0 10.1 04.1

04.1

Indicator light System ON . L_SYSTIM. SR

00.1 Momentary contact System OFF INC

contact)

.

TSystaa_ OFF'

A

1 - --

1

1 11

14

DIM WHEW

2 Into

a Croesreimences

Addlets 14o 0 loffIne


1/1

NI 11

4

1313 1111iLIM

Info

Commelemnom

Arktess via

rx

Press F1 to get Help.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Addressing

18.09.2009 SERV106E.10


In the LAD/STL/FBD Editor you can choose to display the addresses in one of the following two ways when you select the View - Display with - Symbolic Representation menu option: •

Symbolic Addressing or

•

Absolute Addressing.

You can display the symbolic and absolute address assignments used in the network along with their comments by selecting the View 9 Display with 9 Symbol Information menu option. The assignments are found under the network in LAD/FBD and in STL they are found in the statement line. Symbol Information

In the LAD/STL/FBD Editor settings you can select whether the symbol information for the addresses is to be displayed directly at the address (see right picture) or at the lower edge of the network (see left picture).

Note

If you position the mouse pointer on an address, a "Tooltip" appears with the symbol information for this address.



Page 10

ST-SERV1

Symbolic Addressing

SIEMENS

Symbol Selection in LAD/FBD AD 571

-

1 • "FE

-- 5E1011

573(105[allon',CPt) 315-2 Din,-\ FC14]

0 He Edit Insert PLC Debug Yew Options

❑I2;11HWsJAliasj rial Lk*

r: 1

0014 Title,

=gm Indicator light 8.ty 1 1C Cons_ UMW

.

•1_41710 .

"BAT1`

VtVI

L_AUTO .

"UTZ"

.

•13.5Y2.

•M tanv Fault•

•L_Bay-12 .

Vi

1.11.•

•L_Bayl.•

VI

Fault'

•L_Bay-LB .

Cony RICKY .

K

lash_218 . N_Ans_Leh BOOL N_Aux_Nan_ON BOOL Network 2: Indicator ligt Njur_Systam_011 BOOL M_Bayl_occup BOOL . R_Cono_ N_Bey2_ocony POOL .1_1070. RIM" 1_Bay3_occup BOOL I VIN_Bays_occup_1242 BOOL 111_Cono_Yoult BOOL .8171° N_Cono_Yoult_INCE BOOL N_Cono_Jog_11... BOOL POOL IIN_Edge_Aux POOL .1_1=0° RIGS(' kiault1 BOOL H— IIN_Youle2 3001 f----I BOOL Network B: Title: Initiallgtete BOOL 11_3og_LIIT 3001 Cono_ lain_Jeg_BICHT BOOL sremro• 16114_11/1_Acc•pt_BNI BOOL Nissing or incorrect. Bit itM_N/A_ModeSel... BOOL

r1

Mery cc inconectki eddies,

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:



Aux. mg Edge e. Edge at Mowry Memory Memory m11 Bory Memory Neaory mono,. Memory Ausi11] Memory peso, Memory

4 21

101.1 16.3 16.2 30.5 30.4

Memory Memory Mowry Mowry timnoryyj ■ eess <5.2

vi_ e

mourn WILCII/

Introduction

4

14.0 16.2 15.1 14.1 14.2 14.3 33.0 17.0 33.1 30.3 30.2 101.0 17.1 17.3 10.5

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.11

npai.

Pee 1


To simply writing a symbolic program , you can use the View 4 Display with 4 Symbol Selection menu option to show a selection of symbols. When you label the address and you enter the first letter of a symbol name, a section of the symbol table pops up that starts with this letter. All valid addresses for this block are displayed. These are all global variables (even those declared in data blocks), local variables (temporary and static) and the parameters of the affected block. In the first column of the symbol selection you can either display the symbol or the absolute address. To make the choice, select the Options 4 Settings 4 View tab menu options in the LAD / FBD / STL Editor and define how you would like to sort the selection list.


Page 11


SIEMENS

Symbol Table: Export reel Symbol Editor -1[57 Program(2) (Symbols) — My Project \ SIMATIC 3130(1) 1, CPU 315-2 DP] Symbol Table Edit Insert View Options Window Help

G

—

Open... Close

Ctrl+O Ctrl+F-4

30

Ctrl-f5 Properties...

33

Import...

34 3 5 111311 mt..,

36

7

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

`ETo I le I

inert 2ontrol of conveyor motor "aut evaluttion 2ourt parts Where :curt parts using ad;

1

do you want to store the table?

OEMIIIIII■OIIIIM

11111

..=t,c arhp Store -.centre Print Preview... Segue Page Setup... "ontrc 1 fly_Project%5IMATIC 300(1)‘CPU 315-2 DPI...115ymbols for an nonfat 2 My_Profect \ 57_300_5tation1CPU 315-2 DPI. ../Symbols nentar 3 SERV2_5‘57_300_Station 1, CPU 315-2 DP1... \Symbole cony. 4 SERV1 5‘57 300_5tation I CPU 315-2 DPV.A.Symbole come Alt+F4 Exit tch - e I BOOL , Momentar 0.5 I T_MfA_Accept I 0 ri Distal: S_VVeighbQuartily 0.6 1E1001 BOOL 1.4otnentar T_Ackn WeemRestart I 0.7 I 1.0 BOOL Momenter T_Aclen_Faut

-1

Speichen 1 0 S7 Courses

I

JJ I iI

,, LueftunglnitialisierLeigsTest i DSERV2_L „ My_Proje PRO3_Loe SERV1_A „ SERVI_L SER92_13

Speichern

Dateinarne: FiTbol_Table DateitYP:

Copies the selected symbol table or parts of it to a file (of a different format).

(System Data Format

l SDFI

Abbrechen

A

In which format do you want to store the table?

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


General

18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.12


'JP


The Symbol Table - Export menu option enables you to store symbol tables in different file formats so that you can work on them with other programs. You can select the following file formats: •

•

ASCII Format (*.ASC) -

Notepad

-

Word

Data Interchange Format (*.DIF) -

•

EXCEL

System Data Format (*.SDF) - ACCESS

•

Assignment List (*.SEQ) - STEP 5 assignment list



Page 12


SIEMENS

Symbol Table: Import Symbol Editor - [S7 Program(2) (Symbols) — My_Protert \ S1MATIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP]

kail Symbol Table •—

Edit

Insert

View

Options

Window

Help

open... Close

Ctr1+0

ave

Ctr1+5

Ctrll-F4

32 33 34

Properties...

35

Export...

36 37 38 39

Print... Print Preview...

Import...

'

..112.1A

—

E's-ri I WI

inert ontrol of conveyor motor , ault evaluation :curt parts Count parts ustig addbon or evaluating faults :ontrol BCD digital display

111.(1

P age Setup...

a Li rfik

Suchen in: I i0 SLCoutses

40

1 Pity_Proyect151MATIC 300(1ACYLI 315-2 D

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

2 My Project 57_300_5tation \ CPU 315-2 DI 3 5ERV2_5/57_300_5tation‘CPU 315-2 DPI. 4 SERVI_SA57_300_Station \ CPU 315-2 DPI.

LuthunglnitialisierunosTest

SERV2_L

My_Proje

SymbolTable.sd

Select

PRO3_Loe

directory path

SERVl_A

Exit T14/A_Accept S VVeight /Quant y T_Ackn_VvarmRestart IT Ackn Fault

Inserts a copy of a saved fie (of a different format

SERV1_L SERV2El

D alert-lame: D atertyp:

Symbol_T able I System

sdf

C

D ata Format r.SDF)

Enter file name Abbrechen I

Select file format SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.13

A gr


General

The Symbol Table 9 Import menu option enables you to import symbol tables that were created with other user programs.

What to Do

1. Activate the Symbol Table 9 Import menu option. 2. Select the file format in the "Import" dialog window. You will find the same formats as for Export. 3. Select the directory path in the "Look in:" list box. 4. Enter the file name in the "File Name:" box 5. Click the "Open" button.

File Types

You can import the following file formats: • ASCII Format (*.ASC) - Notepad - Word • Data Interchange Format (*.DIF) - EXCEL • System Data Format (*.SDF) - ACCESS • Assignment List (*.SEQ) - STEP 5 assignment list



Page 13


SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Creating a Symbol Table for the Conveyor Model "K_Conv_R1GHT" (Q 8.5) "K Cony LEFT" (Q 8.6) —

—

"BAY1" (I 8.5)

"BAY2" (1 8.6)

"BAY3" (1 8.7)

"LB" (1 8.0)

67"

ul

: .... "Horn" .... (Q 8.7)

I I I ! I I "T_Bay-LB" "T Bay2" 1 "T Bay3" ' " Bay1" / T— (1 8.4) 8.3) 8.2) : (I 8.1) ' i I ".L_Bay-LB" "1j Bay3" "L Bay2" "L_Bay1" (Q 8.4) (Q 2) 8. (Q 8.1) (Q 8.3)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.14

A SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions

Task

Include the symbols for the inputs and outputs of the conveyor model as seen in the slide into the existing symbol table.

What to Do

1. In the SIMATIC Manager, select the S7 program called "My_Program" 2. Start the Symbol Editor by double-clicking on the symbol table 3. Complete the symbol table with the addresses shown in the slide. 4. Save your symbol table



Page 14

ST-SERV1

Symbolic Addressing

SIEMENS


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.1

Contents

SITRAIN Training for Z"' Automation and Industrial Solutions

41

Page

Objectives 2 Commissioning Checklist 3 LEDs on the S7-300 Power Supply 4 ........................................................................................................... LEDs on the S7-300 CPU 5 LEDs on Digital Modules 6 LEDs on the S7-400 Power Supply 7 ........................................................................................................... LEDs on the S7-400 CPU 8 Performing a Memory Reset and Warm Restart .......9 Calling the "Monitor/Modify Variable" Tool .....10 Monitoring and Modifying Variables .............................................................................................. 11 Saving the Variable Table ............................................................................................................ 12 Exercise 1: Testing the Conveyor Model's Sensor (Input) Wiring 13 Exercise 2: Testing the Conveyor Model's Actuator (Output) Wiring 14



Page 1

ST-SERV1 HW Commissioning

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of this chapter the participant will ... know the meanings of the LEDs on the S7 modules be able to perform a CPU memory reset with the "Monitor/Modify Variables" tool... ...be able to create and save a variable table ...be able to check the wiring of the sensors •

... be able to check the wiring of the actuators




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.2

Page 2



SIEMENS

Commissioning Checklist

• Perform a CPU memory reset. • Carry out a CPU warm restart. • Check the LEDs on the modules. •

• Start the SIMATIC Manager. • Download the hardware configuration

•

• Check inputs using the Monitor/Modify Variable tool. • Check outputs using the Monitor/Modify Variable tool.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Checklist

18.09.2009 SERV1_078.3


The checklist shows the individual preparatory steps for commissioning the hardware. If you do not want to use the default setting, it may be necessary to assign parameters to the modules before you check the inputs and outputs. The individual steps are described in more detail on the following pages.



Page 3


SIEMENS

LEDs on the S7-300 Power Supply LED "DC24V"

State

Reaction of the Power Supply

Continuous On 24 V available

24 V available

Output circuit is overloaded: • Voltage dip, voltage recovery when overload no longer exists

• up to 130% (dynamic) Flashing

• up to 130% (static) voltage depression, reduces the service life

• up to 130% (static)

On

Short circuit in output circuit

Voltage interruption, automatic recovery when short circuit eliminated

Off

Overvoltage or undervoltage on the primary side (permissible range: 187V to 264 VAC)

Overvoltage can cause destruction. With undervoltage, automatic interruption.

/

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


LED

18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.4

qt-

SITRAIN


The power supply has a diagnostic LED "DC24V" on the front side of the module. Use this LED to determine the state of the power supply.


Page 4


SIEMENS

LEDs on the S7-300 CPU

CRJ315-2 DP _a.

Sr ? SF D:PUP-2 SATS u DC5v

SF

da,

,SAMENs

%Sv

+1 FRcE !FluN /stop

4 FRcE '{RIND

STO.. MR Es S 'S -30 0

2

Pn

2 ia

00,4.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Status Displays ( LEDs )

SF BATF DC 5V FRCE RUN STOP SF DP BUSF



18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.5

GUSa

SITRAIN Training for (01 „ Automation and Industrial Solutions

System Fault: group error, programming error or fault from a diagnostics-capable module Battery fault: battery is empty or is not present 5V supply voltage present. Lights up when a forcing is active. Flashes when the CPU starts up and is steady on in the RUN mode. Is steady on in the STOP mode, Flashes slowly when a memory reset is requested and flashes quickly when a memory reset is carried out. System Fault DP: group error in the Distributed Peripherals is steady on when there is a fault in the distributed peripherals (BF) = Bus fault, is steady on when there is an interrupted cable, for example. Flashes when there is a station failure, for example

Page 5


SIEMENS

LEDs on Digital Modules S7-300

S7-400

Status LEDs for every individual channel

• Signal state at the terminals (for digital inputs) • Internal state, before the optocoupler (for digital outputs)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Status LEDs

18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.6

A


There are LEDs for diagnostics purposes for every input and output channel on the module. These LEDs can be helpful in locating program errors. The LEDs indicate: • the process state for digital inputs • the process state for S7-300 digital outputs • the internal state before the optocoupler for S7-400 digital outputs.


Page 6


SIEMENS

LEDs on the S7-400 Power Supply "INTF" -> internal fault "BAF" -> battery fault "BATT1F"-> Battery 1 empty or missing "BATT2F"-> Battery 2 empty or missing "DC 5V" -> 5 V OK "DC 24V"-> 24 V OK "FMR" Acknowl. switch (Fault Message Reset) On/Off switch (Standby) Battery compartment

I

Selection switch for battery monitoring I "BATT INDIC" "VOLTAGE" selector

U. r-

> —

3-pin power connection

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.7


A


Power Supply

The power supply (PS) supplies the internal 5V voltage for the modules. Automatic adjustment is made for line frequencies from 48 to 64 Hz.

LED "INTF"

Lights up in the event of internal faults, such as • Short circuit or overload at 5V/24V • Standby switch on "0" and impermissible external supply • Battery fault

LED "BAF"

Battery fault. Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low. Example: No batteries present or battery failure and there is no external power supply available.

LED "BATT1F/ BATT2F"

Lights up in the case of battery reversal, if no battery is present, or the battery is half discharged. The BATT.INDIC switch for battery monitoring is set to the 1BATT position (for one battery), the 2BATT position (for 2 batteries) or OFF (no battery monitoring).

LED "DC 5V/DC 24V" Is lit when the 5V/24V DC output voltage is within the tolerance limits and flashes to indicate voltage recovery after a short circuit or overload. "FMR" Ackn.Switch

Acknowledgement switch for acknowledging and resetting a fault message when the fault has been eliminated.

ON/OFF Switch (Standby)

Switches the output voltage (5/24 VDC) to OV and switches off the LEDs by interrupting the control current circuit. (The power supply is then in standby mode because the primary line voltage cannot be switched off.)



Page 7


SIEMENS

LEDs on the S7-400 CPU

INTF 71

CPU with one interface SIMATIC S7

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved

CPU with two interfaces 18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.8

SITRAIN

f or

Fault LEDs

CPUs have fault LEDs that provide first information about an occurred error or that give the CPU status:

LED "INTF"

Indicates an internal fault (error in the user program ).

LED "EXTF"

Indicates an external fault (fault in an I/O module).

LED "BUS1F"

Indicates a bus fault of the MPI/DP interface.

LED "BUS2F"

Indicates a bus fault of the DP interface.

LED "FRCE"

Indicates that inputs/outputs are forced.


Page 8


SIEMENS

Performing a Memory Reset and a Warm Restart RUN-P RUN

RUN


STOP MRES*

STOP st!' MRES RUN-P RUN STOP CV MRES


Y


RUN STOP MRES

within 1 sec

25.Turn (Press) the mode selector switch to the MRES position once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly. Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to the STOP position.

;. RUN ;

.STOP MRES

RUN-P RUN STOP _11.„,)

RUN

3. Set the mode selector switch to the RUN-P (RUN) position ! (A warm restart is carried out in the transition from STOP to RUN/RUN-P)

STOP MRES ,

MRES/III

SIMATIC S7

Date: File


Memory Reset

Warm Restart


18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.9

SITRAIN Or

Training for


When a memory reset is performed on an S7 CPU, the following happens: •

all CPU user data as well as the entire load and work memory are cleared

•

the CPU interrupts all connections to other communications partners

•

the CPU parameters and all modules are set to default values

•

in the case that a memory card is used, the CPU copies the relevant portion of the stored program needed for execution into the internal RAM

During a warm restart, the process images and the non-retentive data are deleted. Then the cyclic program execution begins by reading in the process image input tables (PII).


Page 9


SIEMENS

Calling the "Monitor/Modify Variable" Tool VSIMATIC Manager - [SERV I _S — IM57_Courses".SER V I _L]

a Fie D

Edit Insert j PLC View Options

la- 11? at

SERV1 S El II S7:300_Sta CPU 31! El Ch1:

window

Access Rights

I AD 5T1 I BD if C lb

Download

arkt.

Configure...

Ctrl+K

Compile and Download Objects...

g TP17013 Col Et,3 Ch08_8

26J JJJ

on,lotor" - - stavi_s.si_soo_stationNcets

DIct12-11:11 & a.16el !clr!I I Es46bhCemealenteCo141eursdCP11 D'""*.d

Up'osd to PG Upload Station to PG...

MICROI.

1

.

O Pee Ed, 1,24.L I PLC Debug New Options wad. Heb

g innertane a re

Copy RAM to ROM.., Download User Program to Memory Card

DepleParceNkos

Q. our

Save to Memory Card...

7016 7101o:

Kap09_binar Retrieve from Memory Card... Kep10_dcite Manage P17 System... Kap12,Rew Efl El a Kap13_MM4 Drive IE

V

Display Accessble Nodes Change Module Identification..,

M.E

CPU Messages...

Disignosbc/Setting

r

. 2: Jog Conveyor LIFT

181 -ji IIAIJIMIN 1: Ewa A 2 1rdo

Display Force Values

etenT• ( )—I

Ciodo

A 4:Meats We

A a Madly A & !Novae c .4.12J2-i

IS Table Ede Wert PLC

PROFIBUS Edit Ethernet Node...

Variable

Cancel PG/PC Assignment

2

DIGAUI X Address' Symbol 83 I_Eleyr 0 84 -1_ _Eley-Ur

Update Firmware

3

0 8 5 "K _Cony jittOefr

Update the Operating System...

4

0 8 6 "h_Conv_LEFT

Assign PG /PC

5

0 87

"Horn'.

New Options Werlow Help

2_1 ( KiJ

1 21T-2:1_ Isk411

I Display towel [ Status velool Modify velu' •fain B001. II Ids* 13001. BOOL lase . 13001. ■ leise false 1300L

Displays selected variable values for monitaing and canging.

5ER81_5157_300_5tabon

SIMATIC S7

Date

File


Gibs

18.09.2009

SERV1_07E.10

I=

<5.2


Area of Use

The "Monitor/Modify Variables" test function can be started from the SIMATIC Manager or from the LAD/STL/FBD Editor and is used to monitor and/or modify variables in any format you choose.

Design of the Variable Table

The variables you choose are entered in a VAriable Table (VAT). With the exception of block-local, temporary variables, you can monitor (view) and/or modify (control and change) all variables or addresses. You can select the columns of the variable table to be displayed in the View menu. The columns have the following meanings: • Address: absolute address of the variable. • Symbol: symbolic name of the variable • Symbol comment: comment on the variable displayed • Display format: a data format you can choose per mouse click (such as binary or decimal), in which the contents of the variable is displayed • Status value: value of the variable in the selected status format • Modify value: value to be assigned to the variable

Inputting into the Variable Table

Entries for the variable table can be absolute or symbolic (provided the symbol exists). The comments displayed in the column "Symbol comment" are from the symbol table. The comments appear automatically and cannot be changed here.

Note

To check the input and output wiring (regardless of the user program), you can also call the Monitor/Modify Variables tool (VAT) directly from the HWConfig tool (see the HWConfig chapter).


Page 10


SIEMENS

Monitoring and Modifying Variables td,.■ Table Edit Insert PLC

Variable

View

Difg-1611 Al X 13t2ilial Address' Symbol PM 2 , "11At_Thurnbw"

1 2 3 4

QiN

6 "GAPJ_DigDisp" 8.0

5 6 7 •

8.1 8.2

"TBay1" "T_Bay2"

8.3 84

"T_Bayr

M416$001:83 V41880003:

BOOL BOOL

false false false

BOOL

false

BOOL BOOL

false false

8.1 1__Bayl"

BOOL

false

8.2 "L_Bay2" 8.3 -L_Bay3"

BOOL BOOL

false false

BOOL

false false false false

8.5

10 11 12

8.6 87

"BAY? "BAY?

13

HEX

false

9

al67.2d 6'14411 411.1 I Modify value'

HEX

BOOL BOOL

"T_Bay-Ur 1BAY1"

8

117. 1

I Display format I Status value

BOOL

14

Q Q

15

Q

16 17

Q Q

6.4 ."L_Bay-LB" 8.5 "K_Conv_R1GHT"

18

Q

8.6 :K_Conv_LEFT-

BOOL 5001.

19

Q

8.7 "Horn"

BOOL

20

MINIM

.11212_cl .12.1x1

Options Window He

false

I

SERV I _5/57_300_5tation

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Monitor

18.09.2009

SERV1_075.11

lAbs < 5 . 2


(16


You can monitor variables in two ways: The (monitor) status values are updated once when you select the Variable 4 Update Monitor Values menu option or click the icon (Update Monitor Values). The (monitor) status values are updated every cycle when you select the Variable - Monitor menu option or click the icon (Monitor Variables).

Modify

Led

Procedure for modifying variables: 1. With the left mouse button, click the line in the "Modify Value" column for the variable that you want to modify. 2. Enter the value in the correct form for the data type selected. 3a. To activate the modify values once, select the Variable 4 Activate Modify Values menu option or click the icon (Activate Modify Variables) (or item 3b). 3b. To activate the modify values every cycle, select the Variable - Modify menu option or click the icon (Modify Variables). 4.

Modify Value Valid 4170 I

Use the "Monitor" function to confirm that the modify value has been entered in the variable you selected.

You can make the "Modify value" entered in a table invalid by selecting that value and clicking on the icon. The now "invalid" value is displayed like a comment. You can make the modify value "valid" again when you click on the icon again. Only valid modify values can be activated.


Page 11


SIEMENS

Saving the Variable Table 1: 1_ a Table Eck Insert PLC Variable 4

,.112 j

P s Window Help

Yew

Cbse

Ctrl+N Ctr1+0 Ctrl+F4

Save

Cb1+5

New

Ctr1-P

1 rey_PTOJeC1157_300_51abon1CPU 2 SOIV1JUS7_300_5tationkCPU 31 3 SERV1_5 57_300_5tatiarKPLI 31! 2 3

la aa la la la

EaB O • O O O O •

2J <

Save As

Pup Setup...

Entry point: 'Project

View:

Name: 81 1_Bayl 82 :L_Bay2" 8.3 1._Bay3' 84 1._13ey-LB" 8.5 1(_ConvIk101-fr 8 6 :KCcrw_LEFT 8 7 1-lom.

BC BC BC BC

My_Project tE,

tic BC

6- Office

LI I Component view Blames path 2:I IDAS7_Courses \My_PToie

Browse-

I liTtt

My_Prolect SIMATIC 300(1) CPU 315-2 DP E E a S7 Prcgarn(51 a Blocks E sr My_Program

E

SERVI_S157_300_51ation Object name:

1 I/O Conveyor

Object type:

OK

H* I

Cancel

.3

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Saving the Variable Table

1.1

18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.12

% SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions

You can use Table 4 Save or Table 4 Save as... to save a variable table. You can give the variable table any name you choose. The name is inserted as the symbolic name in the symbol table. You can reuse saved variable tables for monitoring and modifying, making it unnecessary to re-enter the variables.



Page 12


SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Testing the Conveyor Model's Sensor (Input) Wiring Corifig [S7_300statIon (configuration) -- SHItY1_5]

0(0) DR

2 3

5

CPU 315-2

If

DP

If

DI324/C24V D0324)C24V., DIS/D08x24V. AI2 2ei

If

ir

Online via assigned CPU services

: maload Module identification... ",/load Module Iderticiration to PG...

MO". Worm."'

ISERV1_S

Path:

Faulty Modules Ctrla-1)

Update Firmware...

411'•il (01 UR Slot

Madrie

D132,d)C24V

7

I ad

10

6E57 3211 BL0O-06A0

D032sDC24V7154

6ES7 322,18L00-06A0

Al2a12Sit

6ES7 331.71(901-04S0

8 9 10

POOL

8 1 "T_Bay1"

POOL

8 2 "T_Elay2"

POOL

8.3 "T_Bay3"

POOL

304

"T_Bay-LB" _ .

Status value Modify value

POOL

8.5 "BAY1"

POOL

8.6 "BAY 2"

POOL

8 7 "BAY3"

POOL BIN

O

8.0

O

81

o

8 2 "L_Bay2"

"L_Elay1"

POOL POOL ;an,

19

)C Row Not Effective Run conditionally

11

Display format

8.0 i.e

84

5ave DevIce Nara_ to Mem,/ Card...

Ethan*

S7_300_5tation\CPU 315-2 DP

Addr ess Symbol

I

Update Force Symbol with F5

—Run immediately

1.7. Monitor

614 Status Value

r Enable Periph. Outputs

r

141 Modify Value

r

Modify

E)i

Display

1EM

Trigger...

<>

afantors and modf ies the nputs/outputs of a module or process anew.

SIMATIC S7

Help

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.1 3

V

. I


Automation and industrial Solutions

Task

In this exercise you are to check the wiring of the conveyor model's sensors to the digital input modules directly from "HW Config". You will check the wiring of the actuators in the next exercise.

What to Do

1. Open the SIMATIC Station with HW-Config SIMATIC Manager 9 select the SIMATIC Station 9 double-click on the "Hardware" object 2. Monitor the inputs of the DI/DO module (I/O address 8) to which the conveyor model is connected Select the DI/DO module 9 PLC 9 Monitor/Modify 9 activate (check) the Monitor function under Run conditionally 3. To check the input wiring, press the sensors on the conveyor model one after the other and observe whether the associated input states are displayed on the screen

Wiring Error?

SITRAIN

If you discovered an error in your wiring test, please let the instructor know.


Page 13


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Testing the Conveyor Model's Actuator (Output) Wiring filiVITERUMITINTWIIIMMIPPIMMETTIM OE Station Edit Insert PLC weer Options %Widow Help

_lolx11 7174W

•i!",

Ctr1+1.

Online via assigned CPU services

=I (01 UR

Download Module Identification... CPU 375-21 Upload Module Iderbfication to PG.., 2 X2 it DP Faulty Modules... 3 Module Information... Di32,0c26V 5 If D032x1)C24V, Operating

Path.

ISERV1_5 \ 57_300_Station CPU 3152 DP Address Symbol

Display format

Status value Modify

BOOL

false

I 8 6 "BAY2"

POOL

false

I 8.7 "PAY3"

POOL

false

0 8.0

BOOL

false

Update Firmware...

O

POOL

false

01•211 (0) UR

Gave Device Name to Memory Card...

Q

_ ......._ 8.1 "L_Bay1" _ ....._... 8.2 "L_Bay?

BOOL

true

Slot I Module

Ethernet

Q

8.3 1_8ay3"

POOL

false

O

8.4 "L Bey-LB"

POOL

false

CPU 315-2 D X DR

PROF

Q

8.5 "K_Conv_RIGHT. BOOL

false

O

8.6 1(__Conv LEFT" POOL

false

6 7

II 1)18/1)084424V. It Al2s12134

GleariRer.et.. • Get Time of Day... Mill=11111

4

2

,

4

78

r

1/132id)C24V 8032x8C24V/0 5A

,

■

led.

'

erP•ce Dora

6ES7 32148L0:140E 6ES7 322-1BLOO•OAA0 6E57 331 -710301•13ABO

4 304 30

X Row Not Effective -- Run conditionally

9 10

BIN

0 8.7 "Horn°

0_.3

1EHI

A1241 213it

8 5 'BAV1

I

OF

1..7

Monitor Modify

I

VOWS

true

260

•I

Update Force Symbol with F5

— Atm immedately 6i4 Status Value 41 Modify Value

J

Enable Periph. Outputs

I r 1/0 Display

f Trigger...

Help

Close Monitors and =dies the inoutsfoutputs of e modde or process Image

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.14

_21 SITRAIN Training for

Mr •


Task

Now check the wiring of the conveyor model's actuators to the digital output modules.

What to Do

1. Open the SIMATIC Station with HW Config SIMATIC Manager - select the SIMATIC Station - double-click on the "Hardware" object 2. Modify the outputs of the DI/DO module (I/O address 8) to which the conveyor model is connected Select the DI/DO module - PLC 4 Monitor/Modify 4 in the "Modify value" column, specify Status 1 for the respective output 4 activate (check) the Modify function under Run conditionally 4 observe whether the corresponding actuator of the conveyor model is modified 3. Exit the Monitor/Modify test function and HW-Config

Wiring Error?

If you discovered an error in your wiring test, please let the instructor know.


Page 14


SIEMENS

Block Architecture and the LAD / STL / FBD Editor

LADS ..AD Sri RID -IFCI6 My_onaest_sh3sh8\teststabon\CM1315,20P] 0 Fie Eck Insert MX Debug aess Crams Window Flap

..r12251

..12JLI,

i Eji InIcilt-Ilal A xikielLLiluij 2-_,I, , I il pimii,A*144-1-01-3_.1,1--1.1.1 ,ca tents Of. EnVronnentlInterfme

OB 1

._11.1.--

.-_. 0 Interface

1-1. no

TC16 Bet o

t

: jog conveyor right 10.2

FC

d

assenbly line

F-1 I

FB

H

08.5

10.3

f )----I

1/1

Symbol infosmation: T_Jog_R1GHT 10.2 I' Jog LEFT 10.3 CRT 08.5 .2_11

Press Tito cat Kip.

-- Pushbutton (PB) jog conveyor

-- Pushbutton (PB) jog conveyor -- Contactor for Conveyor Bolt —

O len*

WT 1

aat E—.4

z


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.1

Page

Contents Objectives Types of Program Blocks Program Structuring Possibilities Process Images Cyclic Program Execution Inserting an S7 Block The LAD / FBD / STL Editor The STEP 7 Programming Languages Selecting the Programming Language Programming in LAD and FBD Programming in STL Saving a Block Calling a Block in OB1 Downloading Blocks into the PLC Simple Program Debugging Modifying Blocks Exercise 1: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) Exercise 2: Calling FC 16 in OB 1 If You Want to Know More Editor Customization: "General" Tab Editor Customization: "View" Tab Editor Customization: "STL" Tab Editor Customization: "LAD/FBD" Tab Editor Customization: "Block" Tab Editor Customization: "Sources/Source Text" Tab



SITRAIN rainin for en d lnc strial Solutions Automation T

.......... 2 .......... 3

4 .......... 5 6 7 .......... 8 .......... 9 10 ........ 11 ........ 12 13 14 ........ 15 ........16 17 ........ 18 19 ........ 20 21 ....... 22 ....... 23 ........24 ....... 25 ....... 26

Page 1

ST-SERV1 Editing Blocks

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of this chapter the participant will ... know the different types of S7 blocks understand the principle of "structured programming" know the meaning of the process images (PII, PIQ) be able to explain the principle of cyclic program execution know and be able to select the LAD, FBD and STL programming languages be able to edit, save and download a block with the LAD/STUFBD Editor be able to carry out a simple program debugging with the "Monitor Block" test function




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.2

Page 2

Ir.



SIEMENS

Types of Program Blocks Operating System

DB

Cycle Time Process

DB

TL OB

FC

FB

SFC

FB

FC

SFB

Organization Blocks

Error Legend: OB = Organization Block FB = Function Block FC = Function SFB = System Function Block SFC = System Function DB = Data Block

SIMATIC S7

Maximum nesting depth: S7-300: 8 S7-400: 24

FB

Date: File:


(for each priority class, 2 to 4 additional levels for Error OBs)

FB with Instance DB

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.3

V


Blocks

The programmable logic controller provides various types of blocks in which the user program and the related data can be stored. Depending on the requirements of the process, the program can be structured in different blocks.

Organization Block OB

Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system and the user program. The entire program can be stored in OB1 that is cyclically called by the operating system (linear program) or the program can be divided and stored in several blocks (structured program).

Function FC, SFC

A function (FC) contains a partial functionality of the program. It is possible to program functions so that they can be assigned parameters. As a result, functions are also suited for programming recurring, complex partial functionalities such as calculations. System functions (SFC) are parameter-assignable functions integrated in the CPU's operating system. Both their number and their functionality are fixed. More information can be found in the Online Help.

Function Block FB, SFB

Basically, function blocks offer the same possibilities as functions. In addition, function blocks have their own memory area in the form of instance data blocks. As a result, function blocks are suited for programming frequently recurring, complex functionalities such as closed-loop control tasks. System function blocks (SFB) are parameter-assignable functions integrated in the CPU's operating system. Both their number and their functionality are fixed. More information can be found in the Online Help.

Data Blocks DB

Data blocks (DB) are data areas of the user program in which user data are managed in a structured manner.

Permissible Operations

You can use the entire operation set in all blocks (FB, FC and OB).



Page 3


SIEMENS

Program Structuring Possibilities

Linear Program

Program Partitioned into Areas

Structured Program

---- Recipe A OB 1

OB 1

---- Recipe B ---- Mixer

-----

OB 1

— — --

Pump

Outlet

-- — — Outlet

All instructions are found in one block (usually in Organization Block OB 1)

The instructions for the individual functions are found in individual blocks. OB 1 calls the individual blocks one after the other.

Reusable functions are loaded into individual blocks. OB 1 (or other blocks) call these blocks and pass on the pertinent data.

/ SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_08EA


Linear Program

The entire program is found in one continuous program block. This model resembles a hard-wired relay control, that was replaced by a programmable logic controller. The CPU processes the individual instructions one after the other.

Partitioned Program

The program is divided into blocks, whereby every block only contains the program for solving a partial task. Further partitioning through networks is possible within a block. You can generate network templates for networks of the same type. The OB 1 organization block contains instructions that call the other blocks in a defined sequence.

Structured Program

A structured program is divided into blocks. The code in OB1 is kept to a minimum with calls to other blocks containing code. The blocks are parameter assignable. These blocks can be written to pass parameters so they can be used universally. When a parameter assignable block is called, the programming editor lists the local variable names of the blocks. Parameter values are assigned in the calling block and passed to the function or function block. Example: • A "pump block" contains instructions for the control of a pump. • The program blocks, which are responsible for the control of special pumps, call the "pump block" and give it information about which pump is to be controlled with which parameters. • When the "pump block" has completed the execution of its instructions, the program returns to the calling block (such as OB 1), which continues processing the calling block's instructions.



Page 4


SIEMENS

Process Images S1

K1

I 2.0

Q 4.3

PIQ

PII Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2

• A I 6.4 Q 4.3 CPU Memory Area

CPU Memory Area

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.5

%IP


Introduction

For the storage of all digital input and output states, the CPU has reserved memory areas: the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image output table (PIQ). During program execution, the CPU accesses these memory areas exclusively. It does not access the digital input and output modules directly.

PII

The Process-Image Input table is the memory area in which the states of all digital inputs are stored. The image is read in from the digital input modules at the beginning of the cycle.

PIQ

The Process-Image Output table is the memory area in which the states of all digital outputs are stored. The image is output to the digital output modules at the end of the cycle. Outputs can be assigned as well as queried in the program.

User Program

If inputs are queried in the user program (for example, A I 2.0), then the state of this input that is stored in the PII is queried from the PII. This state cannot change within a cycle since the PII is only updated or read in at the beginning of a cycle. This guarantees that when there are multiple queries of the input in one cycle, the same result is always delivered.

Double Assignment

If an output is assigned a state in several locations in the program, then only the state that was assigned last is transferred to the particular output module (see slide): 1. Output Q 4.3 is assigned the state of the input signal I 2.0 2. In the same cycle, output Q 4.3 is assigned the state of the input signal I 6.4. The result of this last assignment is transferred to the output module. As a rule, these types of double assignments are programming errors.


Page 5


SIEMENS

Cyclic Program Execution • Startup program: Call and execution of OB 100 (once, after Power ON, for example) • Transfer PIQ to the digital output modules

digital input module

Start of the cycle monitoring time

Reading the input states from the digital input modules and saving the states in the process image (PII)

0

IOU

Call and execution of OB1 (possible interruption by call of other OBs for events such as time-of-day interrupt, hardware interrupts etc. )

Writing the process-image output table (PIQ) in the digital output modules

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.6

digital output module 00I

laZ


Starting

When switching on or when switching from STOP 4 RUN, the CPU carries out a warm restart (with OB100). During a warm restart, the operating system deletes the non-retentive bit memories, timers and counters, deletes the interrupt stacks and block stacks, resets all stored hardware interrupts and diagnostic interrupts and starts the scan cycle monitoring time.

Scan Cycle

The cyclical operation of the CPU consists of three main sections, as shown in the slide above:


•

The CPU checks the status of the input signals and updates the processimage input table.

•

It executes the user program with the respective instructions.

•

It writes the values from the process-image output table into the output modules.


Page 6


SIEMENS Inserting an S7 Block SIMATIC Manager - My_Project

yorax,

2I II

General Part 1 I General - Part

57 Software I Organization Block 147 Software Symbol Table Text Library External Source..,

v

4 Data Block '5 Data Type 6 Variable Table

E

i_Lourses My_Proje

My_Prosect SIMATIC 300(1) CPU 315-2 DP E S7 Program(5) E cr21 Sasser

II

Symbol Comment:

I

ST L

Project path:

Parameter External parameters...

E

Symbolic Name:

Created in Language:

WinCC flexible RT WinCC Object

tr:My_Project -

Name:

2 Functionio Et nm ck E' ,„,-, wom

Cats I Attributes I

System data g FC16 g FC42

Storage location of project:

ID:\S7_Courses My_Proje

Date created:

10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM

Last modified:

10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM

Code

Interface

10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM

Comment:

illEEG

Cancel

OK

I

Help

I

Inserts Function at the cursor position.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. At rights reserved.

Inserting a Block

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.7

V


With the appropriate "Blocks" folder highlighted, from a specific "S7 Program", select the Insert 4 S7 Block menu option to display a list of block types: •

Organization blocks (OB) are called by the operating system. These blocks form the interface between operating system and user program.

•

Functions (FC) and function blocks (FB) contain the actual user program. They enable a complex program to be divided into small, easy-to-follow units.

•

Data blocks contain user data.

After choosing the type of block you want, the "Properties" dialog box opens in which you have to specify, among other things, the block number and the programming language (LAD, STL or FBD). When you have made your settings and confirmed them by clicking the "OK" button, the new block is inserted in the current program.



Page 7


SIEMENS

The LAD / STL / FBD Editor y1i1 AD ,11 I AD [FL 1L -

r _r Le.ymet or"

,,

D12;12-1611 ell x1Balel . 1_11 r ELI " F Declaration Table

.1Q.125.1

- SERV 1 _S S7_300_5tatsm CPIS 315-2 OFM,AFC1b)

O. He ELIR Inset PLC Doisixi View Options Window Hails

,

*.161RI'll MI Id -IFI*1-01011-.1-*1 -1 le?j 3

Contents Of: .2nvironment1Interfase. Keen 1.11TZ CP OUT

'E giratface 2:1' OUT

U. II_OTIT

0• rx_our 1- MP

iii TRW

da. RETURN

E Q RISME Pc16 : Conveyor Control

mortvo: Jog Conveyor *1_15AX.

Code Section

• "X_ Cony Jog_RICIFi_ HMI' i t

RIGHT •M Coto Jog_LIYil HMI"

VI

"X_Jog_ RIM" ( )-I

Jog.1272 XXI' I i

'X Cony art" ----I

El A Network 2: Jog Conveyor UST

"IOW" I

Jog_RIC16_ XXI'

Vi

El

I Address Detail Window

MI ,

Mods

PDL_MAN FC_ComWslos M_ConsjogjEFIFC_ConyMotor MCons_Ax01G- , FC_Oxrettitor R M lop RIGHT :FC_Comelotor

Typ Locabsn , R 114 1

/A

L

ft

kW

1

/AM

I VA

R R

Ifh!

1

/A

; WO

INW

4

I LosaPte

Laotian

/0

AW

2 2 2

/A

/A

/An

i

i 113111113111111=NWIIM===IIM111121===WEMW1111130=W 1 --- el kifine fAbs <5.2 No I

Press Fl to got Help.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.8

1 --;:

4


Starting the Editor

The easiest way to start the LAD / STL / FBD Editor is by double-clicking on an S7 block in the SIMATIC Manager. The Editor has the following components:

Declaration Table

The declaration table belongs to the block. This table is used for declaring variables and parameters for the block. The declaration table is discussed in detail in the "Functions and Function Blocks" chapter.

Code Section

The code section contains the program itself, divided into separate networks if required. A syntax check is made during instruction input (in STL) and in labeling program elements or operation symbols. The detail window provides the following functions and information: lists the syntax errors found in the course of a context 1: Error: check or a compilation procedure gives additional information such as "expected data 2: Info: type of an address" a list of addresses used in the network and where they 3: Cross references: are used in the entire program enables you to monitor the addresses used in the 4: Address info: network enables you to modify the addresses used in the 5: Modify: network display of existing data for process diagnostics (only if 6: Diagnostics: configured) Navigation with the function "Compare blocks" 7: Comparison:

Detail Window



Page 8


SIEMENS

The STEP 7 Programming Languages Function Block Diagram FC16 : Conveyor Control

matom:

Jog Conveyor RIGHT

a io. —

Q8. 5

=

TO . 3

Ladder Diagram FC16 Conveyor Control ?

.tetsicork 1: Jog Conveyor RIGHT

TO 2

1 7

I

08.5

TO . 3

VI

Statement List FC16 : Conveyor Control

Network 4: Jog A AN

Conveyor RIGHT 0.2 0.3 8.5

I I

SIMATIC S7

Z, Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.9

‘11 SITRAIN Training for

Er


Introduction

There are several programming languages in STEP 7 that can be used depending on preference and knowledge. By adhering to specific rules, the program can be created in Statement List and later converted into another programming language.

LAD

Ladder Diagram is very similar to a circuit diagram. Symbols such as contacts and coils are used. This programming language often appeals to those who have a drafting or electrical background.

STL

The Statement List consists of STEP 7 instructions. You can program fairly freely with STL. This programming language is preferred by programmers who are already familiar with other programming languages.

FBD

The Function Block Diagram uses "boxes" for the individual functions. The character in the box indicates the function (such as & 4 AND Logic Operation). This programming language has the advantage that even a "non-programmer" can work with it.

Other Languages

In addition to the STEP 7 Basic Package languages, there is a series of engineering tools for the most varied of applications, such as: -


GRAPH 7: Configuration of sequence control systems HiGraph:

Configuration using the State Diagram Method

-

SCL:

PASCAL-like text-oriented high level language for writing algorithms

-

CFC:

Continuous Function Chart for graphic interconnection of S7 blocks


Page 9


SIEMENS

Selecting the Programming Language LAD/57111BD - [FC16 "FC_ConvMotor" SERV1_5 57_30O_Station \GU 315-21:11

,jij o ,LcA

.

— File Edit Insert PLC Debug l— yoew Options Window Help

ark-K

4_9J :Lverviews ais• adidd !cm it g _rj PLC Register O

E g Inter face a IN a• OUT a IN_OUT

Data View View • Declaration View

FC16 : Conveyor Control

I

I 0

0.2 0.3 8.5

Network 2: Jog Conveyor L A Q 4.2 AN N 30.2 A N 30.3 8.6 0 4

1

"•\ Ctri-F1

s..

JJ

rface .

Ctrl+3

Network 1: Jog Conveyor 3 A AN

LAD

1

Ctr1+4 Ctr1+5 •

Display with Zoom In Zoom Ott Zoom Factor...

U Libraries

Column Width... Display Columns.- FI I F5

Changes to the STL programming language in the current block.

0 loffhne

Date: File:


A Multiple instances

Ctrk-Nurn+

Toolbar Breakpoint Bar .■ Status Bar

Update

SIMATIC S7

.71

New network FB blocks FC blocks E l.ed1 SFB blocks SFC blocks

lAbs < 5.2

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.10

I

-

Inse 1;

.%;


View

You choose the View menu to switch from one STEP 7 programming language to another: • LAD (Ladder Diagram) • FBD (Function Block Diagram) • STL (Statement List).

Program Language

You can switch the programming language as you wish when you create as well as later on.

LAD/FBD => STL

You can always convert program sections that have been written in the graphical programming languages (LAD/FBD) into STL. You should, however, be aware that the result of this conversion is not always the most efficient solution in Statement List.

STL => LAD/FBD

It is not always possible to convert program sections written in STL into LAD or FBD. The sections of the program that cannot be converted are left in STL.

Note:

No sections of the program are lost on conversion.



Page 10


SIEMENS

Programming in LAD and FBD 4LAD/STL/FBD - [F[15 "FC_Mode" SERV1_5 57_300_52ation CPLI 315-2 DP — FC15] CF we Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help

! , 1 !I

xliblel

D412'llal J

`J: 11-1-14-1-01111,1-21H

Contents Of: Environment \ Interface'

B-

Name U- IN Cl• OUT

Interface U- IN U. OUT IN_OUT 0- TEMP B 0. PI TURN

Overviews

nr_orrr

411- TIED 4:1. ASSUAN

New

EE 173 DC'S

Title:

• L_SYSTICE•

•E_Aus System_ON•

SR

(N)— s

Network 2 41

1

C SR -(9 --(N)[) --(10). -0 --(SAVE) C NEG J os r ] Comparator

5530.0 1115.1 04.1 /130.1

Eanual Node

Insert Or Overwrite Mode

•

Bit logic

mJ ILID11113110121131WEM Press F1 to get Help.

a Oc if Program elements I VE Call structure

SIMATIC S7

Date: Re'


Elements

I--

C RS

•E_System_ OFF_ANI"

Symbol lalormatlom: M_System_ON_HMI M_Aux_Systex_ON 1_SYSTIM H_Syst•A_OFF_HEI

-II

--INOTI--(9 --( ) -() --(#)---(R) -(9 --(5)

System ON/OFF • E_System_ ON_HISI •

network

Eit loos

18 09 2009 SERV1_08E 11

!Insert I 41-1 • ...••• SITRAIN Training for and Industrial Solutions leAutomation .

I

Frequently used LAD and FBD elements appear as icons in the toolbar. You click them with the mouse to insert them at the selected position in the program. Toolbar icons in LAD: Toolbar icons in FBD:

Tg=5-Pcl-f

AIA-W-0151L+1-11H

Overviews

By clicking the "Overviews" symbol, a new window is opened with the following contents: Program Elements: Shows all program elements and operation symbols. (The contents of this window depends on the programming language LAD/STL/FBD selected) Call Structure: Shows the program structure and/or the block nesting, which block is called from where.

Networks

When you click the "New Network" icon in the toolbar, a new network is added after the current network. You can also right mouse click and choose "insert network". If you want to insert a new network before Network 1, you must select the block name before you click the "New Network" icon.

iu-of s...1

Empty Box

You can use the Empty Box to insert LAD or FBD elements more quickly. You can insert elements directly without having to select them from the Program Elements browser. After you have selected the position in the network where you want to insert an element, click the "Empty Box" icon in the toolbar. When you enter the first letters of an element name, a list appears (beginning with these letters), and you can make a selection.

Insert or Overwrite Mode

You use the "Ins" key to toggle between the "Cp" (overwrite) and "Insert" editor modes. The current mode is displayed in the status bar.


Page 11


SIEMENS

Programming in STL §LAD/STL/F8D - [FC1 -- My_Project\SIMATIC 3110(1)\ CPU 315-21)P) ' Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help E:11 1■L'Ilal Ai x *et _21:11 LIN rt= L-.J ! I !I071E g_2:J if.1*1-01511.1-2.1h1 El I Corments Of: ' laviremmeatA Inter fac• • g IN C1-1:11 1*;; our Cl. nr_orr U. TEMP 4ZA- SENA ii

-e-a2g „ALA

0 Fie Ede

, it Inb

•LIEI

Mae m

face

Cl. OUT

New network jal Fl blocks Iil iiii FC blocks SFS blocks SFC blocks Multiple instances + fll Libraries

U OUT 73 lill4;1.• RETURN

W fat RETURN

A

PC1 : System nattr:System 01/017 8.0 SAAN II0 0.0 8.0 ANOP 00 0.1

Lil Ptc9am elements

311

111313 DOI 11111111:11/WIEW

4 Press Ft to get Help.

a cross-teleran=

rt Address Sic.. 1----

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


0

• t' loffirlo

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.12

6: Diagnostizs <5.2

—

.F. Cal structure

7: Compatison

INw 1 Ln 6

Oq

g SITRAIN Training for

1r


Statements

The user needs to know the statements for writing a program in STL. You can obtain information about the syntax and functionality from the online help: Help 9 Help on STL. The following information is available: "Statement List Instructions", a description of all the statements that exist in this programming language 141 "Working with Statement List", a description of Statement List View and General Syntax Entering and Viewing Constant Data Types of Blocks 1E1 Switch Contacts and Signal States

Overviews

When you are using the STL Editor, the "Overviews" window contains only the libraries and the list of already existing blocks which can be called from the current block.

Networks

Networks are inserted in the same way as in the LAD/FBD Editor (see previous page).

Insert or Overwrite Mode

You use the "Ins" key to toggle between the "Cp" (overwrite) and "Insert" editor modes. The current mode is displayed in the status bar.

SITRAIN


Page 12


SIEMENS

Saving a Block

0

_

Fie Edit cent PLC Debug View Options Widow Help

- [FE I -- My_Projert \ SIMATIC 300(0 \ CPU 315-2 DPI

LAD STL

,

,

Dlis-12-Fal gJ ,x I

Consents OE, .invironnems\Inserteee. la IN

Cl- IN 42. LOOT E 43. MVPS

. Inter f ace

Q. OUT

42. OUT

S

U. IN_OUT 1E-IMP

Q.

System

I

1eetesork 1 . System OR/ OPP

08.0

ICI. 0

SR

Q

al

Counter E ri•ir_eA DBcal E l Jumps Ea j pi]Integer tint-bon S 2 Floatrig-poont fd. Program control EECW ShitiRotate Status Ists ESal(j'rimers a word FE blocks E f'.

RETURN

Lti FC1 -

I.JEI

I

Al network E III BitComparator lux

Name

I.

-

ade.1251

]*I*1-0 L141—t1h1 PA lell -I c-I t%Iiil F %lee' KIllaTft ________

Converter

_

IEGd

_w_l

logic

1

ril

I-5

F/0.1 —V1----R 41

2? — 11111 hogTam elemen

F

L hE Call

ructure

1

J

It

Deal IlliMM

Press F1 to get Hdp.

SIMATIC S7

LA] Note

a

Cross-relerences

Date: File:


Saving a Block

2 Iris

4: Addeo rdo. 1-- -5 !offline

5c IA • • lAbS < 5.2

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.13

&

Diagnostics

INw I In 6

111 7

■ "

7 Comparison II^Sert CI.7 I

X


When you have finished editing a block, you can save it on the hard disk of the programming device:

•

By selecting the File 9 Save menu option or

•

By clicking the "Save" icon in the toolbar.

If more than one block is opened with the Editor, only the block that is visible in the active window is saved with the action "Save" .


Page 13


SIEMENS

Calling a Block in OB1 JXJ

5LAD/511,4813 -1031 My_Project \SIMATIC 3011(1)11:PU 315-2 DP)

G Fie Eck Insert PIC Debug View Options Window Help

,

e NT !Li DIra;12-101 J iLtiti JJ _Adi 031

,±8J2c1

Imp

Cyclic Program Operation

=ItCell EC1 in LAD

Move Program control till Shift/Rotate E 'A Status dts Timers El E at Word logic FI3 blocks Eta FC blocks M

,,

1 CI

IN ENO

A

Network 2 : Cell IC1 so OIL CALL EC

A

1

1=1. FC14 Q FC15 ci FC16 FC17 FC18 FC19 FC42 1j. SFR hinel.c

Progeam elements

= Cal structize

BLOCK—PC

null

1: Enc.

2 Info

3 Cross-references

A

4: Addles:


Date: File:


SITRAIN

5: Moe* A fi Diagnostics Iofflhe

SIMATIC S7 Cyclic Execution

nfa

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.14

A

T. Contemn

iAbs < 5.2 Nw 1

2.1 SITRAIN Training for

41

47


To integrate a newly created block in the cyclic program execution of the CPU, the block must be called in OB1. The simplest way of inserting the block call in the graphic programming languages LAD and FBD is through the browser (see picture above). In the STL programming language, the instruction for calling a block is CALL.


Page 14


-

SIEMENS

Downloading Blocks into the PLC

Z=211=111.1■1111=1111111 File pit Insert PLC

ID

View Qptions window Help

.7_1 70 114

1-:"..».17611S311 < No Ref >

i;Ig?ffl

MyProject

,J11 :1

— D:\Courses\MyProject

MyProject ad S7_300 Station E IN CPU-315-2 DP S7program Sources Blocks E jMICROMASTER_420 Touchpanel

FC16

OF FC17 FC19 FC42 0 DB19 VAT_I/0 -Conveyor VAT_Number_form.

Created in OB_Cycie FC_S ignal FC Mode FC ConyMotor

FED FBD FED FED

FC_Fault

LAD

FC_Count_Add FC_MM420 DB_Parts VAT I/0-Conveyor VAT_Number_formats

FBD FBD DB

1----Ia,5611(pRoFieus)


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Downloading

0 b ect name Systemdaten 0 081 FC14 411. FC15

18.09.2009 SERV1_088.15

V


With the LAD/STL/FBD Editor, you can create or modify individual blocks and download them directly into the CPU. Downloading several or all S7 bocks is possible with the SIMATIC Manager. If the configuration or parameter assignment data of a hardware station was changed with the "HW Config" tool, the "system data" that was changed as a result can be downloaded into the CPU directly from HW Config or you can also do it later with the SIMATIC Manager: 1. Choose which blocks are to be downloaded: • all blocks: select the "Blocks" object Note: with this action, the "system data" is also downloaded into the CPU! • several blocks: hold down the CTRL key and select the individual blocks • one block: select the desired block 2. Downloading blocks into the CPU: • by clicking on the icon shown to the left or • by selecting the PLC -1 Download menu option.



Page 15


SIEMENS

Simple Program Debugging 2LAD ,STL , TBD - [PC I Mly_Project SIMATIC 300(I) 1. CPU 315-2 DP]

Lzil2E1

JJJ

ta Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help

x1Railel

El l IT:I Ll

edill III 2.1611

FC1 System etvosk

System ON/OF!

.11:11LIc

La Re Edit Veer PLC Debug New OptliffS Mese Hee -

DIG;I:Ilij I AHL I Vele' ..71r. I DI1161 ,t 31

08. 0 SR

.

1.±jj

.

_d -11-1*1-01iff11.1-113-11L?1i

ICI Sysces

0

mem: Syn.,* 081/077 08 .0

10.0 X /0.1

_J

W111:7/

Inlo

Fde/Sock saved.

1:113[11 MUM"

2 'do

Derawlerwees

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


4: Afton We

a

8U..

VON<52k+.1

PressFltoptlielp.

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.16


Requirements

Before you can activate the monitoring mode, you must open the block you want to monitor either offline or online with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor. Note: In order to test a block in the offline mode, the block must first be downloaded into the PLC.

Activation / Deactivation

There are two ways of activating/deactivating the "Monitor" test function:

:_d

• •

Click the "glasses" icon Select the Debug 9 Monitor menu option.

View

The program status is displayed in different ways depending on the programming language selected (LAD / STL / FBD).

Note

When the monitoring function is activated, you cannot change the programming language in which the block is viewed (LAD / STL / FBD).



Page 16


SIEMENS

Modifying Blocks Open block offline I online

Datei BearbeitEn

Save (always offline)

Elnfiigen Zlelsystem

Hifie

Extras Fenster

61:

Test Ansicht .0

alg

•

( ..._,..11121 Download (always online)

E

9-

FC1 2=3:10: Titel: 1.8.0 SR

10..I 0 S

0

80.1—

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.17

▪


▪


Block Corrections

Normally, block corrections are made in the following sequence:

Open Block

With the LAD/STL/FBD Editor, blocks can be opened offline (from the PG's project data storage) or online (directly from the CPU). Normally it is not necessary to open a block online.

Modify Block

Regardless of whether the block has been opened online or offline, the changes that are made are first of all only stored in the programming device's work memory. With that, the changes that are made are neither backed up offline in the project data storage nor online in the CPU! If the PG is switched off, all the changes that have been made are lost.

Save Block

By using the "Save" icon, the block is always saved offline, that is, in the PG's project data storage — regardless of whether the block was previously opened online or offline!

Download Block

By using the "Download" icon, the block is always saved online and/or downloaded into the controller - regardless of whether the block was previously opened online or offline!

SITRAIN


Page 17


-

SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) , ADr ST L FBI) - III I b 0

I L_Convflotor" My_Project ,SIMA TIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DPV2,61/161 Fle Ed Insert PLC Debug Ylew Options Window, Kelp

1:1 412-.11ell Al x it

la

.-, -

11

1 v4all

..m.11:

,

1

...1112.1 (

,

IT = 2.16 1 ! 111t5IN Li 11.1*1-01511-.1-1-Fil Ell ,

..:1251

P216 : Jog Conveyor etspork

j

: Jog conveyor RIGHT

r:1 aa

.

T_Jog_ RIGHT . I

.

T _Jog_ LIFT .

.

H Cony_ ajoa-t•

VI

Al

-- Jog conveyor RIGHT, amsentary contact -- Jog conveyor LIFT, momentarycontact -- Run conveyor RIGHT

9 RS 9 SR

.0 -(N)<) -(P)-0 -(SAVE) 9 reG 9 P05 El W Comparator El al Converter E ill Counter E it De al 81 f limps

betimeek 2 : Jog conveyor LIFT

"T

IZ°g.7

d_Ceow._ LIFT.

"11:71-

01

1 I

Ev Szoliel laterewties: T_Jog_RIGHT T_Jog_LIFT H_Conv_LIFT

/0.2 10.3 08.6

-- Jog conveyor RIGHT, aomentary contact -- Jog conveyor LIFT, momentary contact -- Run conveyor LIFT

_tu .1 14 4 a a

A

2 Into

A

a cm:mum=

a

4: Address ado.

Ill:ck boded.

1---0

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


1:1 - IIP Program elamant:

5: 1. 'offline

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.18

t

IIII0 C 1C

2

1' Error

I (-

<, --OR) -0 -(5)

amma.

10.2 20.3 08.5

-

II -M-11 -NOR.° -0 <) -(4.} -

I )---I

2wleawidien: T_Jog_RIGHT T_Jog_LIFT H_Conv_RIGHT

New network

111111

F.. Cal samara

rtiparieco lAbs <5.2

Ow 1

Jrised

Ag

I



Task

Using the simulator "pushbutton" I 0.2, you should be able to jog the conveyor motor to the RIGHT (Q 8.5). Using the simulator "pushbutton" I 0.3, you should be able to jog the conveyor motor to the LEFT (Q 8.6). If both "pushbuttons" are pressed simultaneously, then the conveyor motor may not start in either direction (Lock-out!).

What to Do

1. In the SIMATIC Manager, insert a new FC16 block. Block folder - right mouse click - insert new object - Function 9 in the dialog set the programming language to LAD 2. Start the LAD / STL / FBD Editor by double-clicking on FC 16. 3. In the " Overviews" open the Program Elements browser 4. Edit Network 1 of the FC16 (see slide) using drag & drop, copy the required logic symbol from the Program Elements browser to the desired location in the network's code section. label the addresses at the logic symbol. Give the networks titles 5. Then insert a new, second network and program this in a similar manner as described in Point 4 6. Save the block offline 7. Download the block into the CPU

a Programming Language


Also observe your block in the different programming languages. To do so select LAD / STL / FBD Editor - View 4 choose either LAD, STL, or FBD.


Page 18


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Calling FC 16 in OB 1 ,[012_
1 LAD/STLABD - [0131 — "OB_Cycle" -- My_Project \ SIMATIC 300(1)),CPU 31S-2 DP ,—Wen

0 He Eck

Insert

plcal2-1 611

PLC

Debug

View

Options

Window Fklp

_c AI

-

ir F %lee' ! I !I ratilt t_i -11-1-14-1-orli-1-thl2.1 Al ,t102 1e1 --)1 -IsliLd ,

,

Axl

d

OBI

ET-. .- Shift/Rotate E tA Status bts E .1:1 Timers Word logic E .., 112 FB blocks E ;I FC aocics 0• FC1 Q FC14 FC_Signal la FC15 FC_Mocle ta FC17 FC

Id

:

Cyclic Program Operation

'*tmork 4:

Control of conveyor

•FC CossolbsZac •

la

symbol information:

120,

-- FC

FC16

Control of conveyor motor

Fault

U FC18 FC Count UFC19 FC_Count_Add 0 FC42 FC_M14420 is SFB blocks la SFC docks 14.itiple instances E IS Lbraries

a

lel Program elements

hE. Cal stiuctrie I

,71,111141j1j1.1,1\ ±l: Eno,

4

2: Info

I

3: Cios leferences

4: Address info.

A

5: Marty

1----0 loffrme

Press Fl to get Heip.

A

.

6: D.57..b.

tAbs < 5.2

1

A

7: Cornmeal l

/

1-----1

4

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:



18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.1 9

lit; Automation and Industrial Solutions

Task

In OB 1 program the call of the FC 16 so that this block is executed cyclically.

What to Do

1.

Open the OB 1 block with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor

2. In the "View" menu, choose the LAD programming language and select the code section of Network 1 3. In the " Overviews", open the Program Elements browser and in Blocks folder

it

the FC

4. Program the call of the FC 16 by copying the block symbol into the network using drag & drop.

a

5. Save OB1 offline and download 6.

icd

7.

Test the FC 16 function, that jogged

is,

it

into the CPU

whether or not the conveyor motor can be

FC 16 block with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor and activate the block" test function to follow the signal sequences during the

Open the "

Monitor

program execution


Page 19


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Note


18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.20

_1111 SITRAIN Training for gr,




Page 20


SIEMENS

Editor Customization: "General" Tab 2S1

OLAD/STL/FBD - [FCI My_Project SIMATIC 3111X1)\ CPU 315-2 DP] Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug new 1- ( ptions Window Help

-1611 4 Y, h1e1

DICA3"It

FCI : System 1Setmork .

System Off/OFF

T_ Ttem_

I 1---

. . General I View I STL I LAD/FBD I Block I Sources I Source Text I

Compare On-/Offine Partners Reference Data Symbol Tel*

Font

I !

88.0

Font Size: Saha..

IV

I

Further options

SR S

Font 'Cower New

I i r Report cross-accesses as error ■,

S

"T_S1 1, OFF"

l l ,

ip,

Symbol information:

Momentnr

T Zystem_uN T_System_OFF

Moment al

F Save window arrangement on exit Set network title automatically

—Program status

r Control at Contact r Automatic Program S tatus Change on Blocks w Terminate ONLINE connection after program status Tree Lag:

(0.60) seconds

Mnemonics (Change SIMATIC Manager Options>Customizek Ergish

41

AlliliulthliEtror

A

2: Info 3:Cross-references

Changes various individual settings of this application.

SIMATIC S7

OK

Date:


18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.21

Abbrechen I

th,"

Hale


Font

Here you select using "Select" the font and the size of the text to be used for programming blocks.

Control at Contact

Inputs and bit memories that were given the attribute CC (Control at Contact) in the symbol table, can be controlled directly from the Program Editor using buttons (on the contact).

Report Cross References as Error

Here you can specify that global accesses to instance data blocks, that were entered as such in the symbol table, be reported as errors.

Save Window The contents and the arrangement of possibly still open windows are saved Arrangement on Exit when you exit. The next time you start, they are reestablished. Set Network Title Automatically

Here you can specify that the symbol comment of the first output, bit memory, timer or counter address that is assigned a state in a network ("=", "S" and "R"), be automatically used as network title.


Page 21


SIEMENS

Editor Customization: "View" Tab 1 ,1 Nel I

CLAD/STL/FBD - [FC1 My_Project SIMATIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP]

2S1

G. Pis Edit Insert PLC Debug View I Options Window Help

12

-

*-1= 1611

General View I STL I LAD/FBD Block I Sources Compare On-/Offline Partners Reference Data Symbol Table Ctr1+111

: System '

Satmork

4:

System ON/011,

• T_Syst.ea_ ON'

08.0 SR

I

17 Symbolic representation 17 Symbol information With text color:

Select...

Automatic symbol selection (for LAD /HD)

0

Isyrnbd

Sorting of selection list by:

F0

yst. am_ 77'

14.1

17 Block/network comments 1— Address identification 17 Permanently forced addresses (FORCE) 17 Process diagnostic addresses (PDIAG)

Sfflibel islormation: T_System_ON T_System_OFF

I0.0 I0.1

-- Momentary -- Momentary

With background coior.

'Created in Language

Sant.. Data Blocks: 2:1

I Declaration View

J

I Type and number

Program element overview Project

1

TI MaIMILII11111101111M1231/

3 Cross-references

4 Ad

Select..

11.11

Not faisafe addresses: -View for Block Types Logic Blocks:

41

I Source Text

- View after Block Open

I Type and number

Libraries:

J

Changes various nividual settings of tNs application. OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


View after Block Open

I

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.22

Cancel

H.*

I

I

iSITRAIN Training for

gr


After opening with the Editor, you can display blocks as follows: • with symbolic or absolute addressing •

with or without symbol information

•

with or without symbol selection (only in LAD and FBD)

•

with or without block and network comments

•

with or without address identification for forced addresses and/or addresses that are used for process diagnostics

View for Block Types: ...Logic Blocks

From the selection box you can choose the programming language of the blocks - "STL", "LAD", "FBD" or Created in Language.

...Data Blocks

You can display data blocks in the following views: •

declaration view or

•

data view

Program Elements - Here you can specify how logic blocks are to be sorted in the "Overviews" Overview browser - according to type and number or according to family name (entry in a block's Properties dialog).



Page 22


SIEMENS

Editor Customization: "STL" Tab Customize General I View STL I IAD/FBD I Block I Sources I Source Text —Display of the Status Fields 17 Status Bit Result of Logic Operation Defauk Status

r Address Register

r DB Register r DB Register 2 r Indirect r Status Word

I— Address Register 2

r Accumulator 2 r Activate New Breakpoints Irnmediatekr

Default Abbrechen I

OK

Hie 4

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Status Fields

" SITRAIN Training for

MI,


When you monitor the status of a block in STL, only the status fields you activate in this dialog box will be displayed. The following options are available: • • • • • • • • •

•


18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.23

11

The status bit is displayed. Status Bit: Result of Logic Operation: The result of logic operation (RLO) is displayed. A timer word, counter word or the contents of Default Status: Accumulator 1 are displayed - depending on the operation used. The address registers are used with indirect Address Registers: addressing. The contents of Accumulator 2 are displayed. The contents of the relevant data block register are displayed. Indirect: This display is possible only with memoryindirect addressing. Status Word: The status word is displayed. Default: The "Default" button selects the standard system setting for the Status field. The status bit, RLO and standard status are displayed. Activate New Breakpoints Immediately: This option is relevant only for the "Breakpoint" test function.

Accumulator 2: DB Registers:


Page 23


SIEMENS

Editor Customization: "LAD/FBD" Tab General I View I STL

LAD/FBD

Block I Sources I Source Text I

Layout

Address Field Width

!DIN A4 Portrait

11

(10 .26)

r Element Representation:

I3-dimensional

Line/Color Reference:

'Status fulfilled

Line Weight

r

Narrow

(;* Medium

r

Wide

Select..

[Color:

I

17 Type Check of Addresses

I— Display symbol information at address

OK

SIMATIC S7

Abbrechen I

Date: File:


Layout

I

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.24

Hilfe

glZ


Here you select the print format: • DIN A4 Portrait or Landscape • maximum size.

Address Field Width You can set the limit for the maximum number of characters in an address name to a number between 10 and 26. With symbolic representation, a line break takes place according to the Address Field Width. In LAD and FBD the number of representable operation symbols on the screen or in the printout also changes with the Address Field Width. Element

The program elements can be displayed in different ways: • 2-dimensional (without shadow) • 3-dimensional (with shadow)

Line/Color

You use this box to choose how you want the following to be displayed • Selected Element (color) • Contacts (line) • Status Fulfilled (color and line) • Status Not Fulfilled (color and line).

Type Check

When you edit a block, the type of address entered in bit logic instructions is always checked. You can deactivate the Type Check of Addresses: for comparisons, mathematical operations etc. ( for experienced users only! ).

Symbol Information at Address

If you activate this function, the symbol information is not overlaid at the lower edge of the networks, rather is overlaid directly at the address.



Page 24


SIEMENS

Editor Customization: "Block" Tab Generate Reference Data General I View I STL I LAD/FBD

Block

Sources I Source Text I

Should the reference data be

With the Creation of a Block

,

f;;. updated?

[

F Create reference data

r

Create Logic Blocks Language:

STL

LAD

r

regenerated?

FBD

Function blocks with multiple instance capability Yes

Cancel I

Help

Default

Abbrechen I

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Create Reference Data

Hille

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.25

V


When you modify blocks and save them, the reference data is automatically updated if the "Create Reference Data" option in the "Block" tab is checked. If this option is not checked, the reference data is not updated at first. But the next time you open: Options Reference Data 9 Display, you must decide whether you want to update the reference data and for which blocks. Note: The topic "Reference Data" is discussed in detail in the "Troubleshooting" chapter.

Create Logic Blocks Here you specify which programming language (LAD / STL / FBD) is to be automatically suggested when you insert a new block.


Page 25


SIEMENS

Editor Customization: "Sources/Source Text" Tab Customize

Customize

General I View I STL I LAD/FBD I Block

Sources

Souce Text I

General) View I STL I LAD /FBD I Block I Sources Source Ted

- With Compiling a Source

-Format Tab width:

17 Display warnings

Charade

r Display line number

I- Errors before warnings Fr-/ Overwrite existing blocks

FI Indent automatically

IV Create blocks only lot error-free completion

r Key words in capital letters

With Saving a Block

-Color and Style

P Source text display with the Wowing color and style assignment

r Generate source automaticaly Derive name from:

Text type:

I Normal text

Font Style:

r Bold

D.:olute Idenrifier of the block

C

r

!:

L'I.en'ilier of r.he block

Address-es:

r Italic

Color:

1

Preview Generate sources for blocks that already exist with the settings indicated above):

Execute... I

Select... t.st

Print

r With line numbers Black and white

r

Defaue

OK

Abbrechen I

SIMATIC S7

He

Date: File:


I

Standard font

OK

18.09.2009 SERV1_08E.26

Abbrechen I

Hille

I


Sources

It is possible to enter a program or parts of a program as an STL source (ASCII sources). The source file can contain the code for one, several, or all blocks. The STL source can then be compiled into executable S7 blocks. Creating a program using a source has the following advantages: • You can create and edit your source with any ASCII editor and then import it into STEP 7. The source can then be compiled into individual, executable S7 blocks with STEP 7. • You can program several blocks in a source, whereby you can use the advantages of the ASCII editors (such as find and replace one operation in all blocks). • You can save sources even with syntax errors. This is not possible when creating logic blocks with the incremental LAD/STL/FBD Editor because of the integrated syntax check. As a result, blocks can be programmed with symbolic addresses before a symbol table has even been created. This is an advantage when the wiring of the PLC has not yet been determined, for example. The source is created in the syntax of the "Statement List (STL)" programming language. The structuring within the sources as well as within the blocks themselves (declaration table, networks etc.) takes place using keywords.

Compiling Sources

In the "Sources" tab, you can select with which options executable S7 blocks are to be generated from an STL or ASCII source. The individual options are explained completely in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Source Text

Here you select options of how the text is to be displayed in the source files. The individual options are explained completely in the STEP 7 Online Help.



Page 26


• • SIEMENS

Binary Operations Uij Bit logic >=1 ,

s .. XOR -0

,_1[1_12c]

Ze Help on Function Block Diagi-alti.flv, File Ed

Bookmark Opttons He

index

Cantatas 1..e4s on ITER 7

I

I

Rock

Isittery

E*''

I

SR : Set_Reset Flip Flop

Symbol

address SR

1

R

-- -

—

[A

111-

--[R] • -[5] RS elm

--[N]--

erieleStel. address

MAIM BOOL

MtdMIlLAttel I, O. M. D. L

S

BOOL

I, O. M. D. L. T, C

•

BOOL

I,

▪

BOOL

I, O, M, D, L

Qasniotiar The address specifies Which bltwlll be set or reset Set Instruction enabled

M. D, L, T, C

Reset instruction enabled Signal state of saddreSS•

Description The Set Reset Flip Flop instruction executes Set (S) or Reset (R) instructions only when the RLO is 1 An RLO of 0 has no effect on these instructions, the address specified in the instruction remains unchanged. Set Reset Flip Flop is set when the signal state at input S is 1 and the signal state at input R 1.0 If input S is 0 and input R is 1, the flip flop is reset. If the RLO at both inputs is 1 the flip flop is reset. The Set Reset Flip Flop instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR) For more detailed information ahout how the MCR functions , refer to MCR snloff.

--[SAVE]

Status Word

NEG El- FOS


4..(4 writes

Date: File:

89 DR 5.117 FLU SO X

-

X

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.1

X

1

▪ •

SITRAIN


Page

Contents Objectives

.......... 2

Binary Logic Operations: AND, OR

..........3

Binary Logic Operations: Exclusive OR (XOR)

..........4

Sensors and Symbols

.......... 5

First Check, Signal State, Result of Check and Result of Logic Operation

6

Exercise 1: Sensors and Symbols

.......... 7

Assignment, Setting, Resetting

.......... 8

Setting and Resetting a Flip Flop

.......... 9

Midline Output Coil

10

Instructions that Affect the RLO

........ 11

Example 2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)

...... 12

Exercise 2: "FC—Mode" (FC 15), Solution Hints

....... 13

Exercise 3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16)

.......14

Exercise 3: "FC_ConvMotor" (FC 16), Solution Hints

.......15

RLO — Edge Detection

........ 16

Signal — Edge Detection

........ 17

Exercise 4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16

.......18

Exercise 5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation

.......19


........ 20

Additional Exercise 6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)

......21

Unconditional Jump (Regardless of the RLO)

....... 22

Conditional Jump (Dependent on RLO)

........23

SITRAIN


Page 1

ST-SERV1 Binary Operations

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... understand the difference between 'real' connected NC contacts and NO contacts, and programmed symbols be able to explain the terms Result of Logic Operation (RLO), Status (STAT) and First Check be able to program basic binary logic operations




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.2

Page 2

ird SITRAIN Training for W



SIEMENS

Binary Logic Operations: AND, OR LAD

I 0.0

STL

FBD

I 0.1

Q 8.0

I 0.0 I 0.1

Q 8.1

I 0.2

Q 8.2 )

I 0.2

>=1

1 0.3

I 0.3

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.3

Q 8.2

A 10.0 1 0.1 A Q 8.0 Q 8.1

0 10.2 O I 0.3 = Q 8.2


Logic Tables AND

1 0.0

1 0.1

0

0

0

1

Q 8.0

1

OR

1

1

I 0.2

I 0.3

0

0

0

1

Q 8.2

1

SITRAIN


Page 3


SIEMENS

Binary Logic Operations: Exclusive OR (XOR)

LAD

I 0.4

10.4

FBD

I 0.5

Q 8.0 )

10.5

I 0.4

XOR

I 0.5

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.4

Q 8.0

A AN 0 AN A

1 0.4 1 0.5

X X

1 0.4 1 0.5 Q8.0

1 0.4 1 0.5 Q8.0


Logic Table XOR

Rule


I 0.4

I 0.5

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

Q 8.0

With an EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation, the signal state is "1", if the signal state of one of the two given addresses is "1". With XOR elements for checking more than two addresses, the result of logic operation is: "1" — if an uneven number of checked addresses deliver the result of check "1" "0" — if an even number of checked addresses deliver the result of check "1"


Page 4


SIEMENS

Sensors and Symbols Interpretation in the PLC Program

Process

NO contact

Voltage present at input?

The sensor is ...

The sensor is a ...

Signal state at input

activated

not activated

NC contact

activated

no

L (

Symbol / Instruction

Result of check

Symbol / Instruction

LAD:

Yes"

LAD:

Result of check

1

0

1

Check for signal state "0"

"No" 0 —0— H I— "NO contact--.4 "NC contact'

1

yes

Check for signal state "1"

FBD:

"No" 0

FBD:

I: ,

"Yes" 1

l&

no

"Yes" 1

"No" 0

0

.

.11.141.11

not activated

1

yes

STL: A I x.y

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Process

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.5

"Yes" 1

STL: AN I x.y

1

"No" 0


The use of normally open or normally closed contacts for the sensors in a controlled process depends on the safety regulations for that process. Normally closed contacts are always used for limit switches and safety switches, so that dangerous conditions do not arise if a wire break occurs in the sensor circuit. Normally closed contacts are also used for switching off machinery for the same reason.

Symbols

In LAD, a symbol with the name "NO contact" is used for checking for signal state "1" and a symbol with the name "NC contact" to check for signal state "0". It makes no difference whether the process signal "1" is supplied by an activated NO contact or a non-activated NC contact.

Example

If an NC contact in the machine is not activated, the signal in the process image table will be "1". You use the NO contact symbol in LAD to check for a signal state of "1". General: The "NC contact" symbol delivers the result of check "1" when the checked address state or status is "0".



Page 5


SIEMENS

First Check, Signal State, Result of Check and Result of Logic Operation

=

M 3.4

A

I10

0

1

1

AN I 1.1

0

1

0

A M 4.0

0

1

1

0

1

0

First Check

Result of Logic Operation

Result of Check

Signal State

Example 3

First Check


Result of Check

Signal State

Example 2

First Check


Result of Check

Signal State

Example 1

= Q 8.0 =

Q 8.1

A

I 2.0

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.6

qr


Signal State

A logic operation is made up of a series of instructions to check the states of signals (inputs (I), outputs (Q), bit memories (M), timers (T), counters (C) or data bits (D) ) and instructions to set Q,M,T,C or D.

Result of Check

When the program is executed, the result of check is obtained. If the check condition is fulfilled, the result of check is "1". If the check condition is not fulfilled, the result of check is "0".

First Check

The first check that follows an RLO limiting operation (such as S, R, CU, = ...) or the first check in a logic string is called a First Check (FC) since the result of this check - regardless of the last RLO - is accepted as the new RLO.


When the next check instructions are executed, the result of logic operation is gated with the result of check and a new RLO is obtained. When the last check instruction in a logic operation has been executed, the RLO remains the same. A number of instructions using the same RLO can follow.

Note


The result of the first check is stored without being subjected to a logic operation. Therefore, it makes no difference whether you program the first check with an AND or an OR instruction in STL. To convert your program to one of the other programming languages, you should, however, always program using the correct instruction.


Page 6


SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Sensors and Symbols Task: In all three examples, the light should be on when S1 is activated and S2 is not activated! Hardware r_> I

I 11 S1

I= \ S2 I 11.1 11.0 Programmable controller Q 4.0

DU

itiLight Software

III

LAD >

> DU

FBD

1 1.0 I 1.1 HI--1

11.0 -

&

11.1 -

[I[I1.31 *

Q 4.0 ( )

14 S2 1=\ S1 I I 11.0 11.1 Programmable controller Q 4.0

1 H

Q4.0

I

I

11.1

Programmable controller Q 4.0

4

)Light

Q 4.0 ( )

Q 4.0 I 1.0 ..I.1.1 ..... Q 4.0

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.7

11.0

11.1

Q4.0

- ---

I1

( )

HI

11.0 -

&

I 1.1 -

Date: File:


I

11.0 -

11.0 ..1 ..... .1.1 ..... Q 4.0

SIMATIC S7

11.1

-

I= S2

11.0

Light

1.0

L

I= S1

& Q4.0

I 1.1 1 1.0 ..I.1.1 ..... Q 4.0

1 11 SITRAIN Training for


Exercise

Complete the programs above to obtain the following functionality: When switch S1 is activated and switch S2 is not activated, the light should be ON in all three cases.

Note !

The terms "NO contact" and "NC contact" have different meanings depending on whether they are used in the process hardware context or as symbols in the software.


Page 7


SIEMENS

Assignment, Setting, Resetting LAD

110

I 1.0

Assignment

FBD

I 1.1

I 1.0 —

I—I

I 1.1 —

H

H

I 1.2

11.3

081

I 1.2

Reset

Q 8.1 (R)

I 1.5

SIMATIC S7

11.5

Date: File:


I 1.4

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.8

A 11.2 A I 1.3 S Q 8.1

Q 8.1 S

I 1.3

11.4

A I 1.0 A I 1.1 = Q 8.0

Q 8.0

>=1

O I 1.4 O 11.5 R Q 8.1

Q 8.1 I R

A

4,Zr


Assignment

An assignment passes the RLO on to the specified address (Q, M, D). When the RLO changes, the signal state of that address also changes.

Set

If RLO= "1", the specified address is set to signal state "1" and remains set until another instruction resets the address.

Reset

If RLO= "1", the specified address is reset to signal state "0" and remains in this state until another instruction sets the address again.



Page 8


SIEMENS

Setting and Resetting a Flip Flop

FBD

LAD

M 5.7

11.2 Dominant Reset

SR

M 5.7 Q 9.3 )

11.2

Dominant Set

-

11.3 11.3

11.3 R

I I

M 5.7 Q 9.3 )

11.3

-

R

11.2 11.2

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Flip Flop

Q9.3

A 1 1.3 R M 5.7 A 1 1.2 S M 5.7 A M 5.7 = Q 9.3

-

M 5.7 RS

Q9.3

A 11.2 S M 5.7 A 1 1.3 R M 5.7 A M 5.7 = Q 9.3

SR

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.9

- S

RS


A flip flop has a Set input and a Reset input. The memory bit is set or reset, depending on which input has an RLO=1. If there is an RLO=1 at both inputs at the same time, the priority must be determined.

Priority

In LAD and FBD there are different symbols for Dominant Set and Dominant Reset memory functions. In STL, the instruction that was programmed last has priority.

Note

With a warm restart of the CPU, all outputs are reset. That is, they are overwritten with the state '0'. If the M 5.7 in the example above has been declared retentive, it's state will be retained even after a warm restart of the CPU. If the memory bit was set before the warm restart, it's state remains state '1' even after the warm restart and the output Q 5.7 would be immediately activated once again.


Page 9


SIEMENS

Midline Output Coil

LAD

11.0

11.1

M 20.7

12.0

1 2.1

1---(#)--I I

Q 4.0

II

( )--1

FBD

11.0 —

M 20.7

11.1 — 120 —

Q 4.0

12.1 —

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Midline Output Coil


18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.10

V


The midline output coil exists only in the LAD and FBD graphic languages. It is an intermediate assignment element with assignment function that assigns the current RLO at a specified address (M20.7 in the slide). The midline output coil provides this same address in the same network for subsequent gating. In the STL language, this is equivalent to = M 20.7 A M 20.7 In the LAD language, when connected in series with other elements, the "midline output coil" instruction is inserted in the same way as a contact.


Page 10


SIEMENS

Instructions that Affect the RLO FBD

LAD

A I 0.0

!IF NOT

I0.0

Q 8.0

10.1

A I 0.1 NOT = Q 8.0

)

NOT

Examples: STAT 0 — Bit memory

CLR = M 0.0

not available

not available

STAT 1 — Bit memory,/ not available

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


SET = M 0.1

not available

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.11

SITRAIN Training for qlr


NOT

The NOT instruction inverts the RLO.

CLR

The CLEAR instruction sets the RLO to "0" without pre-conditions (available only in STL).

SET

The SET instruction sets the RLO to "1" without pre-conditions (available only in STL).

Note

The CLR and SET instructions limit the result of logic operation, that is, the next programmed scan becomes a first check.

First Check

The first processed check operation after a conditional operation is called a first check. It has a particular meaning since the CPU takes over the result of check directly as a result of logic operation (RLO). The "old" RLO is thus lost. The first check always represents the beginning of a logic operation. The operation (AND, OR, XOR) that comes with the first check is of no importance.



Page 11


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)

DI

DO

1 0.0

T_System_ON

1 0.1

T_System_OFF L_SYSTEP

Q 4.1

1 0.2

T_Jog_RIGHT

L MAN

Q 4.2

I 0.3

T_Jog_LEFT

L AUTO

Q 4.3

U U

U V

1 0.4 1 0.5 -15V...+15V

Ail A01 All

cs

0

All

0

0

0

I=1

0 8 1 5 0

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Task

CI

CI

0

-15V...+15V

A02

0

0 0

0 0 All Al2 0 0

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.12

gir

Al2

A01

A02

0 0


For the distribution conveyor, you are to program an operating mode section in FC 15 and interlock the MANUAL mode (Q4.2) in FC 16 as an additional condition for jogging the conveyor motor. Function of the operating mode section in FC 15: •

The system (LED Q4.1) is turned "on" using the simulator momentary contact I 0.0. It is turned "off' using the simulator momentary contact I 0.1 (NC contact).

•

You can preselect "MANUAL" mode (LED Q 4.2) or "AUTO" mode (LED Q 4.3) through switch I 0.4 as follows: - I 0.4 switched off (= "0"): "MANUAL" mode preselected, - I 0.4 switched on (= '1 "): "AUTO" mode preselected.

•

The operating mode that you presele-ct through switch I 0.4 is confirmed or switched on through momentary contact I 0.5

•

The operating modes are switched off when you change the preselection of the operating mode (I 0.4) or when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").

Integrating the MANUAL mode (Q 4.2): •

What to Do

The "Jog Conveyor Motor" programmed in FC 16 is now only to be possible when the "MANUAL" mode is switched on. Program the relevant lock-out in FC 16.

1. Insert the new FC 15 block and program the required function 2. Program the lock-out in FC 16. 3. Download all blocks into the CPU and test your program

Solution Hints


You will find solution hints on the following page !


Page 12


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: "FC Mode" (FC 15), Solution Hints Indicator Light System ON

Network 1:

Q 4.1 SR

ON-Condition OFF-Condition Network 2:

Q

—

Indicator Light MAN Mode

Q 4.2 SR

ON-Conditions

Q ____

OFF-Conditions Network 3:

Indicator Light AUTO Mode

Q 4.3 SR

ON-Conditions

Q ____

OFF-Conditions

4 SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.13

21 SITRAIN Training for qr


Whole Function of the FC 15

In FC 15, the operating modes and the indicator lights: System ON, MANUAL mode and AUTO mode are to be programmed with the functions described in the task.

Partial Functions of the FC 15

The whole function of FC 15 can be divided into the following partial functions, as shown in the slide above. These partial functions can be programmed in separate networks: • Network 1 indicator light for System ON • Network 2 indicator light for MANUAL mode •

Partial Functions of the Networks

Network 3 indicator light for AUTO mode

Every network can then be logically divided into two sections which can be programmed independent of one another: •

ON conditions (Set condition)

• OFF conditions (Reset condition) Example:

Programming


-

The conditions for the ON state of the MANUAL mode: System switched on ( Q 4.1 = '1 ') AND MANUAL mode preselected ("ModeSelect" switch I 0.4 = '0') AND "Accept" switch pressed (M.C.Switch I 0.5 = '1 ')

-

The conditions for the OFF state of the MANUAL mode: System switched off ( Q 4.1 = '0') OR AUTO mode preselected ("ModeSelect" switch I 0.4 = '1')

By structuring the whole functionality of the FC 15 into partial functions (networks and network sections) you have created function units that can relatively easily be turned into a program. The simplest way to implement the necessary functions is with memory functions, since the switching on and switching off of the system and the operating modes takes place with momentary contact switches.


Page 13


SIEMENS

Exercise 3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16) Cony Start

Transport Phase

Cony. Stop

Prox.Sens.Bay 1 I 8.5 Mom.Cont.Bay 1 I 8.1 Prox.Sens.Bay 2 I 8.6 Mom.Cont.Bay 2 I 8.2 Light Barrier I 8.0 Run Conveyor RIGHT Q8.5

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Function

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.14

Mr


In AUTO mode, parts are to be transported from Bay 1 or Bay 2 to the "Final Check" (light barrier). Run Conveyor RIGHT starts when •

Bay 1 proximity sensor is occupied AND NOT Bay 2 proximity sensor is occupied AND Bay 1 momentary contact is pressed OR

•

Bay 2 proximity sensor is occupied AND NOT Bay 1 proximity sensor is occupied AND Bay 2 momentary contact is pressed

Run Conveyor RIGHT is stopped when •

the part has reached the Final Check (the light barrier) OR

• What to Do

AUTO mode is switched off

1. Expand FC 16 with the desired function. 2. Make sure that the conveyor stops immediately when the automatic mode is switched off (Q 4.3= "0"). 3. Test to see whether the function "Jog left" or "Jog right" still works in the manual mode (M/A_Man).

Solution Hints

You will find solution hints on the following page !


Page 14


SIEMENS

Exercise 3: "FC ConvMotor" (FC 16), Solution Hints Network x

Jog RIGHT in MANUAL mode Conditions for JOGGING RIGHT in MANUAL mode

Network v

M 16.2

Run Conveyor RIGHT in AUTO mode M 16.4

Conditions for Run Conveyor RIGHT in AUTO mode

Network z

Memory bit for Jog RIGHT In MANUAL mode

S R

Memory bit for Run Conveyor RIGHT in AUTO mode

Control Run Conveyor RIGHT M 16.2

>=1

Q 8.5

Run Conveyor RIGHT

M 16.4 --SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Problem

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.15

V.


The Run Conveyor RIGHT (0 8.5) must be controlled under two conditions: •

In the MANUAL mode while jogging RIGHT (in the slide - Network x) OR in the AUTO mode under the conditions described in the task (in the slide Network y)

If the result of logic operations in both network x and y were assigned the output Run Conveyor RIGHT (Q8.5), an error in the form of a double assignment would occur. The jogging RIGHT of the motor in manual mode (Network x) would no longer function, since the state assigned to the output would be overwritten in Network y. Solution


The problem can be solved by programming a memory bit for each condition or by first assigning the results of the logic operations to a memory bit in both networks x and y. These are then used in Network z to control the conveyor motor.


Page 15


SIEMENS

RLO — Edge Detection LAD

FBD

11.0 I 1.1

M1.0

M8.0

H H

(p)

0

11.0 I 1.1

M1.1

M8.1

H I

(N)

()

SIMATIC S7

I 1.0 —

I

I 1.1 — 11.0 —

I

I 1.1 —

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_098.16

M1.0

M8.0

A 1 1.0 A I 1.1 FP M1.0 M8.0

M8.1

A I 1.0 A I 1.1 FN M1.1 M8.1

P M1.1 N

' SITRAIN Training for Mr ,


RLO Edge Detection An "RLO edge" detection is when the result of a logic operation changes from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0". Positive Edge

(Positive RLO Edge Detection) detects a signal change in the address from "0" to "1", and displays it as RLO = "1" after the instruction (such as at M 8.0) for one cycle. To enable the system to detect the edge change, the RLO must be saved in an FP bit memory (such as M 1.0), or a data bit.

Negative Edge

(Negative RLO Edge Detection) detects a signal change in the address from "1" to "0" and displays it as RLO = "1" after the instruction (such as at M 8.1) for one cycle. To enable the system to detect the edge change, the RLO must be saved in an FN bit memory (such as M 1.1), or a data bit.



Page 16


SIEMENS

Signal — Edge Detection FBD

LAD 1 1.1

M8.0

POS MB1T 1 1.1

M8.1

NEG M_B1T

SIMATIC S7

1 1.1 POS M1.0— M_B1T

1 1.1 NEG M1.1- M_B1T

Date: File:


1 1.0 M8.0

11.0

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.17

M8.1

A A A FP

1 1.0 ( 1 1.1 M1.0

A A A FN

M8.0 1 1.0 ( 1 1.1 M1.1 M8.1

l SITRAIN Training for

ge


Signal Edge

A "signal edge" is when a signal changes its state.

Example

Input 11.0 acts as a static enable. Input 1 1.1 is to be monitored dynamically and every signal change is to be detected.

Positive Edge

When the signal state at 11.1 changes from "0" to "1", the "POS" check instruction results in signal state "1" at output Q for one cycle, provided input 11.0 also has signal state "1" (as in the example above). To enable the system to detect the edge change, the signal state of I 1.1 must also be saved in an M_BIT (bit memory or data bit) (such as M 1.0).

Negative Edge

When the signal state at 1 1.1 changes from "1" to "0", the "NEG" check instruction results in signal state "1" at output Q for one cycle, provided input 1 1.0 has signal state "1" (as in the example above). To enable the system to detect the edge change, the signal state of I 1.1 must also be saved in an M_BIT (bit memory or data bit) (such as M 1.1).



Page 17


SIEMENS

Exercise 4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16

Cony. Start

Transport Phase

Cony. Stop

Part at Light barrier Start condition in AUTO mode Light Barrier (I 8.0)

I

F)

Run Conveyor RIGHT (Q8.5)

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


FC 16 Up Till Now

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.18

Mr1


In MANUAL mode (Q 4.2 = "1"), you can jog the conveyor motor direction to the RIGHT and LEFT using the simulator momentary contacts I 0.2 and I 0.3. In AUTO mode (Q 4.3 = "1"), the Run Conveyor RIGHT is switched on when a part is laid on the conveyor exactly in front of a proximity sensor of Bay 1 or Bay 2, (EXOR -logic operation) and the occupied Bay's momentary contact is pressed. The conveyor motor is stopped when the part has reached the Final Check (the light barrier) OR the AUTO mode is switched off.

Task

The function of the FC 16 to control the conveyor motor in AUTO mode is to remain fundamentally unchanged. However, the conveyor motor is to be stopped as soon as the part has passed through the light barrier (4 edge detection necessary, see slide).

What to Do:

1. Program the necessary changes in FC 16, by interlocking the result of the edge detection as the reset condition for M 16.4 (bit memory for Run conveyor RIGHT in AUTO mode) instead of the light barrier signal itself (I 8.0 ). For the necessary edge detection of the light barrier signal use the bit memory M 16.0 as an edge memory bit. 2. Save the modified FC 16 block and download it into the CPU. 3. Check whether your program fulfills the desired function.



Page 18


• SIEMENS

Exercise 5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation

"BAY1"

in MANUAL mode: 2Hz pulsed honking while conveyor jogging

"BAY2"

"Horn" (Q 8.7)

"L_Bay 2" (Q 8.2)

"L_Bay1" (Q 8.1)

in AUTO mode: Constant light at both bays when a new part can be placed (both bays empty) 1Hz flashing light at the bay where the part is placed and the conveyor has not yet been started - 2Hz flashing light at both bays during conveyor movement SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Function

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.19

A

_11 SITRAIN Training tor

gr


The indicator lights at Bay 1 and Bay 2 as well as the horn are to be controlled as follows: When AUTO mode (Q4.3) is switched on, the indicator lights show ... •

constant light when a new part can be placed on the conveyor (conveyor motor is standing and both proximity sensors are free) 1Hz flashing light at the bay where the associated proximity sensor detects a part, and only so long as the conveyor has not yet been started

•

2Hz flashing light as long as the conveyor motor is moving

The horn sounds with a 2Hz pulsed tone as long as the conveyor motor is jogged to the right or to the left in MANUAL mode. What to Do

1. Copy the block "FC_Signal" (FC 14) from the project "SERV1_B" in the S7 program "Chap9_binary_Op" into your S7 program called "My Program" 2. Put the block into operation 3. Correct the block so that it fulfills the required functions.



Page 19


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7 Note


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.20

g.




Page 20


SIEMENS

Additional Exercise 6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15) OLD: without edge detection T_System_ON (I 0.0)

I I

I

T_System_OFF (I 0.1, NC contact)

i

L_SYSTEM (Q4.1) I

T_System_ON 0 0.0)

NEW: with edge detection 1

I

,

I I

I

:....

c+1 ..i.:

T_System_OFF (I 0.1, NC contact) I I I

L_SYSTEM (Q 4.1) SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.21

SITRAIN Training for Rkr


FC 15 Up Till Now

The system (Q 4.1) is switched on with the simulator momentary contact I 0.0, and switched off with the simulator momentary contact I 0.1 (NC). If you press both contacts simultaneously, the system remains switched off or is switched off if currently on. However, if both contacts are pressed and you let go of the OFF contact, the system switches on again without having to first press the ON contact once more (see slide, upper function diagram "OLD: without edge detection").

Task (1)

Expand the functionality of FC 15 using edge detection so that the ON contact must be pressed every time the system is switched on (see slide, lower function diagram "NEW: with edge detection"). The criteria for switching on the system is no longer to be the pressed ON contact or its '1' signal, but the function of pressing or the "positive edge" of the ON contact signal.

What to Do:

1. In the set condition for "L_SYSTEM", insert an edge detection of the momentary contact "T_System_ON". For the edge detection, use the memory bit "M_Aux_System_ON" (M 15.1) as edge memory bit. 2. Save the modified FC 15 block and download it into the CPU. 3. Check whether your program fulfills the desired function!

Task (2)

Just as with switching on the system, accepting and/or switching on "L_MAN" (Q 4.2) and "L_AUTO" (Q 4.3) is also to happen using "S_M/A_ModeSelect" (I 0.4). Every time there is a mode change, the momentary contact "T_ M/A _Accept" (I 0.5) must be pressed once more. Use the bit memories "M_Aux_Man_ON" (M 15.2) and "M_Aux_Auto_ON" (M 15.3) for the required edge detections.



Page 21


SIEMENS

Unconditional Jump (Regardless of the RLO)

LAD

Network 1

FBD

NEW1 ( JMP )

Network 1

NEW1 JMP

Network 1

JU NEW1

Network 2

Network 2

Network 2

Network x

• Network x

Network x

NEW1

M5.5 I/ I

•

I 4.7

M69.0

)

SIMATIC S7

NEW1

M5.5

M69.0

1 4.7

Date: File:


4

18.09.2009 SERV1_09E.22

NEW1: AN M5.54 AN 14.7 = M69.0


Jump Instruction

With jump instructions, you can jump individual instructions or even whole networks so that these are not executed. Jumps can be made both forwards and backwards. The jump instruction and the jump destination must both be in the same block (max. jump length = 64kbyte). The jump destination must be unique within this block, that is, it may only exist once. Jump instructions can be used in FBs, FCs and OBs.

Jump Label

A jump label (also called a "Label") marks the location in the block where program execution is to continue from after a successful jump. In STL, the jump label is located to the left of an instruction; in FBD and LAD, it is always at the beginning of a network. You will find the jump label symbol in LAD and FBD in the Program Elements browser: Program Elements 9 Jumps 9 LABEL. The name of the jump label can consist of up to 4 characters of which the first must be a letter (in STL the special character "_" is also permitted).

JMP / JU


An unconditional jump instruction causes a program jump to a label regardless of the RLO.


Page 22


SIEMENS

Conditional Jump (Dependent on RLO)

FBD

LAD

Jump if RLO=0

1 0.1

I 0.0

Jump if RLO=1

1 0.0

NEW1 JMP)

-I

I 0.2

1 0.3

1 0.1 —

1 0.2

NEW2 (JMPN)

SIMATIC S7

Date: Filer

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserve:

1 0.3 —

18.09.2009 SERV109E.23

JMP

A 1 0.0 A 1 0.1 JC NEW1

NEW2 JMPN

A 1 0.2 A 1 0.3 JCN NEW2

NEW1

21 g SITRAIN

gr


JC

The "JC" conditional jump is only executed if the RLO is "1". If the RLO is "0", the jump is not executed, the RLO is set to "1" and program execution continues with the next instruction.

JCN

The "JON" conditional jump is only executed if the RLO is "0". If the RLO is "1", the jump is not executed and program execution continues with the next instruction.

Note

STL provides additional jump operations, which are discussed in an advanced programming course.

SITRAIN


Page 23


SIEMENS Digital Operations

S_CUD C S_CU 9 S_CD --[SC] 9 --[CU) --[co]

9

9 S_PULE S_PEX... 9 SOOT 5_007S 9 S_OFFDT

Converter C BCD_I 9 I_BCD 9 I_DI C BCD_DI C DI_BCD DI_R 0 INV I C INV_DI C NEC. _I 0 NEG_DI NEG_R 0 ROUND C TRUNC C CEIL C FLOOR

--[SP] --[SE] - c --[5D] --[SS] C --[SF]

SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

Cornparato C EQ NE_I *:-. 9 GT J if LT _I C GE _I C LE _I 9 EQ_D NE_D C GT_D C LT_D GE_D C LE_D EQ_R NE_R C GT_R C LT_R C GE_R C LE_R

9 ADD _I 9 SUB _I 9 MUL 9 DIV J ADD_DI SUB_DI 9 MUL_DI C DIV_DI 9 MOD DI

Ed Bookmark Op ReEl on STEP 71

fled,

Index

Env

I

I

5lossay

ADD_R Add Real

d Symbol ADD_R — EN —1N1 —1N2

Floating-port frt.

C ADD_R

SUB_R MUL_R C DIV_R 9 ABS SQRT SQR C LN EXP 0 SIN 9 COS 0 TAN C ASIN ACOS ATAN

Date:

I

;were,

OUT —

ENO --

Palm

Maws

EN

BOOL

Neundeked I, 0, K D, L., T. C

Desci Minh Enable input First number to be added

1N1

REAL

1. 0, M. D. L or constant

1N2

REAL

1, 0,

Second number to be added

D, L or

constant OUT

REAL

I, 0, M, D. L

Result of addition

ENO

BOOL

1, O. M. D, L

Enable output

Description A signal state of 1 at the Enable input (EN) actuates the Add Real instruction. This Instruction adds inputs IN1 and IN2 The result can be scanned at output OUT tf either of the inputs or the result is not a floating-point number, the OV bit and OS bit are set to 1 and ENO is set to O. See also Evalualma the Bits of the Status Word voth Floating Point Instruction.

Status Word

writes

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.1

RR

f..C.1

CU

Shi

ES

48

EIA

8L4

EL

X

X

X

X

X

0

x

x

1

.1

.;

.


Page Contents Objectives ....................................................................................................................................................... 2 3 Acquiring, Processing and Outputting Data ....... 4 Integer (INT, 16-Bit Integer) Data Type ....... 5 Double Integer (DINT, 32-Bit Integer) Data Type ....... 6 REAL (Floating-point Number, 32 Bit) Data Type 7 The BCD Code for Inputting and Outputting Integers 8 Loading and Transferring Data ....... 9 Data Storage in Accumulator 1 Exercise 1: Number Formats ...................................................................................................................... 10 11 S5 Counter Functions Counters: Function Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 12 Exercise 2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18) ................................................................... 13 14 S5 Timer Functions Timers: ON Delay (SD) ................................................................................................................................. 15 Exercise 3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17) 16 Conversion Operations BCD <-> Integer ................................................................................................... 17 Comparison Operations ................................................................................................................................ 18 Basic Mathematical Functions 19 Exercise 4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19) ............................................................................. 20 If You Want to Know More 21 Additional Exercise 5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17) ...................................... 22 Additional Exercise 6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging ............................................. 23 Counters: Bit Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 24 Timers: Stored ON Delay (SS) .................................................................................................................. 25 Timers: Pulse (SP) ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Timers: Extended Pulse (SE) 27 Timers: OFF Delay (SF) 28 Time Formats for Traditional S5 Timers in STEP 7 ................................................................................. 29 Timers: Bit Instructions 30 Conversion Operations I -> DI -> REAL 31 Digital Logic Operations ............................................................................................................................... 32 Application Example: Digital Edge Detection 33 SITRAIN


Page 1

ST-SERV1 Digital Operations

10

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will be familiar with the INT, DINT, REAL data types and the BCD display be able to apply the selectable display formats in the "Monitor / Modify Variable" test function understand the "Load" and "Transfer" instructions be able to apply and program the S5 counter and timer functions understand conversion operations for number formats be able to apply and program the comparison operations understand basic mathematical functions

A SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.



Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.2

Page 2

SITRAIN Training tor Automation and Industrial Solutions


SIEMENS

Acquiring, Processing and Outputting Data MEM

Operating + monitoring processes

248 0 1 ■ 0

01 81 11 5 IN IN IN MI

•• •

Thumbwheel buttons, Potentiometer, 7-segment display

Operator Panel

Control unit

such as MPI

Processing the values

All AO

DI/ DO such as PROFIBUS

Field devices

Process controller

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.3

I

ttr


Binary/Digital Processing

True logic control systems are recognizable in the fact that they exclusively process binary data. The performance of today's control computer, as well as tasks in the data processing, quality control areas, among others, has increased the importance of digital data processing using PLCs. Digital process variables can be found in all areas of open-loop control - such as in connected devices for process operating and monitoring or in the control of field devices.

Operating and Monitoring

The goal of process monitoring is to provide the operator with up-to-the-minute information about the working machine or system quickly, concisely and clearly as well as the opportunity to intervene and control and influence the process. While in the past mostly simple, that is, "dumb" input and output devices, such as 7-segment displays and thumbwheel buttons were used to display and enter digital values, today "intelligent" operating and monitoring devices are frequently connected to a PLC.

Field Devices

Today as well, field devices that acquire process data or that control the process are supplied directly with digital variables through field bus systems. The connection of field devices, such as drives or weighing systems, using analog input and output modules is becoming more and more a thing of the past.

Formats

Depending on the type of device connected, different number formats for the coding of data are used to transmit data between device and PLC, as well as for storing and processing data in the PLC.



Page 3


10

SIEMENS

Integer (INT, 16-Bit Integer) Data Type Value range

-32768 to +32767

Arithmetic operations: such as + I, * I,
(without sign: 0 to 65535)

Display Formats: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DEC: +.662

BIN.: 2#

0000001010010110 429

,' Sign s, positive ............. numbers;

HEX: W#16#0 2 9 6 without sign

+2°

+24

2

+2 +2' + 662

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

BIN.: 2# 11 1 1 1 0

DEC: 662

,/ Sign ‘‘, negative numbers/

SIMATIC S7

4 3 2

1

0

01010

HEX: W#16#F D6 A without sign

+214

+2'3 +212 +21 +210 +25

Representation as Twos Gomplement

10 x 16° =10

6 x16'= 96

+25 +25 +23 +2' - 662

Date: File:


6 5

01

6 x 162 = 6 9 x 16' = 144 2 x 162 = 512 662

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.4

13 x 163 = 3328 5 x 163 = 61440 64874

A


Integer Data Type (16-bit Integer)

An Integer data type value is a whole number value, that is, a value without a decimal point. SIMATIC S7 stores Integer data type values with sign in 16 bit code. This results in the value range shown in the slide above. As well, SIMATIC S7 provides arithmetic operations for processing Integer values.

Decimal

STEP7 uses the Decimal (not BCD!) display format to specify the constants of the Integer data type with sign and without explicit format description. The use of constant Integer values in the Binary and Hexadecimal display formats is possible in principle, but because of the poor legibility, they are more or less not suitable. For this reason, the syntax of STEP7 provides the specification of Integer values only in the decimal display format.

Binary

In a digital computer system, all values are stored in a binary-coded form. Only the digits 0 and 1 are available in the binary number system. Base 2 of this numbers system results from the number of available digits. Accordingly, the value of every position of a binary number results from a power of Base 2. This is also expressed in the format specification 2#.... . Negative values are represented as binary numbers in twos complement. In this representation, the most significant bit (bit no. 15 for the Integer data type) has the value - 215. Since this value is greater than the sum of all residual values, this bit also has the sign information. That is, if this bit = 0, then the value is positive; if the bit is = 1, then the value is negative. The conversion of a binary number into a decimal number is made by adding the values of the positions that have a 1 (see slide).


Page 4


SIEMENS

Double Integer (DINT, 32-Bit Integer) Data Type L# -2147483648 to L#+2147483647

Value range

Operations: such as + D, * D,
(without sign: 0 to 4294967295)

Display Formats: 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BIN.: 2# 0 0 0 010 0 0 010 0 0 011 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 00 0

DEC: L# +540809

o o 011 o o 1

,' Sign s, positive `, numbers;

HEX: DW#16# 0 0 0 8 4 0 8 9 (without sign) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BIN.: 2# 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 11

DEC: L# -540809

F Roiresentation 84

L

4

.

HEX: DW#16# F F F 7 BF 7 7

t 11111t1A-:

(without sign)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Double Integer

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.5


Nr Automation and Industrial Solutions

SIMATIC S7 stores Double Integer data type values with sign as 32 bit code.

(32-Bit Integer)

This results in the value range shown in the slide above. As well, SIMATIC S7 provides arithmetic operations for processing DINT values.

Decimal

STEP7 uses a decimal number (not BCD!) to specify a constant of the Double Integer data type with sign and the format L# for "long" (double word, 32 bit). When a value smaller than -32768 or greater than 32767 is specified, the format L# is automatically added. For negative numbers smaller than -32768, the user must specify the format as L# - (for example: L# -32769). This is imperative if the value is to be further processed arithmetically as a double integer since you would otherwise work with false values (value + sign)!

Hexadecimal

The hexadecimal numbers system provides 16 different digits (0 to 9 and A to F). This results in Base 16 of this numbers system. Accordingly, the value of every position of a hexadecimal number results from a power of Base 16. Hexadecimal numbers are specified with the format W# for the dimension (W = word = 16 bit) or DW# (DW = double word = 32 bit) and 16# for identifying the basic numbering system. The number of specifiable bits is variable from 1 to 8 whereby missing (unspecified) bits are filled with leading zero digits. The digits A to F correspond to the decimal values 10 to 15. The value 15 is the last value that can be binary-coded - without sign - with 4 bits. Out of this correlation, the simple conversion of a binary number into a hexadecimal number and vice versa can be obtained. In this way, four binary bits each can easily make up one digit of a hexadecimal number.



Page 5


10

SIEMENS

REAL (Floating-point Number, 32 Bit) Data Type -3.402823.10+38 to -1.175495.10-38 , 0.0, +1.175495.10-38 to +3.402823.10+38

Value range

Operations: such as + R, * R,
sin, acos, In, exp, SQR

General format of a Real number = (Sign) • (to • (2e-127)

Example:

0.75

Sign of Real no. e = Exponent (8 Bit) I I I

f = Mantissa (23 Bit)

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

10 1

11111

0

6 5 4

3 2

1

0

1 0000000000000000000000

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 2-12-22-32_4

2-23

Real no. = +1.5 * 2 126-127 = 0.75

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.6


gig'


Real

The previously described INT and DINT data types are used to store whole number values with sign. Accordingly, only operations that supply a whole number value as the result can be performed with these data types. In cases where analog process variables such as voltage, current, and temperature have to be processed, it becomes necessary to use Real values (real numbers, "decimal numbers"). In order to be able to represent such values, binary digits have to be defined whose value is less than 1 (power of base 2 with negative exponent).

Real Format

In order to be able to form the greatest possible value range within a defined memory capacity (for SIMATIC S7: double word, 32 bit) (see slide), you must be able to select the decimal point position. Early on, IEEE defined a format for floating-point numbers. This format was laid down in IEC 61131 and was included in STEP 7. This format makes it easy to process a variable decimal point position. In a binary coded floating-point number, a portion of the binary digits contain the mantissa (23 Bit) and the rest contain the exponent (8 Bit) and the sign of the floating-point number. When you specify real values, you do so without specifying the format. After you enter a constant real value (for example: 0.75), the Editor automatically makes a conversion to scientific notation (for example: 7.5000e-001).

Application

Floating-point numbers are used for "analog value processing", among others. A great advantage of floating-point numbers is in the number of operations possible with such numbers. These include, in addition to the standard operations such as: +, * , / also instructions such as sin, cos, exp, In, etc, that are used mainly in closed-loop control algorithms.



Page 6


SIEMENS

The BCD Code for Inputting and Outputting Integers Conversion operations:

16 Bit: - 999 to + 999 32 Bit: -9999999 to + 9999999

Value range

r

r

r

16 Bit:

(no arithmetic!)

■

■

■

NEI

0

2

9

6

•••••••••••••••• I BIN.: 2# 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 2

9

6

0

2

9

6

0

2

9

6

Sign (+)

HEX: W#16# Sign (+)

0

0 II

III

32 Bit:

BTI, BTD, ITB, DTB

I

0

II—I—II—I—II

I

II

I

DEC: + 662

II

BIN.: 2# Oxxx 0000000000000000001010010110 HEX: DW#16#

0

0

SIMATIC S7

0

Date: File:


0

2

9

DEC: + 662

6

V

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.7


Origin

In the past, the specification and visualization of whole numbers was done exclusively using simple, mechanical thumbwheel buttons and digital displays. These thumbwheel buttons and digital displays were connected to the PLC's digital input and output modules through parallel wiring.

BCD Code

Each digit of a decimal number is encoded in four bit positions (a nibble). Four bits are used because the highest decimal digit, 9, requires at least four bit positions in binary code. Decimal No. 0 1 2 3 4 5

Negative Numbers

Data Formats

BCD Code 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101

Decimal No. 6 7 8 9 10 to 15

BCD Code 0110 0111 1000 1001 not allowed

So that negative numbers can also be specified using a BCD thumbwheel button, STEP 7 codes the sign in the most significant bit of the most significant digit (see slide). A sign bit = 0 indicates a positive number. A sign bit = 1 indicates a negative number. STEP 7 recognizes 16-bit-coded (sign + 3 digits) and 32-bit-coded (sign + 7 digits) BCD numbers. There is no data format for specifying BCD-coded values in STEP 7. You can, however, specify the decimal number whose BCD code is to be given, as a HEX number. The binary code of the HEX number and that of the BCD-coded decimal number is identical. As you can see in the slide, the DEC data format is not suitable for specifying BCD coded numbers!



Page 7


10

SIEMENS

Loading and Transferring Data

1:1111•11111111111■11M111111110m.alusi FC1 : loading and transferring Data ' network

IN

network 4: in view !HD

MOVE INNS/Wall IN OUT 30

MOW ISO

1464111111Scsato — IN

41

PC1 loading and transferring Data

4: in view LAD

11#160CAll IN INC

INNSINNOneN OUT —NI130

I MMENIM

MIMEMW

IrC1 : loading and transferring Data ' network

(ACCU 1)

4: in view STL

L

li016SCAFI 30 NOP 0

12345678

AlB2C3D4

oats oafs cats

12345678 12345671 12345ST•

41 I

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.8

__241

Mr


MOVE (LAD/FBD)

If the EN input is active, the value at input "IN" is copied to the address specified at output "OUT". "ENO" has the same signal state as "EN".

L and T (STL)

Load and transfer instructions are executed regardless of the RLO. Data is exchanged through the accumulator ACCU1.

Standard / ACCU1

Accumulator 1 (ACCU1) is the main register in the CPU. The load instruction writes the value from the source address right-justified into the (standard) accumulator 1 and pads the remaining bits (32 bits in all) with "0"s. The transfer instruction copies some or all of the contents of accumulator 1 to the specified memory address without clearing the contents of accumulator 1 (see next page). All arithmetic and digital operations store their result in accumulator 1.

ACCU2


When a load instruction is executed, the old contents of accumulator 1 are first shifted to accumulator 2 and accumulator 1 is cleared (reset to "0") before the new value is written into accumulator 1.


Page 8


SIEMENS

Data Storage in Accumulator 1 Contents of Accumulator 1 Program

L MB 0

000 00 00

L MW 0

000 00 00

MBO

OIO

oie 0 0 0 0 0 0 01

I

I

0

7

MBO

MB1

I

0

7

15

MB1

MBO

0 0 0 0 0 0 01

15

23

31

L MD 0

00 00 00

23

31

Load

OIO

7

15

23

31

MB2

I

MB3

T QD 4 QD 4

II/Transfer

T QW 4

411

QW 4

T QB 4

41

QB 4

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.9


IsZ


General

Accumulators are auxiliary memories in the CPU for data exchange between various addresses as well as for comparison and mathematical operations. The S7-300 usually has two accumulators with 32 bits each and the CPU 318-2 and the S7-400 each have four accumulators also with 32 bits each.

Load

The load instruction loads the contents of the specified byte, word or double word into accumulator (ACCU) 1.

Transfer

When a transfer instruction is executed, the contents of ACCU 1 are retained. Consequently, the same information can be transferred to different destinations. If only one byte is transferred, the eight bits farthest to the right are used (see slide).



Page 9


10

SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Number Formats IiirMEM ,.

111/111

1ate!

Tade Edt Insert PLC Variabb View Options Wmdow Help

DIcallal

_Arr

JoJXJ jts_j2ii

6 Afil z,Lf

_ DEC EN 0

BIN

I 0 7 "T_AcknVVermRestart"

BOOL

I 0.0 _"T_Systern_04s#

BOOL

I 1.0 "TAcknFeur

BOOL

W 2 _"WThumbw"

HEX

WV 2 "W_Thurnbw"

BIN

W 2 "W_Thurnbw"

DEC

OVV

6 "OVV_DicrOlsp"

I-EX

OW

6 _"OVV_DigDisp"

BIN

OW

6 "GiVV_DigDisp"

DEC

WV

20 "MW_ACT"

DEC

WV

20 "MW_ACT"

HEX

V416/0084

MVV

20 9,1W ACT"

BIN

2#0000_0000_1000_0100

BIN

V 2/00000000

MD 80

DEC

L0132

MD 80

HEX

DVV/1 6/00000084

MB 20

10 132

201000_0100 4—

MB 21

L#1 32

. • • -• • ON 83 Accessed in betW40•.....

-31677

MD

FLOATING_POINT

132.0

DEC

L#1124335616

84

MD 84

Date: File:


Display Formats

132 0

O

SERVI _A157_300_5tatIon ...\My_Prodram

SIMATIC S7

Invalid value '

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.10

Abs <5.2

". "1 SITRAIN Training for r.


Different display formats can be selected in both the "Monitor / Modify Variables" and the "Monitor (Block)" test function to display variables or register contents. Every variable can be monitored with several display format options. Depending on the variable's data type, it becomes apparent that monitoring with the appropriate display format makes more sense. BOOL:

Display a single bit (only possible for a variable of the BOOL data type)

BIN:

Display the individual bits of a variable (makes sense for variables of the BYTE, WORD, DWORD data types)

HEX:

Display the contents of a variable as hexadecimal number (BCD) (makes sense for variables of the BYTE, WORD, DWORD data types)

DEC:

Display the contents of a variable as decimal number (not BCD!) with sign (makes sense for variables of the INT, DINT data types)

FLOATING_ Display the contents of a variable as floating-point number POINT (makes sense for variables of the REAL data type) Addressing

The SIMATIC S7 memory is universally byte-oriented. Accordingly, memory word MW 20, for example, contains the memory bytes MB 20 (high byte) and MB 21 (low byte, see slide), the memory double-word MD 80, the memory bytes MB 80, 81, 82 and 83. With absolute accesses to variables (such as, with L MD 80), you must make sure that the dimension of the access (here MD...) as well as the address (always equal to the address of the high byte, here 80) is correct. Through an inadvertent "accessing in between", an invalid value would be loaded (such as, with L MW 83, see slide). Such errors can be avoided with the symbolic addressing of variables (here L "MD_DINT").

What to Do

Open the given variable table "VAT_NumberFormats" and specify various values for the output and memory words with "Monitor Variables" or set the different values on the BCD thumbwheel button IW 2. In the process, monitor the values in the different number formats.


Page 10

-


SIEMENS

S5 Counter Functions FBD

LAD

A 10.4 CU C5 A 10.5 CD C5 A 10.3 L C#5 S C5 A 10.7 R C5 L C5 T MW4 LC C5 T QW12 A C5 Q8.3

C5 S_CUD

10.4

Q 8.3

CU

Q

CD

CV — MW 4

10.5 10.3 S CV_BCD — QW 12 C#5

PV

10.7

7 SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.11

1

n SITRAIN Training for

mi

,17


Counter Value

A 16-bit word is reserved for each counter in the system data memory. This word is used for storing the counter's value (0 to 999) in binary code.

Count Up

When the RLO at the "CU" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter's current value is incremented by 1 (upper limit = 999).

Count Down

When the RLO at the "CD" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter's current value is decremented by 1 (lower limit = 0).

Set Counter

When the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter is set to the value at the "PV" input.

Reset Counter

When the RLO at the Reset changes from "0" to "1", the counter's value is set to zero. If the reset condition is fulfilled (stays "high"), the counter cannot be set and counting in either direction is not possible.

PV

The preset value (0 to 999) is specified in BCD format at the "PV" input as: • as a constant (C#...) • a BCD format through a data interface.

CV / CV_BCD

The counter value can be loaded into the accumulator at the binary output as an Integer value (CV) or at the decimal output as a BCD number (CV_BCD) and then transferred from there to other addresses.

Q

The signal state of the counter can be checked at output "Q": • Counter value n: =0 -› Q = 0 • Counter value n: 1<= n <= 999 -› Q = 1


Page 11


10

SIEMENS

SI MATIC S7

Date: File:


Notes

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.12


When the counter reaches the value 999 during count up, the counter value stays at 999 with subsequent count up signals. Likewise, when the counter reaches the value 0, the counter value stays at 0 with subsequent count down signals. If an up count and a down count signal occurs at the same time, the count remains the same.



Page 12


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18)

DO

DI I 0.0

Act Quantity

T_System_ON

I 0.1

T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM

I 0.2

T_Jog_RIGHT

I 0.3

T_Jog_LEFT

I 0.4

S_M/A_ModeSelect

I 0.5

T_M/A_Accept

a

Q 4.1

L_MAN

Q 4.2

L_AUTO

Q 4.3

Log

7

U U

"QW_DigDisp" (QW 6) -15V...+15V

All

a

0

All

a 0

a

•

Ail A01 A02

0

I= CI

0 8 1 5 0 0

I=1

I=1

Al2

0 0 All

0

Al2

0 0

0 A01 0

0 A02

0

z SIMATIC S7

Date: 18.09.2009 File: SERV1_108.13


1 SiT R AlN T rainin for IA Automation and lnclstrial Solutions

Function Up Till Now In AUTO mode, parts are transported from Bay 1 or Bay 2 to the Light Barrier Bay until they pass through the light barrier. The transportation function starts as soon as a part is placed on Bay 1 or Bay 2 and the associated bay's momentary contact is pressed and it ends as soon as the part has passed the light barrier. Task

What to Do

•

The parts transported in AUTO mode are to be counted as soon as they have passed through the "LB" (I 8.0) light barrier ("LB" 0 4 1).

•

The number of transported parts (ACTUAL quantity) is to be recorded with the S5 counter C 18 and displayed on the BCD digital display.

•

The counter is to be reset when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").

1. Program the counting of the transported parts in the block "FC_Count" (FC18). Use the S5 counter C 18. 2. Program the call of FC 18 in OB 1.

SITRAIN


Page 13


10

SIEMENS

S5 Timer Functions Pulse Timer (SP)

Extended Pulse (SE)

T44

T44 S_PEXT

S_PULSE BI — MWO

1 0.7 — S S5T#35s —

TV BC

10.5 — R

BI — MWO

1 0.7 — S

QW12 M8.5

S5T#35s — TV BC I 0.5 — R

Q

QW12 M8.5

H=

Q

ON Delay (SD) T44 S_ODT I 0.7 — S

B1 — MWO

S5T#35s Tv BCE

QW12 M8.5

10.5 — R Stored ON Delay (SS)

OFF Delay (SF)

T44

T44

S_ODTS

S_OFFDT

1 0.7 — S

BI — MWO

S5T#35s — TV BC 10.5 — R

1 0.7 — S

QW12 M8.5

S5T#35s — TV

Q

SIMATIC S7

10.5 —

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.14

R

BI — MWO BCD— m8 QW512 Q

A

V.

=


General

In control engineering, the following traditional timer functions (S5 timer functions) have long since established themselves: • Pulse Timer (S_PULSE or SP), • Extended Pulse (S_PEXT or SE), • ON Delay (S_ODT or SD), • Stored ON Delay (S_ODTS or SS), • OFF Delay (S_OFFDT or SF)

Memory

Timers have their own reserved memory area in the CPU in which each timer function occupies one word. To find out how many timer words and thus timer functions are available in a CPU, please check the CPU's technical data.

Time Value

The time value can be specified via a variable (such as MW50) or - as shown in the slide - via a constant. The syntax for specifying a constant time value is (can be entered with or without underscore): S5T#aH_bM_cS_dMS e.g. S5T#1h_20m_10s

Minimum Time Value S5T#10ms Maximum Time Value S5T#2h_46m_30s



Page 14


SIEMENS

Timers: ON Delay (SD)

I 0.7

LAD

FBD

T4 S_ODT

S_EVERZ

I I S5T#35s -TV 1 0.5 R 1 1

T4

Q8.5 ) B1 — MWO

I 0.7 — S S5T#35s — Tv

BCD — QW12

BI BCD

MWO —

QW12 Q8.5

I 0.5 —

RLO at S RLO at R

>Example

Time operation

A 10.7 L S5T#35s SD T4 A 10.5 R T4 L T4 T MWO LC T4 T QW12 A T4 = Q8.5

Q

1 1

0.01s <— 0.1s <-1s <10s

Data type "S5T1ME"

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


0 0 0 0

18.09.2009 SERV1_108.15

1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1

Units of time: 0 to 999 (BCD-coded)



Start

The timer starts when the RLO at the Start input "S" changes from "0" to "1". The timer starts with the time value specified at the Time Value "TV" for as long as the signal state at input "S" =1.

Reset

When the RLO at the Reset input "R" changes from "0" to "1", the current time value and the time base are deleted and the output "Q" is reset.

Digital Outputs

The current time value can be read as a binary number at the "BI" output and as a BCD number at the "BCD" output. The current time value is the initial value of "TV" minus the value for the time that has elapsed since the timer was started.

Binary Output

The signal at the "0" output changes to "1" when the timer has expired without error and input "S" has signal state "1". If the signal state at the "S" input changes from "1" to "0" before the timer has expired, the timer stops running and output "Q" has a signal state "0".

Note


In STEP 7, you can replace the traditional timer and counter functions with IEC —conforming system function blocks (SFB). The use of system function blocks is dealt with in an advanced programming course.


Page 15


10

SIEMENS

Exercise 3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17) DI

DO

I 0.0 I 0.1

\

I 0.2 I 0.3

N

T_Jog_RIGHT

\g

T_Jog_LEFT

\gi

S_M/A_ModeSelect

I 0.4

O

T_System_ON T_System_OFF

O

I 0.5

L_SYSTEM

Q 4.1

L_MAN

Q 4.2

L_AUTO

Q 4.3

L_Conv Fault

Q 5.0

T_M/A_Accept N

O

N

O

1 1.0

CI

\

T_Ackn _Fault

O

\

O

\

\

Ig

CI

\

O

\

N

O

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Task

What to Do:

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.1 6

SITRAIN Training for . V:


The transport functions while in AUTO mode are to be monitored. The monitoring is to function as follows: •

If the transport function takes longer than the 6 second monitoring time (if a part does not pass through the light barrier within 6 seconds of its start time), then there is a fault in the system and the conveyor motor is automatically switched off (logic in FC 16).

•

A fault is displayed with a 2Hz flashing light (bit no. 3 of the CPU clock memory byte MB 10) on the simulator LED "L_Conv_Fault" (Q 5.0)

•

A fault can be acknowledged via the simulator momentary contact "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0)

•

The indicator lights at Bays 1 and 2 only once more show a constant light (= place a new part), when the fault has been acknowledged (lock-out in FC 14)

1. Program the described monitoring function in FC 17 -

For the (timely) monitoring, use the S5 timer T 17 as ON Delay (SD)

-

When a fault exists, set the memory bit M 17.0 in order to be able to further interlock it in FC 14 and FC 16

2. Program the call of FC 17 in OB 1 3. Program the required lock-outs in FC 14 and the switching off of the conveyor motor in FC16 4. Download the modified blocks into the CPU and test the function



Page 16


SIEMENS

Integer

Conversion Operations BCD I= MI MI NI

Number entered in BCD > Task Number displayed in BCD

0 81 5 OM

1.......,

Conversion BCD->Integer

Conversion BCD<-Integer

FBD

LAD

ENO OUT

IW4 — IN

OUT — MW20

EN MW20

ENO

IW4 — IN

MW10 L ITB QW12 T

I_BCD

I_BCD

MW10

IW4 L BTI MW20 T

BCD_I

BCD_I

EN

<=1

User program with Integer math operations

EN

ENO

IN

OUT — QW12

EN MW10— IN

OUT — QW12 ENO 1

SIMATIC S7

Date: File


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.17

4

1.SITRAIN Training for

.4

,1kr


Application

Since there are no arithmetic operations for the direct processing of BCDcoded values, these have to be converted into arithmetic data types (I, DI or R) through format conversions.

Conversion Operations

S7-300 / 400 has a series of conversion operations available– here a few examples: BCD_I (in STL: BTI) converts a 3-digit BCD number (+/- 999) into a 16-bit integer I_BCD (in STL: ITB) converts a 16-bit integer (+/- 999) ) into a 3-digit BCD number

Inputs and Outputs of the LAD/FBD Elements: EN

The execution of the conversion operation can be determined as follows via the EN input: EN is not connected: the conversion is always (regardless of the RLO) executed Logic operation at EN is fulfilled (RLO = 1): the conversion is executed Logic operation at EN is not fulfilled (RLO = 0): the conversion is not executed

IN

The value delivered to IN is converted and the result is output to OUT.

ENO / OUT

ENO = 0 because RLO=0 at EN input - OUT not written The variable delivered to OUT is not written, that is, it keeps its original value ENO = 0 because error occurred 4 OUT contains invalid value The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with an invalid value ENO = 1 (instruction was executed without error): OUT contains result The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with the result


Page 17


10

SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


CMP

n SITRAIN Training for

An

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.18

Ir


You can use comparison instructions to compare the following pairs of numerical values: D R

Compare integers (on the basis of 16 bit fixed-point number) Compare integers (on the basis of 32 bit fixed-point number) Compare floating-point numbers (on 32 bit real number basis = IEEE floating-point numbers).

If the result of the comparison is "true", then the RLO of the operation is "1", otherwise it is "0". The values at inputs IN1 and IN2 are compared for conformity with the specified condition:



..

IN1

is equal to

<>

IN1

is not equal to

> <

IN1 IN1

is greater than is less than

IN2

>=

IN1

is greater than or equal to

IN2

<=

IN1

is less than or equal to

IN2.

Page 18

IN2 IN2 IN2


SIEMENS

Basic Mathematical Functions FBD

LAD

Addition

Subtraction

EN ENO MW4 - IN1 1N2 OUT MW6 MW10

MW4 MW10

SUB _I

MD66

EN ENO MD40 -IN1 1N2 OUT — MD32 MD4

EN MD40 - 1 Ni 1N2 MD4

MD12

Date: File:


Arithmetic Operations

ENO —

T

MW6

L L -I T

MW8 MW12

L L *D T

MD6 MD12

L L /R T

MD40 MD4

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.19

MW6

OUT

ENO —

OUT

MD66

ENO —

DIV_R

DIV_R

SIMATIC S7

MW4 MW10

MUL_DI

EN MD6 - IN1 1N2 MD12

EN ENO IN1 1N2

L L +I

SUB _I

MULDI MD6

Division

EN 1N1 1N2

EN MW8 - 1 Ni 1N2 MW12

EN ENO MW8 - 1 Ni MW12 1N2 OUT —MW6

Multiplication

OUT — MW6

ADD _I

ADD _I

OUT

MD32

ENO —

MW6

MD66

MD32



S7-300 / 400 has a series of arithmetic operations for the processing of variables of the integer (I), double integer (DI) and real (R) arithmetic data types.

Inputs and Outputs of the LAD/FBD Elements: The execution of the operation can be determined as follows via the EN input: EN EN is not connected: the operation is always (regardless of the RLO) executed Logic operation at EN is fulfilled (RLO = 1): the operation is executed Logic operation at EN is not fulfilled (RLO = 0): the operation is not executed IN1 / IN2

The arithmetic calculation is applied to the values delivered to IN1 and IN2 (in STL, the value loaded first with the value loaded second, in general: ACCU2 with ACCU1) and the result is output to OUT.

ENO / OUT

ENO = 0 because RLO=0 at EN input 4 OUT not written The variable delivered to OUT is not written, that is, it keeps its original value ENO = 0 because error occurred 4 OUT contains invalid value The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with an invalid value ENO = 1 (instruction was executed without error): OUT contains result The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with the result

SITRAIN


Page 19


10

SIEMENS

Exercise 4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19) DI I 0.0 I 0.1 I 0.2 1 0.3

O


\

L MAN

O

T_Jog_LEFT

L AUTO

O

S_M/A_ModeSelect

O

T_M/A_Accept

I 0.4

\

I 0.5

\

0 0

a L_SYSTEM

T_Jog_RIGHT \

SETPOINT Quantity

DO

O

\

•

Q 4.1

7

0 8 1 5

Q 4.2 0

ACTUAL Quantity

I=1

0

Q 4.3

0

0

0

"IW_Thumbw" (IW 2)

• •

"QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)

•

O

\

O

\

I 1.0

T_Ackn_Fault

L_Conv_Fault

O

\

O

\

•

I •

Q 5.0

•

• •

O

\

O

\

O

\

•

O

\

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Function Up Till Now in FC 18

New Function FC19

What to Do

ACT=SET ** "L_Bay-LB" (Q 8.4)

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.20

Acknowledgement "T_Bay-LB" (I 8.4)


•

The parts transported in AUTO mode are counted (with the S5 counter C18) as soon as they have passed through the light barrier "LB" ("LB": 0 4 1)

•

The number of transported parts (ACT quantity) is displayed on the BCD digital display.

•

The counter is reset when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").

•

The counting of the transported parts is no longer to be done with the counter C 18, but rather by addition using MW 20.

•

The SETPOINT Quantity of how many parts are to be transported can be set using the BCD thumbwheel. When the given SETPOINT Quantity is reached, it is displayed with the message "ACT=SET' on the conveyor model LED "L_Bay-LB" (Q 8.4).

•

As long as the message "ACT=SET' (Q 8.4) exists, the indicator lights at Bay 1 and Bay 2 are dark (= no new part can be place on the conveyor - lock-out in FC 14) and no new transport function can be started (- lock-out in FC 16).

•

The message "ACT=SET' can be acknowledged using the conveyor's momentary contact "T Bay-LB" (I 8.4) by resetting the actual quantity (MW 20). Also, when the system is switched off, the ACT Quantity (MW 20) is reset to "0".

Copy the block "FC_Count_Add" (FC 19) from the S7 program "Chap10_digital_Op" of the project "SERV1_B" into your S7 program called "My_Program" of your project called "My_Project" 2. In OB1, call the new FC 19 instead of the old FC 18 3. In the blocks "FC_Signal" (FC 14) and "FC_ConvMotor" (FC 16), program the appropriate lock-outs

1.

Note When you set the SETPOINT Quantity, the CPU occasionally goes into the STOP state because the BCD thumbwheel "bounces" when you change the numbers or it delivers invalid BCD values.



Page 20


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Note

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.21





Page 21


SIEMENS

Additional Exercise 5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17) Cony Fault M 17.0

3— Cony 2— Fault Counter C 17 le

M/A AUTO Q 4.3

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.22


Function Up Till Now The transport functions in AUTO mode are monitored. If the transport function takes longer than the 6 second monitoring time (if a part does not pass through the light barrier within 6 seconds of its start time), then there is a conveyor belt fault condition in the system and the conveyor motor is automatically switched off (logic in FC 16). Task:

The conveyor belt fault conditions in AUTO mode are to be counted. After 3 conveyor belt fault conditions have occurred, the AUTO mode is to be switched off for safety reasons. To start a new transport function, the fault condition must be acknowledged (as already programmed) and the AUTO mode must be switched on once more.

What to Do:

1. In FC 17, in a new network, program the counting of the conveyor belt fault conditions using the S5 counter C 17 as the count down counter. -

When the "Auto" mode is switched on, the counter is set to 3 (number of conveyor belt fault conditions until the AUTO mode is switched off)

-

The counter counts down 1 every time a conveyor belt fault condition occurs (M 17.0 = "1").

2. In FC 15 (operator mode section), program the switching off (reset) of the AUTO mode after three conveyor belt fault conditions. The AUTO mode must switch off when the counter C 17 has counted down from 3 to 0 or when its binary state changes from 1 4 0. In FC 15 "FC_Mode", use the bit memory M 15.7 as auxiliary bit memory to record the negative edge of C 17.



Page 22


SIEMENS

Additional Exercise 6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging Lock-out —> time LEFT

Jog RIGHT I 0.2 Cony motor RIGHT (Q8.5) Lock-out RIGHT T 15 (SF)

-

Jog LEFT I 0.3

lock-out time RIGHT

Cony motor LEFT (Q8.6)

<—

Lock-out LEFT T 16 (SF) /

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


A r ,

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.23

41



The Function Jogging In MANUAL mode (Q 4.2 = '), you can jog the conveyor motor to the RIGHT in FC 16 Up Till Now: and to the LEFT using the simulator momentary contacts I 0.2 and I 0.3. Task:

In order to avoid too great a load change, it should only be possible to jog the conveyor motor in the opposite direction after it has been jogged to the RIGHT or to the LEFT after a lock-out time of 2 seconds (see slide). If, for example, the motor has been jogged to the RIGHT, then it can only be jogged back to the LEFT after the lock-out time of 2 seconds has expired.

What to Do:

1. In FC 16 program the S5 timers T 15 and T 16 as the lock-out timers RIGHT and LEFT as OFF Delay (SF). Start T 15 when the jog condition RIGHT is fulfilled and T 16 when the jog condition LEFT is fulfilled. 2. Interlock the timer states to the jog conditions. The jog condition RIGHT may only be fulfilled when the lock-out time LEFT is no longer running (T 16 = '0') and vice versa. 3. Save the modified FC 16 and download it in the CPU 4. Check the modified function "Jog Conveyor" on the conveyor model

Solution Hint:

By using a "branch", you can integrate the timers in the two networks Jog Conveyor RIGHT and Jog Conveyor LEFT as follows: Editing a branch:

"K_C ony_

1. Select the connection where the branch is to be place 2. click on L* in the Editor toolbar

Jog condition LEFT ....* (Branch)

LEFT"

T 16 SF S5T#2s- TV



Page 23


10

SIEMENS

Counters: Bit Instructions LAD

FBD C5 SC

Network 1: I

0.0

C5

II

SC

I 0.0

( ) C#20

C#20

A L S

CV

1 0.0 C#20 C5

Network 2:

C5

C5

I 0.1

(CU)

I 0.1

I

A 1 0.1 CU C5

CU

Network 3:

I 0.2

C5 (CD)

C5 I

10.2 —I

CD

I

A 10.2 CD C5

I

A C5 = Q 4.0

Network 4:

C5

Q 4.0 )

SIMATIC S7

C5

I Date: File:


Bit Instructions

Q 4.0

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.24

_11

NtT


All counter functions can also operate with simple bit instructions. The similarities and differences between this method and the counter functions discussed so far are as follows: •

Similarities: Setting conditions at the "SC" input

•

-

Specification of the counter value

-

RLO change at the "CU" input

-

RLO change at the "CD" input

Differences: -

It is not possible to check the current counter value since there are no Binary (CV) or BCD (CV_BCD) outputs.

- There is no binary output Q in the graphical representation. Note


IEC-compliant counters can also be implemented in STEP 7. The use of system function blocks for implementing IEC counters is dealt with in an advanced programming course.


Page 24


SIEMENS

Timers: Stored ON Delay (SS)

I 0.7

LAD

FBD

T4 S_ODTS S Q

T4

II S5T#35s — TV 10.5 R I I

Q8.5 ( ) BI — MW0

S_ODTS I 0.7 — S S5T#35s —

BCD — QW12

TV

I 0.5 — R

BI BCD

MWO

QW12 Q8.5

1 0.7 A L S5T#35s SS T4 A 1 0.5 R T4 L T4 T MWO LC T4 T QW12 A T4 Q8.5 L

RLO at S RLO at R

> Example

Timer operation

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Start

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.25


The stored-on-delay timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1". The timer runs, starting with the time value specified at input "TV", and continues to run even if the signal at input "S" changes back to "0" during that time. If the signal at the start input changes from "0" to "1" again while the timer is still timing down, the timer starts again from the beginning.

Reset

When the RLO at reset input "R" changes from "0" to "1", the current time value and the time base are deleted and output "Q" is reset.

Binary Output

The signal state at output "0" changes to "1" when the timer has expired without error, regardless of whether the signal state at input "S" is still "1".



Page 25


10

SIEMENS

Timers: Pulse (SP) LAD T4 S_PULSE

I 0.7 I I S5T#35s I 0.5 I I

T4 S_PULSE

Q (8.5 )

BI —

TV

S

BI

S5T#35s — TV

BCD

10.7

BCD — QW12

R

Els

FBD

I 0.5 —

MWO QW12 Q8.5

A L SP A R L T LC T A

10.7 S5T#35s T4 I 0.5 T4 T4 MWO T4 QW12 T4 Q8.5

RLO at S RLO at R

> Example

Timer operation

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.26

A

‘r



Start

The pulse timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1". Output "Q" is also set to "1".

Reset

Output "0" is reset when: • the timer has expired, or • the start "S" signal changes from "1" to "0", or • the reset input "R" has a signal state of "1".



Page 26


SIEMENS

Timers: Extended Pulse (SE) FBD

LAD T4 S_PEXT Q8.5 S Q ( ) BI — MW0 S5T#35s — Tv 10.5 BCD — QW12 R I I

T4 S_PEXT

10.7

H

I 0.7 — S S5T#35s — TV I 0.5

BI

MWO

BCD — QW12 Q8.5

R

A L SE A R L T LC T A

1 0.7 S5T#35s T4 I 0.5 T4 T4 MWO T4 QW12 T4 Q8.5

RLO at S RLO at R

> Example

Timer operation

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Start

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.27



The extended pulse timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1". Output "Q" is also set to "1". The signal state at output "Q" remains at "1" even if the signal at the "S" input changes back to "0". If the signal at the start input changes from "0" to "1" again while the timer is running, the timer is restarted.

Reset

Output "Q" is reset when: • the timer has expired, or • the reset input "R" has a signal state of "1".


Page 27


10

SIEMENS

Timers: OFF Delay (SF) LAD T4 S_OFFDT Q8.5 S Q I I ) BI — mwo S5T#35s - TV 10.5 R BCD — QW12 I I

FBD T4

I 0.7

S_OFFDT I 0.7 — S S5T#35s — TV I 0.5 — R

BI —MWO BCD —QW12 Q8.5 Q

A 1 0.7 L S5T#35s SF T4 A 1 0.5 R T4 L T4 T MWO LC T4 T QW12 A T4 Q8.5

J

RLO at S RLO at R

> Example

Timer operation

7 I-

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Start

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.28


The off-delay timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "1" to "0". When the timer has expired, the signal state at output "0" changes to "0". If the signal state at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1" while the timer is running, the timer stops. The next time the signal state at the "S" input changes from "1" to "0", it starts again from the beginning.

Reset

When the RLO at reset input "R" is "1", the current time value and the time base are deleted and output "Q" is reset. If both inputs (S and R) have signal states of "1", output "Q" is not set until the dominant reset is deactivated.

Binary Output


Output "Q" is activated when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1". If input "S" is deactivated, output "Q" continues to have signal state of "1" until the programmed time has expired.


Page 28


SIEMENS

Time Formats for Traditional S5-Timers in STEP 7 S5T#35s200ms

Time specifications as constants

(Time base: 01 (100ms), Number of units of time: 352)

3

01

Time specifications per variable

x

x

0

0

5

0

x

x

x

x

0

0

0

Units of time (BCD-coded)

29

Accu 1 contents after "L T..." exec

0

0

Time base

2

x

x

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2°

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Residual units of time (Integer) 01

Accu 1 cont. after "LC T..." exec.

x

x

0

1

0

I I Time base

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Time Specification

5

3 0

0

2 0

0

0

0

Residual units of time (BCD-coded)

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.29

IV


Time values can be fixed and are specified as time constants. The permissible range in which the time values are found ranges from S5T#10ms to S5T#2h46m30sOms. Variable times can be specified using variables (such as memory words or data words) containing the S5TIME data type. The user must make sure that the appropriate time base and the number of units of time, as shown in the slide, are stored in the variable in his program.

Time Base

The time base defines the interval at which the number of units of time is to be decremented by one unit when the timer runs. Bits 12 and 13 of the variable must contain the time base as a binary-coded number: Time base 0 (bit 13 = 0, bit 12 = 0) Time base 1 (bit 13 = 0, bit 12 = 1) Time base 2 (bit 13 = 1, bit 12 = 0)

= 10 ms = 100ms = 1s

Time base 3 (bit 13 = 1, bit 12 = 1)

= 10s

Units of Time

The number of units of time must be specified as a BCD-coded number. When the number of units of time are multiplied by the time base, this results in the desired time value. The range from 1 to 999 is possible. When there is a time specification using a constant (S5T#...), the system automatically uses the smallest possible time base and the number of units of time.

L / B1

At output "BI" or with the instruction "L T..." , the residual time value (number of units of time) of the timer is queried as an integer without time base.

LC / BCD

At output "BCD" or with the instruction "LC T..." , the residual time value (number of units of time) of the timer is queried as a BCD-coded number with the time base in Bit 12 and 13.



Page 29


10

SIEMENS

Timers: Bit Instructions LAD

FBD

Network 1:

I 0.0

T4

A 10.0 L S5T#5s SD T4

(SD) S5T#5s Network 2:

T4

8.0

A T4 = Q 8.0

Network 3:

I 0.1

A I 0.1 R T4

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Bit Instructions


18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.30

1 11

.,Z


All timer functions can also be started with simple bit instructions. The similarities and differences between this method and the timer functions discussed so far are as follows: • Similarities: - Start conditions at the "S" input - Specification of the time value - Reset conditions at the "R" input Signal response at output "Q" • Differences for LAD and FBD: - It is not possible to check the current time value (there are no "BI" and "BCD" outputs).


Page 30


SIEMENS

Conversion Operations 14 DI 4 REAL Data in integer format (16-bit integer)

11>

> Task

Conversion from integer to double integer

i=>

Math program with real numbers

Conversion from double integer to real number

EP

I Dl

B D MW12

EN

OUT — MD14

IN

ENO

LAD 4.,5—

MD14

---

DI R

EN

OUT — MD26

IN

ENO

DIR

11)1

EN ENO —

EN ENO

OUT — MD14 MD14— IN

MW12 — IN

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


OUT — MD26

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.31

11 SITRAIN qv


Application

Basically, arithmetic operations can only process values of the same data type. Therefore, there are operations with which integer values (I or DI) can be converted into real values (R) and vice versa.

I_DI (in STL: ITD)

converts a 16-bit integer (I) into a 32-bit double integer (DI)

DI_R (in STL: DTR)

converts a 32-bit double integer (DI) into a floating-point number (R)

Other Conversion Operations

are discussed in one of the advanced programming courses: Inverts an integer (I) INV _I (INVI) (formation of the ones complement) Negates (sign reversal) an integer (I) (formation of the twos complement) TRUNC (TRUNC) Conversion R - DI: cut off after decimal positions

NEG _I (NEGI)

ROUND (RND)

Conversion R - Dl: round

CEIL (RND+)

Conversion R 4 DI: general rounding up

FLOOR (RND-)

Conversion R - DI: general rounding down

INV_DI (INVD)

Inverts a double integer (DI) (formation of the ones complement)

NEG_DI (NEGD) Negates (sign reversal) a double integer (DI) (formation of the twos complement) NEG_R / NEGR



Negates (sign reversal) a floating-point number (R)

Page 31


SIEMENS

Digital Logic Operations WX0R_W

L

WORW

L W#16#5F2A

WAN D_W EN IWO W#16#5F2A

IW 0

AW / OW / XOW

ENO-

T MW10

IN1 IN2

OUT

15

MW10 IWO = W#16#5F2A =

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

AND

El

MW10 after "AW" ex.

0

0

MW10 after "OW" ex.

0

0

MW10 after "XOW"

0

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


WAND_W

0

0

0

18.09.2009 SERV1_10E.32

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

OR 0

0

0

0

0

1 0

0

1 0

0

1 0

XOR 0

0

1 0

0 1

1 0

0

gtr

0

0

0

1 0 1 0

0

0

0


The "AND Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit in accordance with the AND truth table. The result of the AND operation is stored at the address at output OUT. The instruction is executed when EN = 1. Example: Masking out the 4th decade of the thumbwheel buttons :

WOR_W

IW4= W#16#OFFF

= 0100 0100 1100 0100 =0000 1111 1111 1111

MW30

= 0000 0100 1100 0100

The "OR Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit in accordance with the OR truth table. The result of the OR operation is stored at the address at output OUT. The instruction is executed when EN = 1. Example: Setting bit 0 in MW32 :

WXOR_W

MW32 W#16#0001

=0100 0010 0110 1010 = 0000 0000 0000 0001

MW32

= 0100 0010 0110 1011

The "Exclusive OR Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1 and IN2 bit by bit in accordance with the XOR truth table. The result of the OR operation is stored at the address at output OUT. The result of the XOR operation is stored at the address at output OUT. The instruction is executed when EN=1. Example: detecting signal changes in IWO :


IWO MW28

= 0100 0100 1100 1010 = 0110 0010 1011 1001

MW24

=0010 0110 0111 0011


Page 32


SIEMENS

Application Example: Digital Edge Detection

LAD STL HID - [FC28 -- Myproject_C3S8\Cfl_digital_operek„ Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug Options Window Help

J.

,jizg25.1 __Ji nja'

D*1:1-11:11 Pi A IiiblIMI ''''Ll ''- Lkiliii 2al I ''' I 1 I !I IrlIggl _rj *Iii-i-oriL P1----1 A

Contents Of: tnvironmentUnterface'

E 0 Interface

I _ ti*"

H

FC28 : Application ExesTle: Digital Edge Detection

fl

Network 1: positive edge detection (16 Bit( L L %OW L AW T

TW MW

0 220

TW

0

MW

222

Network 2: negatiw edge detection (16 Bit(

L L XCW L AW T Network 3:


220 0

MW

220

MA

224

raving

L T 211

MW 1W

1W MW

0 220

--

E431

0 keine

Date: SERV1_10E.33 File: 18.09.2009

SIMATIC S7


2.f.:1

iAbs <5.2 'W3 in 1

4

4

SITRAIN Training for Automati on and Industrial Solutions

General

The program example displayed in the slide implements a logic for detecting a signal change of 16 binary digits (edge detection for 16 bit) using digital word instructions.

Network 1

For the detection of a positive edge detection, that is, the detection of a signal change from 0 4 1, it suffices to carry out a digital AND operation of the change pattern (MW 220) with the new signal states (IW 0).

Network 2

If only the 1 4 changes are to be detected, a digital AND operation of the change pattern with the old signal states is to be carried out.

Network 3

Save the old states so that the signal state change can be detected.


Page 33


10

SIEMENS

Introduction to PROFIBUS DP and HMI (1) SNAIL-. PANEL

TA

PROFIBUS DP

SIMATIC S7


r

Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.1

Training for 1 "" S TRAIN CPI Automation and Industrial Solutions -.T.,

Page Contents Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 2 ...... 3 Structure of a PROFIBUS DP System ...... 4 Configuring a PROFIBUS DP Master System 5 Configuring Compact and Modular DP Slaves ...... 6 Exercise 1: Configuring the DP System (ET 200S) ...... 7 Control and Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI ...... 8 Communication between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI System ...... 9 Configuring Phase, Downloading Phase and Process Control Phase 10 WinCC flexible 11 Touchpanel: Setting the Interface for the Project Transfer 12 HW Config: Setting the Runtime Interface 13 WinCC flexible — Configuration Tool Input and Output Fields .................................................................................................................. 14 Buttons ............................................................................................................................................ 15 Defining the Connection to the Controller ....................................................................................... 16 17 Transfer Settings in WinCC flexible 18 Exercise 2: Setting the Touchpanel Interface for Transfer Exercise 3: Switching the PG Interface to PROFIBUS DP ............................................................. 19 Exercise 4: Checking the PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................ 20 21 Exercise 5: Checking the RT Interface of the WinCC flexible Station Exercise 6: Checking the Connection to the Controller ................................................................... 22 Exercise 7: Transferring the WinCC flexible Project into the Touchpanel ....................................... 23 Exercise 8: Testing the WinCC flexible Project ................................................................................ 24 Exercise 9: Testing the WinCC flexible Buttons .............................................................................. 25 If You Want to Know More .............................................................................................................. 26 .......................................................................................... 27 PROFIBUS - DP Terminating Resistor Segment Length Depending on the Baud Rate ............................................................................. 28 PROFIBUS Connector ..................................................................................................................... 29 Preparing a Fast Connect Cable ................................................................................................... 30 Installing PROFIBUS-DP Slaves Later On 31 SITRAIN Training for


ST-SERV1 Page 1 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)

11

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... be familiar with the use of PROFIBUS DP be familiar with the WinCC flexible software be able to set the interface of the TP 170B touch panel be able to download a project to the TP170B touch panel be familiar with the principle of interfacing the touch panel via tags




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.2


44! Automation and Industrial Solutions


SIEMENS

Structure of a PROFIBUS DP System Master S7 S7

PS 10A

S7-400

PS S7-300 S7-300 CPU 314

S7

S7-300

CP 3425 DP

PROFIBUS -DP ET 200M

SIMATIC S7-300 P

S7 CP 3425 DP

Slaves

STAND. DP SLAVE

Compact Slaves

Intelligent Slave

S7 S7 ST S7

SI Modular Slave

STAND. DP SLAVE

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Overview

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.3


The units installed in the field for automating technical processes, such as sensors, actuators, transducers and drives more and more make use of field bus systems for exchanging information with the higher-level controller units. PROFIBUS is an established fieldbus system which can be used by all automation equipment, such as PLCs, PCs, Human-Machine Interfaces as well as actuators and sensors, for exchanging data.

PROFIBUS-DP

PROFIBUS-DP is a protocol optimized for speed which was specially designed for communication between PLCs (DP masters) and distributed I/Os (DP slaves). PROFIBUS-DP is a low-cost, flexible substitute for transmission of signals on cumbersome parallel 24V and 20mA lines. PROFIBUS-DP is based on DIN 19245 Part 1 and the user-specific extensions in DIN 19245 Part 3. In the course of the European fieldbus standardization process, PROFIBUS-DP was integrated into the European fieldbus standard EN 50170.

Master Devices

PROFIBUS makes a distinction between master and slave devices. The PROFIBUS masters are in charge of data traffic on the bus. A master can send messages without being requested to do so, provided it is in possession of the token that entitles it to access the bus. Masters are also referred to as active nodes in the PROFIBUS protocol.

Slave Devices

PROFIBUS slaves are simple I/O devices, such as actuators, sensors, transducers, etc. They do not receive the token, that is, they can only acknowledge the receipt of messages or send messages (data) to a master on request. Slaves are also referred to as passive nodes.



11

SIEMENS

Configuring a PROFIBUS DP Master System Properties - PROFIBUS interface DP (R0/52.1)

Ration 0dlt I insert PLC View Options Window He

,

D rer 2

61 Mimi I in' lel

Insert Oblect..., Replace object..

:: 1 57_300_

Gennd Parameters Address:

Master System

Highest address.. 126 Transmission rate 1.5 Mbps

CPU 315-2 DP

r

DP

Subnet:

DI3240C24V D0321rDC24V/0.54 DIEVDO8k24V/0.5A

5 6 7 8

Al2x12Bit

9

♦

Gonad Network Salligs

J (0) UR

Slot

0

Nana

Module

0.

Fi

M.

0

Comment

OK

tal

HW Eonfig - S7_300_5E/Rion

Stature Edt Insert PLC

Dc32- 11 %I&

-

Options Window Help

TP- i8I It

—

It?

IPROFIDUS_TikSERV1

57 subret

173r 00 .-0013

Project path

IMy_Prciact \PROFIDULTIILSEFIV1

Stowe location al Ms pined

IDA57_CournisM4y_Prop

&Atm

Data croaked Last ramified

:.157_300_SIatoon (Configuration) SERVI _L

Comment 2

Sorple OP-Master:yawn will DP-Staves f T2005 and Mms,nuoter MI4420

CPU 315-2 DP

A

PROFIBUS_T1ASERV1• DP roaster :yawn

0

7

113/12/2006 0121146N 10/12/21336 0121146PM

DIINDC24V c24V/0.54 D113/D09r24V/115A Al2s1261

Result OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.4

I

_Z 'SITRAIN Training for


Distributed I/O

All master systems consisting of a DP master and DP slaves that are connected using a bus cable and that communicate via the PROFIBUS-DP protocol are designated as distributed I/Os.

DP Master

As DP master you can install: • S7-CPU with integrated DP master interface (such as CPU 414-2, etc.) • CP in connection with a CPU (such as CP 443-5, etc.)

Setting Up DP Master To configure a master system, proceed as follows: 1. Select the PROFIBUS interface X2 of your CPU and insert a master system (Menu Insert - Master System) 2. The dialog box "Properties - PROFIBUS interface DP" is opened. In this dialog you can define the following properties: • set up a new PROFIBUS subnet or open an existing one • set the properties of the PROFIBUS subnet (baud rate, etc.). • define the PROFIBUS address of the DP master. 3. Acknowledge the settings with "OK". The following symbol appears: -■= 1=b1. for the DP master system. This symbol is used as a "hanger " for the DP slaves.




HW Config - [S7_300_5tation (Configuration) -- SUM

.=_11312E.I

_L]

JJJ

011 Station Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help ,

I Cirg" 1-u

elfalillIMIIIIIII■111111■111111111

End

CPU 1 315

2 3 4

Bode: 'Standard

PROFIBUS_TIA SERVI DP master system DI

-

El {_j ET 2005P 2 c3 ET 2011 E a1 ET 200M p-[] ET 200mo E {23 ET 2008 ET 2005 ET 2005 Compact 16DI/16DC E ET 200S Compact 32DI E IM151-1 Basic to 84151-1 FO Standard E 11.1151-1 FO Standaid E 114151-1 FO Standard E 114151-1 HE E 114151.1 HF E

DI32xDC24V D032.0C24V/0.5A D18/008x24V/0.54 Al2:42Bit

5

6 7 10 11

Ifi

*1.1(0)

UR

sid 3 Rolle 1 2 II CPU 315-2 DP . ,1/4..7 3 DP

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

D132x C24V D032xDC24V/0.54 D18/D0&24V/0 54 Al2x1213it

41 ' 111111

-

SES7V1.2 2 1023

6Es7 6ES7 6E57 6E57

88

.1020

ern Oa Not we VW 0.••• *NY.

octs.• r • apt alb CMS It?

DP Slave

41

88

I


6E57 151-1 Interface ne electrorec n communica

I

••••Cvl,

t•

oonottwxiie

I 7

0.90•4.,113. At.W#A.

1111 j.: .OJPI

111150 5.100 los.•

Configure rack like central hardware

1,1y sr

• -•■ WV ST

e

wotw sew

coowon t

led.. please.

0.16••• Ri571714117030.

sr 3s(m•wo

•0 113

.7

'71

40 e 3 0 I

.0'1 wren*.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


DP Slaves

SITRAIN Training for likr


•

Modules with integrated digital/analog inputs and outputs (compact DP slaves, such as ET200B).

•

Interface modules with assigned S5 or S7 modules (modular DP slaves, such as ET200M, ET 200S). S7-200/300 stations with modules that support the "Intelligent Slave" function (such as CPU 215-DP, CPU 315-2).

•

Selecting DP Slaves

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.5

To configure a DP slave, proceed as follows: From the "Hardware Catalog" select the desired compact DP slave (such as ET200B) or the interface module (such as IM151-1 Standard for ET200S) for a modular slave. 2. Drag the symbol (such as IM151-1 Standard for ET200S) onto the symbol for the master system: .■= .1=1.h The dialog box "Properties — PROFIBUS interface DP" is opened. Here you can set the following properties: • properties of the PROFIBUS subnet (baud rate, etc.).

1.

•

the PROFIBUS address of the DP slave.

3. Acknowledge the settings with "OK". A configuration table is attached to the symbol (icon) that represents the I/O configuration of the compact slave or the rack of the modular slave. 4. For a modular DP slave, you now insert the desired modules from the "Hardware Catalog" into the configuration table. The addressing and parameter assignment of the modules is then handled similar to the configuration of the centrally inserted modules.




11

SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Configuring the DP System (ET 200S) ,_111 :1 2cJ

Config - [S7_300_Station (Configuration) — SERVO _U

WI Station Edit (Insert PLC View Options Window Help

. 2, D lair

CPU

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 .

I

Insert Object...

led

Replace Object

I ID

Oe I

Find:

PROFIIJET 10 System

PROFIBUS(1) I -

Profile:

41

±.1 (4) IM151-1 Standard 110 . Slot 1

4 5 6 7

f

Module

Pack Addresses Order Number

PM-E DC24V 4D1 DC24V ST

6E S7 138-4CAOCI-CIAA0 6E57 131-413D00-0AA0

401 DC24V ST

BEST 131-413000-00AD

400 DC241//01,54 ST

6E97 132-413ND-045J) 6ES7 132-Q000-0AM

4D0 D124V/0,54 ST

I Address

0 Address

eH 23 e4 87 8.0...8.3 8.4...8.7

I Standard iIM151 -1 FO Standard . -1 ' 1 IM151-1 HF F 1 IM151 -1 HF IM151-1 Standard E TN 1M151 -1 Standard < .......1 1 +, AI El 0 AO El a cP q-ca DI 3..0 DO 1 F-R0 24V..2301/5A 200 AC24..230V/1A 200 DC24V/0,54 HF MO DC24V/0.5A HF 200 DC24V/0,5A ST 200 DC24V/0,5A ST

D132)0 C24V 0032xDC24V/0.5A D18/1)08a4V/0.5A Al2x12Bit

'

I

,nn nriavoe wr

41

li r

■

6E S7 151-1AAG2-0ABO Interface module IM151-1 for ET 2005 electronic modules, send capability for diect data exchange

tS


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.6


'IT


Task

You are to commission the DP system for your training unit so that the conveyor model can be controlled using the ET 200 S when you have the same functionality, without having to modify the S7 program.

What to Do

1. Expand the existing configuration to include the distributed (remote) station ET 200S (additional connection possibility for the conveyor model). Notes: Insert the PROFIBUS DP master system as follows: Select the DP interface of the CPU - Menu Insert - Master System -

OFF ON 64 32 16 8 4 2

New...

To connect the ET200S, use the mouse to drag the interface module IM151 from the module catalog to the master system (see slide) 2. On the IM 151-1's address switches, set the Slave Address to 4 (see slide left) and check the PROFIBUS cabling Note: Changes to the slave address only take effect after Power ON/OFF! 3. Change the addresses of the mixed DI/DO module in the URO Universal Rack to IB 88 and QB 88. 4. For the input and output addresses in the ET200 S, configure the addresses IB 8 and QB 8. Note: So that the 8 channels of a module are located in one byte, you have to pack the addresses. To do so, select both modules and then click on "Pack Addresses" (see slide) 4. Connect the conveyor model to the interface of the ET200S. 5. After "Save and Compile" download the configuration into the CPU. 6. Verify that the configuration is error-free. The error LEDs — Group error (SF) and bus error (BUSF) must be dark on the CPU. 7. Test the program you have created up until now. Everything should work as before.



SIEMENS

Control and Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI Process Visualization System SIMATIC WinCC

SIMATIC Panels

or

WinCC flexible 2005

•'

ProTool I Pro

ZUr. '...z.111 E.,

WinCC SIEMENS 200. 5moms...A lighrtt men.

c.1wIndowIllssern•A0actsysem astall 0.5000.0 b7755c5619315089•malsall

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Overview

18.09.2009 SERV1 11E.7

241 SITRAIN Training for RV.'


With SIMATIC HMI, there is a field-proven HMI system for user-friendly process control and monitoring available for the SIMATIC S7. The products range from simple text display to the process visualization system. SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI are completely harmonized and integrated. This greatly simplifies the use of the SIMATIC HMI control and monitoring system. •

The SIMATIC S7 has already integrated HMI services. The HMI system requests process data from the SIMATIC S7. Data transmission between SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI is handled by the two operating systems and does not have to be taken care of by the user. SIMATIC HMI systems can be connected directly to PPI (S7-200) and MPI, i.e., PROFIBUS (S7-300 and S7-400) and Industrial Ethernet, i.e., PROFINET. A networking via PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet, i.e., PROFINET makes the process control and monitoring possible even over greater distances and to several controllers.

•


Numerous features from the uniform data base and symbols to the same user-friendly Windows-oriented user interface make it easy to use HMI systems.



11

SIEMENS

Communication between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI System

-dom isno._

wopro

fr4N/

• MPI • PROFIBUS DP • Industrial Ethernet

SIMATIC PANEL

SIEMENS

Trahrig for Automata" and Crives

Update

n

Press key "set bit" Man

008000

Confirm

"Wens.ledge Fault

Let go of key "reset bit"

• ••• SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.8

Re screen

tr i SITRAIN Training for

a gl


Tag

Process tags are used to make the data exchange between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI system. Tags are created in the configuration with WinCC flexible and are assigned to a CPU data area for this. The HMI system cyclically reads out the tag values and displays them in an output field, for example.

Data Areas

In the configuration of tags, the following CPU data areas - global tags - can be used: •

Data blocks (DB)

•

Bit memories (M) Inputs (I) and Outputs (Q) Peripheral input (PI) and Peripheral output (PQ)

•

Timers (T) and Counters (C)

HMI systems also recognize local tags without process connection. That is, these tags are processed exclusively internally and do not require any communication resources. Communication

The operator panels can communicate with the PLC using the MPI or PROFIBUS DP or Industrial Ethernet bus systems. The S7 protocol is used here. Communication is organized through the S7 CPU and HMI system operating systems. User programming on the S7 is therefore not necessary. An operator panel can exchange data with several PLCs simultaneously.

Updating


Data transfer between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI system takes place cyclically. That is, process tags are cyclically read and written depending on the configured update times.



SIEMENS

Configuring Phase, Downloading Phase and Process Control Phase

Transfer

Configuring phase (Offline)

Process control phase

PC/PG WinCC flexible Configuration data

Configuration data Source file .hmi

PC/OP/TP Flash Flash Ethernet

I

MPI DP

PLC

1111 PROJECT]..hmi PROJECT_i_log.LDF

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Introduction

18.09.2009 SERV1_118.9

4,1 SITRAIN


You configure your project on a PC or programming device (PG). You then generate the configuration under WinCC flexible and download it to the PC/OP/TP. If the PC/OP/TP is connected to the PLC, the PC/OP/TP displays the current values in the tags and graphics. The three phases of working with the configuration data are shown in the slide.

Configuring

The configuring process consists of various partial steps: 1. Defining the PLC and the type of connection (MPI, PROFIBUS DP, Industrial Ethernet etc.) 2. Making general settings for the PC/OP/TP (defining the current connections etc.) 3. Generating objects such as tags, screens, messages etc. 4. Downloading (transferring) the generated database to the HMI system via MPI, PROFIBUS DP, or Industrial Ethernet The configuration is stored in source files in your S7 project (Directory ...\HmiEs). In the compiling phase, a file of the type fwx is created which is later transferred to the target device •

Editors


.fwx

for Windows-based HMI systems

WinCC flexible includes a set of editors (tools) for configuring the different types of objects. You create each object under a symbolic name. You must specify this symbolic name time and again, for example, when creating, editing, referencing or deleting the object.



11

SIEMENS

WinCC flexible Advanced Advanced Demo - Complete functional scope - Limited to a max. 30 days

Standard

Compact *) Options

*) Options

*) Options

Micro

• R PIM

.

SIMATIC PANEL Micro

SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC PANEL 70 / 170

Date: File:


SIMATIC PANEL 270 / 370

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.10

.......

PC - based Windows 2000 Windows XP

'IC


WinCC flexible Engineering System

The Engineering System (ES) is the software with which you carry out all the necessary configuring tasks in order to create an interface for controlling and monitoring machines and systems.

Editions

The Engineering System of WinCC flexible is modularly graded into different editions. The edition determines which operator panels of the SIMATIC HMI spectrum can be configured. With each higher edition, a wider range of target devices and functions is supported. The configuration data is compatible. Micro: Configuring the micro panels Compact: Configuring the micro panels and panels of the 70 and 170 series Standard: Configuring all panels (micro panels, panels of the 70/170/270 and 370 series) Advanced: Configuring the PC-based and all other panels (micro panels, panels of the 70/170/270/370 series and PC Runtime) Advanced Demo:Test version limited to 30 days

With the WinCC flexible Compact edition and above, you can change to a higher Changing the WinCC flexible Edition WinCC flexible edition with a "Powerpack". Runtime

WinCC flexible Runtime (RT) is the software for process visualization on the operator panel. With Runtime, you execute the project during process operation. The various panels already come delivered with operating system and the appropriate Rutime version. Possible, additionally required Runtime components are loaded along with the project onto the panel.

Options

Both components can be expanded through Options (licenses). The options depend on the target system used. An operator panel that doesn't support a specific functionality also cannot use the associated option.



SIEMENS

Touchpanel: Setting the Interface for the Project Transfer Loader V07.01.01.00_01.34

Ccrweycr

Language

M+420

1=1

(

— Station Parameters Address:

Control Panel

Pe2knal Settrcs

1 s

Time-out: NetworkParameters

61

a

X

Panel is the only master on bus Start

Eft Yew

Cigira.nc.

•K

PROFIBUS

Transfer

1.5 Mbits/s

Transmission Rate:

Ls ikftrrik

57-Trrnir., Screw&wet

Highest Station:

126

Profile:

DP

Sett,C5

Bus Parameters...

Transfer Settings Channel I Directories 1

S7-Transfer Settings

Channel 1:

MPI

Serial:via R5232 /Zero Modern Cable

,

F.Enable Channel

MEI

Profibus

Remote Control

Channel 2:

I MFVProtibus

Properties...

Enable Channel F.; Remote Control

advanced

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Transfer Settings

SITRAIN

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E. 1 1

It"


The interface of the TP170B must be set up for the project transfer. These settings are only relevant for downloading the project, not for later communication between panel and controller during the process control phase. The interface parameters necessary for this are defined with WinCC flexible within the project. Channel:

In addition to the serial transfer channel (Channel 1), a second channel (Channel 2) can be selected for downloading the project onto the operator panel.

Remote Control:

The loading of the WinCC flexible project can be triggered without first having to manually exit Runtime. The panel automatically exits Runtime and switches to the Transfer mode.

Advanced:

Setting of transmission parameters for MPI or PROFIBUS DP.



11

SIEMENS

I jI Y

O

HW Config: Setting the Runtime Interface SIMATIC Manager-[My_Project-- D:\S7_Kurse\SERV1 _L] 31JJ JJxJ My_Projett E S7300_Station E g TP170B_Color

Object name

Symbolic name

Ilk Configuration MR"

Type &ion ntiguration

flexible RT HW Config - [TPI70B_Color (Configuration) -- My_Projeitt

Mk

Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wndow k%


a gAermiligm

JJJ

Help

annisav

03 (0) HMI

General I AssignmeM I Reserve LSAPs Diegrosties I I Shen Description:

HMI MPI/DP

Satraute fa any PROF1BUS nodule, S7 coroebsint. DP mast.. DP SIMATIC NET CD 7/2001 SP4 tsve. PG functions,

A

r

Order No.:

*1011(0) HMI Index

Name:

Module

Interface

Order numb

Type

IPROFIBUS

Addis= Netweiked Yes Comment

Press Fl to get Help. rcei Ca

SIMATIC S7

Date:

File:


Communication Settings


18.09.2009

SERV1_11E.12

Help

SITRAIN Training for 1 Automation and Industrial •,lh0 Solutions a

For a WinCC flexible project that is integrated in STEP7, the interface parameters (address and network) are set up with the HW Config tool — as shown in the slide. With the parameters set here, the panel will later communicate with the controller or controllers during Runtime or during the process control phase. For WinCC flexible projects not integrated in STEP7, these parameters are defined with WinCC flexible in the configuration of the "Connections" (see following pages).



SIEMENS

WinCC flexible - Configuration Tool _,..D212s1 En•Kt tAt IP. PPP Fp•P PAPP*. 4own, PIndo•

•

niece

1:,0 ti n:. I 4

111 le7 II

• •

•

COP:-

11=2_

•

SIEMENS

i•eiC4 • E s TP17CEL.Colot(TP 1708 mice/ E 17=3 Samna 4 Add Screen Template Conveys, HM420 0 Stan ▪ !rst Communication Tops Cennetrions Sae Cycler ▪ Aisne hlamgement 1/4 Analog Akins Discrete Alum E Seaga • Recipes • Teri and Graphics Ltels Airtime Wet Admevreation • Deese Seems S ti Language Settings S Inroad Languages Graphics Propel Teets • •Direonaner Shretures g Varian Managernent

l

SIMATIC PANEL] Training tor Automation and Drives

........ si[B1111M•11111

111 •••11gr i,

........ Editor.SeCtion ............ff

• P

w

(Work Area)

IR

............ K .................. .""""" 11 :11 • 11 - 1.0 WWI! •- :

It

704 •

fi,

70 •

• *•

Simple Objects

/ Line PolylMe Cis Polygon Ellipse 3 Circle ▪ Rectangle El Text Field Ei 10 Field Date-Time Field El Graphic 10Field Symbolic 10 Field Q Graphic. Mee NI Button ▪ Switch EU I .

; Properties * "" "" . .....

General la Properties

nhanced Objects

..... — •

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Activating

_it Tim • • t•gop L!) 11:242107 Gerold

I Derajitien The device TP170B_Cobi Lsdated

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.13

Y ebrecthereto elete it.


For projects integrated in STEP7, WinCC flexible can be started directly from the SIMATIC Manager. After software installation, the engineering tool starts with an initial start screen. The most important windows are opened.

Project Window

Work Area

Properties Window

Tool Window

Task Window

The project window is the central switching position for configuration. All components and all available configuration editors of a project are displayed in the project window in the form of a tree structure and can be opened from there. Each Editor has an icon assigned to it through which you can identify the associated objects. Only elements that are supported by the selected operator panel are displayed in the project window. In this window, you have access to the operator panel's device settings, the language support and the version administration. The work area is the central configuring area in which the objects of the operator panel are edited using the editor that has been started. Several editors can be open at the same time. In the Properties window, you edit the properties of selected objects (such as, the properties of screens, screen objects, tags). The Properties window is only available in those editors where object properties have to be set. The Tool window contains all configurable objects that can be configured in screens and it also enables the access to libraries. The Task window displays all engineering system messages that are created when generating a project, for example.



11

SIEMENS

Input and Output Fields eroject

Ede

View Insert Format Faceplates

New ■

■?"

English (United States)

Tahoma

6-f (cc

PRO1 El es Touchpanel(TP 1778 6" Screens a Add Screen 0 Template 0 Conveyor ❑ MM420 0 Start Communication Tags Connections Cycles Alarm Management . UAnalog Alarms k',.1 Discrete Alarms Settings E - Recipes it 1/4 Reports ft rt.' Text and Graphics L Runtime User Admin Et ff) V" Device Settings ki Language Settings Project Languages T: Graphics Output

gicitions Window Help

•••• 8

(4 1

^

v

.Uri

$.;; .

‘i•

/ U

_Conveyor

SIEMENS

SIMATIC PAL,

R _ Simple Objects A

A TextField I Jog left

±-tatiodl:_ctatiod2 Stait:on

IO Field Date-Time Field Enhanced Objects

Man

,- 000000

LI

Enter — ackn

General Properties 10. Animations

7,177.191F7

7 PRO1 _ • Touchpanel Communicatior -e:t Tags • 81, My Project

M_MM420_0n_HMI M 40.0 M_System_OFF_HMI M 30.1 M_System_ON_HMI M 30.0 MW_ACT MW 20 _5ETP MW 22

•

New

Mode [Outpu mm

Tag

•

m

mmm ..... MW_ACT mmmmmmmm

m

Format pattern 4■4

!999999

i.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.14

RC


I/O Field Mode

Tag values are displayed through output fields. The values of tags can also be specified through input/output fields using a screen keyboard. The mode can be set in the Properties window as shown in the slide.

Format Type

With Format Type you define in which format the value of the tag is to be displayed.

Tag

In the field Tag you define from which WinCC flexible tag the value in the I/O Field is to be displayed or specified. The WinCC flexible tag is, as a rule, linked to a variable of the S7 controller. However, it can also be an internal tag that is not linked to a variable of the S7 controller and that merely serves to store values within the HMI device.

SITRAIN



SIEMENS

Buttons WinCC flexible Advanced - My_Project - Touchpanel

erem of mew

Insert Format

Faceplates Qptions Mnclow

rat .

New English (Unked States)

ler PRO1

v

( (Cc

Touchpanel(TP 1776 6" Screens -11 Add Screen Template 0 Conveyor MM420 0 Start Communication Tags Connections Cycles Alarm Management RA Analog Alarms EA Discrete Alarms • r Settings Recipes + , Reports r_ Text and Graphics L + 2 Runtime User Admin + Device Settings • ,= 4 Language Settings Project Languages Fif Graphics

Tahoma

No 1 8

No

oaveyor

Simple Objects A Graphics View

.... e

Jog right

Button switch

...-

Enhanced Objects Graphics ack Lau

Or Events ak, ail• • It Press ti=>SetBit • *MA& Tag I InOutj • Activate w. 2 crio function>

- jud PRO1 Touchpanel IS 1E1 /3. Communicatior Tags My_Project

7>> >

M 17.0 M_Conv_Fault M_Conv Jog_LEFT_HMI M 30.3 M_Conv Jog_RIGHT_HMI M 30.2 M 30.5 _MiA_Accept_HMI MIA_Mode5elect_HMI M 30.4

New

I CI

Conv3og_RIGHT,EIMI

t

output

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Buttons

18.09.2009 SERV1 ji1E.15


The operator can use buttons to initiate system functions such as the selection of a screen or the setting of a tag as shown in the slide. Through the "Events" of a button, you define in which event which system function is to be executed.

Variable

If the selected system function is executed with a WinCC flexible tag, this tag must be specified. The WinCC flexible tag is, as a rule, linked to an S7 controller variable. It could, however, also be an internal tag that is not linked to an S7 controller variable, but is simply used to store values within the HMI device.

SITRAIN



11

SIEMENS

Defining the Connection to the Controller fi'VrAnCE flexible 2005 Advanced - My_Project - TP170B_Color erniect Lclit Yew Insert Dern& Fapeplates gptions Jndow Help :)-- New • kW ig In • la ' 1 ■., 1) “ Y:. 1 4

i iEnosh (United States)

,j11 :1
In . 1 Iii 43. H. IC.-,

J . i se ?.. 7:,..

J.

oip 0 start 0 m,-;:: .sy..........

I.PRO TP171:8_Colagl. 1708 tt Screens -2 Add Screen 1....1:1 Template PEI Conveyor 1.... In MM420 , ,..-1:1 Stan al!Communication tle Tags

r:1 J FIE. II

I ,.--

Comadions 2xL I ,*--S --110 Cycles 1 8 NI Mem Management VI Analog Alan= EA Discrete Alarms * v. Settings Fr.: .. Recipes Ir- Text and Graphics Li B ti4 Rtmline User Admini E tz Devkits Settings Language Settings B Languages O ! it Graphics e Project Terns '. r i 01.4 Dictionaries EP % Sbuptuies Eli ro Version Management

II 1 7 A Objects

ci o e

C

.....Uun_I

ornmunication driver :ISIMA17C 57 3001400

On

artner

L•illiy_Project15... •• CPU 315-2 DP

4I

I miet"s

i J J ''-', r_.:i'l rj _1 _1_7j -

=111.=; zjMIMI DP :1 :1 °n

I.1

I

Area pointer TP 1708 color — .„-.-. "—,... = ........■

Babe) Interface 'HMI 11.1iDmi

Network

HMI device Type

Baud rate

Profie

0 TTY 0 R5232 0 R5422 0 R5485

Address

C) %nett

El Orly master on the bus

1500000 Access Pant

• -

F

I,

A

Highest station acldress (RSA)

77,

CitaINE Hurter of masters

7

PLC device Address Expansion slot

r----

Rack

0 Cyck operation

■

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.16

_11 SITRAIN Training for ,,r Automation and Industrial Solutions

Creating Connections With the configuring of the connection(s), the communication partners of the operating panel are defined with which the Runtime exchanges data in the later process control phase. For WinCC flexible projects integrated in STEP7, connections to partners (controllers) are merely created here. The addresses of the operator panel and the S7 controller as well as the associated network (MPI, PROFIBUS, Ethernet) have already been determined in the hardware configuration of the operator panel and the S7 controller. For a WinCC flexible project not integrated in STEP7, the connections must be configured completely here (address of the operator panel and the controller, network).



SIEMENS

Transfer Settings in WinCC flexible fif WinCC flexible 2005 Advanced - My_Project - TP1796 Caw Project Edit View Insert Format Faceplates 2oborts Window Help

Ell

Nevi

x

lquSelect devices for transfer

New Project with Projec

riettings for TP17013_Color (IP 17133 color)

Close

IMPI/OP

Mode

save

Station add.= 11

Save As Version... Change device Type... Import Tag;... Integrate in STEP 7 . Copy from STEP 7... ■ •

I rr* Project Docurnenta.—.... Print Selection

Ctrl+W

PROFINET CBA

j

.1

)

Z\

1708 color

.

_

Iran le, SIMATIC PANEL

lilted Dv

Co5pler

7,7 1-1

kansfer

Transfer kettings71

Recent Proiects

Backtransfer Lockup... Restore...

ems

License keys...

nsion

czit

mcsecr Languages sf Graphics Project Texts i EEI - 4 Dctionaries Structures Version Management

I

I

TTY R5232 R5922 C) R5985 Slinatic

Qptions... 05 Update sclic of

2 Only master on the b

Objects

1111

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Transfer Settings

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.17


SITRAIN

Transfer is the transmission of the project onto the operator panel that is to execute the project. The transfer settings necessary for this are only relevant for the project transfer, not for the data exchange with the controller later on during the process control phase.

Transfer Mode

For the transfer, the operator panel must be in "Transfer Mode". Depending on the current interface parameterization, the operator panel must be switched to the Transfer mode manually or it switches automatically.

SITRAIN



11

SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Setting the Touchpanel Interface for Transfer Loader V07.01.01.00_01.34 Transfer

PROFIBUS

Start Language

Conveyor

Address:

Control Panel

111

Peoknu Selags

-

0P.s-ei

moult 07-Trareftr Set rce

t.r!J;ad

...••

•

si eCi) Network CP

tAJ.64

1 s

Time-out:

Elle loner I

...

x

Station Parameters

Mk+120

4 .5 10 40 iiii ....,,,.... corr. LAWTrfu. .1fq.

K

Panel is the only master on bus

— NetworkParameters

ii

Ra:.,. - .;

tS

System •• -Iran sta • • a • •

Transmission Rate:

1.5 Mbits/s

Highest Station:

126

Profile:

DP Bus Parameters...

Transfer Settings Channel

Directories

S7-Transfer Settings

Channel 1. Serial:via RS232 Zero Modem Cable

MEI

MPI

, IT Enable Channel F.; Remote Control

Profibus

Channel 2. tbus

F Enable Channel F Remote Control

Properties... Advanced

1 SIMATIC S7

A Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.18

17

.


Task

The interface of the touchpanel is to be set up as in the slide, so that the WinCC flexible project can then be downloaded from the PG to the panel. Before you can parameterize the interface, you must exit Runtime. For this, there is, as a rule, a button in the Start screen for doing so. After exiting Runtime, the "Loader" appears through which the "Control Panel" (see slide) can be activated. The Loader also appears after every voltage recovery.

What to Do

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Notes

Exit the touch panel's Runtime Activate the "Control Panel" Double-click on "Transfer" to select Make the settings as shown in the slide and accept these by pressing the "OK' button until the "Control Panel" reappears Double-click on the icon "OP" Press the "Save Registry" button Go back to the Loader by closing the Control Panel. Via "Transfer", activate the "Transfer Mode". In this mode, the touchpanel waits for a connection set up through the PG. Check the PROFIBUS cabling.

Channel: Remote Control:

Advanced:



In addition to the serial transfer channel (Channel 1), a second channel (Channel 2) can be selected for downloading the project onto the operator panel. The loading of the WinCC flexible project can be triggered without first having to manually exit Runtime. The panel automatically exits Runtime and switches to the Transfer mode. Setting of transmission parameters for MPI or PROFIBUS DP.


SIEMENS

Exercise 3: Switching the PG Interface to PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC Manager Options Properties -CP.9611(PROFIBUO' ?"`

Set PG/PC Interface

PROFIBUS

023==ailmv

—Station Parameters r PG/PC is the only master on the bus

Access Path 1

I S7ONLINE

10

Address:

IT

Access Point of the Application:

1_1

CP5611(PROFIBUS)

(STEP 71

Check address

s

Tirneout.

(Standard for STEP 7) —Network Parameters—

Interface Parameter Assignment Used

if4 CP5611 tiell CP5611(PPI) CP5611(PROFIBUS DP Slave) CP5611(PROFIBUS)

Transmission Rate:

Properties.

ICP5611(PRO FIB U S) J

Copy...

Standard Universal (DP/FMS) User-Defined Bus Parameters...

What to Do

Master: 11

Select

Cancel

SIMATIC S7 Task

Network Configuration

r Include network configuration belsrs

Add/Remove:

I

He

Date: File:


:_ '1

Profile:

Interfaces

OK

126


Diagnostics..

(User parameter assignment of your communications processor CP5611 for SOFTNET DP Master)

[

11 5 Mbps

I - --

I

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.19

OK

Slaves 1

Default

1

Cancel I Help

IV


So that the WinCC flexible project can be downloaded from the PG onto the touch panel, the PG's interface parameters and the transfer settings of the touch panel must both be parameterized to PROFIBUS DP. 1.

Change the PG's interface to PROFIBUS DP. Use the parameters shown in the slide. Important: For "Interface Parameter Assignment Used" DO NOT select "PROFIBUS-DP Slave", since the PG is not used as a PROFIBUS slave.

2. Connect the online cable of the PG with a PROFIBUS DP interface.



11

SIEMENS

Exercise 4: Checking the PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC Manager

n->Options 1 > Set PG/PC Interface

SIMATIC NET diagnostics - CP5611(PROFIBUS)

PROFIBUS/MPI Network Diagnostics

Hardware I

— Status/Network Diagnostics 10K

Test Access Path

Station address:

Bus parameters: Baudrate:

Access Point of the Application: I _ NLINE

(STEP 7)

--> CP5611(PROFIBUS)

Highest station address (HSA): Minimum station delay Time (Min Tsdr): Maximum station delay Time (Max T sal Setup time (tsetj:

(Standard for STEP 7) Interface Parameter Assignment Used ICP5611(PROFIBUS)

1r-4 CP5611fMPlj 1'4 CP5611(PPI)

Properties... Diagnostics...

_N --v>

11

o irirrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr ------

looFFEEFFErrrrrrrrrrrrr - - -nor r r r rr r Key E Station passive

- Interfaces

Read

Add/Remove:

Select..

OK Cancel

SIMATIC S7

Task

I

17 Station active F Station active ready

I

Cancel

j

I Help

I Help

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. AM rights reserved.

zi

20 I—

User parameter assignment of your communications processor CP5611 for SOFTNET DP Master)

OK

1 te it

Bus Nodes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ri rrEFFEEFF1 1 1 1 1 1 Fr 4C EFFErrr- rr-- 1-1-1-1-1-Fri- Frr 60 rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr 80 FrrEFFErri- r- rEFFI-1-1-1-1-

Copy

CP5611(PROFIBLIS DP Slave] J 14 CP5611(PROFIBUS)

1500.00 Kbps 126 11 tBit 150 tBit

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.20


Now connected to the PROFIBUS are: the PG (address 0, active) -

the touchpanel (address 1, active) the S7 controller (address 2, active)

-

the ET200S (address 4, passive)

Using the function "SIMATIC NET Diagnostics" (see slide), check whether all nodes are accessible via the PROFIBUS DP. What to Do

1. Start the diagnostic function SIMATIC Manager - Options - Set PG/PC Interface - Diagnostics... 2. Check the PROFIBUS network using the "Test" button 3. Using the "React' button, determine which nodes are accessible via the PROFIBUS.

Note

SITRAIN

The "active" and "passive" node properties indicate whether a node can (active) or cannot (passive) initiate communication to another node.



SIEMENS

Exercise 5: Checking the RT Interface of the WinCC flexible Station ❑ ri-k* l 1? gl

ei I

Irti 161 la

J 4p

EERVII ci II< No Filter >

MyProject 0: \Courses \MyProject MyProject E

Object name

S7_300_Station

/I CPU 315-2 DP 7 E sr S7progran rl•' HW Con ig - Tourhpant .12E1 Scrum Saban Edit Insert PLC View Block:

Touchpanel

Syrnteic

rit'•

D

$1 a I I

511 1

x

Typ General

L crt

P.,..met.

I

Address:

General I Assignment I F Short Description:

Highest address, 126 Transmission rale: 1.5 M bps Subnet not networked

Touchpanel (Configuration)

PROFIBUS 1

15M


New

I

Pro:tartlet

I

Delete

I

Order No: Name: Interface

sI 4,116± (0) HMI Index

Module

Type:

7 1: I

Address:

1

Networked

Yes

OK

CarrlorM

I

Properties...

Comment

OK

Cancel

I

Help


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Task

What to Do

SITRAIN

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.21

q.t.;


So that the panel's Runtime can communicate with the S7 station during the process control phase, the panel's interface must be parameterized with the HW Config tool. Using the HW Config tool, check the parmeterization of the panel's interface. If necessary (see slide) make the appropriate corrections.



11

SIEMENS

Exercise 6: Checking the Connection to the Controller ,d_cuLci MyProject ▪ S7_300_Station • :=4 Touchpanel WinCC flexible R T , Screens 17 5- Communication -ej Tags ,,s a Connections Cycles Flik Alarm Managemen vx Recipes El Reports ▪ Text and Graphics Runtime User Adm ▪ Device Settings

0•ect name

Info

eoiect Edit Dew Insert Fefe,ef Peceeletes Qvtsons Endow tielp New • I& A rn • x Engfnh Weed Knedom) 6?.1x, 0 Ran I .Stonnea■ons PRO Touollaare(TP 1778 6" J DJ IE-1 1 Saws Partner ▪ Communication .ML.i221 4- 0. 1 . 1 -44i===9=.1111111 11 Cornectionl Tags .15111111C 57 300/400 ViyProjectk57... : 1CPU 315-2 DP : 1CF ,0n 4-11-111-11 1 iar MI Cedes Open editor • ilk Alen Menegerren •-41 Reeiees Add Connection Reports at generate Tex and Graphics ® Manama User Adm Lind° Ctrl+Z BEI r- Devine Settings ▪ Language Settiigs Cuh Ctrl+X at &mimes E -Ws Vend, Mannerneni ra Spy Ctri+C NI device Netot,' Cp Fiat Copy

e

Paste Replace...

Ctrl+E

Delete

Delete

Print Selection tf

7 Output

SIMATIC S7

Highest stens address (HSA)

ALINE e bus

Number

of matters

Cross-References

R econnect...

File:

Date:


Ctrl+W

I: o

ProNe

Ctrl+V

SERV1_11E.22 18.09.2009


IlithiT Automation and Industrial Solutions

Task

Make a connection so that the panel's Runtime communicates with your training unit.

What to Do

1. Start WinCC flexible by opening the WinCC flexible station Touchpanel in the SIMATIC Manager (see left slide) 2. Open the object "Connections" and check whether your S7 station is specified as connection partner. 3. Connect the WinCC flexible tags with the controller's variables right mouse button on "Connections" -4 Reconnect... 4. Complete the dialog that appears as follows:

FR Options for Reconnecting Symbols

—

Connect STEP7/SIMOTION symbols with WinCC flexible tags if

C symbol name, address and data type match a one or more of the following conditions are true: symbol name matches (address and data type are not relevant) 17 address and data type match (symbol name is not relevant)

l Replace tag name with symbol name

OK

SITRAIN


Cancel

4


SIEMENS Exercise 7: Transferring the WinCC flexible Project into the Touchpanel

JJJ

"l' WinCC flexible Advanced - MyProject - Touchpanel

Project Edit Dew Insert Format Ptceplates Qptlons Endow deb S.- New • par

-

r • •-

11..g

-•

English (United Kingdom) Ld

• .................................

I& PRO Touchpanela Screens 11-

%'' Commune Tags

0 "n.

it, ' •

Touchpanel [TP 1778 6 c...

—Settings for Touchpanel (TP 1778 (i color PN/DP)

1"".5.11111. ES- -%Alarm Mari:. Recipes !! ! f $ Reports Text and' E8 IT] -4 Runtime I. . p. Y Device Sr Language Se p r5 Structures 111--%Version Mane

Mode

IMPI/DP

Station address

11

•

• • Arirlrecc

r Enable back transfer r Overwrite user administration r Overwrite recipe data records

Transfer

APPIY

*rums sabot access trDA)

4

4

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.23

Tr


Task

The given WinCC flexible project "Touchpanel" is to be downloaded into the panel.

What to Do

1. Activate the Transfer function and make the settings as shown in the slide 2. Start the data transfer to the panel using "Transfer"



11

SIEMENS

Exercise 8: Testing the WinCC flexible Project DI I 0.0 I 0.1

\

I 0.2 I 0.3

)9

1 0.4

O

DO T_System_OFF T_Jog_LEFT

O

S_M/A_ModeSelectl

N

I 0.5

L MAN

•

Q 4.2

L AUTO

•

Q 4.3

GI

T_Ackn_Fault

1 1=1

1=1 =I 1=1 1=1

SIEMENS

L_Conv_Fault

•

O

• • •

N

SIMATIC S7

"QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)

SIMATC PiOJEL

Training for Automation and Drive

Date: File:


7

0815

• • •

)1D

ACTUAL Quantity

1=1

"IW_Thumbw" (IW 2)

T_M/A_Accept

\

r

Q 4.1

L_SYSTEry

T_Jog_RIGHT

O

N

SETPOINT Quantity

11

T_System_ON

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.24


A• Automation and Industrial Solutions

Task

The functioning of the WinCC flexible project "Touchpanel" is to be checked:

What to Do

Select the screen "Conveyor" and check whether the following information is correctly displayed via the output fields:

Note

•

States of the proximity sensors of Bays 1 — 3 and the light barrier

•

Display of conveyor faults

•

Operating states (System ON, Manual and Auto modes)

•

ACT quantity

What doesn't yet work: Operating the system or the conveyor (System ON/OFF, mode selection, specifying the SETPOINT Quantity, Jogging RIGHT/LEFT, Acknowledging conveyor faults) via the input fields is not possible at the moment since your S7 program in the controller has not yet been adapted accordingly. You will do this in the next chapter with the function "Rewiring".




SIEMENS

Exercise 9: Testing the WinCC flexible Buttons

Operand' Symbol

Symbolkommentar

M 30.0 "M_Anlage_EIN_HMI" Merker Anlage EIN (TP170)

Stahtswert

■take

M 30 1 "M_Anlage_.AUS_HMI" Merker Anlage AUS (TP170) IlltrUe

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Task

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.25

1c



In the WinCC flexible project, find out with which S7 variables the buttons "System on", "System off', "Jog left", "Jog right", "Mode select", "Enter Mode" and "ackn fault" are connected and enter the variables in a Variable Table (see slide). In the "Conveyor" screen, press the buttons and with the STEP7 test function "Monitor/Modify Variables" observe how the touchpanel sets and resets the associated variables in the S7-CPU.

What to Do

1. On the touchpanel, select the screen "Conveyor". 2. Through the "Properties" of the buttons, determine with which S7 variables the buttons are connected. 3. Enter all the variables that you find out in a Variable Table. 4. One after the other, press all buttons and with the STEP7 test function "Monitor/Modify Variables" observe how the touchpanel influences the variables.




11

SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Note

SITRAIN

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.26

„Xi SITRAIN





SIEMENS

PROFIBUS - DP Terminating Resistor

t

ft

of

0 .

The terminating resistor must be switched on at the beginning and at the end of the segment

iii

i

i 0

E

,

0

i 1 Ei m ' MI I Mf

M9I 1 NI

Slave

Slave

.

19 Resistor On

i

,,,,""..1

ii..l

Slave

Slave

Master

m II .1 •

0

: i

Elf

e Resistor Off

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Setting the Terminating Resistor

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.27

2.1 SITRAIN Training for

gr


Switch on the terminating resistor on the first and last nodes of a segment. To do this, you open the cover of the bus connector and set the switch to the ON position.

The PROFIBUS is only correctly terminated if the power supply of the node in which the terminating resistor is inserted is actually switched on. If this is not always the case, the PROFIBUS can also be terminated with an active RS485 terminating resistor (6ES7972-0DA00-0AA0). The terminating resistor is then either permanently supplied with power separately from the other modules or is supplied with voltage from the peripheral modules. Termination of the bus system enables the nodes (for example ET 200L) to be connected and disconnected at will, without causing malfunctions.



11

SIEMENS

Segment Length Depending on the Baud Rate

Baud Rate 9.6 to 187.5

1,000 meters

500

kBaud

400 meters

1.5

MBaud

200 meters

3 to 12

MBaud

100 meters

Master

`o

— 0

i

I II

'

. .

0 0

Segment Length

kBaud

Slave

I

IMI I IM I

1

f

o

t

t:

li

Slave

I

t

I

t

M I I•1 t

i

0

1

I i IMI I I■1 i i I

.0

Slave

iii E 1

. . .. .

Segment Length

SIMATIC S7

Date: Files


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.28

SITRAIN RIZ"


Segment Length

In the slide you can see the cable lengths of a segment without a repeater depending on the transmission speed.

RS 485 Repeater

An RS 485 repeater boosts the data signals on the bus cables and connects bus segments. You will require an RS 485 repeater, if: •

more than 32 stations are connected to the bus,

•

bus segments are to be operated ungrounded on the bus or

•

the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded.

If you set up the bus with RS 485 repeaters, only a maximum of 9 RS 485 repeaters may be switched in series. The maximum cable length between two nodes is 10,000 meters at 9.6 to 187.5 kBaud.

SITRAIN



SIEMENS

Standard connector with screw terminal SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.

Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.29

n SITRAIN Training for An

gOr


PROFIBUS Connectorin the slide you can see two different versions of the PROFIBUS connectors. The incoming cable is connected to the terminals Al and Bl. If a connection to a further PROFIBUS partner is required, the connection is then made to terminals A2 and B2.



11

SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.30


General

PROFIBUS cables can be produced quickly and error-free with Fast Connect. You require a special stripping tool, cable and connector for Fast Connect.

What to Do

1. Measure the cable length by placing the cable on the template. 2. Place the measured cable ends in the stripping tool. Limit for the placement depth is the pointer finger of the left hand. Fasten the cable in the stripping tool. Turn the stripping tool clockwise four times to strip the cable. 3. Pull the closed stripping tool from the cable end. The residual cable parts remain in the tool. After opening the tool you can remove the residual parts. If the white filling did not come off during stripping, you can remove it by hand. To make it easier to remove the protective foil cut it carefully between the wires using a screwdriver. Remove the protective foil from the wires.




SIEMENS

Installing PROFIBUS-DP Slaves Later On

HW Config - IS7_300_Station (Configuration) -- My_Project]

1.1 atation edit Insert El-C 1

Dita:1:'1

11

view Option

1%1 dif

P117113

Window Help

Customize

; GSD-Datei for produkt 6F)0001-xxxxx, SIEMENS ; Version : (V2.0)-(Contact person Mr. Rechinger +49 9131 913 3955) ; Copyright (C) SIEMENS AG 1999 ; All Rights Reserved.

CtrkAlt*E

'L pecu Configure Network 'Lyrnbol Table Remit ,zrern Eiro:

flProfibus_DP

Eck Catalog Prone Update Catalog

PrmText=1 Text(D)= Increasing clockwise (0). Text(1 -Increasing counter clockwise (1)* EndPrmText PrmText=2 Text(0"Disable Text(1 -EnableEndPrmText PrmText=3 4 1

Instal HW Updates ... Instal New GSD... Import Station GSD...

Updates the catalog contents by checking al GSD and type Pies.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Type Files

Example of a Type File

18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.31

SITRAIN Training for Tr Automation and Industrial Solutions

STEP 7 requires a GSD or a type file for every DP slave, so that you can select the DP slave from the Hardware Catalog in the HW-Configuration tool.

All properties of a DP slave are stored in a GSD file and they conform to the PROFIBUS standard. Type files conform to the Siemens specification. For SIEMENS AG DP slaves, there is a type file for every DP slave type. DP slaves from other manufacturers are supplied with a GSD or a type file. Integrating DP Slaves

A new DP slave can be integrated into the Hardware Catalog as follows: 1. Select the menu options Options 4 Install New GSD 2. In the dialog field that then appears open the drive/directory with the appropriate GSD file. The slave is entered in the window "Hardware Catalog" (only in the catalog profile "Standard"!) under "Additional Field Devices" and is then available for the configuration.



11

SIEMENS

Rewiring a User Program DO

DI .0 1 .2 .3

‘0 s e 0

s

.4 .5

e

s

T_System_ON L_SYSTEM T_System_OFF L MAN T_Jog_RIGHT L AUTO T_Jog_LEFT S_M/A_ModeSelect T_M/A_Accept

.6 7 .0

0

s

T_Ackn_Fault

L_Conv_Fault

.1 s

.3

s

.0

•

.2

•

.3

•

• • • • • •

•

e e

.2

•

•

•

4

0 0

.5

s

6

s

• •

•

.7

1

.4 .5 6 .7

Set_Quantity NI

0 0 1 5

.0 .1 .2 .3

SIMATIC PANEL

SIEMENS

.4 .5 .6

Ell

.7

•

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.1

C)

• • .

start screen

SITRAIN Training for =• Automation and Industrial Solutions

Page

Contents .....................................

2

Areas of Use .................................. Rewiring using Absolute Addresses

3

Rewiring Results

5

Leading Symbols .......................... Rewiring using "Leading Symbols"

6

Objectives

4

.................................

Rewiring with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor Rewiring with the "Check Block Consistency... " Function .........................

7 8 9

.......................................................

10 11

Exercise 1: Creating a Backup Copy of the S7 Program Exercise 2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses ..........

12

Exercise 3: Comparing Blocks

14

Comparing Blocks (1) Comparing Blocks (2)



.........................................

Page 1

13

ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program

12

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... know how rewiring functions and how to apply it be able to carry out a rewiring using the SIMATIC Manager be able to carry out a rewiring using the symbol table ("Leading Symbols") be able to compare S7 blocks online-offline and offline-offline




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.2

Page 2

4



SIEMENS

Areas of Use program Operation via TP177B

program Operation via simulator

04.1

04.1 10.0

SR

SR

---

II

S

0

s

0

10.1 R

Rewiring • absolute addresse

Symbol information: T_System_ON T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM

I0.0 I0.1 04.1

"S_N/ "T H/ A_Accept"

A_ ModeSelect

"LHAN SR

s

II "l_STSTIHT"

Rewiring using symbolic addresses

Symbol information: H_System_OH_HMI 130.0 H_System_OFF_HHI 130.1 L sysnim 04.1

"M_M/ A_ "H M/ A_Accept_ ModeSelect HMI" HMI"

1I IA

Symbol information:

Symbol information: M_M/AAccept_HMI M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI L_SYSTEM LMAN

10.S 10.4 Q4.1 Q4.2

T_M/A_Accept S_M/A_NodeSelect L_SYSTEH LMAN

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.3

M30.5 M30.4 04.1 04.2

SITRAIN Training for gler


• In all blocks, one address is to be exchanged for another. • In one module, a defective channel (input or output) is determined. If, on the same module or another module, not all channels are occupied, the sensor or actuator in question can be reconnected to the free channel. •

Rewiring

s

"L_SYSTEM"

IA

Areas of Use

MAN" SR

The program is to be adapted to another process in which the sensors or actuators are wired to other addresses.

The program must be adapted to the new situation by rewiring (inserting the new addresses in the program). There are three ways to rewire a user program:

SITRAIN

•

Rewire using absolute addresses (independent of the symbol table, Address Priority Absolute Value)

•

Rewire using symbolic addresses (Address Priority "leading symbols") - in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor - with the Check Block Consistency function

•

Rewire using a source program


Page 3


12

SIEMENS

Rewiring using absolute Adresses !SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project — DA57_Courses \My_Proje]. File Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help

g?

IF.

S7_300_Station CPU 315-2 DP Ch13_1.114420 E a Sources

E

Customize... Access Protection Change Log

Ctrl+Alt+E

Y.#

Filter >

I Th

MI I k?

Size in the work me...

Text Libraries

SDB 134 Organization 124 Function

FBD FBD

Language for Display Devices... Manage Multilingual Texts

FBD

104 Function 100 Function 76 Function 64 Function 112 Function

a MICRO

2 TP1708_

Compare Blocks... Blocks: FC14:FC15fC16.FC175C18;FC195C42;0111

Blocks: FC14;FC155016507501850195C42;0131

Replacements:

Replacements: Ord address

flew address

Old add, ess

M30.0 M301 M30.2 0.430 3 M30.4 M3OS 131.0 1

2 3 4 5

6 7

2 3

•

5 6 • 7 — ET 7

Note. Insert Row

Delete Row

Cancel I

SIMATIC S7

Delete Row

O

..V141accesses Help

hin the specified addresses (not for peripherals)

OK

Date: File:


I

pred Row

4

r All accesses withrn the specined addresses [not lot peripherals]

OK

..

NOW addr

18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.4

Cancel I

(

C

Help


Rewiring...

Independent of the symbol table, the old addresses (in the example, bits of the IW 0) are replaced with the new addresses (in the example, bits of the MW 30) in the existing user program. The original blocks are overwritten with the new, rewired blocks. When you rewire using absolute addresses, you must select "Address priority: Absolute value" in the Blocks folder's Object Properties.

...in Specific Blocks

If you are only going to replace the addresses in one or several blocks, you have to select these blocks before you start the function.

...in All Blocks

If you are going to rewire or replace the addresses in all blocks, you have to select the Blocks folder of the S7 program before you start the function.

If you check (activate) this option, the individual bits of the specified byte, word ...All Accesses Within the Specified or doubleword addresses are also rewired. In the example shown, all bits of the "old address" IWO are rewired to the bits of the "new address" MW30. What to Do

SITRAIN

1. In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks folder or the blocks to be rewired 2. Choose the setting "Address priority: Absolute value" SIMATIC Manager - Edit 9 Object Properties 4 Address Priority tab 3. Start the rewiring SIMATIC Manager 9 Options 4 Rewire... 4. In the Rewire screen, enter the old and the new addresses and, if necessary, activate "All accesses within the specified addresses" 5. Acknowledge with "OK"


Page 4


SIEMENS

Wiring Results • FC15 — "FC_Mode" -- SERV 1_5 57_300_5tationt,CPU 315-2 DP \—\FC15

FC15

Title:

jj

Ilet.mork 4: System alum ..... :

•.

•

04.1 SR

N1S.1

4

.

4 -'

Symbol informmtlma:

T_System_ON M_Aux_System_ON T_Systea_OFF L_SYSTEM

41 I

• FC15 "FC_Mode" SERV I _5 57_300_Station \ CPU 315-2 DP

PCIS : Title: Zttttla: System ON/OFF .....

04.1 SR

M15.1 Tr

'

aI

Symbol information:

M30.0 MI5.1 M30.1

M_System_ONFRII M_Aux_System_ON M_System_OFF_HMI l_SYSTEM

04.1

-----

Memory bit System ON (TP170) Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Memory bit System OFF (TP170) Indicator light System ON

41 I

SIMATIC S7

11

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.5

Mg


Result

In the rewired blocks and/or in the entire user program, the old addresses (in the example, I 0.0 and I 0.1) have been replaced with the new addresses (in the example, M 30.0 and M 30.1). The old blocks (FC 15 in the example) have been overwritten with the new ones.

Rewiring Protocol

After rewiring, you can print out a protocol which shows how many replacements were made in which blocks:

r

chwinlo.txt - Editor

Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht ?

Address list: Old address: Iwo Block list: FC14: Number of replacements:2 FC15: Number of replacements:8 FC16: Number of replacements:4 FC17: Number of replacements:1 FC18: Number of replacements:0 FC19: Number of replacements:0 B1: Number of replacements:0



Page 5

New address: MW30


12

SIEMENS

Leading Symbols ...11:11A1 ..1.2121

6i LAD ,'511 .FEID - [FC15 --"FC_Mode"-- SERVI_S S7_300_Stritto Hn. Cl. File Edlt Insert PLC

Debug View Options Window Help

1:11 41-.1121

ell b ji

Ned !‹1›,!1 o_jr gg

F

7C15 Title: System OM/011, •T_System-

"N Aux

_SYSTEM SR

System P

oN"t

Q8.0/ L_SYSTEM j Indicator ight System

ea_ '4 Symbol Table: Address Priority:

Address Priority: Old Entry:

Absolute Value

1: Etta

LAD , STL ,F1313 - [FC15 "FC Mode -- SERVLSV

Cl• Ile &It Insert

9tetion \CPU

PLC Debug Vow OptionsV

f2LJ

D102-1 611 A1

.11

-11-1+1-1-01EIL, -11}-t1

A ;

L_SYSTEM = Q8.0

ON"

PLC Deism

New Entry:

ill sk

L_SYSTEM = 04.0

J®

Window Het.

41-1{

=tom System ON/OCT

mtmixis System ON/OFP •T System_

4: Address rim

MEDI=

Symbols

•N

System ON"

•T_Sys.A._ 077 •

vi

er

thj 14 4 P 14

1: Eno

A

2 1r4o A

3 Cseeteletences

Press Fl to got Help.

SIMATIC S7

Adams iJo. loffline

A 5: M. bs

Date: File:


FI

211111111.e

ter A

21NO

3Gesaelemnces

Press Fl SCO Help.

18.09.2009 SERV1_126.6

_A

Address into. IthIn.

Oh. "


nr


Introduction

If you want to change the assignments in the symbol table of an already existing program, you can also decide whether the absolute address or the symbolic address has priority.

Selection

In the SIMATIC Manager, right mouse click the "Blocks" object of an S7 program. Select the Object Properties menu option and then the "Blocks" tab. You can choose between "Absolute Value" or "Symbol" in the "Address priority" field.

Address Priority:

With this setting, the absolute address of an operand does not change if you change the address assignment in the symbol table later on. In the example above, the output Q8.0 (symbol name "L_SYSTEM") was changed to output Q4.0 in the symbol table. With the "Address Priority: Absolute Value" setting, the program continues to use the output Q8.0.

Absolute Value

Address Priority: Symbol

With this setting, the absolute address of the operand is changed to the new entry in the symbol table (functionality: "Rewire with Address Priority: Symbol"). In the example above, the output Q8.0 (symbol name "L_SYSTEM") was changed to output Q4.0 in the symbol table.

Note

When you change the address priority later on, you must recompile all blocks with the function "Check Block Consistency... 4 Program 4 Compile All" Without this compilation, the changed address priority is only valid for blocks that are created after the address priority change.



Page 6


SIEMENS

Rewiring using "Leading Symbols" jij m 2si

Syr SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project ER,57_Cour

80 Fie Edlt beat PLC VIew Options Wmdow Help

❑ re.irl' el c [47111,161[i 2E1 2g --- ET-- VIVI<"'""

LI7o

lily_Ptoject 111MTMIIIMPIMMEIIMIETTSIMATIC 300I1) di/System data 6 II CPU 315-2 OP LAD OB_Cycle Ck OB1 B S7 Pim:m.151 0 FC1 LAD Sauces , FBD PC Mode CI FC15 i5l 111" LAD otor Ctrl+X cut conveys Ctrl+C Cagy arl+V posts

Ell

a

Delete

MIA?

Cal General) Blocks I Checksums Address priority:

Insert New Object PLC

Behavior as in STEP? < V5.2

Rewire... CompareWas... Reference Data Check Block Consistency...

Absolute value has priority

Print

r

Recommended for symbolic programming

Symbols are applied from the symbol table and the DB for all accesses (I,Q.M,T,C and DB)

C Exception: symbol accesses on the DB remain as they were programmed in the code block

Exception: for accesses in structurally unchanged data types, the current symbols will be applied

V" Fa aU accesses (I,Q,M,T,C and DB)

F2

Rename Object Properties—

Displays properties of the

'

101111=511 T.• SDB 54 Organization Bk 48 Function 104 Function 50 Function Venable Table

Ak+Return

Special Object Properties Symbol has priority

C

Cancel I Help

OK

After every change activate the "Check Block Consistency ..." function!

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


General

18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.7

SITRAIN Training for lk

I


You can also rewire an S7 program using "Leading Symbols" with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor or the function "Check Block Consistency...". Prerequisites are •

an existing symbol table

•

in the Block Folder's Object Properties, select the setting "Symbol has priority.... For all accesses (I, Q, M, T, C, and DB)"

Before you rewire with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor or with the "Check Block Adapting the Absolute Addresses Consistency..." function, you have to enter the absolute addresses of the new operands in the symbol table. The symbols of the operands must not be changed. Note

The property "leading symbols" offers considerable benefits when data block variables are frequently used especially in connection with the function "Check Block Consistency...". If variables are deleted or inserted later on within already existing data blocks, the necessary address correction of the remaining data block variables can automatically be undertaken with the function "Check Block Consistency...". The easiest way to replace the traditional PLC operands (I, Q, M, T, C) is to use the previously described function "Rewiring with the SIMATIC Manager".



Page 7


SIEMENS

Rewiring with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor SIMATIC Manager - [ SERV I _325 C: 57_Courses Servl Fie Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help

oluki ELT' 6.-9 SE RV1_325 E My_Station El -;SA chapt09 chaptl0 E E ,21] Rewiringl al Sources 1.0 Blocks • Rewiring2 Elia Upload

F5_1170. OB1

.,-, no'',

NI

< No Filter >

__Lq12_(1 ,Lai2sj

Cr.IC

O FC16 At least one symbol assignment changed

Whig

CLAD; STL'FBD - [FC99 SERV1_3251.Ftewiringl

_LejJ

Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window

OK

lei L-± Lioul rk7) 6 1 -Al !<
r


FC99 : Title: Xietwork 11: Title:

"Inputl"

F

"Input2"

II

VI

'Inputl"

"Input2" I

0-1

I

111:11111131 MiLOMMECIW Press Fl to get Help.

120.0

a Cross-references

4: Address ido.

I-loffine

Ifiym as C

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.8

1 k


Rewiring

After you have set "Symbol" as the address priority in the Object Properties of the Blocks folder and then adapted the absolute addresses in the symbol table, you can proceed to rewire with the LAD/STL/FBD by opening the block. After you acknowledge the message "At least one symbol assignment changed", the modified addresses are automatically inserted by the Editor.

Attention

Rewiring is only made in the blocks that are explicitly opened with the Editor! As well, rewiring of a block is only effective when the block is then saved. If one or more addresses in several or all blocks of an S7 program are to be rewired or exchanged, all blocks must be opened one after the other with the Editor and then saved.



Page 8


SIEMENS

Rewiring with the "Check Block Consistency... " Function

:lc block consestency. [Demo_5 kly_Peoeecl] & view Hob

Triv !‹1›!! Jen) yj I d4 objects> 1

Object Hierarchy.

Cut

S7 program Call Tree [References I "FC_Mode" [FBD] • FC15 "FC_Conveyor" IFBDI • FC16 'TC_Faults" [FBI)] • FC17 ''FC_Math" [FBD] • FC19 "FC_MM420" [FBI)] • FC42 "Main_progiam" [FBI)] • OB1 "FC_Mode" [FBD] FC15 "FC_Conveyor" [F131/] FC16 FC17 "FC_Faults" [FBD[ "FC_Math" [FBI)] FC19 "FC_MM420" [RD] FC42

COW

Copy

Delete

Del

Insert New Object PLC Rewiring.. Compare Blocks... Reference Data

STEP7 Project: D: \ S7_coueses \My_Proje program' My_Prolect1Demo_5 Bausteme

Check Block Consistency...

program setting address alio* Symbol. Number of Blocks: 6 The 57 program contains blocks of the folovang editors.

Pont Rename Object Properties... Special Object Properties

F2 Att+Return

FBD

►

57 ptoryam Cal Tree (References "FC_M ode" [FBD] FC15 "FC_Conveyor" [FBD] FC16 "FC_Faults" [FBD] o FC17 "FC_Math" [FBD] FC19 "FC_MM420" [FBD] FC42 "M am_program" [FBD] 0 081 "FC_M ode" [HD] o FC15 O FC16 "FC_Conveyor" [FBD] "FCFaulte [FBD] o FC17 o FC19 "FC_M ath" [HD] "FC_MM420" [RD] o FC42

2Into less F1 for help.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV112E.9



Rewiring

After you have set "Symbol" as the address priority in the Object Properties of the Blocks folder and then adapted the absolute addresses in the symbol table, you can proceed to rewire with the function "Check Block Consistency... ". This is a good method when addresses are used in several blocks, since the blocks affected do not have to be opened.

What to Do

1.

IP I

SITRAIN

In the SIMATIC Manager, right click with the mouse on "Blocks" and select the menu option Check Block Consistency...

2. If there are blocks that are displayed in red, a compilation is necessary. You can trigger this compilation with the icon.


Page 9


SIEMENS

Comparing Blocks (1) Compare Blocks - Results

Compare Blocics Type of comparison:

t"; ONLINE/Offline

r

The block comparison resulted in the following differences: Path 1/F

Path 1:

P Including SDBs Pr Execute code comparison

r Including blocks created it different programming langi.

Path 2: ONLINE ISERV2_32S \Chapter6 \Blocks Storage Location I

Selected Path 1:

ISERV2_32S1Chapter6\Blocks

Storage Location: ICAS7_Courses1Sery2_32

SERV2_32S■Chapter6

Block List:

Blocks

Block FC1

Result of compartson xJ only exists in Path 2 ONLINE

Compere with. Path 2:

OK starts the ONLINE/0in

I

r

Canc

OK

Hide instance data blocks of the same length e:

I

lemesetless

! Path I

Lag radars chow s woop IM Sloo cheas,rn Oxf138.4 II. Created In bronco LAD Tad length of block 410 bytes go Length et bed data 6 bytes Length of eK7 code 310 bytes lock yenta 2 .11Name (Header)

„bki,Vciclgs are different.

Path 2 OMNI

051039 PM. 1110712000 OSM:511P1

0

OxA743 LAD 410 bytes 6 bytes 310 bytes

Details

2

Close

0.1

Clew I

Go To

— Update

I

Pant

I

Help

mi Mate

SIMATIC S7

...see next page4 Date: File:


18n9.2009 SERV1_12E.10

ge

l SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions

Introduction

You can compare blocks between online and offline data management or between two user programs on the hard disk of the PG. With this function, you can determine whether, for example, program corrections were made in the CPU later on and in which network the blocks differ.

What To Do

1. With the right mouse button, select the Blocks folder of an S7 program. 2. Select the Compare Blocks menu option. 3. Choose whether you want to compare online/offline or between 2 offline programs and acknowledge with the "OK" button. 4. In the follow-up screen, the blocks that differ are listed. 5. Select the line in which a difference was determined and then select the "Details" button. 6. In the "Compare Blocks - Details" window you can ascertain when the block was modified and if the block length was changed. 7. After you select the "Go To..." button, the differing block is opened online and offline in two windows, for example, and the network, in which the first difference was determined is displayed.

Note

Program corrections can only be made in the offline window.



Page 10


SIEMENS Go To...

Comparing Blocks (2)

--.

,..Lcij id

-._ He Edt Insert PLC Debug View options Window 11*,

❑Ir1-1®I ell x Nei .L-1-_j Lkkii F ezj thl nrit Li' • FCI7 — SERY2_325 \ •

-H-144-1-nr771

14-I .1211

"M_Feultl" —Freport_liessory

"N_Feul tl" —Repot t_Dersory i,, _Fault.l. Edge _Edge_rieaory_B

eul tl_Edge

Edgefienory_13 —it

e 2

Net

Network 11: Eveluetton Disturbance 2

"DB_Instence F eult2"

"DBInstance_F sal t2" EN

"FBFaults" _

EN

A

Disturbence_I "4_Fault2" —nput

Display-89.4

Al A

ENO

_J

Display -89.2

"T_Ferul t_Itst^ —Acknowledge Flash_f re guen "2 Hz" — cY

Flesh_f re quen "2 Hz" —c1`

1

"FEI_Faults"

Disturbance _I "4Fault2" —zPut

"T_Feult_Ret" —Acknowledge

4

_IIoJ al

• .s.al,I. -

• Ilk•i::E.•..

,_1P_125.1

2

1

Le-..: I 0,1 :

1.4 4 ijj\ 1. ii.i 1u

Next

I

1:Effo

,

,10 ,,...

?: Cros eferencas

I

,,pdare

7: Coe arson J

4 Address info.

I


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Differences

18.092009 SERV112E.11

0111111.111.11 Abs < 52

144 4

P----

SITRAIN tr

g


After you select the "Go To..." button (see previous page), the Program Editor is opened with two windows side-by-side, in which the network with the first difference is displayed. You can navigate between the differing networks or program locations using the "Previous" and "Next" buttons.

Example


In the example shown above, the blocks of two different S7 programs are compared in an offline - offline comparison. Both S7 programs contain an FC16 block, but each have a different program code. You can read out which of the two blocks was the last one saved or which has the newer date from the time stamps in the "Compare Blocks - Results" screen.


Page 11


12

SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Creating a Backup Copy of the S7 Program

JJJ

VSIMATIC Manager - [My_Project D:\ST_Courses \My_Projej gp File Edit Insert PLC

View

Options Window He

Rkeltal E

My_Project SIMATIC 300(1 111 CPU 315-2 DP F, E CID Source Blocks E sr My_Program E

2

-41227:-EElint

Object name

Symbofic name

=LJ XI

1_1 70

No Filter

ig I %Fl

Type

Size Author

Source Folder Block Folder Offline 53198

1. Make a backup copy as a hardware-independent S7 program

La 10 09 10

--/

2. Rename the original program

lussigrom


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.12

‘1r „



Task

Before you rewire your S7 program, you are make a backup copy. This backup copy is to be created as a hardware-independent S7 program in the project.

What to Do

1. With the mouse, drag your S7 program called "My_Program" directly onto the project symbol so that the copy is assigned to the project as a hardware-independent S7 program (see slide). 2. Rename the original S7 program assigned to the CPU "Rewire".

SITRAIN


Page 12


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses Simulator

DI I 0.0 \ID I 0.1 \D I 0.2 \c, I 0.3 I 0.4 \D I 0.5 O \

DO


L_SYSTEM

T_Jog_RIGHT

L_MAN

T_Jog_LEFT

L_AUTO

SIMATCPANEL

• • Q 4.1 • Q 4.2 • Q 4.3

-

©0 =

•

S_M/A_ModeSelect

•

T_M/A_Accept

C 3 - 7

• •••

•

O

N

O

\

, 20

1=111111■1111■11■1111Matak .... Blecke FC145C155C165C175C185C19fC42.GB1 RadxenaMx Old address I

10.0

C:)

El

H15.1 P

New addroos

3 4 5

04.1 SR

.1

3130.0

Effi

VI

E

I

Rewire

1115.1

04.1 OR

0

30.1

El I

r

Notes Spiel tagesatioa: T_System_ON I0.0 M_Aux_Systea_OH 015.1 T_Systa._OFF I0.1 L_SYSTEN 04.1

il

medRom •• P /8 acmees within the spec:tied addresses (not fee Petherals1

Delft Row

S3441m43. lasfmertion: H_Syscem_ON_HHI H30.0 H_Aux_Systes_OH H1S.1 M_System_OFF_HKI H30.1 1_SYSTIM 04.1

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.13

IC



Task 1

The S7 program is to be adapted in such a way that operating the system or the conveyor model (System ON/OFF, operating mode selection, specifying the SETPOINT quantity, jogging RIGHT/LEFT) is no longer done via the simulator but is done via the touchpanel. You are now to make the appropriate adjustments to the S7 program with the function "Rewire".

What to Do

1. In the S7 program called "Rewire" select the property "Address priority: Absolute value". SIMATIC Manager 4 select the Blocks folder of the S7 program 4 Edit 4 Object Properties 4 Address priority tab 2. Activate the "Rewire" function. SIMATIC Manager 4 select the Blocks folder of the S7 program 9 Options 4 Rewire... 3. In the table of the Rewire dialog, enter the old and the new addresses and activate (check) the option "All accesses within the specified addresses" (see slide). 4. In FC 17, the input "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0) has been replaced with the memory bit M 31.0. Modify the block in such a way that you can acknowledge a conveyor fault (M17.0) either via the touchpanel (M 31.0) or, as before, via the simulator momentary contact "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0). 5. Download all blocks into the CPU and test the functions 6. The (hardware) NC contact "T_System_OFF" (I 0.1) has been replaced with the (NO contact) memory bit "M_System_OFF_HMI" (M 30.1). Modify FC 15 so that the system can be switched on again

Result

With the exception of specifying the setpoint quantity, you can operate the system completely via the touchpanel.

Task 2

Modify the program of the FC 19 block in such a way that the setpoint quantity no longer has to be specified via the BCD thumbwheel buttons on the simulator but can be made via the corresponding input field on the touchpanel. Solution tip: The touchpanel transfers the setpoint quantity specified in the "Parts Setpoint" input field into the variable "MW_SETP" (MW 22).



Page 13


12

SIEMENS

Exercise 3: Comparing Blocks

.. C1■LAD 511 (BD FT 15 -- "I I moth, Insert

nlryl coo + .J

ofra;12-lial J x FC_Plode- - mael

n FCIS

-

PcIS

JQJJ

PLC Debug Mew Options Verde" Help

_5 \57_3003tation\CPU 315-2

plum ...121z1

..

"FC.Iiode — SER1/1_S 57 3003tatimo \ CPU 315-2 DP \

FC1 5

FC1S : Title:

Title:

MUM:

11-141-1-01ff'11.1-1.1 -1 ff FC15

MOM System ON/OFF

system 01/011

.

.

IO.o

54.1

011.1

SR

1

:M30.0 %

Q

015.1

04.1 SR

:50.1 1 4

I

• e T.

1--‘7l a! lafeammtion: /0.0 010.1 $0.1 04.1

T_System_ON M_Aux_Systea_ON T_Systam_011, L_V/STIN

-----

Momentary cont■ 14g. auxiliary Momentary COD, Indicator ligt :tr ml

Symbol lateaantioa: 5500.0 M_System_ON_HMI 5515.1 M_Aux_System_ON 5510.1 M_System_OFF_HM/ 04.1 L_TYSTIff

-----

Memory bit Edge auxil Memory bit Indicator

■ 11

[EI DC111111111=1/WEEW Press II to pet E

a Cross-references

4 Adders info

.

MIELL"

5: M

F-0 loots

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.14

7: lIME I

A

SITRAIN Training for V ir


Task

With the "Compare Blocks" function, check the changes you made during rewiring. To do so, compare the rewired S7 program called "Rewire" with the backup copy of the original program called "My_Program".

What to Do

1. In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks folder of the program "Rewire" and start the "Compare Blocks" function SIMATIC Manager - Options 4 Compare Blocks 2. In the follow-up dialog box choose "Type of comparison: Path 1/ Path 2". Then, in the SIMATIC Manager window, click on the Blocks folder of the S7 program called "My_Program" and start the function via "Compare". 3. The box "Compare Blocks — Results" appears. Use "Go To..." to display the different versions of the FC 15 block

Task Expansion

SITRAIN

Also compare the program stored online with the current program called "Rewire".


Page 14


SIEMENS

Introduction to Micromaster MM420


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_138.1

▪


•


Page

Contents Objectives

.......... 2

Principle of an Inverter Overview: Standard Drives

.......... 3

Communication: PROFIBUS DP Main Tasks of the Master — Slave Communication

..........5

Structure of the Control Word Integrating a Drive in the HW-Config

.......... 7

.......... 4 ........ 6 .......... 8

BOP (Basic Operator Panel) Standard Operator Panels

.........9

Keys on the Operator Panel PROFIBUS Communications Module: Setting the Address

........10

Exercise 1: Reset to Factory Default

....... 12

Exercise 2: Controlling the Micromaster via the BOP Exercise 3: Setting the MM420 Parameters with the BOP

.......13

Exercise 4: Integrating a Drive in HW-Config

....... 15

Exercise 5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel

....... 16

SITRAIN


Page 1

...... 11

...... 14

ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)

13

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... understand the principle of an inverter be able to reset the inverter to factory defaults be able to operate the BOP standard operating panel be able to set basic parameters using the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) be able to integrate the Micromaster into the hardware configuration be able to monitor and control the Micromaster




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.2

Page 2

4



SIEMENS

Principle of an Inverter Infeed (Rectifier)

DC link

Power module (Inverter)

zs Three-phase mains system such as 3 AC, 400V, 50 Hz

AA

Induction mo Or Variable speed

Inverter

Voltage

Voltage

41111•1111011•111107-

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Direct On-line Operation Motor Starter Inverter

The Way it Works

Configuration Rectifier

18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.3

Voltage

,111,1111111, WNW SITRAIN Training for gir Automation

and Industrial Solutions

Three-phase AC motors (here: induction motors) can be operated directly on the three-phase mains system. They are switched on and off by means of a contactor (= relay for high currents). For example: a pump for a water storage tank. To achieve a smooth start-up, a reduced voltage starter (= motor starter) is frequently used. After start-up, the motor is then operated directly on the mains. For example: the drive of an escalator. If the motor speed is to be variable, an inverter is used. For example: the drive of a container crane. Some applications require a precise adherence to a predefined speed. This is frequently connected to positioning tasks. These are then servo drives. In simple terms, servo drives are used everywhere where movement used to be carried out manually. For example: machine tools, packaging machines, robots. With a rectifier circuit, the three-phase current of the public supply system is rectified. This results in a DC voltage that is buffered by capacitors (DC link). A power module with transistors generates a three-phase current with variable frequency and voltage from this DC voltage. Variable voltage? The motor represents an inductive resistance for the current flow. With rising frequency the inductive resistance increases. For that reason, the inverter must also increase the output voltage proportional to the output frequency. It is possible to connect several power modules for several motors to a rectifier (such as SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES). If a rectifier circuit with transistors instead of diodes is used then electrical energy can be fed back into the system during ramping down.


Page 3


13

SIEMENS

Overview: Standard Drives

4. c7=

Application example: Controlled pumps and fans in an air conditioner

MICROMASTER 4 Inverter (here the different sizes with a performance of about 0.1 to 250 kW)

SIMATIC S7

Application example: Conveyor belt

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.4


Categorization

Standard drives are used for applications that only require a low to medium dynamic as far as speed control is concerned. Many applications in the past used to be driven with three-phase motors connected directly to the mains. In the 90s, inverters became so economical that the advantages of a speedcontrolled drive could be utilized in many areas (energy savings in the partialload operation, smooth ramp-up and controlled ramping down, quality improvement in production).

Design

The MICROMASTER inverters are now in the fourth generation. They are "Stand-Alone" devices. That is, the inverter is complete and is connected between the mains and the motor. The MICROMASTER 4 inverter family comprises several versions: MICROMASTER 420: for simple control requirements such as pumps and 430: fans. MICROMASTER 440: for demanding control requirements (dynamic and precise speed control). MICROMASTER 410: for the simplest requirements with only a limited ability to parameterize. MICROMASTER 411: the integration of motor and converter (= COMBIMASTER). The inverter is located in a special housing piggy-backed on the motor.

Applications

• • • • •


Pumps and fans (for heating, air conditioning, ventilation, chemistry, foodstuffs ...) Conveyor belt systems (for packages, baggage, mail) Automatic doors ([house] entrances, elevator doors, garages) Washing machines, dryers and ironing machines (industrial field) Car washes ...


Page 4


SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.5

l

•

ittT


Field Bus

A field bus connects distributed sensors and actuators (such as, valves, light barriers, measuring devices, drives, operator control panels) with the central PLC. PROFIBUS DP is a manufacturer-independent, open field bus. PROFIBUS has been standardized and continuously further developed by the PNO (Profibus User Organization) since 1990.

Master-Slave

The master (usually a PLC with a PROFIBUS interface module, such as, S7-315-2 DP) controls the data communication on the bus. Slaves only send data when they are prompted by the master. That way, no collision results between two senders.

Cyclical Range

The slaves are cyclically (= one after the other) supplied with process data by the master and their process data is scanned. In Drives, process data are, for example, • speed setpoint, switch-on signals from the master or • actual speeds, error signals from the drive. The data telegrams consist of 2 to 16 words (a 16 bit). Cycle times lie between about 2 to 20 ms.

Event-driven Range

As well, there is often the need to read or change the parameters of a drive. This occurs (in today's applications) only when prompted. The cyclic operation is then briefly interrupted and a longer data telegram with up to 117 words is sent.

Master Class 2

The "normal" master is called Master Class 1. For commissioning, you can also connect a PC or PG (= SIMATIC programming device) as a Master Class 2. Independent of the actual data communication, the Master Class 2 can access the drives.

PROFIBUS Address

The minimum requirement for commissioning the PROFIBUS option module is the setting of the PROFIBUS address.



Page 5


13

SIEMENS

Main Tasks of the Master — Slave Communication Master-Slave Communication Reading and writing of parameters Reading out of fault and diagnostic values Reading and modifying function values

Controlling the drive process Permanent setting of control bits and setpoints Constant reading of status bits and actual values

Parameter index value (PKW)

Process data (PCD)

Panama_ Size of the main setpoint Source of the main setpoint

}to the inverter

Level of the control bit

Source of the control bit

Size of the main actual value

}from inverter

Level of the status bit

How does data transmission take place? • •

Only triggered if required Freely accessible to all parameters

SIMATIC S7

• •

Date: File:


Fast and permanently triggered With fixed "wiring" to the process

18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.6


Process Control

Fast data transmission of short data telegrams to all participating stations with the maximum speed available on the bus. In drive systems these are typically setpoints, control commands, status replies and actual values (measured values).

Operating Control

In addition to this permanently available data, there is data that is only needed in particular cases. It would therefore be senseless to permanently put load on the bus if this data is only needed once per hour or per day, for example, when starting up the machine (Class 1 Master). Another reason for an expanded communication need could be the commissioning, optimization or diagnosis of machine components from a central location. In this case, (such as a fault) a detailed access of an Engineering Tool to the system components or the drive is enabled. Since, as a rule, only one affected device/component is directly addressed, this window is only made available once per bus cycle for one bus station and not simultaneously for every station.



Page 6


SIEMENS

Structure of the Control Word . ..... E : 15 14 13 12

9

8I7

6

= Motor ON

F

:

7

4

0

W # 16 #

7

4

0

W # 16 #

5

Rising edge for switching on !

:13 =

Motor OFF

4

L

ON/OFF 1 OFF 2 - OFF 3 - Pulse-Enable Ramp-function Generator-Enable Ramp-function Generator-Startup Setpoint-Enable Fault-Acknowledge JOG right - JOG left - Control from PLC - Reverse --- Motor-Poti up - Motor-Poti down Command Data Set Bit 0

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.7

glkT


Control Word

The control word (bits 0 to 10) conforms to the Standard PROFldrive Profile. Bits 11 to 15 are MICROMASTER-specific.

ON/OFF1

To switch on the inverter, a rising edge of this bit is necessary, and the bits OFF2 and OFF3 must have the state = 1. When switching off via this bit, the motor is braked on the braking ramp of the ramp-function generator (P1121) and the inverter then switches off.

OFF2

The inverter switches off immediately and as a result the motor ramps down without braking (coasts to a standstill). To switch the inverter on again, this bit must be set to 1 once more and a rising edge at ON/OFF1 is necessary.

OFF3

The motor is braked on the OFF3 braking ramp and the inverter remains switched on. This function is often used as EMERGENCY STOP.

Note

For reasons of wirebreak safety, the inverter is always switched off if the signal state of the associated OFF bit is = 0.

SITRAIN


Page 7


13

SIEMENS

Integrating a Drive in the HW-Config station Edit Insert

izi.c Dew

=0A

be

Qptkins Window

iai; :-I5g s7_300_5tation (Configuration) -- MyProject

CPU 315-2 DP

II

np

Properties - PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PR General

L

PROFIBUSI11. DP

master system (1) End froliec

Parameters I

E d SIMOREG dSIMOVERT E al LARGE DRIVES CBP2 MASTERDRIVES CBP MASTERDRIVES CBP2 0-/MIDI-/COMBIMA al 1 ' ► ASTER 4 E • BIMASTER 411

E

Address.

Transmission ra Subset:

IDriyeES

General Dove Unit / Bus Address "-

Zevice type:

I'

Device version

HMI=

r

General Crnfifit.elim I Dala Etc:honor Broadcast • Overview I Qefralt

PPO type 3. PZD-2/2

•

0111221:11 1 MIIMIM111111111111111

MICROMASTER 430

mirRnmAqun tidy!

8

1PBOO-C1 A0 (4M4B) ASTER 420 wilh US Interface (see Ord& ES / SIMOTION

Delete slot Mastatislave configuration 1 121DP Mester. Stat., S7

OK

Staten

Corrrrent

Cancel

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


General

Properties Dialogs

I

'I*

Training for S lN A iT utomati on and Industrial al Solutions

18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.8

The cyclic data exchange between CPU and MM4420 via PROFIBUS must be configured in HW Config.

The following properties are defined in the dialogs: PROFIBUS interface: PROFIBUS address and subnet SINAMICS: Firmware version of the Micromaster (to be found on the nameplate of the MM420 such as, "Issue: A06/1.17") DP Slave: In addition to the I/O addresses for data exchange between CPU and Micromaster, the type of communication must be defined here: PPO Types: (Parameter Process data Object) The structure of the user data for the cyclic data exchange is identified as the PPO Type in the PROFIBUS profile for Variable-speed drives. The PPO types 1 to 5 have a defined number of PKW (Parameter Index Value) and PCD (Process Data): PPO Type 3 permits a simple data transmission with which the controlling of the Micromaster is possible as well as the specification of the speed setpoint and the reading out of the speed actual value. With PPO Type 1, you can also change all drive parameters per CPU program.



Page 8


SIEMENS

BOP (Basic Operator Panel) Standard Operator Panels BOP (= Basic Operator Panel)

SDP (= Status Display Panel)

Setting parameters (changeable parameters):

Index of a parameter (sub-parameters):

Parameter keypad for easy commissioning or changing individual parameters

As delivered from factory LED Status display

SIMATIC S7

Monitoring parameters:

Date: File:



18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.9

SDP

The MICROMASTER is fitted with the SDP (= Status Display Panel). The MICROMASTER is already parameterized in such a way that it can be operated through the terminal strip. The SDP has a status indicator with a green and yellow LED (16 different messages).

BOP

The BOP (= Basic Operator Panel) can be ordered as an option. It is inserted instead of the SDP — temporarily for commissioning or long-term. Available functions are: •

LCD display with 5-digit 7-segment display and unit symbols (Hz, min-1, V, A, kWh)

•

Access to all parameters up to Access Level 3 (Expert)

Parameter List

Unlike a PLC controller (SIMATIC), drives are not programmed. No program is written. Settings are made in parameters. The basic program in the digital drive is fixed and is called firmware. By assigning parameters, the inverter is adapted to the task.

Indexed Parameter

Many parameters contain sub-parameters. Parameters with similar functions are often grouped there.

Monitoring

Some parameters are only used to display values. So that you can differentiate them from the others at first glance, an "r" (= read only) is placed in front of them instead of a "P".

Parameters

Trigger Parameters


Some parameters can only be changed from 0 to 1. An internal action in the MICROMASTER is usually triggered with this, for example, Reset to Factory Default.


Page 9


13

SIEMENS

Keys on the Operator Panel

,. 1

.

0 Start the converter with parameterized ramp-up time Bring the converter to a standstill with parameterized ramp down rate. Press twice and the converter coasts to a 0 standstill.

iI rj u.0 nnn u (r

r

Fri

A

log

P

1

0 Changes the direction of rotation e)

C

Parameter access. Is used to select the parameter number and to accept the value

CI

Increase parameter number or value

s

MICROMASTER

420

.. .•• 4... . iii .......— • ,....., PC.A.54 .11 Ble f

'

,

1, “

Motor starts and rotates at the preset jog frequency. Motor rotates as long as the button remains pressed

0 0 SIMATIC S7

Decrease parameter number or value This key has a series of functions: - Roll function to display the 5 most important values - More exact setting of parameters, e.g. decimal places - Jump to Parameter 0000. The display shows r0000

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.10

A

NZ


Access Levels

For simple applications, only a few parameters have to be changed. For complex applications, an "exotic" parameter may be needed from time to time. For that reason, access levels were established in parameter P003: • Level 1 = Standard: Only the 17 most important parameters are displayed • Level 2 = Extended: In this level, additional parameters are visible for the input and output terminals, as well as for communication through field bus or for example, for the setpoint channel • Level 3 = Expert: Here you have access to all necessary parameters. For the MICROMASTER, this is about 600 parameters • Level 4 = Service: Some specific parameters are only meant for authorized service personnel. The level is protected by codeword.

Command Source

Commands are: on signal, off signal, jog, and acknowledge fault messages, for example. On the training unit, you can select the following sources using parameter P0700:

Setpoint Source


•

P0700= 1

•

P0700 = 2

BOP operator panel Switches S1-S3 on the demo case

•

P0700 = 6

From the CPU through PROFIBUS

Setpoint is, the inverter frequency, for example. On the training unit, you can select the following sources using parameter P1000: •

P1000 = 1

BOP operator panel with the higher/lower buttons (only with r0000)

•

P1000 = 2

Potentiometer on the demo case

•

P1000 = 6

From the CPU through PROFIBUS


Page 10


SIEMENS

PROFIBUS Communications Module: Setting the Address

Switch number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Add to address

1

2

4

8

16

32

64

Example 1: Address = 6

off

on

on

off

off

off

off

Example 1: Address = 88

off

off

off

on

on

off

on

Some addresses have a "particular meaning Address

Meaning

0

PROFIBUS address is specified by Parameter P0918

1 to 125

valid PROFIBUS address

126, 127

invalid PROFIBUS address

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


‘

18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.11


17


Attention

The minimum requirement for commissioning the PROFIBUS communications module is the setting of the PROFIBUS address.

Setting

You can set the PROFIBUS address in two ways: - through the 7 DIP switches on the module or - through Parameter P0918

Note

To change the DIP switch, the inverter must be in a switched off state (no voltage) (for already mounted communications module). A change to the DIP switch only takes effect after the PROFIBUS module is restarted. The restart must be triggered by a Power OFF / Power ON. This is true for an inverter supply as well as through a separate 24V supply.


Page 11


13

SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Reset to Factory Default Parameter

Value

Comment

P0010

30

Reset to Factory Default

P0970

1

1111101111

End

11111/141.1111.1

S1 = Drive On/Off

P0010 = Commissioning filter P0970 = Reset to factory defaults P3900 = End of quick commissioning

LI

S2 = Reverse direction of rotation S3 = Acknowledge fault H1 = Fault (is lit when there is no fault) P1 = Potentiometer for the frequency/speed

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.12

,



Task

First of all, carry out a Reset to Factory Default to establish a defined initial state.

Factory Default

In the factory default, the inverter is already functional. It is parameterized for a 4-pole Siemens motor with the same power rating as the MM420 and can be controlled via the binary inputs (see slide).

What to Do

1. Change the parameter P0010 to the value 30 2. Change the parameter P0970 to the value 1 3. Wait until the P---- indicator "disappears" on the display 4. Test the inverter using the switches and potentiometer on the demo case (see slide)

Quick Commissioning

If Parameter P0010 is set to the value 1, the quick commissioning mode of the inverter is activated. Only the most important or the most frequently required parameters are displayed. The quick commissioning mode is always required when motor (characteristic) data are to be changed. With the end of the quick commissioning via Parameter P3900, additional parameter data are recalculated out of the changed motor data: •

P3900 = 1

4 Reset to factory default and motor data calculation

•

P3900 = 2

- Only motor data calculation 4 Reset the parameter assignments of inputs and outputs

• P3900 = 3 This procedure is also described in the "Getting Started" Guide that is included with every unit. We will not practice the quick commissioning in this exercise.



Page 12


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Controlling the Micromaster via the BOP

Parameter number

Value

Comment

P0700

1

Control signals from BOP

P1000

1

Frequency setpoint from BOP

• • •• 11 • •• Reverse direction

ON—. OFF1—.

With selected Parameter r0000: ncrease frequency Decrease frequency

Jog operation (set-up operation)

SIMATIC S7

Date File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.13


Nt;


Task

Switching on and off as well as the specification of the drive's speed is to be done via the BOP operator panel.

What to Do

1. On the BOP, set the parameters shown in the slide to the specified values 2. Switch on the motor using the ON key 3. Select the parameter r0000 using the arrow keys and press the P key so that the current frequency is displayed 4. Change the frequency and with that the motor speed using the arrow keys.

Note: Arrow Keys

Pressing the higher/lower (arrow) keys only affects the speed when the parameter r0000 is selected and the parameterization mode has been exited via the P key. Otherwise the arrow keys continue to used for assigning parameters. Changing the frequency or the speed using the arrow keys is also called motor potentiometer (MOP).

Jog Key:

The drive or motor can be jogged using the Jog key. By default, the control signals and the setpoint come from a SIMATIC S7-CPU. When setting up the drive or in the case of service, it can become necessary to control the MM420 "by hand" using the Jog key. The Jog key only functions in the ready state. That is, the signal OFF1 = 1. The frequency is 5 Hz in the factory default.

Fn Key

With the "Fn" (Function key) key, you can carry out the following actions: • acknowledge alarm and fault messages when the error no longer exists • jump between decimal positions in parameter changes • display important inverter data, such as, voltage of DC current link (Roll function when "Fn" key is pressed for 2 seconds).


Page 13


13

SIEMENS

Exercise 3: Setting the MM420 Parameters with the BOP If the PROFIBUS address was set from the hardware side, P0918 can only display

Parameter number

Value

P0003

2

Expanded parameter access

P0700

6

Control signals from PROFIBUS

P0918

6

PROFIBUS address of the MM420

P1000

2

Frequency setpoint from Potentiometer

P1120

2.00

Ramp-up time 2 seconds

P1121

2.00

Ramp-down time 2 seconds

.__

Comment

Setpoint before ramp-function generator:

50 Hz

Setpoint after ramp-function generator:

Internally generated / ction Setpoilt frequency ramp-fu

Setpoint frequency 50 Hz

AIL P1120

P1121

1

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.14

4


Task

The drive is to be assigned parameters in such a way that it receives the control signals from the CPU via the PROFIBUS.

What to Do

Use the BOP to set the parameters as shown in the slide.

Diagnosis

An LED is located on the front of the PROFIBUS-DP interface of the MM420. The following table explains possible LED displays and error causes and helps you with the following exercise:

Off

no power

Red flashing

invalid PROFIBUS address (126/127 is invalid) or hardware / software error

Red on

temporary state during startup or new communication configuration; if constant state, then PROFIBUS interface or inverter defective

Orange flashing

communication to inverter built-up; no connection to PROFIBUS, or PROFIBUS connector not inserted or faulty or PROFIBUS master is switched off.

Orange on

communication is established, but no cyclic data exchange is taking place.

Green flashing

cyclic process data exchange exists, but setpoints are invalid (control word = 0, because S7 master is in the "STOP" state, for example.

Green on

cyclic process data exchange is established.

Ramp-up Time

Internally, the setpoint value changes according to a step function. To achieve a controlled ramp-up transition, a ramp-function generator is integrated that generates a ramp-type setpoint for the controller.



Page 14


SIEMENS

Exercise 4: Integrating a Drive in HW-Config :HW Coring - S7_300_5tation

aCation Edit Insert eLC Dew Qptions Window help

J o ci:1-ez wu a R2Ielimilimitolialtel LZS7_300_Station (Configuration) -- MyProject

CPU 315-2 DP OP Properties - PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PROFIBUS General

L

JJ

PROFIBUS(1) DP master system (1)

El 0 SIMOREG 0 SIMOVERT ID 0 LARGE DRIVES CBP2 ■ MASTERDRrVES CBP MASTERDRIVES CBP2 0-/MIDI-/COMBIMA ASTER 4

Parameters

Address:

Genetel Drive Ur / Bus Addle.

Transmission ra

BIMASTER 411

Qeace type

5ubnet:

Des,ice yeeson

ilei" Slat t 4 6

rI PPO type 3 F Tt 2/2

Nero Type A. WON

PROFBUS partner PR... 4/0 e._ Pro... Length 1 L0 Type

Actusiviss/... 2D1 Inratoeut

.2

1=1- - • 2

—

Conaste

1Nerel UMW!

I

Cl

MI"! MICROMASTER 430 mirP MASTFP

1P800-0AAO(MM4B) TER 420 with US Interface (see Order e ES / SIMOTION 10

-

— Merle-sieve conlIguation 1 — 121 DP Menem S7_300_Station Stelon

OK I

OK

I

Comment

_J Cancel I Hein

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.15

gr


General

The cyclic data exchange between CPU and MM420 via PROFIBUS must be configured in HW Config. Proceed as follows:

What to Do

1. Activate the HW Config tool. 2. Open the HW Catalog and set the Profile "DriveES". 3. From the SIMOVERT 4 MICROMASTER4 directory, select the Micromaster 420 and drag this onto the PROFIBUS DP mastersystem using drag and drop. 4. In the "Properties — PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PROFIBUS" screen, enter the PROFIBUS address 6, select the subnet and confirm with "OK" 5. In the "Properties — SINAMICS" screen, choose the device version "1.0x" or "1.1x" that fits for your training unit. You will find this version on the MM420's nameplate (such as, "Issue: A06/1.17") 6. In the "DP Slave Properties" screen, in the "Configuration" tab, select PPO Type 3 and assign the I/O address 42 for data exchange with the CPU (see slide). 7. Save, compile and download the configuration into the CPU.

Result

When the MM420 has been successfully parameterized and integrated in the hardware configuration of the S7 Station, the LED of the MM420 PROFIBUS interface shows a green flashing or constant light.


Page 15


13

• SIEMENS

Exercise 5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel SIMATIC PANEL I

4C.42 z

CPU

Meter as

•latemor•

.••••• -

“gm.

I

e. am '1•F— 0111•11•71

.• ti

om

P R

..••• Control_•

je.zo-

• • .• 40.0m1 lageenatlanz 11 14 4:0_0,12.11 ,4_70ntat.12121430

0

M40. 0 .3t4J

Jyttch On Mulors tat M430 .1,1701 -- Control word tor 1115.1j0

Mlmenr. z 1•41.t. Motor Ogg

F

•. ILM420 • 014_11110 •_ •

yjp.'=ew

so

111161143I —xx

B U

••00 * Con;rel_ . 114214120• • tr.....

1171.40 1:014•44441.gaz On 102 =

S

11111110111:

D

M40 0 OW42

Stmtch On genory Olt MM430 17,1701 -- Control word for M430

Jo g Motor flat

044;'''''' 11 14 '''' ' • 4. JogIIIM_ Jog_14/7. 'X 111420 MS' On 1017- 4 ..., * 1---/1-0—;70=M X110

•

P

.............. 141:1167-IM

Control_ . 20' . ................................... 1•••• 111•1•01 1•01440.04.04: MM5430_J g CMMI MJ143_Jo g _IFT__01 _M11430_0n_1171:3 OV_Contr ol101430

-- :Unary tat M420 Jog IS M 111.170. -- Nemo, hat M11430 Jop 1Mt 111.1707 Sto.tth On gentry bat M11430 170170. -- Control word for MM400

1140. M40.3 M40.0 12 10,

A SIMATIC S7

Date: File:



18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.16


Task

You should be able to switch the drive on and off from the touchpanel. During switched off continuous operation, the MM420 can be jogged to the right and to the left via the appropriate keys; during switched on continuous operation, it turns at the speed that is set on the potentiometer of the MM420 training unit.

What to Do

1. Copy the "FC_MM420" (FC 42) block from the project called "SERV1_B" located in the S7 program called "Chap13_MM420" into your S7 program. 2. Put the block into operation 3. On the touchpanel, activate the screen "MM420" 4. Test the functions described.

Notes on the Program

The QW42 output word declared by you in the Hardware Configuration serves as so-called "control word" for the MM420. Per program you can control the MM420 by transferring defined values. The values (HEX constants) specified in our example have the following meanings: in NW1: W#!16#47F = switch on the drive in NW2: W#16#47E = switch off the drive in NW3: W#16#57E = jog the drive to the right in NW4: W#16#67E = jog the drive to the left



Page 16


SIEMENS

Documenting, Saving, Archiving


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.1

gir


Page

Contents

......... 2

Objectives Other Documentation Tools

............ 3

Block Documentation

............ 4

Page Setup Print Preview Managing Multilingual Project Documentation

............. 5 ............................ 6 ........... 7 ............8

Overview: Saving User Data Uploading an S7 Program from the CPU to the PG

............9

Uploading a Hardware Station to the PG (PLC Copy)

........... 10 ........11

Transferring a Program onto a Memory Module Saving a Project onto a Memory Card Loading a Project from the Micro Memory Card (MMC)

......... 12 ........13

Archiving a Project Memory Concept of the S7-300 until Oct. 2002

.......................................................14

Memory Concept of the S7-300 after Oct. 2002 Memory Concept of the S7-400

..........16

......... 15 ......... 17

Exercise 1: Documenting a Block and Printing It Out

........ 18

Exercise 2: Saving the Program and Hardware Configuration (PLC Copy) ........ 19 Exercise 3: Archiving "My Project" .............................................................................................................20 If You Want to Know More

......... 21

MMC - as Additional Data Memory on the CPU PLC: Storing Data on the Memory Card

........ 22 .......... 23

PLC: Getting Data from the Memory Card

..........24

SITRAIN


Page 1

ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... be familiar with the documentation possibilities of blocks understand the "Managing multilingual project" function be able to print out programs understand the memory concept of the SIMATIC S7-300/400 be able to make a "PLC Copy" (online data storage) be able to load/read a program to/from a Memory Card be able to archive/retrieve a project




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.2

Page 2



SIEMENS

Other Documentation Tools Reference data

Program structure Cross references Assignment of I/Q/M/T/C

Unused addresses

Checklists

Addresses without symbols

Symbol table

Configuration

Network configuration

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.3

_21 SITRAIN Training for r


Reference Data

If you print out the reference data it makes troubleshooting, in particular, easier. You will find more information in the "Troubleshooting" chapter.

Symbol Table

The symbol table contains the association between absolute address, symbol names and symbol comments. See the "Symbols" chapter for more information.

Configuration

Configuration data generated with the "Hardware Configuration" tool. The printout is in text form. If you want a graphic printout, you can copy the graphics onto the clipboard and then paste them in another program such as Winword and print it out.

Network Configuration

Displays in graphic form the stations of a networked system with the relevant configuration data such as the MPI address.

Printer

The printer used for documentation is the one installed under Windows. If you want to use a different printer, you must set it up with the Windows Control Panel.

DOCPRO

The DOCPRO optional software is also available for superior documentation and for writing wiring manuals.


Page 3


14

SIEMENS

Block Documentation ,i_ol ,i ,

pLAD/STL/FBD - [FC4 -- My_Project \My_Station\CPU 314] Ck He Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options ,.

DI ;[ I-1611

,

AI xltilal -1 -1

Window Help

Eldhl F

_J 1 1 nig 1-1d

-11-

<1 .119 ._12_ 0

1

1 -

1 4 1 D1 -01- 1

1 k?I

.fd

FC4 : Block Title up to 64 characters

_J

Block comment: To enter a comment, select menu options "View -> Display with -> Comment". You have up to 64 kBytes per Block for block and network comments. =aleiNetwork Title up to 64 characters

Network comment: To enter a comment, select menu options "View -> Display with -> Comment". You have up to 64 kBytes per Block for block and network comments. A "T_System_ON" // Statement comment up to 160 characters // Comment can also be inserted between the lines S "L_System" // LED for System ON AN "T_System_OFF" // System OFF R "L_System" // LED for System ON

_Li

Ell

1: Errs

2:14o

a Cross-references

_A

4: Address MM.

)

5: Modify

1---- Cr ickfline


A___ 6: Diaprrostics A

lAbs <5.2

INvii 1 In 6

7: Cowen=

triert {Cho

A

/ SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


A SITRAIN Training for

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.4

qr


Block Comments

The slide above shows the different comment facilities available for a program block (OB, FC, FB).

Printing

To start the Print function: • Click the printer icon or • Select the menu option File 4 Print.

Print Setup

You can change the printer settings by selecting the File option.

Print Setup... menu

BEI

El HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS Document Properties Setup Advanced

Print Setup r Printer Name:

et0pe_ rties i

HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS

Status:

Ready

Type:

HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS

Where:

LPT 1:

> Paper Source I

Automatically Select Copy

Copy Count: 999)

Comment -Paper

Paper Size: A Letter

- Orientation

Size:

I Letter

Source:

!Automatically Select

Orientation

A

r Landscape

OK

r

Rotatild

Print on troth Sides (Duplex Printing)

r Landscape

EI 6 None Network... I

I -V"1

( Portrait

A

r Short Side

[:0(- LongSile

Cancel I Color Appearance

as

6' Gray Scale -

r Color

OK

SITRAIN


Page 4

I

Cancel


SIEMENS

Page Setup Seite einrichten Pa terformat Schalk's,

Papierformat I Schrittfeldet Layouts.

Kopfze4e

A4 Fend

Links:

A3 A3 Rand A4

Mite:

I

{Objekt}

I

Recite: I

(Datum) {Uhrzeit) zLI ..LI

Ausrichturg

—Fuezeie

Hochfonnat

1. ... d

H

AS A5 Rand Legal 8,5" x 12" Legal 8,5" x 12" Rand Letts 8,5' x 11" Lena 8,5" x 11" Rand

Al

..

Koplzeile LINKS

r

Querformat

Links-.

IFullzeile LINKS

Meta

I

Rechtz

I

1

I_d

-.. .

...ji....d

FuBzeile AMITE

Sei!, {Seite} von (Seitenaneah) ...1 _ .2LI

Votgabe

11;

MAIO

111011111■z_J Abbrechen I

OK

SIMATIC S7

Gultig Ur.

Hale

I

Date: File:


Z_I

I Protelkt

Abbrechen

OK

Ita. *1

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.5

Hie



Page Setup

When you select the File 4 Page Setup... menu option, a dialog box in which you can select the print format (such as A4 Margin) appears.

Paper Format

Selection of the paper format that is used for printing.

Labeling Fields

The header and footer edited in the "Labeling fields" later appears on each page of the printout regardless of with which tool (for example, HW Config or LAD/STL/FBD Editor) the printout was undertaken. Fields for printing out the current date of the printout, the page number, or the name of the object are provided in the headers and footers (such as {Date} {Time}, Page {Page}, {Object}).

14

SITRAIN


Page 5


SIEMENS

Print Preview

SINATIC

By Prolect\ My Station1CPII 314\ —11,020 -

01/22/2003 9:20:24

FC20 - •1C ?malt" Evaluation of Faults no memory Vanily: Autbor: WardLan: 0.1. Aim* varsina: 2 00 stamp Cada: 10.01.2002 09:17:22 Istarfaca: 1.2.07.2000 14:24:45 Idadtbs (blackflafFinidnta): 00152 00048 00000

rte:

Name

Data lype

Address

PI

0.0

Disturbance Input Boo! AcknoWedge 8001 Flash frequency :Soul OUT I ' Display Soul IN OUT I Report_Memory 'Boni Edge Memory Bit Bool TEMP RETURN RET VAL I

0.0 0.1 0.2 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.1 0.0 0.0 0.0

Initial Value

Comment

FALSE FALSE FALSE ;FALSE FALSE FALSE i

Ia.*. ocn ftwork: 1

Disturboca *valuation

*Disturbance 2 Sldpa_Saaory 13 Siteport_llanory Illub_frequan - it EP= SA . 01-7 1 I 1---,.....-..-....--1( 0--3 I

SESaplay (5----I

Sacknoaltdge -A 99isturbance_I Sltaportilaaorp mina.

-IA

H

Page 1 of 1

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Print Preview

Note

SITRAIN

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.6

26 .


For a preview of what your printout will look like, select the File 4 Print

Preview... menu option.

The appearance of LAD program printouts depends on the settings made under the Options 4 Customize 4 LAD/FBD menu option in the LAD/STL/FBD editor. Example: The setting for the length of the address field affects the number of contacts that can appear side by side in the printout and the number of characters of the symbol name that fit on a line above the contacts.


Page 6


SIEMENS

Managing Multilingual Project Documentation SIMATIC Manager - [TIA-PROI-Solution_en D:\ S7-Kurse TIA-PROI \TIA-PRD .];; FIe Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Kelp

.3

DI I 1?lel

Customize... Text libraries 2 titil TIA-PRO1-Solutton_en Display language... My project_C9_HMI Manage h9ultiLnqual Te.. My_prolect_CI O_MM420 E E II test station Rewiring... E. I CPU 315-2 DP Run-Time Properties... E. 0 CI OMy_Proi al Sources Compare Blocks... Reference Data MICROMASTER. Define Global Dote My_project_C11_C14 Configure Network test station • Simulate Modules E. a C12 FC_FB_E1 C12_FC_FB_E2 E SIMATIC PDM IE Cl2_FC_FB_E3 III 0 Cl 2 FC_FB_E4 Configure Process Monitoring C13_organisat_block E Charts ad Sources

Ctri+Ak-FE

MEI

fill Blocks

C14_analog_value_E E a Chapter12_FC_FB_ei

F

Manages user texts

SIMATIC S7 Function

Export

Import

J vg

o Fiter >

9 111*1

I Created in langur

I Symbolic name Export...

■

Change Language... Delete Language... Reorganize Settings for Comment Management... FBD FBD STL LAD STL

FC_Faults FC Count FC_Edge_Detection FC_MM420 FC_Scaing Control Micromaster

Import objects PLC-OS Connection Data Set PG/PC Interface...

Date: File:


;

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.7

Raz


STEP 7 lets you multilingually manage the documentation (texts and comments) created in a project. These can be exported from the project for translation purposes and then later be reimported in the language in which they were translated. The opportunity then exists to choose between different languages for the documentation. The following types of texts can be managed multilingually. • Block titles and block comments • Network titles and network comments • Line comments from STL programs • Comments from symbol tables, variable declaration tables, user-defined data types and data blocks • Comments, status names and so on, of blocks that were created with engineering tools such as S7-GRAPH or S7-PDIAG. The Export is carried out for all blocks and symbol tables that are located in the selected object folder. For every text type (see above), an export file is generated that can then be edited with EXCEL. This file contains a column with the source text in the original language and a column in which the translated text can be written. During Import, the translated text is accepted into the selected project. The translated text is only accepted if the original source text still exists.

Change Language

For Change Language, all languages can be selected that were imported into the project. The change is carried out for all selected object folders.

Delete Language

When you delete a language, all text in that language is deleted from the internal data management.


Page 7


14

SIEMENS

Overview: Saving User Data Uploading program from the CPU to PG

1. Create a new S7 program in the SIMATIC Manager 2. Switch to the online view 3. Open the new S7 program and select Blocks folder 4. SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Upload

Upload station in PG

•

Load program from PG to Memory Card...

1. Open two windows in the SIMATIC Manager: "Blocks folder of the S7 program" and "S7 Memory Card"

(Flash EPROM or MMC)

SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Upload Station

2a. Use drag & drop to copy blocks to the "S7 Memory Card"

... inserted in PG/PC or ... inserted in CPU

2b. PLC - Download user program to Memory Card

Copy program from CPU • to Memory Card

SIMATIC Manager - PLC - Copy RAM to ROM...

(only with S7-300 with Flash EPROM)) Project archiving on Memory Card / MMC (S7-400, S7-300 with MMC)

1. 2. 3. 4.

Project archiving

1. Select the CPU on whose Memory Card the project data are to be saved 2. SIMATIC Manager - PLC 4 Save Project on Memory Card SIMATIC Manager - File 4 Archive Select project to be archived Specify name and storage path of the archive file and start function In the Windows Explorer, copy archive file (e.g. onto USB stick) /

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved .

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.8


Uploading a Program With this function, you copy all blocks and the system data without from CPU into PG/PC documentation (symbol table, variable and parameter names, comments) from the CPU into the selected program folder. The selected program folder then contains a "PLC copy" with the current online program. Upload Station in PG/PC

With this function, you load the complete hardware station as a new station in the project. It is not possible to overwrite an already existing station.

Load Program from PG/PC to Memory Card

You can load the blocks and system data from the blocks folder of an S7 program onto a memory card. You can insert the memory card in the interface of the PG/PC or in the slot provided by the CPU if the CPU supports this service.

Copy Program from CPU to Memory Card

If a user program is stored on a memory card, you can still make program changes online. The modified blocks are stored in the internal RAM of the CPU, while the unchanged block remains stored on the memory card. You can store the modified blocks on the memory card with the Copy RAM to ROM function.

Archiving Project on Memory Card

You save the entire data of the project (such as user programs with all comments, symbol tables, and hardware configurations from all hardware stations) on the memory card with the "Save Project on Memory Card" function.

Archiving Project

With the "Archive Project" function, you save the complete data of the project (such as user programs with all comments, symbol tables, and hardware configurations from all hardware stations) in an archive file in compressed format (*.zip, *.arj etc.). The archive file is much smaller than the non-archived project and you can move or copy the archive as often as you like with the Windows Explorer.



Page 8


SIEMENS

Uploading an S7 Program from the CPU to the PG File Edit

D

Qptions

nsert

I

! g?

X, fib

MYRoiect E 1111 S7_300 Station CPU 315-2 DP S7program ••• Blocks a MICROMASTp.420 et3 S7 El II ID 0

ffl

Program

,11:112(.1 Window Help

.:_17.17 I Pd*

Access Rights Ctrl+L

Downloyi

and

Ctrl+K

Configure... Compile

Download Objects...

Pi] Upload Station to PG... Copy RAM to ROM... Download User Program to Memory Card Save to Memory Card... Retrieve from Memory Card... Manage M7 System... Drive Oise* Accessible Nodes Change Module Identification... CPU Messages... Display Force Values Monitor/Modify Variables Diagnostic/ Setting PROFIBUS Edit Ethernet Node... Ass's p,rPC Cancel PG/PC Assignment Update Firmware

FC1 FC16 FC19 SFB2 SFB5 SFC1 SFC4 SFC7 SFC13 SFC17 SFC20 SFC23 SFC29 SFC32 SFC36 SFC39 SFC42 • SFC46 SFC50 SFC54 SFC57 SFC64 SFC67 SFC72

x

Update the OPeret/MISYstem.Press Ft to get Help.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


FIBUS)

Save Service Data.

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.9

1


11.1

Before you make changes to an existing program, you should at least make a Copying a CPU Program onto a PG backup copy of the CPU's S7 program. What to Do

1. In the SIMATIC Manager, create a new, hardware-independent S7 program (in the slide "PLC Copy") 2. Select the Blocks folder of the new S7 program and activate the ONLINE view so that all blocks stored in the CPU are visible in the right window. 3. Load all blocks from the CPU into the new Blocks folder PLC 4 Upload.

Note:

Only the complete S7 program is "uploaded" into the project, not the complete hardware station. Even though the CPU's "system data" are also copied during upload it is not possible to retrieve the configuration and parameterization data of the complete hardware station, As well, the uploaded S7 program has no documentation whatsoever. That is, there are no comments such as network titles, no symbols and also no variable and parameter names.



Page 9


SIEMENS

Uploading a Hardware Station in the PG (PLC Copy) VSIMATIC Manager - MyProject Fib Edit insert

Window Help

0 a; I I? RP X, 13a

Access Rights

Ctrl+L Ctrl+K

-2'.. MyProject D: Courses'; MyProject

B

t1 Fr

IE §1,399JBleilori. VIIII.SIMATIC 390(1) . "*. %.• • a. CPU 315-2 DP Eva 57 Program A° t • 'al Sources •• • el*,•* * TOMOkr • E sr 57 Program

Compile and Download Objects... Upload Station to PG...

Copy RAM to ROM. Download User Program to Memory Card Save to Memory Card... Retrieve from Memory Card...

MATIC 300 St MAT IC 300 St MATIC HMI S Program PI OFIBUS OFIBUS

Manage M7 System... Drive Display Accessible Nodes Change Module Identification... CPU Messages,.. Display Force Values MonitorlModify Variables Diagnostic/Setting PROFIBUS Edit Ethernet Node... Assign PG/PC

Cancel PG/PC Assignment Update Firmware Update the Operating System... Press Fl to get Help.

SIMATIC S7

Save Service Data...

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.10

A

Mr


PLC Copy

Before you make changes to an existing program, you should make a backup copy of the entire hardware station (PLC copy) in the offline project.

What to Do

The uploaded station is always stored as a new hardware station in a new or already existing project (as in the slide). PLC - Upload Station to PG...

Note:


The uploaded hardware station contains all configuration and parameterization data of the station (including networks and components) as well as the complete user program. The uploaded S7 program, however, has no documentation, that is, there are no comments such as network titles, no symbols and also no variable and parameter names.


Page 10


SIEMENS Transferring a Program onto a Memory Module

04====11M111=111111111L delp view Qptions Window

He EdIt riser. 41,C

12

e

:fop

_jai X

LptlyProject — DA,Co_rses \MyProject • MyRroiect

0 081 0 FC1 0 FC14 0 FC15 0 FC16 0 FC17 0 FC18 0 FC19 'q ._ VAT_I/0 -Conveyor

a

.•• .•

it

/

57 memory card

Symbolic name

Ob eel name

2,..) Systemdaten

= II S7_300 Station - IN CPU 315.2DP al S7program za Sources Blocks + 1 MICROMASTER_420 .• • c -:. Touchpanel •

n S7 memory card

< No Filter >

Er= Ill

--06_Cycle FC_S ignal FC_M ode FC_ConvM otor FC_F ault FC_Count FC_Count_Add VAT I/0-Conveyor

.•

Created in Ian, a. .._ LAD STL LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD

I

2.11 7 /,1 ,jinjal

21 System data C} FBI

Cl. F Cl 4 0. FC17 0. FC20 0. DB2

0 OB1 0. FB20 ci. FC15 0 FC18 0 FC42 0. DB3

0. OB100 0. FC1 0. FC16 0. FC19 o 0131 oDB19

(This window can only be selected if the Memory Card is inserted in the PG ) ICP5611(PROFIBUS)


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:

Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserve,'

Prerequisite

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.11

itt-

SITRAIN


The memory module (Memory Card or MMC) must be inserted in the PG. As well, the Memory Card driver must be loaded in the STEP 7 software. If this is not the case, you can install the driver via "Start" 4 Simatic STEP 7 Memory Card Parameter Assignment" Then, the "Memory Card" icon exists in the SIMATIC Manager's toolbar.

Erasing the Memory Module

Before you can transfer the program onto the memory module, the memory module must be erased. The Memory Card can always only be erased completely. That is, individual blocks can not be erased or overwritten.

Transferring the Program

1.

Note

With most of the CPUs, the Memory Card can also be written in the CPU using

In addition to the project window, open the Memory Card in a further window in the SIMATIC Manager ( File 9 S7 Memory Card 9 Open) 2. Arrange the Project window and the Memory Card window one below the other as shown in the slide. 3. In the Project window, in the appropriate Blocks folder, select the desired blocks and drag them with the mouse into the Memory Card window.

PLC Download User Program to Memory Card


Page 11


14

SIEMENS

Saving a Project onto a Memory Card _,L51.1 c1

Manager - Nyproject (Component view) -- si-Courses My_proje)

et) Fie Edit Insert rPtc View Options Varelow

D114:I ail,

Acce" RCit'

E

Dowrioad

MV_Porocl E SIMATIC 3( E • CPU 31 El cam

a

tiI2!

EIC.343 test station 91 ED LI Chacter12

,12.111 c

Nab

J Yo

I < No Flue >

I Created in Anoxia,

Compie/Downbiel Proyams...

'13141

_I Sin in the wok

FBD

upload

FBD

Ibload Station Copy RAM to ROM...

OIL 08

Downbad user program to memory card

Retrieve from Maxey Card... ManageC17 S, itern... Drive Display Accessible Nodes

Display Force Values McmitorlModfy Variables

STEP 7Daa Caaulawaw Ma ma wawa* P Cieeipreo

aaa Taraawavlbe waradaial Varna POWarawkaad

Diagnostic/Setting PROFIBUS Assim Monet Address... Assign PGIPC Cancel PGIPC assignmer Update Operating System...

area Soechit

mix OP tr NC pa mix a.m.*. x aiX re Pao/MIX aw

1

:J 41 fEM i

J

Saves desired data to the Memory Card.

SUM.loWatta PLC May Led

_J SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.12


'lltr


Function

With the functions "Save to Memory Card..."and "Retrieve from Memory Card...", you can save and retrieve the complete data of a project (user programs with all comments, symbol tables, hardware configurations etc. from all hardware stations) on a memory card. The memory card can be located in a CPU or in the memory card programming slot of a PG or PC. The project data are compressed before they are saved on the memory card and are extracted when retrieved. The size of the project data to be saved corresponds to the archive file size of the project. If the memory capacity of the memory card is not sufficient a message will appear indicating so.

Project Data with / without User Program

Similar to the archive of a project - the project data contains all data belonging to the project and all user programs of the CPUs. The user programs contained in the project data can not be read by the CPUs and thus cannot be executed. With the option "Load the user program also", the executable user program is also stored in addition to the project data. This user program is the one assigned to the CPU on which the memory card is inserted.

Area of Use

If several co-workers in the service and maintenance area have the job of maintaining the SIMATIC S7 PLC, it is difficult to quickly provide every worker with the current project data for a service assignment. When the project data are available locally in one of the CPUs to be maintained, every worker can access the current project data and make changes, if necessary, which in turn are current and available to all other workers.

Note

The functions Save to Memory Card and Retrieve from Memory Card are unrestricted in the S7-400 system. They are available for the S7-300 system after Oct. 2002.



Page 12


▪

SIEMENS

Loading a Project from the Micro Memory Card (MMC)

a

File Edit Insert

Al Ia' MILO 'IN

PLC View Options Window I1

olad 1?1,1 PROFINET 10 111 SIMATIC 3C CPU 31 E E CJ Tes E RE C7 Testprosran

Access Rights Doe.inioad

!keine system... Ctrl+L

is name

Configure...

KNOW HOW protec...

Load mem EPROM

Compile/Download Programs... Compile and Download Obje:ts.

EPROM

Upload to PG

Upload Station to PG... Copy RAM to ROM...

Modified Adobe Acrob... 06.02.2001

Download user program to memory card


...

Manage M7 System... Drive Display Accessible Nodes

I7 Li /Referent Michael lemon

CPU Messages... Display Force Values Monitor/Modify Variables Diagnostic/Setting

V tSofivare STIA_PRO123_v55 •

o abc

AX NF ZZ

File type:

PROFIBUS Edit Ethernet Node,..

OK

Asnon PG/PC

F N

Cancel PG/PC As5i:,,,,r[v. Retrieves desired Nes se

Update Fume

P

Documents and Settings f.D DOTS_SWP RECYCLER i SIMATIC 57 - Projekte L-I SIMATIC 57 Archrve

0,th.; 157 COUSeS

Update the Operating System...

OS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.13

Mauer ordneri

I

SITRAIN Training for • .Automation and Industrial Solutions

P

Introduction

With the PLC 4 "Save to Memory Card" and PLC 4 "Retrieve from Memory Card" functions, you can save all project data and any files you wish for a later application on a Memory Card and then you can retrieve it later on. The functions for saving project data and retrieving from the Memory Card are, however, only available for newer CPUs (after Oct. 2002). The project data is compressed (zipped) before it is saved on the Memory Card and is unzipped when it is retrieved. The size of the project data to be stored corresponds to the archive file size of this project.

Application

If several employees in the service and maintenance department are responsible for maintaining the SIMATIC automation system, it is difficult to quickly provide each employee with the current project data and possible service instructions that exist in file form. If, however, the project data of a CPU is available locally in one of the CPUs to be serviced, every employee can access the current project data and, if necessary, make modifications, which in are then available for all other employees.

Operating

If the project data does not exist on the programming device used (PG/PC), you can select the source CPU in the window "Accessible Nodes". Open the window "Accessible Nodes" with the menu options PLC - Display Accessible Nodes and select the desired Connection/CPU with the Data on the Memory Card. Now select the menu options PLC 9 Retrieve from Memory Card. In the follow-up dialog, choose the data to be transmitted and the project path.

Note

You can protect CPUs against unauthorized access by using a Password. See the Hardware Configuration chapter for more information.



Page 13


SIEMENS

Archiving a Project

IA=1===11111M1011111M111=1111V File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help New...

Ctrl+N

New Project' Wizard... Open...

EI- *I d II

Close

1_179 113

111111111•11112k

Archiving User projects I Libraries I Sample projects I Multiprojects I

Multiproject

Name

57 Memory Card

Storage path

MyProject

D: \Courses WyProject

Memory Card File Save As...

Archiving - Select an archive -:

Delete...

Archive That Goes across Diskettes:

Reorganize... Manage... EMEZI Retrieve...

I N°

r Incremental Archiving r Reset Archive Bit r Check Consistency

>

Print Page Setup... 1 57 memory card 2 Loesungsprojekt_PRO 3 SERV1 5 (Project) —

User projects: Libraries: Sample projects: Multiprojects:

File name:

4 SERV1_13 (Project) — Exit

OK

14 I

OK

IMyprojec zip

Cancel I Help

Save I

Save as lype: I PKZip 12.0-Archive('.zip)

Cancel

ell)

Lit Saves project or library (compressed) h an archive.

SIMATIC S7

A

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.14

V



Introduction

Since the data in a project can take up a lot of memory space and might not fit completely onto a disk, an archive function is provided. This archive function compresses the data so that it only takes up approximately 1/8 of its original amount of memory. It uses the normal file compression utilities, such as PKZIP, ARJ, LHARC, RAR or WINZIP. One of these programs must first be installed on the PG/PC. If you want to use long file names for the projects, you will need PKZIP, WinZip or RAR. The ARJ and PKZIP file compression utilities are supplied with STEP 7. You set the path for the archive program by selecting the Options - Customize 4 Archive menu options in the SIMATIC Manager.

Archiving

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Retrieving

1. Select the File 9 Retrieve... menu option. 2. Select the "Look in: " location where the archived file is stored and select the "File name" of the archived file and "Open". 3. In the next dialog box, select the destination directory and "OK". 4. Use the last dialog box to select options for overwriting and restoring the storage path


The project to be archived must be closed in the SIMATIC Manager. Select the File 4 Archive... menu option. Select the project to be archived in the dialog window and press "OK". Select the "Save in:" path and "File name" in the next dialog box. In the last dialog box, you can choose between the following options: - Archive That Goes across Diskettes = Can split the archive file onto several diskettes = Only the files with the ACR - Incremental Archiving attribute (STEP7 files) are archived. Archive only the files that have - Reset Archive Bit = been changed since the last archive. Compare the files to be archived = - Check Consistency (only for ARJ)


Page 14


SIEMENS

Memory Concept of the S7-300 until Oct. 2002 Load memory: Blocks: • Logic blocks > (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) Additional info

Comments

-a-rn

RAM

Flash EPROM

Working memory: • OB,FC,FB

Symbols Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB)

Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) Additional info

=

DB n. reten.I reten.

With Power ON without battery backup

11111

System memory: • PII,PIQ • M, T, C n. relent reten.

Retentive memor

7

• Retentive M, T, C • Retent. Data blocks

Flash EPROM Memory Card in PG (inserted later in the CPU)

SIMATIC S7

Date File


With Power OFF without battery backup

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.15

l

ikiT

z SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions

Load Memory

The load memory is a component of a programmable module. It contains load objects (logic blocks, data blocks, and additional information) created on the programming device. The load memory can either be a plug-in memory card (EPROM) or an integrated RAM.

Work Memory

The work memory (integrated RAM) contains the parts of the S7 program relevant for running your program. The RAM work memory is integrated in the CPU and is backed up by the battery.

System Memory

The system memory contains the memory areas for: • Process image input and output tables (PII, PIQ) (M) • Bit memories • Timers (T) • Counters (C) • L stack (L).

Retentive Memory

The retentive memory is a non-volatile RAM used for backing up bit memories, timers, counters and data blocks even if there is no backup battery. A Flash EPROM Memory Card must be used to do this. You specify the areas to be backed up when assigning the CPU's object parameters.

Inserting a Memory Card

When you insert a memory card, the operating system requests a memory reset. (STOP LED flashes slowly). You perform the memory reset by turning the mode selector to the "MRES" position. The sections of the program relevant for execution are then transferred from the memory card (with load memory function) to the work memory. You must leave the memory card inserted while the program is being executed..

Memory Reset

During a memory reset, all user data - with the exception of the diagnostic buffer and the MPI parameters - are deleted.


Page 15


SIEMENS

Memory Concept of the S7-300 after Oct. 2002 Micro Memory Card (CPU load memory) Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) • System data

Comments Symbols

4j

Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB)

.

Load

Working memory: Sections of the • logic blocks

-

Power OFF

• data blocks relevant for execution

Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) • complete project, if desired

Warm restart after Power ON

System memory: • PII, PIQ • Local data Micro Memory Card in the PG (inserted later in the CPU)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Load Memory Micro Memory Card (MMC)

L

• M, T, C

Power OFF retentive n. retent.


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.16

W.


The Micro Memory Card (MMC) is used as the load memory of the CPU. It is used to store logic and data blocks as well as the system data (hardware configuration, communication connections etc.). If you like, the complete project can be stored. That way, you have the symbols, comments and configuration data, for example, for HMI or drives, available. The MMC contents are retentive. If a block or the entire user program is downloaded into the CPU from the PG, the information is stored on the MMC. All block sections relevant for execution are automatically copied into the work memory (RAM). It is only possible to load a block or the user program as well as operate the CPU when the MMC is inserted! A memory reset is required every time the MMC is pulled or inserted!

Work Memory

The work memory (RAM) is integrated on the CPU and only contains the parts of the S7 program relevant for running your program (such as, only the current values of the data blocks, not the initial values).

System Memory

The system memory contains the memory areas for: • • • • •

Retentive

Process image input and output tables Bit memories Timers Counters Local data

(PII, PIQ) (M) (T) (C) (L)

All data that are saved in a power failure and/or which don't lose their contents are considered retentive. This is all the work memory data as well as the bit memories, timers and counters declared as retentive in the hardware configuration. Retentiveness is achieved in that the above-mentioned data are stored on the MMC in a power failure and are written back to the RAM after a warm restart when the power comes back on.



Page 16


SIEMENS

Memory Concept of the S7-400 Load memory: Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) Additional info

Comments

Working memory: • OB,FC,FB

Symbols Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB)

Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) Additonal info

RAM

Flash EPROM

Backup via battery

• DB System memory: • PII,PIQ • M, T, C

rm.

-111

Flash EPROM Memory Card in PG (inserted later in the CPU)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.1 7

SITRAIN Training for Rtr


Load Memory

The load memory can either be a plug-in memory card or integrated RAM. In the S7-400, the memory card (RAM or Flash EPROM) expands the internal load memory. A memory card is always required for the S7-400, since the internal load memory only has a limited size.

Work Memory

The work memory contains only the data relevant at runtime. The RAM work memory is integrated in the CPU and is backed up by the battery.

System Memory

The system memory contains the memory areas for: • Process image input and output tables (PII, PIQ) (M) • Bit memories (T) • Timers • Counters (C) • L stack (L).

Memory Card

When a RAM memory card is used, the system must be operated with a battery. The battery backs up the data on the memory card and any internal RAM in case of a power failure. When a Flash EPROM memory card is used, the user program is stored in the memory card making it power failure safe. The data found in the internal RAM are backed up by the battery. The "Hot Restart" mode is possible only in a backed up system.

Inserting a Memory Card

When you insert a memory card, the operating system requests a memory reset (STOP LED flashes slowly). You perform the memory reset by turning the mode selector to the "MRES" position. The sections of the program relevant for execution are then transferred from the memory card (load memory) to the work memory. You must leave the memory card inserted while the program is being executed.


Page 17


14

SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Documenting a Block and Printing It Out NV Dcoicc‘NY NC-etion■ CD13 314 \ • -A MIN -
3121TIC

Rea/or. 2

01 22 20 3

/

/

0 10:05150

IDDIAL Dodo

'1' NM Accept -

-

is WV Z. occ•

DoeleS21 191

:C Disoulemee

SETSSE -IV -

CD

2

.S2/ANodmEel eet .

SMILE

::D ConveyorE S_POL111 -

TV

B

SIMATIC S7

BCO

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.18

‘Vir


Task 1

Provide the networks of a block with network comments and network titles. Then take a look at a print preview of the block with headers and footers.

What to Do

1. Edit the headers and footers for the printouts SIMATIC Manager - File - Page Setup... - Labeling fields... 2. In a block, edit the network titles and network comments LAD / STL / FBD Editor 4 View 4 Display with 9 Comment 3. Take a look at the block in the print preview LAD / STL / FBD Editor 4 File 4 Print Preview...

Task 2


Also take a look at the symbol table as a printout. Open the Symbol Editor and select Symbol table 9 Print Preview


Page 18


SIEMENS

Ex.2: Saving the Program and Hardware Configuration (PLC Copy) File Edit Insert PLC lAew Options Window Help

❑D M11 MyProject E E

MI

E0

F S7_30 Touch

Which module do you want to reach?

Access Rights Download

Ctrl+L

Configure...

ttrl+K

Compile and Download Objects...

S

Back

r6 E.

Slot:

71 ..,

,

Upload tc PG d Sr.ahrri to PS Copy RAM to ROM...

Target Station:

Download User Program to Memory Card

6 Local

r


Can be reached by means of gateway

Enter core ection to target station:

Retrieve from Memory Card...

PROFD3U5 address 1 Module type I Station name I Module name I Plant designation CPU 315-... S7 300 S... CPU 315-2... 2

Manage M7 System... Drive

Accessible Nodes

Display Accessible Nodes Change Module Identification...

57 300

CPU Messages...

St...

IM151•1

4

,_1_11125.1 pe

EcIA Insert KC Dew captions Niindow bslip

gib e

,igjiLci

IL3; MyProject -- D: \ Courses \ MyProject E

z., MyProject

E II F LC_■ ■_. ,, E ffii S7_300_Stalion

Hardware

i

UPdate

CPU 315 DP Cancel I Help

II D Touchpanel

05611(1 4

Press F1 to get help.

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


—J I

I

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.19


Task

You are to make a data backup (a so-called "PLC Copy") that includes the hardware configuration and parameter assignment data and the complete S7 program as well as the current production data (quantities etc.).

What to Do

1. Load your complete hardware station into your current project SIMATIC Manager PLC 9 Upload Station to PG... 2. In the dialog "Select node address" that then appears, activate the button "View" to display all the accessible nodes. 3. Select your CPU and start the upload by pressing "OK". 4. Rename the newly created station "PLC Copy".

Result


A new hardware station has been created in your project (in the slide "PLC Copy") whose CPU contains the current S7 program with the current production data, such as, quantities etc. The "uploaded" S7 program, however, does not contain any comments, any variable and parameter names and also no symbols!


Page 19


SIEMENS

Exercise 3: Archiving "My Project" VSIMATIC Manager Fie PLC View Options Window Help

Archiving

New... New Project' Wizard. , . Open... Open Version 1 Project...

2

User projects I Libraries Sample projects Mukiprojects Name I Storage path GD_Cornmunication CAS7_Kurse1GD_Kommu Mein_Nojekt C: S7_Kurse Mein_Pro

S7 Memory Card Memory Card Fie

ojec

7_Lourses My_Proje

SERV1_32S SERV2_32S

Delete... Reorgaize... Manage...

C. S7_Courses S ervl _32 C: S7_Courses Serv2_32

Archiving - Select an archive User Projects: Print Setup...

Save in:

Libraries: Sample Projects:

1 My_Project (Project) - CA57_Courseskley_Proje 2 Accessible Nodes - MPI 3 SERV2_325 (Project) - CA,57_Courses1.5erv2_32 4 SERV1 325 (Project) CA57_Courses Serv1_32 Exit

Multiprojects:

cn,

S7_Courses

My_Proje ....1 5erv132s 5erv2 J5erv2_32

OK Ak+r-4

Saves project or Itcary (compressed) in an archive.

Filename

Save

I HY_Proie. zip

Save as type: IPrZip 0-Aidwive zip) -

Cancel

4

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.20

gr

Task

Archive your project called "My_Project" for data backup.

What to Do

1. Start the archive function File 4 Archive... - Project


2. In the following dialogs, select the settings displayed in the slide 3. Using the Windows Explorer, check the success of your archive and compare the size (memory requirement) of the original project with that of the archive created. Windows Explorer 4 right mouse click on Archive or Project - Properties - Size



Page 20


SIEMENS


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Note

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.21



14



Page 21


SIEMENS

MMC - as Additional Data Memory on the CPU

Ilcr!SIMATIC Manager -1**PROFINET-IO (Component view ) -- U....Siemens \ StepTks7proj \##PROFIN) .,_1=21 a He Insert Pic View Options Window Help ,ItyjLci 1. d I < No Fite; > D Ical .1?16,1 Access Rights In_d VI*I AIMIrl t lj Crl+L E '', tIPROFINET-I D°wri°ad I Created in language I Size in the work me.. I T. , rtrk-K. Symboic name 3( c `-' 1 f' g u' e • E II SIMATIC -— SI a III CPU 31 Compile/Downbad ProgramsFBD 86 0 Compile and Download °Inlets „ . E, 0:1 38 0 Upload to PG FBD Load Memory :hi! Upload Station to PG.. 3838 00 FBD Copy RAM to ROM.. FBD 38 0 Download user program to memory card FEI D 48 Ft Save to Memory Card.. Data Memory Retrieve from Memory Card.. lana e (17 S,;ten... Drive g ► Display Accessible Nodes CPU Messages.. Display Force Values Monitor/Modify Variables Diagnostic /Setting ► PROFIBUS ► Edk Ethernet Node.. Assi n PG /PC Cancelg PG/PC Assi nment Update Firmware g Update the Operating System.. Save Service Data... A 141 Downloading and controlfrig blocks and programs, modifying and monitoring modulI es. 4 Ed[

a s71

r

Date: File: 18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.22

SIMATIC S7


TrainIndustri ing for al Solutions Automation and

111 SITRAIN

mc

General

The Micro Memory Card (MMC) is used by the CPU operating system as a load memory and can also be used by the user for any data storage. The loading procedure is the known procedure for integrated load memories: Menu option: PLC - Download or the appropriate icon in the toolbar.

Load Memory

The load memory is used in the CPU to store: • Logic blocks (FC, FB, OB), • Data blocks, • System data (hardware configuration, communication connections etc.) The load memory as an additional data storage area can be used, by the user, to store: • S7 project data (complete S7 project, that is, user programs with all comments, symbol tables, hardware configurations etc., of all hardware stations). The data storage is realized as a compressed archive. • any other non-compressed files, such as, *.doc or *.pdf project documentation and device descriptions

Commands

Menu options:

Note

It is not necessary to compress the MMC. Deleted areas (pages) are completely reused the next time information is saved. During CPU startup, there is also an MMC Check in which "lost pages" are "recaptured". The loading times vary depending on the operating mode of the CPU: Operating mode RUN - slow, since the user program has priority in processing. Operating mode STOP 4 fast, since the user program doesn't have to be processed.



PLC - Save / Retrieve to / from Memory Card

Page 22


SIEMENS

PLC: Storing Data on the Memory Card Save to Memory Card in the PLC

Corresponds to "Load user program on MC"

—STEP 7 Data

C

/7

Currently open project is compressed and copied All individual files except archives (e.g. *.zip) and directories

Caution! The memory card will be completely deleted if program' is selected

Current user program find HW configuration)

t3fies in cu I

rn,Piproject

Other ties each

avant user

MM420_Manuals_englisch

sfi DA1ITIA_PRO123_V551Entivi DAV IA_PRO123_VS5 \Entwi D 18TIA_PRO123_V55LEnhvi

MM420_0perating Instruction.pd1 MM420 Parameter Listpci

Current Selection List !! No current MMC content Dateien laden in EPROM Memory Card our CPU

Storage location

Deleien Ubeitragen ins Zietsyslem Sunk D: \S7_SERV1 \Ubtrgen \MM420_Pmerroteriste.pd1 Zost CPU

on PLC

■•• Memory Card

Detenialsombegung rn Zielsystem lault IF14,1,11 Geschatzte Dauer Geserries Derenvoiumen. Bemis ubereagen.

OK

Starts transmission

Help

I

.•**

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


What to Do

4 me 23 sec 1 396 MB 1.396 MB

t for N T rai n 41 SlT RAl n and 1 inni a l Solutions : Automa t io

18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.23

11

1. An S7 project must be open, otherwise the function "PLC - Save to Memory Card..." is inactive !! 2. Configured S7 CPU with Micro Memory Card (MMC) must be selected. 3. The target CPU must be in the STOP mode.

Note

The transmission is finished when the blue bar has reached the end and the message "Data transmission to the memory card is finished" appears.

Download files to EPROM Memory Card on the CP

Transfer files to target system Source C:tS iemensIS tep71s7proj11#13PR 0 Fl N=PR 0 Fl N s7p Target: CPU The data transmission to the memory card is finished.

Innummilemmommmummounnommo Total duration:

35 s

Total data volume:

981 kB

Total transmitted:

981 kB

Close


it

Page 23


14

SIEMENS

PLC: Getting Data from the Memory Card

=2=1:1=11=NIMIIINIMIMPwr.'

Contents are displayed Attention! File type by default only "S7 Projects"; if necessary, set to "all files"

File name

Size

Type

SOPROFILIET-I0... 1009840 Mr44 PPOFIBUS... 525792

STEP Pry Adobe Acrob.

I Modified in 10.2005 06.02.20

I Fie name: Res C m)

Fie bee.

STEP7 wee: r.srpj STEP 7 Lbseies STEP 7 Lie projects r.k7p) STEP 7 Lie smolt lies t'.k7e

OK

Select + highlight particular files

111=111=12•MEML Save where ?

Oderert von Perlsystern oolen

I ease

57-Proples7p

Help

1209696

I Typ

keendert

Deteien holm eon Memory

Deleien ibertragen on PG Om* MM420_Psameterkte pu (CPO) Zet D \ T

03 0 aretsteise fReferent %Owl )ant= E43 •Software Et3 {Z) rrIA_PRO123_‘,55 Er; abc 0AXPFZZ E 0 Documents and Settngs DOTS_swp n RECYaER

STEP ... 23.01.2004 13:36:20

I

Datenobernagung is PG laud

Gezehatze Daue, Geserntes Detenvoiurnen Bemis ti:ertiven

3 rrn 54 one 1 396 MB 1 396 MB

O

Datenstna

IMM420_Pererroderiste prE

Da 400

Vie Deleon( 1

OK

E 6e_j Ab eken

Ordner

Mee

lit

sEmAric S7 - ProJekte

piles

• ems

Starts transmission

I...

4

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


What to Do


18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.24

gr,


1. An S7 project must be open, otherwise the function "PLC - Retrieve from Memory Card..." is inactive !! 2. Configured S7 CPU with Micro Memory Card (MMC) must be selected. 3. The target CPU must be in the STOP mode.

Note

The transmission is completed when the blue bar has reached the end and the message "Data transmission to the programming device (PG) is finished" appears. - When S7 projects are "gotten", they are copied, unzipped and, if necessary, opened (after being prompted). - When other files are "gotten", they are only copied in the target directory. Get files from memory card

Transfer files to PG Source IIIIPROFINET -10 (CPU) Target: D: \S7 courses The data transmission to the programming device (PG) is finished.

Total duration:

27 s

Total data volume:

358 kB

Total transmitted:

358 kB

Close

SITRAIN

Training for


I

Page 24


SIEMENS


Date. File:

18.09.2009 SERV115E.1


Automation and Industrial Solutions . N'41

Page

Contents

2

Objectives ... Task Exercise 1: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart

3 .......... 4

Exercise 2: Setting the PG Interface to MPI Exercise 3: Deleting an Old Project and Retrieving a New Project

.......... 5

Exercise 4: Hardware Commissioning

.......... 7

Exercise 5: Software Commissioning Exercise 6: Software Expansion

8 9 ..........

.......... 6

15


Page 1

ST-SERV1 Closing Exercise

SIEMENS

Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ...

be able to perform a CPU memory reset be able to adapt a given HW station to a real HW station be able to debug simple program errors be able to program simple program expansions




Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.2

Page 2



SIEMENS

Task DO T_System_ON T_System_OFF

L_SYSTEM L_MAN

T_Jog_RIGHT T_Jog_LEFT

L_AUTO

S_M/A_ModeSelect T_M/A_Accept

• • • • • • • •

SIEMENS

SIMATIC PANEL

T_Ackn_Fault L_Conv_Fault

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.3

SITRAIN Training for %Er


Task

The TIA project that is now to be commissioned is to fulfill exactly the same functions as the project you have already created during the course. As well, it is also to be expanded by some smaller functions.

Commissioning

Hardware Commissioning: For this, the automation components of the TIA project have to be adapted to the actual components in your training station by ... replacing the components (CPU, IM151, I/O modules...) that are not the same as the existing exercise components setting the addresses (PROFIBUS addresses, addresses of the I/O modules) Software Commissioning: The logic errors in the given S7 program have to be eliminated.

Expansion

Small function expansions have to be programmed.

15


Page 3


SIEMENS

Exercise 1: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart Until Oct. 2002

After Oct. 2002

RUN-P RUN


RUN STOP MRES

STOP V!! MRES RUN-P RUN STOP (V


if

MRES RUN-P RUN STOP Cl. MRES

tIN S TOEs P mR

within 1 sec

3. Turn (press) the mode selector switch to the MRES position once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly. Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to the STOP position.

I1RUN STOP MRES


4. Set the mode selector switch to the RUN-P (RUN) position. (A warm restart is carried out in the transition from STOP to RUN/RUN-P)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.4

qr'

— RUN STOP MRES


Task

You are to perform a CPU memory reset and check whether the memory reset was successful.

What to Do

1. If a CPU with MMC is used at your training area, the MMC must first be explicitly erased. For example, SIMATIC Manager 9 Accessible Nodes 9 in the Blocks folder select all blocks 9 Delete 2. Carry out the memory reset according to the steps in the slide above (manually and from the PG). 3. Check if the memory reset was successful. It was successful if only system blocks (SDBs, SFCs, SFBs) are left in the CPU SIMATIC Manager 9 Accessible Nodes 9 Double-click on MPI=2 9 Click on Blocks

Notes

To make sure that no "old" blocks are left in the CPU, a memory reset of the CPU should be performed. The following steps are carried out during a memory reset: • All user data is deleted (Exception: MPI parameter assignments and the contents of the diagnostic buffer are retained). • Hardware test and initialization • If an Eprom memory card or a Micro Memory Card (MMC) is installed, the CPU copies all data on the cards that is relevant for execution back into the internal RAM after the memory reset. • If no memory card or Micro Memory Card is installed, the preset MPI address on the CPU is retained. If, however, a memory card is installed, the MPI address stored on it is loaded.


Page 4


SIEMENS

Exercise 2: Setting the PG Interface to MPI SIMATIC Manager Q>Options

>=1=1.111.11 Access Path 1 Access Point of the Appkation

(Standard for STEP 7) Interface Parameter Assignment Used Properties

1CP5611(M PI)

Diagnostics

CP5611(MPI) CP5611(PPI) CP5611(PROFIBUS - DP Slave)

_J

Copy..

CP5611(PROFIB US)

zi

Delete

MPI

— Station Parameter-.

r PG/PC is the only master on the bus Address: ID

Parameter assignment of your communications processor CP5611 for an MPI network) — Interfaces

-

Timeout

Select...

Add/Remove:

11 s

Network Parameters -

OK

Cancel 1

He

Transmission Rate:

1187 5 Kbps

Highest Station Address.

131

OK

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.5

Default I

Cancel

I He

I

_21 SITRAIN Training for gr


Task

Depending on the type of CPU used, it could be that after the CPU memory reset the PROFIBUS interface is no longer parameterized and so the PG can no longer access the CPU. If this is the case, the PG's interface has to be switched to MPI and connected to the MPI interface of the CPU.

What to Do

1. Using the "Accessible Nodes" function, check whether you can set up a connection to the CPU. SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Display Accessible Nodes If you can not set up a connection to the CPU: 2. Activate the "Set PG/PC Interface" function SIMATIC Manager 4 Options 4 Set PG/PC Interface 3. In the Properties dialog, change the properties so that they appear as those shown in the slide


Page 5


SIEMENS

Exercise 3: Deleting an Old Project and Retrieving a New Project V5IMATIC Manager - MeinProjekt File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help New... New Project' Wizard... Open... Close

Retrieving - Select an archive

Ctrl+N Ctrl+O

JJ

Li 4- C(3 de El'

Look jn: t;:_) Archive SERV l_A. zip SERV I _B. zip 11 SERV I JtartUp.zip 4

Multiproject 57 Memory Card Memory Card File Save As...

Ctrl+S

Reorganize...

File name:

2pen

I SERVl_StartU p. zip

Files of lype: I PI(.74. 1 2.0-Archive (".zip)

Pitt Page Setup.

SERVI_Startlip D: Courses SERV1_StartUp

1 Loesungsprojeld_PRO1 V59 2 SERV1_5 (Project) — D:\Courses\5ERV1. 3 5IZRVI_B (Project) — DACoursesliSIERVI. 4 SERVl_A (Project) — DACcurseASERVI Exit

Object name E

S7_300_Station CPU 315-2 DP ID 0 Chap15_StartUp al Sources Blocks E MICROMASTER_420 Touchpanel

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


S7_300_Station Touchpanel

E

a

_1J xl Symbolic SIMATIC 300 SIMATIC HMI MPI PROFIBUS

VMPI(1)

VPROFIBUS(1)

4l

18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.6


r,


Task

Delete — insofar as it exists — the old project "SERV1_StatUp" and then retrieve the project archive "SERV1_StatUp.zip"

What to Do

1.

Delete the old project "SERV1_StatUp"

SIMATIC Manager - File - Delete... - User Projects

2. Retrieve the project archive "SERV1_StatUp.zip" SIMATIC Manager - File - Retrieve...

3. As the destination directory in the dialog, select the directory in which your project "My_Project" has already been stored Result

SITRAIN

...is the retrieved project "SERV1_StatUp" that you are now to commission.


Page 6


SIEMENS

Exercise 4: Hardware Commissioning ji_1 :1 2
LS7.1iW Con - f57_300_Station (Configuration) SERVI_Stardip]

LJJ

gation Ot Insert PLC View Qptions Window deli,

Dcairt-ta (0) UR

PROFIBUS(1): DP master system (1) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PROFIBUS address OK? I/O addresses OK?

DI32xDC24V D 0 32xD C24V/0.5A DI8/D08x24V/0.5A Al2x1264

PROFIBUS address OK? Module types OK? I/O addresses OK?

CPU type OK? Clock Memory MB10 OK? .

2

A.,17

..,...\ V

Order number

Module

PP

3 ] 4 r DI 32xD C24V 5 D 0 32xDC24V/0.5A D18/D08x24V/0.54 6 7 Al2x1213it

8

I address

Q add...

Comment

2

6657 31 5-2AF01-0ABO

CPU 315-2 DP

MPI ...

Firmware

7C47..;'•

0 ..3

6E57 321-113L00-0AA0 6E S7 322-1 BLOO-OAA0 6E S7 323-1BH 00-QoA0 6E S 7 331-7KB 01.0AB 0

88 88 304...307 4 .7

—

• R11,...1111, -. CJUU

F•trsetc

y fJG

rat.,

n A


SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.7

.1 SITRAIN Training for

4

%I"


Task

The hardware configuration and parameter assignments given in the project "SERV1_StartUp" must be adapted accordingly to your actual training unit.

What to Do

Check the parameterization data highlighted in the slide and make — as far as necessary — the appropriate corrections.

15


Page 7


SIEMENS

Exercise 5: Software Commissioning DI I 0.0

T_System_ON

I 0.1

T_System_OFF LSYSTEM

I 0.2

T_Jog_RIGHT

I 0.3

T_Jog_LEFT

L_MAN L_AUTO

10.4

S_M/A_ModeSelect

I 0.5

T_M/A_Accept

11.0


SIMATIC S7

"L_Bay1" "LBay2" (Q 8.1) (Q 8.2)

"L_Bay_LB" (Q 8.4)

"T_Bay1" "T_Bay2" (I 8.1) (I 8.2)

"T_Bay_LB" (I 8.4)

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.8


vg- Automation and Industrial Solutions

Task

The given program is to fulfill exactly the same functions as the program that you have created during the course. The given S7 program is to be corrected by you and commissioned. Note: The touchpanel program is error-free !

What to Do

Check the following functions and — as far as necessary — correct the program: 1. Can you switch the operating modes "L_SYSTEM" (Q4.1), "L_MAN" (Q4.2) and "L_AUTO" (Q4.3) on and off via the touchpanel? 2. Can you jog the conveyor motor to the right and to the left in the MAN (Q4.2 = '1') operating mode? 3. While in AUTO mode (Q4.3 = '1'), are the parts placed at Bay 1 or Bay 2 transported through the light barrier?



Page 8


SIEMENS

Exercise 6: Software Expansion DO

DI 1 0.0

T_System_ON

a

1 0.1

T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM

1 0.2

T_Jog_R1GHT

L_MAN

1 0.3

T_Jog_LEFT

a a a

L_AUTO

1 0.4

S_M/A_ModeSelect

a

1 0.5

T_M/A_Accept

a

4.1 Q 4.2 Q 4.3

a

a

1 1.0


a

Q 5.0

a

left

Jog

"L_Bay3" (Q 8.3) "T_Bay1" "T_Bay2" "T_Bay3" 8.3) (1 8.1) (1 8.2) "L_Bay1" "L_Bay2" (Q 8.1) (Q 8.2)

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Task

18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.9

right

"L_Bay_LB" (C) 8.4) "T_Bay_LB" (I 8.4)



The S7 program commissioned by you is now to be expanded in its functional scope as follows: 1.

MANUAL mode expansion: The range in which a part placed on the conveyor can be moved by jogging the conveyor motor is to be limited for safety reasons: When jogging to the LEFT, the conveyor is to stop as soon as the part reaches the proximity sensor "BAY1" (I 8.5) of Bay 1 (even when the "Jog left" button is still pressed on the touchpanel). When jogging to the RIGHT, the conveyor is to stop as soon as the part reaches the light barrier "LB" (I 8.0) (even when the "Jog right" button is still pressed on the touchpanel).

2. AUTO mode expansion: Up until now, the transport functions could only be started from Bay 1 and Bay 2. Expand the program so that transport can also be started from Bay 3. Just as before, you should only be able to start a transport function from where the part lies on the conveyor via that Bay's momentary contact. As well, you must ensure that exactly only one part lies on the conveyor, that is, is detected by the proximity sensors of Bays 1 to 3. Furthermore, the indicator light at Bay 3 (Q8.3) is to perform the same as the already configured lights at Bays 1 and 2: - Continuous light at all bays when a new part can be laid on the conveyor (all bays free) - 1Hz flashing light at the bay where the part was placed and the conveyor has not yet started - 2Hz flashing light at all bays during conveyor movement



Page 9


SIEMENS


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_168.1

Contents Exercise Solutions Symbol List Symbol List Ch3 Ex1: Using the S7-300 Manuals Ch3, Ex2: Wiring the Signal Modules Ch8, Ex1 + 2: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) / Calling FC 16 in OB 1 Ch9, Ex1 : Sensors and Symbols Ch9, Ex2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15) Ch9, Ex3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16) Ch9, Ex4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16 Ch9, Ex5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation Ch9, Ex6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15) Ch10, Ex2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18) Ch10, Ex3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17) Ch10, Ex4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19) Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 14 Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 16 Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17) Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Lock-out in FC15 Ch10, Add.-Ex6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging (FC16) Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC15) Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC16) Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC17) Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC19) Ch13, Ex5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel (FC 42) SITRAIN Training for


Page 1

Training for A SITRAIN Automation and Industrial Solutions

Page ......... 2 ......... 3 ......... 4 ......... 5 ......... 6 ......... 7 ......... 8 ......... 9 ....... 10 ....... 11 ....... 12 ....... 13 ....... 14 ....... 15 ....... 16 ....... 17 ....... 18 ....... 19 ....... 20 ....... 21 ....... 22 ....... 23 ....... 24 ....... 25 ....... 26 ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions

•

SIEMENS


Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_16E.2

Contents

SITRAIN Training for • gam Automation and Industrial Solutions

Page

Ch15: Closing Exercise: Overview

........ 27

Ch15: Software Commissioning (0B1)

........ 28

Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC14)

........ 29


........ 30


........ 31


........ 32


........ 33


........ 34


........ 35

Ch15: Software Expansions (FC14)

........ 36


........ 37


........ 38


........ 39



Page 2

ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions

Symbol List

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Symbol C_Conv Fault C Parts DB Instance_F620_Fauft2 DB_Instance_FB20_Fault3 DB Parts FB FaultEvaluation FC_Signal FC Mode FC ConvMotor FC_Fautt FC_Count FC Count Add FC_FauttEvaluation FC MM420 T System ON T_System_OFF T_Jog_RIGHT T_Jog_LEFT S_M/A_ModeSelect T_M/A_Accept T_Ackn Fault S_Fault1 S Fautt2 S_Fault3 LB T_Bay1 T Bay2 T_Bay3 T_Bay-LB BAY1 BAY2 BAY3 IVV Thumbw rIN State MM420 WV Act MM420 M_Flash_2Hz M_Flash_1 Hz M_Aux_System_ON M_Aux_Man_ON M_Aux_Auto ON M_Aux_C17 M_Aux_LB M_Jog_RIGHT M_Auto RIGHT M_Conv Fault M_Fault1 M_Aux_Fault1 M_Fault2 M_Aux_Fault2 M_Aux Auto M_Aux_Count M_System ON_HMI M_System OFF HMI M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI



Address C 17 C 18 2 DB DB 3 DB 19 FB 20 FC 14 FC 15 FC 16 FC 17 FC 18 FC 19 FC 20 FC 42 I 0.0 I 0.1 I 0.2 I 0.3 I 0.4 0.5 I I 1.0 I 1.1 I 1.2 I 1.3 I 8.0 I 8.1 I 8.2 I 8.3 I 8.4 I 8.5 I 8.6 I 8.7 2 WV NV 42 NV 44 M 10.3 M 10.5 M 15.1 M 15.2 M 15.3 M 15.7 M 16.0 M 16.2 M 16.4 M 17.0 M 17.1 M 17.2 M 17.3 M 17.4 M 18.0 M 19.0 M 30.0 M 30.1 M 30.2

Comment Data type Counter Conveyor faults COUNTER Counter transported parts COUNTER Instance DB for FB20, Evaluation of Fault 2 FB 20 Instance DB for FB20, Evaluation of Fault 3 FB 20 DB with parts data 19 DB FB for evaluating faults FB 20 FC 14 -FC Indicator lights + Horn FC Set operating modes FC 15 FC Control of conveyor motor FC 16 FC Fault evaluation FC 17 FC Count parts FC 18 FC Count parts using addition FC 19 FC for evaluating faults FC 20 FC Control MM420 FC 42 Momentary contact System ON BOOL Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact) BOOL Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact BOOL Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact BOOL Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MAN, '1'=AUTO BOOL Momentary contact, confirm operating mode BOOL Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement BOOL Simulate Fault 1, 0=OFF/1=ON BOOL Simulate Fault 2, 0=OFF/1=ON BOOL Simulate Fault 3, 0=OFF/1=ON BOOL Light barrier BOOL Momentary contact Bay 1 BOOL Momentary contact Bay 2 BOOL Momentary contact Bay 3 BOOL Momentary contact Light barrier bay BOOL Proximity sensor Bay 1 BOOL Proximity sensor Bay 2 BOOL Proximity sensor Bay 3 BOOL BCD thumbwheel WORD WORD State word of MM420 Actual speed of MM420 INT Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz BOOL Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz BOOL BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier BOOL Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT BOOL Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT BOOL Memory bit Conveyor fault BOOL Memory bit for storing Fault 1 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Fault 1 BOOL Memory bit for storing Fault 2 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Fault 2 BOOL Auxiliary memory bit Edge AUTO on BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier BOOL Memory bit System ON (HMI) BOOL Memory bit System OFF (HMI) BOOL Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI)

Page 3


Symbol List

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92

Symbol M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M_MIA_ModeSelect_HMI M_MiA_Acceist_HMI M_Ackn_Fault_HMI M_Bays_occup_HMI M_Conv_Fault_HMI M_MM420_0n_HMI M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M_SlaveFailure MB_SlaveAddress MW_ACT ki1W_SETP OB_Cycle OB_SlaveFailure OB WarmRestart L_SYSTEM L_MAN L_AUTO L_Restart_man L_Restart_aut L_Conv_Fault L_Fault1 L_Fault2 L_Fautt3 L_Bayl L_Bay2 L_Bay3 L_Bay-LB K_Conv_RIGHT K_Conv_LEFT Horn QW_DigDisp QW_Control_MM420 QW_Setp_MM420 OD_Conv_Monitoring VATI/O-Conveyor VAT_Numberformats



Address / M 30.3 M 30.4 M 30.5 M 31 .0 M 33.0 M 33.1 M 40.0 M 40.2 M 40.3 M 86.0 MB 87 MW 20 NW 22 OB 1 OB 86 OB 100 Q 4.1 Q 4.2 Q 4.3 Q 4.5 Q 4.6 Q 5.0 Q 5.1 Q 5.2 Q 5.3 Q 8.1 Q 8.2 Q 8.3 Q 8.4 Q 8.5 Q 8.6 Q 8.7 OW 6 QW 42 44 GAN T 17 VAT 1 VAT 2

Data type BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BYTE INT INT OB 1 OB 86 OB 100 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL WORD WORD INT TIMER

Comment Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, '1'... Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI) Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI) all Bays 1 to 3 occupied Memory bit Conveyor fault Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI) Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI) Memory bit DP Slave has failed DP address of failed slave Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp. OB for cyclic program Error OB for slave failure Warm restart OB Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode Indicator light Automatic mode Indicator light for manual warm restart Indicator light for automatic warm restart Indicator light Conveyor fault Indicator light Fault 1 Indicator light Fault 2 Indicator light Fault 3 Indicator light Bay 1 Indicator light Bay 2 Indicator light Bay 3 Indicator light Light barrier bay Run conveyor RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Horn BCD digital display Control word for MM420 Setpoint speed for MM420 Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode

Page 4


Ch3, Exl: Using the S7-300 Manuals

1.

How many racks with how many modules each can be installed in the S7-300? max. ..... 4 ........ racks with ...... 8 ....... modules each

2. The PS 307 power supply module, 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 (5A output) is designed for an input voltage of ...... 120 ........ VAC or ...... 230 ............ VAC

3. An S7-300 and its various modules rated at 24 VDC have a voltage Tolerance Range of ...... 20.4 ........... VDC to ...... 28.8 ......... VDC 4. How many digital inputs and outputs can the CPU 314 address and how large is the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image output table (PIQ)? Process-image input table: ...128 ..... bytes = ....1024 ....... digital inputs Process-image output table:

128

...... bytes = ....1024 ....... digital outputs

5. At which voltage levels does the digital input module SM321; DI32/24V deliver signal state "0": ...-30... V to .+5 .... V signal state "'I': ...+15...V to ....+30 .. V

6. What is the maximum output current that the digital output module SM322; D032; DC24V/0.5A delivers at signal state "0": ....0.5.mA (residual current) signal state '1 ": ....0.6...A

7. What is the maximum operating frequency of this output module? for resistive load: ...100... Hz for inductive load: ...0.5..

Hz

8. Is the output module short-circuit proof? ........ yes (electronically) ....................................................



Page 5


SIEMENS

Ch3, Ex2: Wiring the Signal Modules

Mom. Contact 1

Mom. Contact 2

LED

Power Supply

L+

00

0 0

L

0

1720

1316

00

DI/ DO 323 1 2 3 4 5




6 7 8 9 10

Date: File:

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

18.09.2009 SERV1_16E.6

Page 6

qr



Ch8, Ex1-2: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) / Calling FC 16 in OB 1 OBI : cyclic Program : Control the Conveyor

EN

FC16

ENO

Symbol information: FCConvMotor FC16

-- FC Control of conveyor motor

FC16 : Control Conveyor Motor I

tietmork 1j: Jog to the right 10.3

10.2

Symbol information: 10_2 T_Jog_RIGHT T_Jog_LEFT 10.3 Q8.5 K Conv RIGHT

Q8.5

-- Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact -- Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact -- Run conveyor RIGHT

Nettiork 2 : Jog to the le ft I0.2

10.3

II

I/I

Q8.6

0

Symbol information: 10_2

10.3 Q8.6


T_Jog_RIGHT T_Jog_LEFT K_Conv_LEFT


-- Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact -- Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact -- Run conveyor LEFT

Page 7


SIEMENS

Ch9, Exl : Sensors and Symbols Task: In all three examples, the light should be on when S1 is activated and S2 is not activated! Hardware I 11 S1

I I-‘ 2 I I 1.0 I 1.1 Programmable Controller Q 4.0

OU

I=‘ S1

I= S2 I I 1.0 I 1.1 Programmable Controller Q 4.0

4

)Light

Software OU

I 1.0

I 1.1

LAD

[111

FBD

I 1.1

Q 4.0

MEI*

SIMATIC S7


Q 4.0

I I

( )

&

A A =

Date: File:

1 1.0

Page 8

•

Q 4.0

C)

&

1 1.1

I 1.0 I 1.1 Q 4.0

18.09.2009 SERV1_16E.8

1 1.1

-H- I 1 1.0

- Q 4.0

I 1.1 -

A 11.0 AN I 1.1 = Q 4.0


1 1.1

-

11.0 Q 4.0

)Light

1 1.0 I

& •

1

(1) Light

) I 1.0

1=-- S1 I=1 S2 I I I 1.0 I 1.1 Programmable Controller Q 4.0

Q4.0 AN 11.0 A I 1.1 = Q 4.0

Ric



Ch9, Ex2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)

maw

FC15 : Mode Section Indicator Light System On/Off

I0.0

Q4.1 SR

Q

I0.1

Symbol information: T_System_ON I0.0 T_System_OFF I0.1 L_SYSTEM Q4.1

-- Momentary contact System ON -- Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact) -- Indicator light System ON

Network 2: Indicator Light MAN Mode Q4.2 IO.S

II

10.4

IA

SR

Q-

Q4.1

IA

10.4

Symbol information: I0.5 T_M/A_Accept S_M/A_ModeSelect 10.4 Q4.1 L_SYSTEM LMAN Q4.2

-----

Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode

Network 3: Indicator Light AUTO Mode

10.5

04.3 10.4

SR

QQ4.1

I/I 10.4 I/I

Symbol information: I0.5 T_M/A_Accept 10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect Q4.1 L_SYSTEM Q4_3 LAUTO

SITRAIN


-----

Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL Indicator light System ON Indicator light Automatic mode

Page 9


•

Ch9, Ex3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16) FC16 : Title: Network 1: Jog to the right

Q4.2

10.2

10.3

M16.2

I I

Symbol information: Q4.2 L_MAN 10.2 T_Jog_RIGHT 10_3 T_Jog_LEFT M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT

-----

Indicator light MAN mode Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT

Network 2: Jog to the left 04.2 I I

10.2

I/I

10.3

Symbol information: Q4_2 L_MAN 10.2 T_Jog_RIGHT 10.3 T_Jog_LEFT Q8.6 KConvLEFT

-----

08.6

Indicator light MAN mode Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact Run conveyor LEFT

Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor Motor in AUTO Mode

18.5

I I

18.5

18.6

I/I

18.6

M16.4 SR

18.1

018.2

04.3

I/1

18.0

I/1

Symbol information: BAY1 18.5 BAYZ 18.6 T_Bayl 18.1 T_Bay2 18.2 L_AUTO Q4.3 LB 18.0 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4

--------

Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 2 Indicator light Automatic mode Light barrier Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT

Network 4: Control the Conveyor Motor to the right M16.2

II

08.5

M16.4

Symbol information: M_Jog_RIGHT M16.2 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5



-- Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT -- Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT

Page 10


Ch9, Ex4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16 FC16 : Title: Network 1: Jog to the right 04.2 I I

10.2

II

M16.2

10.3

1)-1

I/1

Symbol information: L_MAN Q4.2 T_Jog_RIGHT 10.2 T_Jog_LEFT 10.3 M_Jog_RIGHT M16.2

-----


Network 2: Jog to the le ft 04.2

I I

10.2

I/1

08.6 (

10.3

I

Symbol information: L_MAN Q4.2 T_Jog_RIGHT 10.2 10.3 T_Jog_LEFT XConvLEFT 08.6

-----



18.5

II

18.5

I/I

18.6

'1/I

18.6

P116.4 SR

18.1

I

0-

18.2

04.3

I/I

18.0

M16.0 (P)

Symbol information: 18.5 BAY1 18.6 BAYZ 18_1 T_Bayl 18.2 T_Bay2 Q4.3 L_AUTO 18.0 LB M16.0 M_Aux_LB M16.4 M_Auto_RIGHT

---------

Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 2 Indicator light Automatic mode Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT

Network 4: Control the Conveyor Motor to the right 1116.2

II

08.5

M16.4

Symbol information: M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT M16.4 M_Auto_RIGHT Q8.5 KConvRIGHT



Page 11


Ch9, Ex5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation FC14 : Indicator Lights + Horn Network 1: Indicator Light Bay 1 Q4.3

II Q4.3

H 04.3

II

Q8.5

I/I 18.5

II

18.5

18.6

18.6

H10.5

soo

I/I

ppor.....

H

Q8.5

I I

Logic Error: Q 8.2 -> Q 8.1

H10.3

Symbol information:

Q4.3 Q8.5 18.5 18.6 M10.5 M10.3 Q8.2

L_AUTO K_Conv_RIGHT BAY1 BAY2 M_Flash_lHz M_Flash_2Hz L_Bay2

--------

Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 2

Network 2: Indicator Light Bay 2 04.3

Q8.5

18.5

18.6

Q4.3

18.5

18.6

H10.5

Q4.3

08.5

II

II

H10.3

08.2

II

Symbol information:

Q4.3 Q8.5 18.5 18.6 M10.5 M10.3 Q8.2

L_AUTO K_Conv_RIGHT BAY1 BAY2 M_Flash_lHz M_Flash_2Hz L_Bay2

--------

Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 2

Network 3: Horn

M10.3

Q8.5

08.6

Symbol information: K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5


11

Logic Error: Remove negation

I

08.6 Q4.2 M10.3 Q8.7

Q8.7

K_Conv_LEFT L_MAN M_Flash_2Hz Horn


------

Page 12

Run conveyor RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Horn


Ch9, Ex6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15) FC15 : Title: Network 1: Indicator Light System On/Off Q4.1 SR

M15.1 S

Symbol information: T_System_ON 10.0 M_Aux_System_ON MI5.1 T_System_OFF I0.1 L_SYSTEM Q4.1

Q-

-----

Momentary contact System ON Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact) Indicator light System ON

Network 2: Indicator Light MAN Mode

10.5

MI5.2 (P)

Q4.2 SR

10.4

I/I

Q-

Q4.1

Symbol information: T_M/A_Accept 10.5 M_Aux_Man_ON M15.2 S_M/A_ModeSelect 10.4 L_SYSTEM Q4.1 L_MAN Q4.2

------

Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0. =MANUAL Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode

Network 3: Indicator Light AUTO Mode Q4.3 10.5

II

M15.3

10.4

SR

(P)

Q-

04.1

I/I

10.4

I/I

Symbol information: I0.5 T_M/A_Accept M15.3 M_Aux_Auto_ON 10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect Q4.1 L_SYSTEM Q4.3 LAUTO



------

Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, Indicator light System ON Indicator light Automatic mode

Page 13


Ch10, Ex2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18) FC18 : FC-Count using S5-Counter

Network 1: Count 18.0

parts

M18.0

C18 04.3

S_CU CU

Q4.1

PV CV BCD —0W6

I/I

Symbol information: 18.0 LB M18.0 M_Aux_Auto Q4.3 L_AUTO 04.1 L_SYSTEM QW6 QW_DigDisp



------

Light barrier Auxiliary memory bit Edge AUTO on Indicator light Automatic mode Indicator light System ON BCD digital display

Page 14


Ch10, Ex3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17) FC17 : Title:

Network

Conveyor fault (time monitoring) T17 S_ODT

Q8.5

Q4.3

S

Q

BI

S5T116S- TV

BCD

Symbol information: L_AUTO Q4.3 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8_5 OD_Conv_Monitoring T17

-- Indicator light Automatic mode -- Run conveyor RIGHT -- Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode

Network 2: display Conveyor fault H17.0 SR

T17

Q5.0

M10.3

Il. 0 — Symbol information: OD_Conv_Monitoring T17 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 T_Ackn_Fault I1.0 H_Flash_2Hz M10.3 LConv_Fault Q5.0



------

Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode Memory bit Conveyor fault Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Conveyor fault

Page 15


Ch10, Ex4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19) FC19 : Count parts Network 1: reset the counter to 0 04.1

I/1

EN

08.4

MOVE ENO

0— IN

18.4

OUT —NWZO

I I

Symbol information: Q4.1 L_SYSTEM Q8.4 L_Bay-LB 18.4 T_Bay-LB MW20 MW_ACT

-----

Indicator light System ON Indicator light Light barrier bay Momentary contact Light barrier bay Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts

Network 2: count the parts in AUTO node 18.0

M19.0

04.3

ADDJ EN

(P)

ENO

MW2O — IN1

OUT —NWZO

1— INZ Symbol information: 18.0 LB M19.0 M_Aux_Count Q4.3 L_AUTO MW20 MW_ACT

-----

Light. barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Indicator light Automatic mode Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts

Network 3: read in Setpoint and convert BCD! EN

ENO

IW2 — IN

OUT —11W22

Symbol information: 11E2 IWThumbw MW_SETP MWEZ

-- BCD thumbwheel -- Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp.

Network 4: Indicator Light ACTUAL=SETPOINT 04_3

CMP > I

08.4

MW20 — IN1 MWZ2 — INZ

Symbol information: MW_ACT MW20 MW_SETP MW22 L_AUTO Q4.3 L_Bay-LB Q8.4

-----

Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp. Indicator light Automatic mode Indicator light Light barrier bay

Network 5: Display the actual no. of parts L8CD EN MWZO — IN

Symbol information: MW_ACT truzo QW_DigDisp 0.16



ENO OUT —QW6

-- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts -- BCD digital display

Page 16


Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 14 FC14 : Indicator Lights Horn Network 1: Indicator Light Bay 1 18.5

18.6

M17.0

Q8.4

IA

VI

IA

I/I

VI

18.5

18.6

M10.5

M17.0

Q8.4

II

III

VI

Q4.3

08.5

I I

Q4.3

II

I

I

IA

Q4.3

08.5

110.3

.1 I Symbol imformatioa: Q4.3 Q8.5 18.5 18.6 M17.0 08.4 M10.5 110.3 08.1

Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 1

L_AUTO R_Conv_RIGHT BAY1 BAY2 MConv_Fault LBay-LB M_Flash_lHz /1 Flash_ZHz L_Bayl

Network 2: Indicator Light Bay 2 Q4.3

08.5

18.5

18.6

117.0

Q8.4

II

IA

IA

IA

VI

IA

04.3

18.5

18.6

110.5

117.0

08.4

I1

VI

11

II

VI

VI

Q4.3

08.5

110.3

08.2

I I

Symbol iaformatioa: 04.3 08.5 18.5 18.6 M17.0 Q8.4 M10.5 110.3 08.2

-- Indicator light Automatic mode -- Run conveyor RIGHT -- Proximity sensor Bay 1 -- Proximity sensor Bay 2 -- Memory bit Conveyor fault -- Indicator light Light barrier bay -- Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz -- Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz -- Indicator light Bay 2

LAUTO RConv_RIGHT BAY1 BAY2 MConvFault L_Bay-LB M_Flash_lHz MFlash_2Hz LBay2

Net-work 8:Horn Q8.5

04.2

1 I

1

I110.3

Q8.7

I

08.6 I 1

Symbol information: 08.5

Q8_6

04.2 M10.3

Q8_7

K_Conv_RIGHT K_Conv_LEFT L_MAN

M_Flash_2Hz Horn


Run conveyor RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Indicator light MAN mode

Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Horn

Page 17


Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 16

NW 1 and NW 2 are not modyfied


18.5

1 I

18.5

18.6

1/1

1116.4 SR

18.1

Q—

18.6

Q4.3

I/I

18.0

M16.0

1 1

(P)

1117.0

1 1

08.4

Symbol information: 18.5 BAY1 18.6 BAY2 18.1 T_Bayl 18.2 T_Bay2 Q4.3 L_AUTO 18.0 LB M16.0 M_Aux_LB M_Conv_Fault M17.0 L_Bay-LB Q8.4 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4

-----------

Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 2 Indicator light Automatic mode Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT

Network 4: Control the Conveyor Motor to the right M16.2

1 1

Q8.5 01

M16.4

Symbol information: M_Jog_RIGHT M16.2 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5




Page 18


Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17) FC17 : Title:

atellat

: Conveyor fault (time monitoring) 117

Q4.3

08.5

I I

I

S_0 DT

S

0 BI

SST#6S — TV

R

BCD

Symbol information: L_AUTO Q4_3 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 OD_Conv_Monitoring T17


Network 2: display Conveyor fault H17. 0 T17

M10.3 —______i

SR

-

I I

QS.0

11.0—

Symbol information: 117 OD_Conv_Monitoring M17.0 M_Conv_Fault I1.0 T_Ackn_Fault M_Flash_2Hz M10.3 Q5.0 LConv_Fault

------

Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode Memory bit Conveyor fault Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Conveyor fault

Network 3: count Conveyor faults C17 M17.0

I1------- CD

S_CD

04.3 — S

CV—...

Cf 3 — PV CV BCD ... —

Symbol information: M17.0 M_Conv_Fault C17 C_Conv_Fault Q4.3 L_AUTO

-- Memory bit Conveyor fault -- Counter Conveyor faults -- Indicator light Automatic mode

•

1111:


Page 19


Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Lock-out in FC15 FC15 : Mode Section Network 1: Indicator Light System On/Off

I0.0

II

M15.1

04.1 SR

I0.1

I/I Symbol information: I0.0 T_System_ON

M15.1 I0.1 Q4.1

-----

M_Aux_System_ON T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM

Momentary contact System ON Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact) Indicator light System ON


I0.5

II

M15.2

04.2 10.4

SR S

(P)

Q

Q4.1

I/I 10.4

Symbol information: IO.S T_M/A_Accept

M1S.2 10.4 Q4.1 04.2

M_Aux_Man_ON S_M/A_ModeSelect L_SYSTEM L_MAN

------

Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: .0'=MANUAL, Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode

Network 3j: Indicator Light AUTO Mode

Q4.3 10.5

H15.3

10.4

1

(P)

1 1-S

C17 1I -

SR 0-

M15.7

(N)--

Q4.1

IA

10.4 VI

Symbol information:

10.5 M15.3 10.4 C17 M15.7 Q4.1 Q4.3


T_M/A_Accept M_Aux_Auto_ON S_M/A_ModeSelect C_Conv_Fault M_Aux_C17 L_SYSTEM L_AUTO


--------

Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, .1'=AUTO Counter Conveyor faults Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults Indicator light System ON Indicator light Automatic mode

Page 20


Ch10, Add.-Ex6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging (FC16) FC16 : Title: Network 1: Jog to the right Q4.2

10.2

10.3

IA

M16.2

T16

0-1

IA

T1S S_OFFDT 0— SST#25— TV

BI BCD

Symbol information: L_MAN 04.2 T_Jog_RIGHT 10_2 T_Jog_LEFT 10.3 M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT

-----


Network 2: Jog to the left 04.2

10.2

10.3

Q8.6

T15

T16 S_OFFDT Q

S5T#2S — TV

-

BI BCD

Symbol information: 04.2 L_MAN 10.2 T_Jog_RIGHT 10.3 T_Jog_LEFT 08.6 K_Conv_LEFT

-----


ti



Page 21


Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 15) FC15 : Mode Section 1

4fetmork

4: Indicator

Light System On/Off Q4.1

M30.0

SR

M30.1— R

Symbol information: M30.0 M_System_ON_HMI M15.1 M_Aux_System_ON Q4.1 L_SYSTEM M30.1 M_SystemOFFHMI

-----

Memory bit System ON (TP170) Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Indicator light System ON Memory bit System OFF (TP170)


M30.5

I I

M15.2 (p)

Q4.2 M30.4

SR

1/

Q-

Q4.1 IA

M30.4

Symbol information: M30.5 M_M/A_Accept_HMI M15.2 M_Aux_Man_ON M30.4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI Q4_1 L_SYSTEM Q4.2 L_MAN

------

Memory bit, confirm operating mode (TP170) Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: .0..MANUAL Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode

Network 3: Indicator Light AUTO Mode 04.3 M30.5

I1

M15.3

M30.4

SR

Q-

(p)

04.1 N30.4

SyMbol information: M_M/A_Accept_HMI M30.5 M_Aux_Auto_ON M15.3 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI M30.4 L_SYSTEM Q4.1 L_AUTO Q4.3



------

Memory bit, confirm operating mode (TP170) Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL Indicator light System ON Indicator light Automatic mode

Page 22


Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 16) FC16 : Title: Network 1: Jog to the right Q4.2

M30.2

Symbol information: L_MAN 04.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M30.3 M_Jog_RIGHT M16.2

M16.2

M30.3

-----

Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (TP170) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (TP170) Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT

Network 2: Jog to the left 04.2 I I

1130.2

I/I

Symbol information: L_MAN Q4.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M30.3 Q8.6 K_Conv_LEFT

Q8.6

M30.3

II

-----

Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (TP170) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (TP170) Run conveyor LEFT

NW 3 and NW 4 are not modyfied


Page 23


Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 17) FC17 : Title:

n

etwork 1: Conveyor fault (time monitoring)

Q4.3

T17 S_ODT

Q8.5 S

0

S5T#6S — TV

BI BCD — . .

Symbol information: Q4.3 L_AUTO Q8.5 H_Conv_RIGHT T17 OD_Conv_Monitoring


Network 2: Title:

T17 I

M17.0 SR

M10.3 0

I

05.0 01

11.0 I I

M31.0 I I

Symbol information: T17 OD_Conv_Monitoring I1.0 T_Ackn_Fault M31.0 M_Ackn_Fault_HMI M17.0 M_Conv_Fault M10.3 M_Flash_ZHz Q5.0 L_Conv_Fault



Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (TP170) Memory bit Conveyor fault Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Conveyor fault

Page 24


-

Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 19) FC19 : Count parts Network 4: reset the counter to 0

Q4.1

MOVE EN

ENO

0 — IN

OUT

IA 18.4

Q8.4

MW20

Symbol information: - - Indicator light System ON - - Indicator light Light barrier bay - - Momentary contact Light barrier bay - - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts

L_SYSTEM L_Bay-LB T_Bay-LB MILACT

Q4.1 Q8.4 18.4 MW20

Network 2: count the parts in AUTO mode

18.0

04.3

M19.0

AUDI EN

(P)

ENO OUT —111120

MW20— IN1

1— IN2 Symbol information: - - Light barrier -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier - - Indicator light Automatic mode - - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts

LB M_Aux_Count L_AUTO MW ACT

18.0 M19.0 Q4.3 MW20

Network 3: Indicator Light ACTUAL=SETPOINT

CMP)=1

Q4.3

08.4 ()1

NW20— IN1 NW22— INZ

Symbol information: MW20 MW22 Q4.3

MILACT MW_SETP L_AUTO LBay-LB

Q8.4

Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp - - Indicator light Automatic mode - - Indicator light Light barrier bay

Network 4: Display the actual no. of parts

LBCD EN MW20 — IN

ENO OUT —QW6

Symbol information: MY20 MILACT QW_Dignsp


- - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts - - BCD digital display

Page 25


Ch13, Ex5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel (FC 42) FC42 : Control MM420 Motor ON M40.0

I

MOVE

1------ EN

1416:47F—IN

ENO OUT —QW42

Symbol information: M40_0 M_ME420_0n_HMI QW42 QWControlMM420

-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170) -- Control word for MM420

Network 2 : Motor OFF M40.0

MOVE

EN W#16#47E — IN

ENO OUT —QW42

Symbol information: M_MM420_0n_HMI QWControlMM420

M40.0 QW42

-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170) -- Control word for MM420

Network 3: Jog Right M40.2

M40.3

M40.0 EN

IA

MOVE ENO

11#16#57E- IN

OUT —QW42

Symbol information: M40.2 M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M40.3 M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M40.0 M_MM420_0n_HKI QW42 QW_Control_MM420

Memory bit MM420 Memory bit MM420 Switch On Memory Control word for

Jog RIGHT (TP170) Jog LEFT (TP170) bit MM420 (TP170) MM420

Network 4: Jog Left M40.3

M40.2

I/1

M40.0

MOVE EN

OUT —QW42

W#16#67E — IN

Symbol information: M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M40.3 M_MR420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M40.2 M_MM420_0n_HMI M40.0 QWControlMM420 QW42



ENO

-----

Page 26


Jog LEFT (TP170) Jog RIGHT (TP170) bit MM420 (TP170) MM420


SIEMENS

Ch15: Closing Exercise: Overview Hardware Commissioning: Error

Correction in the given HW Config

What doesn't fit in the given HW Config?

1

CPU type and I/O module types

...replace with CPU actually used

2

PROFIBUS addresses of ET200 and MM420

." set accordingly to the actually used ET200 and MM420

3

ET200: Module types and I/O addresses

...set to I/O address 8 according to the given S7 program

Software Startup Error

Malfunction

Correction

Error Location

1

System (Q4.1) can not be switched on

OB 1, Network 1

CALL

2

Jog Cony. Right doesn't work

FC 16. Network 1

= Q 8.5

M.

3

Cony. doesn't transport the parts through the LB

FC 16, Network 3

FN 18.0

11111. FP 18.0


Date. File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_16E.27


Page 27

FC 15

insert

= M 16.2

_11 SITRAIN Training for gir



Ch15: Software Commissioning (0B1) OBI : "Main Program Sweep {Cycle)" Network 1: Mode section

insert CALL FC15

Network 2: Control the Conveyor Motor

EN

FC16 ENO

Symbol information: FC16; FCCorfollot or

-

FC Control of conveyor motor

Network 3: Indicator Lights + Horn

FC14 EN ENO

Symbol information: FC14 FC_Signal

FC Indicator lights + Horn

Network 4 : Count parts

FC19 EN ENO

Symbol information: FC_Count_Add

FC19

-- FC Count parts using addition

Network 5: Conveyor monitoring

FC17 EN ENO

Network 6: Control 121420

FC42 EN ENO

Symbol information:

FC42

SITRAIN

FC 241420


-

Page 28

FC Control 11/1420


Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC14) FC14 : Indicator lights + Horn Network 1: Indicator Light bay 1 Q4.3

08.5

18.5

18.6

M17.0

Q8.4

II

I/I

I/I

I/I

I/I

lid

Q4.3

Ie.s

18.6

H10.5

M17.0

Q8.4

II

II

VI

II

I/I

I/I

Q4.3

Q8.5

M10.3

Q 8.1 -

0

1

1 I Symbol information: L_AUTO 04.3 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 BAY1 18.5 BAY2 18.6 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 L_Bay -LB Q8.4 M_Flash_lHz M10.5 M_Flash_2Hz M10.3 L_Bayl Q8.1

----------


Network 2: Indicator Light bay 2 04.3

Q8.5

18.5

18.6

M17.0

Q8.4

Q4.3

18.5

18.6

H10.5

M17.0

Q8.4

04.3

Q8.5

H10.3

II

II

Symbol information: L_AUTO Q4.3 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 18.5 BAY1 18.6 BAY2 M17.0 M_Conv_Fault Q8.4 L_Bay-LB M10.5 M_Flash_lHz M10.3 M_Flash_2Hz Q8.2 L_Bay2

I/I

I/I

II

III

----------

I/I

08.2

I/1


Network 3: Horn Q8.5

II

04.2

1110.3

1 1

Q8.7 () 1

Q8.6

Symbol information: 08.5 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.6 K_Conv_LEFT Q4.2 L_MAN M10.3 M_Flash_2Hz Q8.7 Horn


------


Page 29


Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC15) FC15 : Mode Section Network 1: Indicator Light System On/Off

M30.0

Q4.1 M15.1

SR

R

Symbol information: M30.0 M_System_ON_HMI M15.1 M_Aux_System_ON Q4.1 L_SYSTEM M30.1 M_SystemOFFHMI

-----

Memory bit System ON (HMI) Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Indicator light System ON Memory bit System OFF (HMI)


M30.5

II

M15.2 (P)

M30.4

Q4.2 SR

1/1— S

Q4.1

I/1

QL

M30.4

Symbol information: M30.5 M_M/A_Accept_HMI M1S.2 M_Aux_Man_ON M30.4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI Q4.1 L_SYSTEM Q4.2 L_MAN

------

Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI) Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'..4LU Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode

Network 3: Indicator Light AUTO Mode Q4.3 M30.5

M15.3

M30.4

SR 0

—

Q4.1

I/1

M30.4

I/I

Symbol information: M_M/A_Accept_HMI M30.5 M_Aux_Auto_ON M15.3 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI M30_4 L_SYSTEM Q4.1 L_AUTO Q4_3



------

Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI) Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'.=MA/ Indicator light System ON Indicator light Automatic mode

Page 30



FC16 : Title:

Q8.5 -> M 16.2

Network 1: Jog conveyor motor to the Right Q4.2

M30.2

M30.3

T16 If TIS S_OFFDT 0—

BI

SST#2S — TV

BCD —...

Symbol information: L_MAN 04.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M30.3 KConvRIGHT Q8.5

-----

Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Run conveyor RIGHT

Network 2: Jog conveyor motor to the Left Q4.2 1

M30.2

M30.3

/1

Q8.6

TiS

IA

} 1

T16 S_OFFDT

Q — SST#28— TV R

Symbol information: 04.2 L_MAN M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.3 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI 08.6 K_ConvLEFT



-----

Page 31

BI BCD

Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Run conveyor LEFT



Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor motor in AUTO mode

18.5

18.1

M16.4 SR

I I 18.6

18.2

04.3

1/1

18.0

II

M16.0

M17.0

II

->

08.4 I

Symbol information: 18.5 BAY1 18.1 T_Bayl 18.6 BAY2 18.2 T_Bay2 Q4.3 L_AUTO 18.0 LB M16.0 M_Aux_LB M17.0 M_Conv_Fault Q8.4 L_Bay-LB M16.4 MAuto_RIGHT

-----------

Proximity sensor Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 2 Indicator light Automatic mode Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT

Network 4: Control the conveyor motor to the Right H16.2

II

Q8.5

N16.4

SyMbol information: M_Jog_RIGHT M16.2 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5




Page 32



FC17 : Title: : Conveyor fault (time monitoring)

etuark

Q8.5

Q4.3

I

II

------ S

T17 S_ODT

1

S5T#6S —

TV

S

Q M31.0 —

BI

M17.0 SR

Q

M10.3 1

------

Q5.0

It

BCD

Symbol information: L_AUTO Q4.3 H_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 OD_Conv_Monitoring T17 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 M_Ackn_Fault_HMI M31.0 M_Flash_2Hz M10.3 L_Conv_Fault Q5.0

--------

Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode Memory bit Conveyor fault Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI) Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Conveyor fault

Network 2: Count Conveyor faults

M17.0 I I------ CD Q4.3 — S C#3

C17 S_CD CV —...

PV CV BCD

Symbol information: M17.0 M_Conv_Fault C17 C_Conv_Fault Q4.3 L_AUTO


-- Memory bit Conveyor fault -- Counter Conveyor faults -- Indicator light Automatic mode

Page 33


Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC19) FC19 : Count parts Network 1: reset the counter to 0 Q4.1

I/I

MOVE ENO

EN

08.4

0- IN

18.4

OUT —MWZO

I I

Symbol information: Q4.1 L_SYSTEM Q8.4 L_Bay-LB 18.4 T_Bay-LB MW20 MW_ACT

Indicator light System ON Indicator light Light barrier bay Momentary contact Light barrier bay Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported

Network 2: count the parts in AUTO mode 18.0

M19.0

Q4.3

(P)

I I------ EN

AD DI ENO

MATZO- IN1

OUT —111120

INZ

Symbol information: 18.0 LB M19.0 M_Aux_Count Q4.3 L_AUTO MI620 MW ACT

-----

Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Indicator light Automatic mode Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported

-----

Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to Indicator light Automatic mode Indicator light Light barrier bay

Network 3: Indicator Light ACTUAL=SETPOINT CMP>=I

04.3 ------

I I

08.4 C)

131120— IN1 MWZZ-,INZ

Symbol information: MW_ACT MW20 MW_SETP MW22 L_AUTO Q4.3 LBay-LB Q8.4 Network 4: Display the actual no. of parts

EN

LIMO ENO

TIWZO- IN

OUT —0116

Symbol information: MW_ACT MW20 QW_DigDisp QW6



-- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported -- BCD digital display

Page 34


Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC42) FC42 : Title: Network 1: Motor ON

M40.0 I I------ EN

MOVE ENO OUT —QW42

W#16#47F — IN

Symbol information: M_MM420_0n_HMI M40.0 QWControlMM420 QW42

-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI) -- Control word for MM420

Network 2: Motor OFF M40.0 1/1

MOVE — EN ENO OUT —QW42

W#16#47E- IN

Symbol information: M_MM420_0n_HMI M40.0 QWControlMM420 QW42

-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI) -- Control word for MM420

Network 3: Jog to the Right

M40.2

M40.3

M40.0 EN

MOVE ENO

W#16#57E- IN OUT —Q11142

Symbol information:

M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M_HM420_0n_HMI QW_Control_HM420

M40.2 M40.3 M40.0 QW42

-----


Jog RIGHT (HMI) Jog LEFT (HMI) bit MM420 (HMI) HM420

Network 4: Jog to the Left

M40.3

II

M40.2

I/I

M40.0 EN

MOVE ENO

W#16#67E- IN

OUT •

Symbol information:

M40.3 M40.2 M40.0 QW42

M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M_HM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M_MM420_0n_HMI QWControlHM420


Page 35


Jog LEFT (HMI) Jog RIGHT (HMI) bit MM420 (HMI) MM420



All bay indicator lights show the same behavior: -> query all bay proximity

FC14 : Indicator lights + Horn

switches

Network 1: Indicator Light bay 1 Q4.3

Q8.5

18.5

1 1 04.3 Q4.3

18.6 1/1

18.5

18.6

18.7

18.7

M17.0

Q8.4

Q8.1

... : M10.5

II

01

M17.0

Q8_4

I/I

ICI

1671.......... Af675 ..............

1

Symbol information: Q4.3 L_AUTO Q8.5 R_Conv_RIGHT 18.5 BAY1 18.6 BAY2 18_7 BAY3 M17.0 M_Conv_Fault Q8_4 L_Bay-LB M10.5 M_Flash_lHz M10.3 M_Flash_2Hz Q8.1 L_Bayl

Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bay 3 Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 1

Network 2: Indicator Light bay 2 04.3

II

Q4.3 1 1 04.3

08.5 I/I

18.5

I/I

I8.5 --

: VI

18.6

M17.0

IA

08.4

Q8.3 01

/1

18.6

18.7

M10.5

1 1

I/I

1

M17.0

08.4

'dirt ...... Wiry ................

II

II

Symbol information: Q4.3 L_AUTO R_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 BAY1 18.5 BAY2 18.6 BAY3 18.7 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 L_Bay-LB Q8.4 M_Flash_lHz M10.5 M_Flash_2Hz M10.3 L_Bay3 Q8.3



Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bay 3 Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 3

Page 36


Ch15: Software Expansions (FC14) new NW for indicator light Bay 3 Network 3: Indicator Light bay 3 04.3

Q8.5

04.3

18.5

18.6 •

/I 08.5

18.7

M17.0

08.4

18.7

18.7

M10.5

M17.0

I/I

s

Q4.3

18.6

I/I I/I

II

II

Q8.3

Q8.4

I/I

ICI

2110.3

I I

All bay indicator lights show the same behavior: -> query all bay proximity

Symbol information: Q4.3 08.5 18.5 18.6 18.7 M17.0 Q8.4 M10.5 M10.3 Q8.3

L_AUTO K_Conv_RIGHT BAY1 BAY2 BAYS M_Conv_Fault L_Bay-LB M_Flash_lHz M_Flash_2Hz L_Bay3

Indicator Run convey Proximity Proximity Th.„ T Proximity se Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 3

___ switches

Network 4: Horn Q8.5

04.2

II

II

1110.3

08.7

08.6

I I Symbol information: 08.5 Q8.6 Q4.2 M10.3 Q8.7

K_Conv_RIGHT KConv_LEFT L_MAN M_Flash_2Hz Horn

------




Page 37


Ch15: Software Expansions (FC16) FC16 : Title: Network 1: Jog conveyor motor to the Right Q4.2

M30.2

M30.3

I I

I I

III

T16

I8.0 .•. M16.2 •• ........

T15 S OFFDT

Q —

Jog RIGHT only up to LB

S5TO2S- TV

BCD —...

R

Symbol information: Q4.2 L_MAN M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.3 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI 18_0 LB M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT

Network

------

BI

Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Light barrier Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT

2j: Jog conveyor motor to the Left

04.2 I I

•.........• H30.2

III

H30.3

-I I

T15

III

18.5

•

I/I

•

Q8.6

........ •

116 S_OFFDT 0

Jog LEFT only up to Bay1

S5T/12S- TV

BI BCD

Symbol information: Q4.2 L_MAN M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M30.3 BAY1 18.5 K_Conv_LEFT 08.6



------

Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Proximity sensor Bay 1 Run conveyor LEFT

Page 38


Ch15: Software Expansions (FC16) Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor motor in AUTO mode

18.7

18.6

18.5

.... ti..... M16.4 Is.1 ; SR

1-H-S 18.7

18.5

18.6

18.2

18.6

18.5

18.7

18.3 •

I/I

•

Q4.3

1/

18.0

M16.0

I

(p)

Conveyor Start possible from all bays

M17.0

1

1

08.4

Symbol information: BAY3 18_7 BAY2 18_6 BAY1 18.5 T_Bayl 18.1 T_Bay2 18.2 T_Bay3 18.3 L_AUTO Q4_3 LB 18.0 M_Aux_LB M16.0 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 L_Bay-LB Q8_4 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4

-------------

Proximity sensor Bay 3 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 3 Indicator light Automatic mode Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT

Network 4: Control the conveyor motor to the Right M16.2

-I 1

08.5

C)-1

M16.4

Symbol information: M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT M16.4 M_Auto_RIGHT Q8.5 KConvRIGHT



Page 39


SIEMENS

Training and Support

SIEMENS

1011111001

• 11•11•0111•0110•1 7/110,01

• Mr...V. c■ Ome•Hia•

•••••••••■

• •••••■■ ••■■•

.1••••• ■••••■••

lirmemelgessen•weneare

.••■•.• ••■■•••■• •■•■

SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. AS rights reserved.

Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.1

SITRAIN Training for Rtr


Page

Contents Do You Still have Questions about our Learning Offers? www.siemens.com/sitrain or sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld

..........2 ..........3

SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation

4


5

Do You Need Service & Support ? Know-How in the Service & Support Portal

6 7

Communication in the Service & Support Portal ... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 1/2

8 9

... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 2/2

........10


Page 1

ST-SERV1 Training and Support

SIEMENS

Do You Still have Questions about our Learning Offers?

We'll help you! ... With the Infoline: Tel 01805 23 56 11 Fax 01805 23 56 12 he Intern t: siemens

/sitrain

4 SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.



Date: File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_178.2

Page 2

SITRAIN Training for %■T



SIEMENS www.siemens.com/sitrain or sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld LI fi7 G° Acrotess http://streineutomatron.semax.cornistrernworkdi Lairs

re

SIEMENS SITRAINTM - Training Courses by Siemens for Automation and Industrial Solutions Getting directly applicable know-how fast practical tralning courses from the manufacturer!

•

In over 200 locations in 62 countries, Strain oilers tramp courses for Siemens Industry products and the interplay of the products 0 systems. Thts worldwide presence makes t possible tot vailo build up know-how on site—wherever you wish your training curse. In addrtron to traditional classroom trainng courses, you can acquire your krrwlevige wth the help of rrinovalive and communications media such as Learning with Web Based,' Tiering.

> New Training front SITRARI'.?

Training Topics Worldwide You ere looking for a Paring °arse on a specific product and would like to know where n the world this course is offered, Here you wil Ind an overview of the worldwide tree wog courses on offer. > Arnomation Systems

> Low Voltage Controls and DiSll ibution

> Communication Ilet works

> More Ti Miring Courses by Siemens

> throes Technology

> Process Automation

0 Electrical Installation Technology

> Sensor s. Test and Measurement

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.3

Gal In Contact > SITRAIW. worldmap > SITRA111`. contacts worldwide I SITRAIN'. Worlehencie

z.1 CI

1 _1 1SITRAIN Training for NIT.


The complete course selections are accessible through the following links: www.siemens.de/sitrain or www.siemens.com/sitrain Course Search

With Course Search it is possible, through various search filters, such as, keyword, target group etc., to find your desired course selections. The filters can also be combined.

Top Links

With Top Links, various course selections can be accessed directly, such as, SIMATIC S7, SINUMERIK solution line ...

Training News

Here, new SITRAIN course selections and actions are presented at a glance.

Course Catalog

The Course Catalog enables you to find the desired course through learning paths or through the structure of the Siemens Mall.



Page 3


SIEMENS SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation Service personnel, Operators, Users, Maintenance personnel

Programmers, Commissioning engineers, Project engineers

W8 2)

wATZ

PLC's for Beginners (WBT)

PLC's for Beginners (WBT)

Micromaster 420 (WBT)

PROFIBUS (WBT)

SIMATIC S7 TIA Service Training 1

SIMATIC S7 TIA Programming 1

Decision makers, Sales personnel, Project managers, Project members, Programmers, Commissioning engineers, Project engineers, Service personnel, Maintenance personnel

SIMATIC TIA for Non-Technicians wAT4

WinCC flexible (WBT)

WinCC flexible (WBT)

PROFIBUS (WBT)

MICROMASTER 420 (WBT)



WRIO)

Industrial Ethernet (WBT) WinCC flexible (WBT)

Industrial Ethernet (WBT)

Siemens Certified Service Technician Level 1




wRT2)

WinCC flexible (WBT) SIMATIC S7 TIA Programming 3


Exam for Siemens certified Service Technician Level 2

Production Automation with TIA

Learning path ST 2

Date: File:

Exam for Siemens Certified Programmer

18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.4

Page 4

ST 4



SIEMENS


Mtcroma star 420 t WI3TY:3

Decision makers, Sales personnel, Project managers, Project members, Programmers, Commissioning engineers, Project engineers, Service personnel, Maintenance personnel

Programmers, Commissioning engineers, Project engineers

Service personnel, Operators, Users, Maintenance personnel

4 SIMATIC 57 TIA Programming 1

SIMATIC 57 TIA Service Training 1

it

tfdlik,

Non Technicians

wIrrn MICRoMASTER 420 (WEl" SIMATIC S7 TIA Programming 2

mat ethernet Siemens Certified Service Technician Level 1

Produ lion Automation with TIA

*'

.inCC flexible IWET)

ra


TIC 57 IA Service Training 3

Exam for Siemens Certified Service Technician Level 2

Learning path ST 2

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Exam for Siemens Certified Programmer

18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.5

ST 4

1111

,r;



Sitrain Certified Program


•

The SITRAIN Certification Program is the new international certification program from SITRAIN

•

The SITRAIN Certification Program consists of different modules in which you can participate

•

After passing the examination of a module, the participant receives an international diploma and certificate


Page 5


SIEMENS

Adrenal

Do You Need Service & Support ? Li El endow, w I two ' fp sow Di

IC Ittpollsupport.eutoination.samens.can/WW/Isap.dtMuncacslissosinfoautadwoseus SIEMENS International

Intranet

siemans.com -s Automation and Drives

E q3anoll

Contact I Semen

I. tigri 1 Register

[Advanced]

I Product Support I Applications & 1 oohs Services !Firm glaring I For um

Automation and Drives Service & Support

Supp Subwribe to our newsletter now 4 Release for delaery, SIMOTION C240 7 Pon, T-Tap PRO Cornedor Released fa Deivery SalesfDekvery Release Basic Versions of the Model IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 V5.20 SP4 APPlicatun sample Mir degnosis end set up of ETXOS FC via Too:Peened TPI 708

Se artti

world wide support

I Cheese a rout nrySupport -s re,

led-help Ertee your specific ;sabot Int median Wow to Welty extract the IMP related entries from ea globel dateesse

as

-0 to personal:cabal

go to our globe Menne we webs** enact specr

FAGS, menial& downbede and approvelskertil cations 4 Product Support

Protect Nese or Pan Wenner

For automaton system nteraction end connectally Wenn.. old Woe to nantaban examples, samples. demonstration systems and more'

Search Teed (hay wads)

4 Application & Tools

Support by experts worldwide

l

le= Ones Help

View eesong careeredions and talk to other users sboal

specific scaliest applications and issues. Please note the you we reed to Login to actively partcpate

A Now start your discussion math other users

Send your question drectir to a Siemens !anneal ni

t

en Weal Toe

expert Ws our aerie Support Request

-8

Support Request

Our service offer

SWAMI •

Our Service products are designed to meet yap support needs to Its Mire We cycle or your nelallatat 4 Spare parts and repairs Service on-see 4 Optimization and modernization

4 Technical consulting 4 Configuring and Software engineering 4 Technical Support

SIMATIC S7

Date:


File:

18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.6

HM0111011 CM Vs entomb:in LMT cad

User wee kennel

W


Under www.siemens.com/automation/service&support the Service & Support portal offers online access to the wide range of information and services regarding the Automation & Drives portfolio whenever required. Online support is divided into two principle topics: Know-How

Communication

•

Product support: Technical information and downloads for products (manuals, FAQs, software updates, etc.)

•

Applications & Tools: Automation solutions (solution examples, system descriptions, demo versions, calculators, tools etc.)

•

Services: Information on wide range of services offered by Service & Support (contacts, repairs etc.)

•

Forum: Direct customer - customer communications in case of technical questions

•

Support Request: Technical requests are answered by experts



Page 6


SIEMENS

Adnue

Know-How in the Service & Support Portal Wectaaln to I Unks ml

htti 1 survort seutornabon

1,-.4111L4i.z,

.cornIww *tic drf unc

SIEMENS

sinntfins.com Itslianta

)Automation and Drives

International

Snap ty

a.cs.f

paooll rf.:Z

Intranet Contact i nfamy

I Product Support I Applications & Tools I Services Information I Forum

Automation and Drives

Service • Support

!ogint Register [Afwara-mf]

Delivery IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 V524 SP/

S FC vie Touchpenel TP17013

Product Support

Services & Infos

Techn. information and downloads for products

btormalion below to quid*

s trom our global database

to Our glabal dobbin. and explore the FACts, mammas, dovenloads and approvals 4 Product Support

Prock.rct None or Part

or sttornabon system internam and c cbcii below 10, erbecatIon examPle7 . 7.7007.

Search Text (key words)

aeon systems and more -1J■nnhr.

prodixt

View exestrog carwersations end let

aorsceccs and

Tnni

4 field Semite 4 Sweepers

Applications & Tools

Support by experts world,

specific

Information on range of services offered

Information on automation solutions

you we need to Login to actively pa

A Now start your discussion and

er users

Our service offer

SIEMENS 4

One Service products are dessgned to meet your support needs la the elite lie cycle or Your ttStalabbnTechnical consulting

-t Spare parts and repairs

-a Configuring and Software engineering

- Service on-site -a Optimization and modernization

SIMATIC S7

• Technical Support

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.7

Wormetion maw Automation Value Card

Warfel

w User stew

SITRAIN Training for kV Automation and Industrial Solutions

General

The online support with its comprehensive information system and many types of services is available around the clock. From product support over service information to interactive services, online support is always your first step you need to take for obtaining a quick solution.

Product Support

Profound expertise in our products and systems and up-to-date information are the Product Support's support know-how basis in form of FAQs, downloads of, for example, updates / upgrades, up-to-date product information from Marketing & Sales, manuals in electronic form in PDF format, test certificates and characteristics

Applications & Tools Applications & Tools is the new platform for solutions and system overviews in the Service & Support portal. Applications & Tools help you solve your automation tasks. This support is provided in the form of programming examples and tools, background knowledge, functional descriptions, recommendations on possible actions, performance data etc. The focus is not on the individual product but rather on the individual products working together. Services

Here you can find our complete range of services and detailed information on our Service & Support processes and a database containing the contact persons.

Information

Are you looking for the latest Service & Support brochures - or do you want to know at which trade show you can meet us personally? All of this and much more can be found under "Information".



Page 7


SIEMENS

Communication in the Service & Support Portal SIEMENS International Automation and Drives

Home

4 siemens.com

I ntranet


Genteel I Stamp

I Product Support I Applications & Tools I Services I Information I Forum

Service & Support

Loon I RecKler bscrIbe to our

4

Release for delivery, SIMOTION C240 7/Er Power T-Tap PRO Connector Released for Delivery Sales/Delivery Release, Basic Versions of the Model IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 4 Application sample for diagnosis and set up of ET2005 FC via Touchpanel TP170B 4

Choose a country

4

Self-help Search Product Support Documents melon below to quickly om our global database.

Technical Forum

Discussion platform for Browse Support Docu customers Go to our global database FAQs, manuals, clownloa, and appro s ce ic Ions -0 Product Support

Online requests to the A&D

Contact

For automation system interaction and connectivity questions, click below for application examples, samples, demonstration systems and more

hotline

Go

Spare parts

4 Application & Tools

Help

Support by experts worldwide lechnical Forum

Onins risc

the Siemens expert

View existing conversations and talc to other users about specific product applications and Issues Please note that you will need to Login to actively participate. es Now start your discussion with other users

Send your question directly to a Siemens technical support expert via our online Support Request

SIEMENS

IIIPMEMILIMPLIMIPPAPPARIk

Date: File:


Guided Tour

4121 Support Request

Our service offer

SIMATIC S7

Contacts worldwide -0 Field Service

18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.8

%Or


Technical Forum

In addition to the comprehensive scope of services, we support the direct dialog among experts with the help of modern web technology. The new Technical Forum is an attractive discussion platform (English and German) where users and experts can exchange information.

Support Request

With the online Support Request you will always find direct answers to your questions. In the online screens you can describe your requests. Through the knowledge base you will immediately be informed about possible solutions. If the suggested solution does not resolve your problem, you can send the web form directly to your team of experts in Technical Support (Hotline).



Page 8


SIEMENS

..• just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 1/2 SIEMENS International Automation and Drives

I ntranet

4, siemens.com

Home Product Support Applications & Tools

Contact I Siternap

Deutsch I Francais] Itahanoi EsparlelI °PIZ

->Automation and Drives

I Services I Information I Forum

Service & Support

Login I Register

-4Subscribe to our newsletter now.

A clearly structured, user-friendly navigation in a "Product tree" or an Index Automation and Drives


Service & Support

Service & Support

Product tree

Product tree

Index (A-Z)

•

Index (A-Z)

ABCDEFGHI J

Product Information

_ L ft

Drive Technology

HOP ORSTUVW X Y

Automation systems

Search in the Index Go

9 J Communication/Networls

database and explore the product s downloads and approvelskertificat rduct Support

An intelligent, comprehensive Search function

s,,,-,terri inter action and connectivity below for application examples, sermls-_____ yrterri, and more

alication & Tools

9

Lov.Voltage Controls

9

Electrical Installation Technology

•

Process automation

Poorer supplies

-

n Spare parts

Help f-=2 Online Help

Notes:

9 J Sensor technology, measuring and t •

SIMATIC PCS 7 V5.2 0 SP4 -ral el TP1708

The Index is the fast access to our Product Support.

ion directly to a Siemens technical support

Guided Tour

Support Request port Request

9 _j Safety systems - Safety Integrated Select a letter from the above overview of make use of our Index search.

9 J Industries 9J Service

SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.9


To find the required information, you can use the intelligent Search function and a the user-friendly navigation: Search

An intelligent and comprehensive search function provides you with the relevant results. • Automatic recognition of key words • Automatic spell-check • Automatic sorting of the hitlist based on topicality

Navigation


You can also do a targeted search in the product tree to obtain the required information. Use the index for easy selection of the product.


Page 9


SIEMENS

... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 2/2 SIEMENS International Automation and Drives

Horne 1 Product Support

-) siernens.corn

Automation and Drives Applications & Tools I Services

Deutsch' Franca1A Itall no/ Espanol -

I

htforrnation

I

Intranet Carted! StaMag

Forum

Service & Support

Loge; I Register

(Advanced)

Search

Functions: Forum: Experts exchange in forum contributions Newsletter: Always up-to-date thanks to daily news on pre-selected topics Support Request Jechnischeoeien

myTree: Define your personal, transparent product tree

'llachaairee

Personal data is automatically filled in forms, e.g. in the Support Request

SIMATIC S7

Date: File:


Registration

IMutterrnann Imintermennall•enline.de • Finto Testcompieve Aare* "Musterstrasse 3

I

18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.10

L2

INN trimidw Mon Login

vans 'Michael 'Telefon 1.49 123 45678 Abtellung 'Quaid& 'PLZ 'Sue 73 1 4- 1Musterstildt

2.1 SITRAIN

Training for gr Automation and Industrial Solutions

After registering with our service "mySupport", you can utilize our complete range of online services after entering your data only once. You will then have exclusive access to the following functions:

Your personal newsletter Through the Automation and Drives Newsletter system you receive daily, upto-date news on selected topics - sent direct to your mailbox. As a mySupport user, you can individually adjust the mailing options. myTree

Your personal product tree. As a mySupport user, you can adjust the product tree so that it only shows those products and services from the comprehensive A&D range that are important to you. Thus you can always maintain an overview and find the required information faster.

Online Support Request You need to enter your personal data only once and they will be automatically entered in the Support Request forms. You don't have to repeatedly enter the same information in every form which saves you time for more important things. myForum


Direct access to our Technical Forum. As mySupport user you also automatically have direct access to our Technical Forum


Page 10


Siemens AG Industry Sector Gleiwitzer Str. 555 90475, NURNBERG DEUTSCHLAND

www.siemens.corn/automation

TIA Service Training 1 S

Recommend Documents